Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/cavalryservicereOOunitricli 


% 


WAR  DEPARTMENT  :  OFFICE  OF  THE  CHIEF  OF  STAFF 


Cavalry 
Service  Regulations 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY 

(EXPERIMENTAL) 


1914 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1914 


War  Department, 

Document  No.  461. 

Ofiice  of  the  Chief  of  Staff. 


War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  op  Staff, 

Washington,  March  9,  1914- 
The  following  (Experimental)  Cavalry  Service  Regulations  were 
prepared  by  a  board  composed  of: 

Brig.  Gen.  Edward  J.  McClernand,  U.  S.  Army,  retired. 
Col.  Cunliffe  H.  Murray,  Twelfth  Cavalry. 
Lieut.  Col.  Joseph  T.  Dickman,  Cavalry. 
Lieut.  Col.  Frederick  S.  Foltz,  General  Staff. 
Maj.  Jesse  McL  Carter,  Cavalry. 
Capt.  Frank  Parker,  Eleventh  Cavalry. 
They  are  approved  and  published  for  experimentation  by  the 
.  Cavalry  of  the  Army  of  the  United  States. 

They  will  govern  in  the  training  and  leading  of  Cavalry,  but 
everything  not  foreseen  therein  is  left  to  the  initiative  of  the  officer 
in  command,  who  in  campaign  and  in  maneuvers  must  conform 
his  actions  to  actual  conditions,  even  departing  in  necessary  cases 
from  the  letter  of  the  Regulations. 

These  regulations  will  become  applicable  upon  receipt  by  the 
organization  commanders. 

Each  officer  of  the  Cavalry  Service  will  submit  in  the  month  of 
June,  1915,  a  report  embodying  his  opinion  of  and  recommenda- 
tions as  to  changes  or  modifications  in  these  Regulations. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

I 


S93624 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Preface 9 

Definitions 11 

Basis  of  the  system 14 

General  principles 17 

Signals 20 

Part  I. — Training. 

Paragraphs. 

Duties  and  responsibilities  of  regimental  officers 1-6 

Instruction 7-27 

The  school  of  the  trooper,  dismounted 28-147 

Instruction  without  arms 31-38 

Setting-up  exercises 39-51 

Running,  jumping,  and  swimming 52-56 

Steps  and  marchings 57-66 

Individual  instruction  with  arms 67-147 

Armament  for  garrison  duty  dismounted 67 

Manual  of  the  rifle 68-100 

I  Loadings  and  firings 101-119 
The  use  of  cover 120-122 
Observation 123-124 
Manual  of  the  pistol 125-137 
Manual  of  the  saber 138-147 

School  of  the  trooper,  mounted 148-265 

The  standard  required  of  men  and  horses 151-152 

K  Preparatory  exercises , 153-188 
Work  on  the  snaffle ^ 189-232 
Work  on  the  bit 233-252. 
Use  of  arms,  mounted 253-265 
Manual  of  the  saber,  mounted 254-261 
Manual  of  the  rifle,  mounted 262 

Manual  of  the  pistol,  mounted 263 

Inspection  of  arms,  mounted 264-265 

Additional  instruction  in  equitation 266-298 

5 


6  COHJri^NTS. 

,     ,  ;     ,    ,     .  ,  Paragraph. 

Care  of  horses.' .' . : 299-308 

Stables  and  stable  management 301 

Stable  duty 302 

Grooming 303 

Watering 304 

Feeding 305 

Exercising 306 

Sick  horses 307 

Shoeing 308 

Care  of  saddlery 309 

Fitting  the  saddle 310 

The  platoon 311-371 

The  platoon  mounted 313-362 

Close  order 319-346 

Extended  order 347-353 

Scouts 352 

Patrols 353 

To  fight  on  foot 354-361 

Employment  of  the  platoon 362 

The  platoon  dismounted 363-371 

The  squadron 372-451 

The  squadron  mounted 372-450 

Close  order 377-411 

Extended  order 412-418 

To  fight  on  foot -  420-445 

The  advance 422 

The  fire  attack 423-424 

The  squadron  in  support 425-427 

The  squadron  acting  alone 428-429 

Fire 430-433 

Employment  of  the  squadron 446-450 

The  squadron  dismounted 451 

The  regiment 452-519 

The  composition  of  the  regiment 452 

School  of  the  regiment 453-508 

Extended  order 486 

Dismounted  action 488-508 

Employment  of  the  regiment 509-519 

The  brigade 520-533 

The  division 534-538 


CONTENTS.  7 

Part  II. — Campaign. 

Paragraph. 

Employment  of  Cavalry 539-777 

General  principles 539-554 

Command  and  leading 555-564 

Reconnaissance 565-576 

Independent  Cavalry 566-568 

Divisional  Cavalry 569 

Patrols. - 570-575 

Transmission  of  information 576 

Protection 577-595 

Advance  guards. 578-583 

Flank  guards 584 

Rear  guards 585-589 

Outposts 590-595 

The  advance  toward  contact 596-610 

Mounted  combat 611-663 

Dismounted  combat 664-718 

Breaking  off  an  engagement  and  leaving  a  position. . .  719-727 

Horse  artillery  and  machine  guns 728-747 

Pursuit 748-755 

Retreat ;-.--.---.- 756-761 

The  Cavalry  Division  in  a  general  engagement 762-768 

Raids 769-777 

Camping 778-789 

Marches ^ 790-805 

Swimming  horses  and  fording 806-810 

Transportation  of  horses 811-817 

Minor  warfare 818-827 

Night  operations 828-830 

Field  escorts 831 

Intrenchments 832 

Part  III. — Ceremonies. 

Reviews,  parades,  escorts,  presentation  to  the  standard, 

guard  mounting,  honors 833-864 

General  rules  for  ceremonies 833 

Reviews 834-843 

Parades 844 


8  CONTENTS. 

Reviews,  parades,  escorts,  etc. — Continued.  Paragraph. 

Escorts 845-855 

Escorts  of  honor 845-846 

Funeral  escort 847-855 

Presentation  to  the  standard 856 

Guard  mounting  (mounted) 857 

Honors  and  salutes 858-864 

Trumpet  calls 865 

The  guidon 866-869 

The  standard 870-872 

APPENDICES. 

Page. 

A. — Music  for  trumpet  calls 304 

B. — Semaphore  code  for  Cavalry 329 

C. — List  of  manuals  for  reference 331 


PREFACE. 

These  regulations  have  been  prepared  with  a  view  of  training 
Cavalry  to  fulfill  its  role  as  laid  down  in  Bulletin  No.  18,  War  De- 
partment, October  3,  1912,  as  follows: 

1.  Mounted  action  is  the  main  r61e  of  the  Cavalry  Arm  and  its 
organization,  armament,  and  instruction  should  be  with  a  view  to 
rendering  it  effective  in  such  action. 

Dismounted  action  is,  however,  a  very  important  role  of  the 
Cavalry,  and  neither  an  organization  nor  the  method  of  instruction 
which  fails  to  provide  for  the  effective  use  of  Cavalry  dismounted 
will  enable  it  to  perform  fully  its  functions  in  war. 

2.  The  organization  should  be  such  as  to  permit  of  the  greatest 
mobility,  which  is  the  essential  quality  of  the  Cavalry,  while  pro- 
viding units  of  great  smashing  j)ower  in  the  charge  and  a  sufficient 
number  of  rifles  to  make  effective  its  use  when  required  as  a  dis- 
mounted force. 

3.  Cavalry  must  maneuver  freely  and  widely  without  fearing 
too  much  for  its  rear;  and  being  often  at  a  distance  from  the  main 
body  of  an  army,  its  commander  must  be  clothed  with  authority 
to  conform  to  actual  conditions^ 

4.  While  the  chief  task  of  the*  Cavalry  is  to  assist  the  other  arms 
in  accomplishing  the  common  object,  its  role  is  often  of  primary 
importance.  The  action  of  Cavalry  must  be  bold  and  daring;  it 
must,  whenever  practicable,  assume  the  initiative,  seeking  out 
the  enemy  and  placing  him  upon  the  defensive. 

5.  The  principal  weapon  of  Cavalry  in  mounted  action  is  the 
horse  and  the  force  of  impact  should  be  utilized  to  the  utmost.  The 
terrain  and  nature  of  the  operations  will  determine  which  of  the 
other  weapons  must  be  used. 

6.  When  circumstances  permit,  Cavalry  opposed  to  Cavalry 
should  fight  mounted,  thus  retaining  the  mobility  and  power  of 
maneuver  necessary  to  its  security  and  success. 

7.  The  historical  value  of  Cavalry,  including  the  experience  and 
evolution  of  our  own  and  that  of  other  countries,  must  be  carefully 
studied,  and  due  consideration  should  be  given  to  the  greater 
magnitude  of  our  future  Cavalry  operations  as  compared  with  our 
experiences  since  the  Civil  War. 

8.  The  use  to  which  Cavalry  should  be  put  in  campaign  is  sum- 
marized as  follows: 

(a)  To  seek  and  destroy  the  enemy's  Cavalry. 

9 


10  PREFACE. 

(6)  Screening,  contact,  and  reconnaissance. 

(c)  Seizing  and  holding  important  advanced  or  isolated  positions, 
thus  delaying  the  advance  of  the  enemy  until  the  arrival  of  the  . 
other  arms. 

(d)  To  operate  on  the  flank  and  in  rear  of  the  enemy. 

(e)  Raids  and  other  enterprises  requiring  great  mobility. 

(/)  The  mounted  charge  at  the  opportune  moment  against 
Infantry  or  Field  Artillery. 

ig)  Energetic  pursuit  of  a  retreating  enemy  or  covering  retreat  of 
its  own  forces. 

(h)  When  none  of  the  above  roles  has  been  assigned  to  it,  Cavalry 
may  go  to  the  assistance  (dismounted)  of  hard-pressed  Infantry  to 
fill  gaps  in  the  firing  line. 

Horsemanship,  horse  training,  care  of  horses,  horseshoeing,  gym- 
nastic exercises,  and  the  use  of  arms  have  been  included  only  so  far 
as  to  make  these  regulations  sufficiently  complete  to  answer  in  the 
emergency  of  training  volunteers  in  time  of  war,  referring  for  the 
details  of  these  subjects  to  special  manuals. 

Other  subjects  treated  of  in  the  old  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations 
such  as  packing  and  trumpet  marches  have  been  entirely  omitted 
as  more  properly  subjects  for  special  manuals. 

The  board  has  based  the  school  of  the  trooper  mounted  and  horse 
training  on  the  system  followed  at  the  Mounted  Service  School 
and  is  indebted  to  Capt.  Guy  V.  Henry,  Seventh  Cavalry,  senior 
instructor,  for  valuable  hints  and  criticism  of  this  part. 

Ceremonies  have  been  simplified  so  as  to  use  the  forms  of  drill 
evolutions  and  dispense  with  memorizing  special  formations  and 
movements  not  used  for  practical  purposes. 

The  attention  of  those  familiar  with  the  former  Drill  Regulations 
is  invited  to  the  fact  that  the  school  of  the  trooper,  mounted  and 
dismounted,  is  for  the  individual  training  of  the  trooper  and  that 
the  collective  training  begins  with  the  school  of  the  platoon;  also 
that  the  schools  of  collective  training  are  not  to  be  used  for  remedy- 
ing deficiencies  of  individual  training;  when  this  becomes  neces- 
sary the  means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  must  be 
resorted  to. 

The  use  of  formal  commands  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  has  been 
minimized  so  as  to  render  it  unnecessary  for  the  recruit  to  memorize 
and  comprehend  a  formula  of  words  before  learning  to  execute  a 
movement. 


CAVALRY  SERVICE  REGULATIONS. 

DEFINITIONS. 

A  body  of  troops  in  formation  is  composed  of  ranks  and  files. 
A  rank  is  composed  of  two  or  more  troopers  side  by  side.  A  file  is 
composed  of  two  troopers  one  behind  the  other;  a  file  is  blank 
when  it  has  no  trooper  in  the  rear  rank. 

A  file  leader  is  a  trooper  of  the  front  rank,  relative  to  the  one 
who  is  behind  him  in  the  rear  rank. 

A  file  closer  is  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer,  placed  out 
of  ranks,  whose  duty  it  is  to  supervise  the  men  in  ranks  and  see  that 
the  orders  of  the  commander  are  carried  out.  For  convenience, 
this  term  is  applied  to  any  man  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Flank. — The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  column;  also 
the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  a  line. 

In  speaking  of  the  enemy  the  terms  right  and  left  are  used  to  desig- 
nate the  elements  that  would  be  so  designated  by  him. 

Wing. — The  half  of  a  regiment  or  larger  body.  Wings  are  termed 
"right"  and  "left"  when  in  line,  and  "leading"  and  "rear"  when 
in  column  or  echelon. 

Center.— The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command. 

Interval. — The  lateral  space  between  men  or  units. 

Distance. — The  space  between  men  or  bodies  of  troops  from 
front  to  rear.  Distance  is  measured — mounted,  from  the  groups  of 
the  rear-rank  horses  of  a  fraction  to  the  heads  of  the  front-rank 
horses  of  the  following  fraction;  dismounted,  from  the  backs  of  the 
rear-rank  troopers  of  a  fraction  to  the  breasts  of  the  front-rank 
troopers  of  the  following  fraction. 

Depth. — The  space  included  between  the  head  and  rear  of  a 
column,  including  the  leading  and  rear  elements. 

Alignment. — The  placing  of  several  troopers  or  units  on  the  same 
straight  line;  also  the  line  on  which  such  adjustment  is  made. 

Line. — The  formation  in  which  the  elements  of  a  command  are 
deployed  and  placed  side  by  side.  When  the  elements  are  not 
deployed  into  a  continuous  line  the  formation  receives  an  appropri- 
ate designation;  as,  line  of  squads,  line  of  masses. 

11 


13  DEFINITIONS. 

Column. — ^The  formation  in  which  the  elements  of  a  command 
are  placed  one  behind  the  other.  A  platoon  column  is  a  platoon 
in  column  of  squads.  A  squadron  column  is  a  squadron  in  col- 
uma  of  platoons. 

Double  column.— The  formation  of  the  regiment  in  which  the 
squadrons  of  each  wing  are  one  behind  the  other  in  column  of  pla- 
toons, the  two  columns  separated  by  an  interval  of  6  yards. 

"Evolutions. — Movements  by  which  a  command  changes  its 
position  or  passes  from  one  formation  to  another. 

Formation. — The  regular  placing  of  all  the  fractions  of  a  com- 
mand in  line,  column,  or  echelon. 

Deployment. — ^An  evolution  in  which  the  command  extends 
its  front,  as  in  forming  line  from  column. 

Ployment. — An  evolution  in  which  the  command  dimishes  its 
front,  as  in  passing  from  line  to  column. 

Rally. — The  rapid  grouping  behind  the  chief  of  the  elements  of 
a  command,  whatever  may  have  been  their  previous  situation  and 
formation. 

The  object  of  the  rally  is  to  reestablish  cohesion  with  a  view  to 
immediate  action,  or  to  form  line  in  a  new  direction  where  the  regu- 
lar method  of  forming  line  would  be  slow  or  difficult.  It  is  exe- 
cuted in  the  order  of  arrival  of  the  elements  of  the  command  with- 
out regard  to  their  normal  order.  The  formation  in  which  each 
unit  is  rallied  is  fixed  in  the  drill  instructions  for  that  unit. 

Assem.bly. — The  regular  grouping,  in  normal  order,  behind  the 
chief,  of  the  dispersed  elements  of  a  command,  whatever  may  have 
been  their  previous  situation  and  formation.  The  object  of  the 
assembly  is  to  place  the  command  in  regular  formation  without  any 
preliminary  evolution. 

The  formation  which  each  unit  takes  in  assembling  is  fixed  in  the 
drill  instructions  for  that  unit. 

Foragers.— Mounted  troopers  distributed  on  a  line  at  pre- 
scribed intervals. 

Scouts.— Troopers  detached  from  their  commands,  operating 
alone  or  in  small  groups,  with  a  definite  mission. 

Skirmishers. — Dismounted  troopers  distributed  on  a  line  for 
fire  action. 

Defensive  flank  or  flank  guard. — An  element  of  a  command 
disposed  with  a  view  to  protecting  a  wing  or  flank. 

Offensive  flank  or  flank  attack.— An  element  of  a  command 
detached  to  threaten  or  attack. the  enemy's  flank. 


DEFINITIONS.  18 

Disposition. — ^The  distribution  and  aesi^ment  of  the  compo- 
nent parts  ^of  a  command  for  the  accomplishment  of  a  common 
purpose. 

Echelon. — A  body  of  troops  is  in  echelon  with  reference  to 
another  when  it  is  more  advanced  or  less  advanced  and  unmasks 
or  uncovers  the  same,  wholly  or  in  part;  units  thus  placed  are 
called  echelons. 

Drill. — The  exercises  and  evolutions  taught  on  the  drill  ground. 

Tactical  exercises. — Operations  against  an  outlined  or  repre- 
sented enemy  who  is  limited  to  prescribed  directions  or  movements. 

Maneuvers. — Operations  against  an  outlined  or  actual  force 
under  a  separate  commander,  who,  within  the  limits  of  the  scheme, 
is  free  to  adopt  any  formations  and  make  any  movements  he 
chooses. 

Directing  unit. — The  unit  on  which  the  direction,  pace,  and 
alignment  or  relative  positions  of  the  several  parts  of  a  formation 
depend. 

Dress. — The  act  of  taking  a  correct  alignment. 

Horse-length. — A  term  of  measurement  (8  feet). 

Gait. — One  of  the  special  forms  of  movement  of  the  horse,  as  the 
walk,  the  trot,  the  gallop. 

Pace. — The  rate  of  speed  of  the  gait. 


BASIS  OF  THE  SYSTEM. 

Two  essential  principles  govern  all  the  mounted  evolutions  of 
Cavalry: 

1.  The  chief  must  be  able  to  lead  his  unit  to  the  attack,  remain- 
ing constantly  the  master  of  its  direction  and  gait. 

2.  The  unit  must  always  preserve  the  order  and  cohesion  indis- 
pensable to  its  success  in  the  attack,  and  to  this  end  the  movements 
involved  in  any  evolution  must  be  few  and  simple. 

The  success  of  all  actions  in  war  depends  upon  the  proper  selec- 
tion of  the  means  to  the  end.  Therefore  each  Cavalry  commander 
must  conform  his  actions  to  the  actual  conditions,  departing  when 
necessary  from  the  letter  of  the  regulations.  The  methods  pre- 
scribed are  devised  to  fit  the  general  case.  They  are  to  be  regarded 
as  tools  furnished  to  the  various  leaders,  who,  to  secure  uniformity 
and  avoid  confusion,  must  employ  them  in  the  ordinary  case;  but 
everything  that  is  not  foreseen  hy  the  regulations  is  left  to  the 
initiative  of  those  tvho  execute  the  action,  and  the  interference  of  a 
chief  is  needed  only  when  the  actions  of  his  subordinates  are  evi- 
dently erroneous. 

DIRECTION   AND   GAIT. 

In  order  that  the  chief  may  be  able  to  direct  his  unit,  it  must 
follow  him,  marching  in  his  trace  and  at  his  gait. 

A  directing  unit  must  follow  the  chief,  or  move  on  the  point 
designated  by  him;  the  other  units  regulate  on  this  directing  unit 
in  all  formations  and  in  all  evolutions.  The  directing  unit  is  thus 
the  base  of  the  formation. 

The  inconvenience  resulting  from  the  fact  that  the  leader  is  not 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  squadron  or  of  the  regiment  when  the 
number  of  component  units  is  even  is  more  than  compensated  for 
by  the  facility  of  leading.  To  increase  this  facility  still  more,  the 
directing  unit  in  the  regiment  and  larger  bodies  is  somewhat  in 
advance  of  the  others  in  line  of  columns  and  in  line.  This  unit, 
distinctly  detached  and  clearly  visible,  translates  A-isually,  by  its 
formation,  gait,  and  direction,  the  wishes  of  the  chief.  ^  Practically 
the  chief  has  therefore  only  to  lead  the  directing  unit;  the  other 

14 


BASIS  OP  THE  SYSTEM.  15 

units  regulate  upon  it.  If  he  wishes  temporarily  to  move  independ- 
ently, he  has  only  to  indicate  the  direction  and  gait  to  the  com- 
mander of  this  unit. 

ORDER  AND   COHESION. 

Order  is  the  primary  requisite  for  the  proper  execution  of  evolu- 
tions and  for  cohesion  in  the  attack.  The  regiment  is  in  order  when 
all  its  squadrons  are  individually  in  order,  whatever  their  relative 
positions.  It  is  of  no  im/portance  that  a  squadron  is  not  exactly  in 
its  place,  if  it  is  in  order.  On  the  other  hand,  nothing  is  gained  if  it 
he  exactly  in  its  place,  if  in  arriving  there  or  in  retaining  its  position 
it  he  thrown  into  disorder.  The  squadron  is  therefore  properly  the 
unit  of  order. 

Cohesion  results  from  the  good  order  of  the  squadrons  and  from 
the  flexibility  of  the  articulation  between  them.  It  is  never  so 
necessary  as  at  the  moment  of  the  attack. 

As  the  surest  means  of  securing  the  cohesion  of  a  line  the  require- 
ment for  alignment  has  been  limited  to  units  not  greater  than  a 
squadron.  The  regimental  line  is  formed  of  squadrons  individually 
aligned,  but  not  aligned  on  each  other  and  slightly  echeloned  in 
rear  of  the  directing  squadron.  Very  small  intervals  have  been 
allowed,  and  these  are  destined  to  disappear  at  the  moment  of  the 
attack. 

This  formation  insures  greater  flexibility,  order,  and  cohesion 
than  one  in  which  the  squadrons  are  on  the  same  line: 

Greater  flexibility,  because  the  chief  can  make  slight  changes  of 
direction,  as  he  has  to  lead  not  a  line  of  squadrons  rigidly  joined 
together,  but  a  line  of  squadrons  articulated,  each  one  with  free 
ground  to  its  right  and  left; 

Greater  order,  because  each  squadron  has  the  same  ease  of  move- 
ment as  if  it  were  alone,  and  because  the  elasticity  of  the  echeloned 
formation  facilitates  the  regularity  of  gait; 

_  And,  finally,  greater  cohesion,  because  there  are  no  longer  in  the 
line  the  crowding  effects  which  immediately  reacted  in  sudden 
extensions,  occurring  often  at  the  very  moment  of  striking  the 
enemy.  The  suppression  of  the  intervals  presents  no  difficulty, 
since  there  is  no  longer  any  possibility  of  crowding.  The  attacking 
line  will  therefore  be  more  compact  and  will  never  show  empty 
spaces.  It  will  lose  a  little  of  its  breadth  of  front,  but  will  gain  in 
penetrating  power,  and  that  is  what  is  wanted .  Enveloping  attacks 
are  not  to  be  guarded  against  by  extending  the  line,  but  by  pro- 
viding protecting  elements  on  the  flanks. 


16  BASIS  OF  THE  SYSTEM. 

DEPLOYMENT. 

The  evolution  of  deployment  should  be  the  simplest  and  the 
clearest,  because  this  is  the  final  evolution  before  the  attack. 
There  must  be  no  uncertainty  for  the  platoon  leaders  in  the  squad- 
ron nor  for  the  captains  in  the  regiment. 

The  unit  is  faced  toward  its  objective  before  deployment.  This 
can  alwaj^s  be  done  except  in  case  of  surprise. 

The  unit  havina:  been  faced  toward  its  objective,  is  deployed 
fanwise;  this  is  the  simplest  method,  since  neither  the  chiefs  nor 
the  directing  units  have  to  change  their  places,  and  because  the 
axis  of  movement  of  the  unit  is  the  same  before,  during,  and  after 
deployment.  We  thus  have  a  single  normal  method  of  deployment 
and  a  single  habitual  command. 

In  case  of  surprise  or  when  the  terrain  requires  it  a  lateral  deploy- 
ment may  be  desirable.  This  is  accomplished  by  a  special  com- 
mand, which  permits  no  doubt  as  to  the  direction  of  the  deploy- 
ment and  which  is  confirmed  by  the  position  taken  by  the  chief. 

There  are  occasions  when  it  is  desirable  to  deploy  at  the  irallop, 
but  there  are  many  others  where  promptness  in  completing  the 
deployment  is  of  first  importance;  the  leading  unit  must  then 
reduce  the  pace.  Vigor  of  attack  does  not  consist  in  speed  of  heads 
of  columns  laboriously  overtaken  by  units  more  or  less  disordered 
by  their  efforts.  The  true  effect  comes  from  the  cohesion  of  a 
united  and  compact  body  deployed  without  confusion  or  disorder 
and  taking  the  charge  as  a  unit. 


OENERAL.  PRINCIPLES. 

A.  Except  as  otherwise  specifically  stated  in  these  regulations, 
all  bodies  of  troops  are  formed  in  double  rank. 

B.  The  elements  of  all  commands  larger  than  a  squadron  are 
echeloned  when  in  line  to  preserve  flexibility,  avoid  crowding,  and 
eliminate  the  difficulty  of  maintaining  an  alignment  in  long  fronts. 

C.  Line  is  formed  on  the  chief,  who,  as  a  rule,  will  indicate  the 
objective  before  forming  line. 

The  directing  unit  follows  the  chief  and  becomes  the  base  of  the 
formation. 

In  forming  line  from  column  in  an  oblique  direction  the  chief 
causes  the  head  of  the  column  to  march  in  the  new  direction  before 
ordering  the  deployment. 

D.  The  chief  is  the  leader  of  his  unit.  He  marches  in  the  direc- 
tion and  at  the  gait  desired.  He  is  followed  by  the  dire(^ting  unit 
upon  which  the  other  units  of  the  same  kind  regulate.  In  column 
and  in  echelon  the  directing  unit  is  that  at  the  head.  In  line  it  is 
the  center  or  right  center  unit,  unless  otherwise  indicated  by  the 
chief. 

The  chief  may  leave  the  guidance  of  the  directing  unit  to  a 
subordinate,  and  so  become  free  in  his  movements. 

E.  In  movements  from  the  halt,  or  when  marching  at  the  walk, 
if  the  gait  be  not  specified  In  the  command  the  directing  unit  takes 
or  maintains  the  walk. 

F.  Line  is  formed  to  the  front  from  column  by  increasing  the 
gait  of  the  rear  elements  without  command  or  by  indicating  a  gait 
for  them.  The  head  of  the  column  preserves  the  gait  of  the  march. 
When  the  formation  must  be  hastened  or  executed  in  a  restricted 
space,  the  leader  diminishes  the  pace  or  gait  of  the  leading  element 
or  halts  it,  according  to  the  object  in  view. 

G.  Column  is  formed  from  line  on  the  directing  unit  at  the 
gait  of  march,  or  at  the  gait  ordered.  The  other  units  take  or 
maintain  the  slower  gait  or  halt  until  they  can  take  their  places 
in  column. 

H.  In  all  other  movements,  if  the  units  have  equal  distances  to 
go,  they  move  at  the  gait  of  the  march  or  at  that  indicated  in  the 

34396°— 14 2  17 


18  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

command.  If  the  distances  are  not  equal,  the  directing  unit 
maintains  the  gait  of  naarch  or  takes  that  of  the  chief;  the  other 
units  take  a  correspondingly  slower  or  faster  gait,  and  on  arriving 
at  their  places  take  the  gait  of  the  directing  unit.  The  chief 
regulates  the  gait  of  the  directing  unit  so  as  to  facilitate  the  forma- 
tion or  to  attain  the  object  in  view.  In  all  evolutions  the  elements 
of  the  command  must  he  led  to  their  ^places  by  the  shortest  practicable 
route. 

I.  To  avoid  repetition,  movements  by  or  to  the  flank  are  ex- 
plained for  the  right  only.  Unless  specially  excepted  they  can  be 
executed  by  or  to  the  left. 

J.  In  turning  about,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  officers  and  men 
turn  to  the  left  about  when  mounted  and  to  the  right  about  when 
dismounted. 

K.  Officers,  and  noncommissioned  officers  acting  as  platoon 
leaders,  draw  and  return  saber  with  the  superior  commaHider. 

L.  Means  of  communicating  commands: 

1.  Signals. 

2.  Gait  and  direction  of  horse,  and  in  general  the  example 

of  the  leader. 

3.  Voice. 

4.  In  large  commands,  messengers. 
6.  Trumpet  calls. 

6.  The  whistle. 

Any  combination  of  the  above. 

The  method  or  combination  of  methods  best  suited  to  the  occasion 
must  be  employed. 

Whatever  means  is  used  will  be  considered  the  equivalent  of  a 
verbal  command. 

The  directing  unit,  by  the  example  of  its  march,  formation,  and 
gait,  explains  clearly  by  visible  signs  the  will  of  the  chief. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  commands: 

The  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates  the 
movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT,  or  ARMS, 
causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  boldface  type, 
those  of  execution  by  CAPITALS. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an  interval  of 
time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit  of  being  properly 
understood;  the  command  of  execution  should  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  movement  is  to  commence. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES.  1» 

If  the  instructor  wishes  to  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  he 
does  so  by  commanding:  AS  YOU  WERE. 

M.  The  principle  governing  the  wording  of  commands  is  that  the 
commander  announces  the  result  desired  and  leaves  to  the  subor- 
dinate commanders  the  adoption  of  the  proper  means  to  obtain 
this  result.  Thus,  in  line,  the  captain  commands  right  oblique, 
and  not  platoons  right  half  turn.  It  then  becomes  necessary 
for  the  platoon  commanders  to  command  right  half  turn  to 
obtain  the  result  desired  by  the  captain. 

N.  Exceptions  to  these  general  rules  will  be  indicated  when 
necessary. 


SIGNALS. 

In  all  movements,  exercises,  and  evolutions  commands  will  be 
transmitted  by  the  simplest,  most  direct,  and  most  efficient  means 
suited  to  the  occasion. 

To  avoid  noise  and  confusion,  signals  with  the  arm  or  hand,  head- 
dress, or  the  saber,  when  drawn,  will  be  used  except  when  darkness, 
fog,  dust,  or  other  causes  render  such  signals  invisible  or  inappro- 
priate.  The  preparatory  signals  with  the  saber  are  made  from  the 
carry,*  with  the  hand  or  headdress,  from  the  position  of  the  hand  at 
the  side.  The  return  to  the  carry  or  dropping  the  hand  to  the  side 
from  the  preparatory  signal  is  the  command  of  execution. 

Signals  are  explained  for  the  arm  and  hand.  When  the  saber  is 
drawn  it  is  held  in  prolongation  of  the  arm  except  that  when  the 
signal  is  made  by  the  fingers  (as  for  platoons,  squads,  etc.)  the  saber 
is  allowed  to  hang  from  the  wrist  by  the  saber  knot  or  is  grasped 
by  the  left  hand. 

Signals  should  be  made  clearly,  and  with  vigor  and  precision. 
The  manner  in  which  a  movement  is  executed  is  determined 
largely  by  the  manner  in  which  the  command  is  given. 

It  is  of  great  importance  that  the  signal  should  be  plainly  visible 
to  those  concerned  in  its  execution;  it  should  be  repeated,  if 
necessary. 

The  whistle  blast  may  be  used  by  the  commander  to  attract 
attention. 

In  movements  in  extended  order  the  signal  for  the  unit  should 
precede  the  signal  for  extension. 

In  addition  to  the  signals  herein  prescribed  the  gait  and  direction 
of  motion  of  the  leader's  horse  and  the  example  of  the  directing  unit 
all  serve  to  convey  the  leader's  commands. 

1.  Attention.— Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent  and 
describe  slowly  small  circles  with  the  hand.  This  signal  may  pre- 
cede any  command. 

2.  Forward. — Stretch  the  arm  in  the  direction  to  be  taken. 

3.  Assemble. — Same  as  attention  except  that  the  circles  are 
made  larger  and  with  the  forearm. 

4.  Rally. — Describe  horizontal  circles  rapidly  about  the  head, 
with  the  arm  as  nearly  extended  as  possible. 

20 


SIGNALS.  21 

5.  To  increase  the  gait. — Raise  and  lower  the  hand  rapidly 
from  a  position  near  the  shoulder. 

6.  To  decrease  the  gait. — Raise  the  right  arm  laterally  and 
place  the  hand  just  above  the  head. 

7.  Halt. — Extend  the  arm  vertically,  and  retain  it  in  that  posi- 
tion until  the  directing  unit  has  halted. 

8.  To  change  direction. — Extend  the  arm  fully  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  marching  flank  and  then  make  a  slow  sweeping  move- 
ment toward  the  new  direction;  move  the  horse  in  this  direction. 

9.  Oblique. — Extend  the  arm  fully  in  the  direction  of  the 
oblique,  and  move  the  horse  in  that  direction. 

10.  Line. — Raise  the  arm  vertically  and,  with  the  arm  fully 
extended,  wave  well  down  to  the  right  and  left  several  times,  sway- 
ing the  body  with  the  movement  of  the  arm. 

11.  Squads,  half-squads,  or  files. — Extend  the  arm  vertically; 
show  four  fingers,  two  fingers,  or  one  finger. 

12.  Extend. — Sweep  the  arm,  fully  extended,  slowly  and  hori- 
zontally across  the  body,  swaying  and  turning  the  body  with  the 
sweep  of  the  arm. 

13.  As  foragers  or  skirmishers. — Extend  the  arm  and  move 
it  rapidly  several  times  in  a  horizontal  plane  to  the  right  and  left. 

14.  To  the  rear.— Turn  in  the  saddle,  or  face  about  if  on  foot, 
and  extend  the  arm  fully  to  the  rear. 

15.  Fight  on  foot. — Strike  three  or  four  blows  with  the  clenched 
fist  in  the  direction  in  which  the  action  is  desired.  In  striking  the 
point  of  the  elbow  should  be  higher  than  the  shoulder. 

16.  To  dismount. — Extend  the  arm  diagonally  upward  to  the 
right,  palm  downward,  and  wave  several  times  toward  the  ground. 

17.  To  mount. — Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  right,  palm 
upward,  and  wave  upward  several  times. 

18.  Platoons. — Raise  the  right  elbow  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  forearm,  vertical,  hand  closed. 

19.  Column.— Describe  circles  on  the  right  in  a  vertical  plane 
with  the  arm  fully  extended. 

20.  Double  column. — Extend  the  arm  fully  and  describe  a  circle 
in  a  vertical  plane  from  front  to  rear  and,  without  pausing,  from 
rear  to  front. 

21.  Mass.— Extend  the  arm  horizontally  to  the  right  and  bring 
the  hand  repeatedly  to  the  point  of  the  shoulder. 


Part  I,— TRAINING. 

DUTIES  AND  RESPONSIBILITIES  OF  REGIMENTAL 
OFFICERS. 

1.  The  colonel  is  charged  with  the  application  of  these  regula- 
tions in  so  far  as  they  pertain  to  his  regiment. 

He  is  responsible  for  the  instruction,  efficiency,  and  harmonious 
cooperation  of  his  officers,  and  must  vigilantly  preserve  for  each 
the  initiative  pertaining  to  his  sphere  of  responsibility. 

Unity  of  purpose  and  convergence  of  effort  can  be  secured  only 
through  the  impulse  of  the  will  of  the  chief  transmitted  through  his 
agents.  To  this  end  the  colonel  will  personally  direct  the  instruc- 
tion  of  his  field  officers  and  captains  in  all  that  pertains  to  their 
role  and  their  duties  in  peace  and  war,  and  will  assure  himself  that 
all  his  officers  maintain  themselves  in  fit  physical  condition  for 
active  campaign. 

2.  The  lieutenant  colonel  aids  the  colonel  in  the  execution  of  his 
task  in  such  manner  as  the  colonel  may  direct,  supervises  the  exe- 
cution of  his  orders,  and  in  his  absence  takes  his  place  and  assumes 
his  duties. 

3.  The  majors  may  be  placed  in  charge  of  half -regiments  or 
assigned  by  the  colonel  to  other  duty  of  instruction  and  adminis- 
tration. They  are  responsible  for  the  state  of  preparation  for  war 
of  any  squadrons  committed  to  their  charge. 

They  will  see  that  the  results  desired  by  the  colonel  are  attained, 
leaving  to  the  captains  a  large  initiative  in  the  choice  of  means. 

4.  The  captains  are  responsible  for  the  instruction  and  prepara- 
tion for  war  of  their  squadrons. 

They  should  have  a  large  liberty  as  to  the  means  employed.  The 
end  to  be  attained  having  been  indicated,  superior  authority  should 
interfere  in  the  instruction  of  the  squadron  only  when  necessary  to 
insure  diligence,  to  rectify  mistakes,  or  to  prevent  omissions. 

Within  the  limits  set  by  the  regimental  and  brigade  commanders 
the  captain  will  vary  the  nature  of  his  exercises  and  instniction  in 
order  to  maintain  interest. 

He  will  personally  direct  the  education  of  his  lieutenants  and 
noncommissioned  officers  and  the  training  of  his  cooks,  farriers, 

22 


INSTRUCTION.  23 

horseshoers,  saddlers,  wagoners,  and  trumpeters  in  so  far  as  this  is 
conducted  within  the  squadron,  and  will  exercise  a  constant  per- 
sonal supervision  over  all  the  instruction  imparted  to  his  squadron. 

The  squadron  being  the  true  unit  of  instruction,  the  captain's 
duties  are  of  the  greatest  importance  and  require  his  constant 
attention  and  undivided  interest. 

6.  The  lieutenants  share  with  their  captain  the  responsibility  for 
the  moral  and  military  training  of  their  men  as  well  as  for  their 
appearance,  and  for  the  condition  of  the  horses,  arms,  and  equip- 
ments of  their  platoons. 

They  are  responsible  to  the  captain  for  the  collective  training  of 
their  platoons  and  for  the  individual  instruction  of  their  men  and 
horses  in  so  far  as  this  has  not  been  otherwise  provided  for. 

Thev  should  know  the  antecedents,  character,  ability,  and 
special  fitness  of  every  man  under  their  command  and  the  temper, 
endurance,  and  capability  of  every  horse  committed  to  their 
charge,  and  be  able  to  judge  accurately  what  can  be  expected  of 
each  man  and  horse. 

6.  The  adjutant  and  the  qimrtermaster  perform  the  functions 
imposed  upon  them  by  Army  Regulations  and  assist  the  colonel  in 
the  discharge  of  his  duties. 

INSTRUCTION. 

General  Principles. 

7.  The  instruction  of  his  command  in  all  that  pertains  to  its 
duties  in  war  is,  next  to  effective  leadership,  the  most  important 
duty  devolving  upon  a  commander.  All  other  service  functions 
must  be  subordinate  to  it. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  are  charged  with  a  responsi- 
bility commensurate  with  their  grade  or  rank  for  the  performance 
of  this  most  important  duty.  They  must  devote  to  it  their  best 
efforts  and  their  unremitting  care  and  attention. 

Instruction  must  not  be  limited  to  mere  professional  training, 
but  must  be  extended  to  include  the  moral  education  and  physical 
development  essential  to  success  in  war. 

It  must  not  only  develop  the  memory  and  intelligence  of  the 
trooper,  but  must  awaken  in  him  a  sense  of  pride  in  his  profession, 
a  confidence  in  his  ability  to  overcome  his  enemy,  a  feeling  of 
devotion  to  his  leaders,  and  that  pride  in  his  country's  institutions 
and  past  achievements  which  increases  patriotism. 


24  INSTRXTCTION. 

Such  instruction  tends  more  surely  to  the  inculcation  and 
enforcement  of  discipline  than  do  the  most  exacting  orders  and 
regulations. 

8.  The  instruction  in  the  regiment  must  be  conducted  during 
the  entire  year  so  as  to  fulfill  the  following  conditions: 

(a)  The  regiment  must  at  all  times  be  prepared  to  take  the  field. 

(6)  Recruits  must  be  brought  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with 
thorough  training  to  a  state  of  preparation  for  field  service. 

(c)  The  system  must  be  such  as  to  bring  the  regiment  to  a  proper 
state  of  preparation  for  participation  in  the  annual  maneuvers  or 
field  exercises. 

9.  Taking  into  consideration  the  local  conditions  the  brigade 
commanders  will  regulate  the  employment  of  time  and  the  rate  of 
progress. 

They  will  assure  themselves  of  results  obtained  by  suitable 
personal  inspections. 

10.  Instruction  in  maneuvers  and  in  marching  and  camping 
should  be  carried  out  at  the  same  time,  and  in  the  manner  and 
season  best  suited  to  the  climate  and  other  conditions. 

11.  Tactical  exercises  should  be  held  frequently;  always  with 
an  indicated  enemy  and  under  conditions  approaching  as  nearly 
as  possible  those  of  war.  The  units  participating  must  be  under 
their  permanent  leaders  and  at  as  nearly  full  strength  as  conditions 
will  permit. 

12.  It  must  be  the  effort  of  every  leader  to  awaken  in  his  sub- 
ordinates the  spirit  of  initiative  and  mutual  helpfulness  and  to 
develop  to  the  greatest  extent  that  aggressive  desire  to  close  with  the 
enemy  which  in  war  is  the  first  condition  of  success. 

13^.  The  course  of  instruction  will  comprise: 

(a)  The  instruction  of  officers,  noncommissioned  oflicers,  and 
special  grades. 

(6)  The  instruction  of  the  trooper  individually  and  in  the  various 
units. 

The  first  has  for  its  object  the  preparation  of  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  for  the  performance  of  their  duty  as  instruc- 
tors and  leaders  of  i;nits  and  of  the  men  of  special  grades  (cooks, 
trumpeters,  farriers,  horseshoers,  wagoners,  and  saddlers),  for  the 
performance  of  their  functions.  It  must  include  every  detail  of 
service  and  all  the  operations  in  which  cavalry  may  be  called 
upon  to  participate  in  war. 

14.  To  impart  instruction  efiiciently  officers  and  noncommis- 
sioned officers  must  be  able  to  execute,  with  the  greatest  degree 


INSTRUCTION  OF  OFFICERS.  25 

of  skill,  all  that  they  are  called  upon  to  teach  others,  and  must 
understand  and  use  to  practical  advantage  the  methods  of  instruc- 
tion recognized  as  the  best. 

To  be  able  to  lead  their  units  without  hesitation  and  with  success 
they  should  be  practiced  in  assuming  situations  in  which  they 
will  find  themselves  in  war  and  in  indicating  the  most  rapid  and 
simple  measures  to  meet  the  conditions.  They  will  be  tested 
from  time  to  time  in  their  knowledge  of  that  portion  of  these  regu- 
lations and  of  the  service  manuals  bearing  ipon  their  duties,  and 
will  be  required  to  solve  map  and  terrain  problems  based  upon 
situations  which  they  would  probably  meet  in  war. 

16.  The  colonel  is  charged  with  the  instruction  of  the  field 
officers  and  captains  and  the  regimental  noncommissioned  staff; 
the  captains  with  the  instruction  of  the  lieutenants,  noncommis- 
sioned officers,  and  special  grades  of  their  squadrons. 

Instruction  of  Officers. 

16.  The  worth  of  a  command  to  the  Government  depends  largely 
upon  the  training  and  knowledge  of  its  officers. 

Nothing  should  be  neglected  which  will  tend  to  increase  then- 
professional  knowledge  or  to  elevate  their  moral  and  intellectual 
level. 

Apart  from  the  instruction  imparted  by  their  commanders,  all 
officers  should  regard  it  as  their  duty  to  labor  ceaselessly  to  perfect 
their  military  training,  to  keep  themselves  abreast  of  all  progress 
in  their  arm,  and  to  study  the  conditions  and  necessities  of  modern 
war.  They  must  possess,  as  a  foundation  for  all  training,  a  thorough 
theoretical  and  practical  knowledge  of  horsemanship,  of  the  regu- 
lations concerning  their  arm,  and  of  the  duties  they  will  be  called 
upon  to  assume  in  peace  or  war. 

In  addition,  they  should  have  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  or- 
ganization, formations,  and  tactics  of  the  other  arms,  of  topography, 
fortification,  and  other  military  subjects  that  bear  upon  the  great 
variety  of  missions  with  which  they  may  be  charged.  For  this 
purpose  full  use  should  be  made  of  the  presence  of  troops  of  other 
arms  in  the  garrison  or  in  maneuvers. 

Map  and  terrain  exercises  should  be  devised  to  enable  the  officers 
to  make  practical  application  of  what  they  have  learned.  These 
exercises  must  be  simple  and  entirely  practical  and  suited  to  the 
grade  of  the  officer  under  instruction.  Their  principal  aim  should 
be  to  train  the  officer  to  grasp  quickly  situations  in  war,  to  form 


26       INSTRUCTION  OF  NONCOlOfflSSIONED  OPFICEES. 

correct  decisions,  and  to  formulate  from  them  clear  and  precise 
orders  and  reports. 

Officers  of  all  grades  must  acquire  skill  in  the  use  of  every  arm 
carried  by  their  men,  and  must  keep  up  bold  and  vigorous  riding. 

An  officer,  not  below  the  grade  of  captain,  will  be  designated  to 
give  instruction  in  equitation  to  officers  requiring  it. 

17.  Officers  should  bear  in  mind  that  their  manner  of  imparting 
instruction  and  their  personal  bearing  and  aptitude  have  a  great 
influence  upon  the  men  under  their  charge.  A  sound  soldierly 
spii'it  can  not  be  developed  by  rules,  but  much  can  be  accomplished 
by  force  of  example  in  teaching  high  ideals  of  personal  conduct  and 
in  training  men  to  meet  privations  cheerfully  and  never  to  grumble 
at  work  or  hardship. 

Instruction  of  Noncommissioned  Officers. 

18.  Noncommissioned  officers  must  be  able  to  instruct  in  the 
school  of  the  trooper  and  of  the  platoon,  to  assist  their  officers  in  the 
details  of  service,  and  to  replace  them  in  case  of  necessity. 

Their  theoretical  instruction  will  embrace  such  of  these  regula- 
tions as  pertain  to  their  duties,  to  include  the  school  of  the  trooper, 
the  platoon,  and  the  squadron,  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual, 
Field  Service  Regulations,  interior  economy  of  the  squadron,  and 
elementary  lessons  in  hygiene  and  hippology. 

Their  practical  instiniction  will  embrace  all  that  is  necessary  to 
prepare  them  for  their  duties  as  instructors,  for  their  functions  in 
the  school  of  the  platoon  and  squadron,  and  for  any  missions  with 
which  they  may  be  charged  in  war. 

They  must  be  trained  to  comprehend  the  formations  and  move- 
ments of  troops  of  all  arms,  to  read  a  map  readily,  and  to  write  a 
succinct  report  accompanied,  when  necessary,  by  a  sketch  showing 
the  location  and  disposition  of  troops. 

The  colonel  may  designate  an  officer  to  perfect  and  develop  the 
training  in  equitation  of  the  noncommissioned  officers  of  his 
command. 

Instruction  of  the  Special  Grades. 

19.  To  replace  casualties  among  the  cooks,  farriers,  horseshoers, 
and  saddlers  who  are  graduates  of  the  service  schools,  the  captain 
will  cause  instruction  to  be  given  to  selected  privates  who  show 
aptitude  for  these  duties. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  TROOPEE.  27 

The  trumpeters  will  be  trained  and  instructed  by  the  chief 
trumpeter  under  the  supervision  of  the  adjutant. 

The  wagoners  will  be  instructed  in  the  principles  of  draft,  the 
care  of  wagons,  and  the  care  and  fitting  of  harness. 

Instruction  of  the  Trooper. 

20.  The  instruction  of  the  trooper  is  conducted  in  each  squadron 
under  direction  of  the  captain,  who  is  assisted  by  his  officers  and 
noncommissioned  officers  according  to  their  several  aptitudes  and 
grades.  The  course  of  instruction  should  be  so  arranged  as  to  bring 
the  trooper  to  the  highest  degree  of  efficiency  at  the  time  of  the 
annual  maneuvers. 

While  the  captain  should  carry  on  this  instruction  according  to  a 
systematic,  prearranged  plan,  he  must  be  left  free  to  alter  his  plan 
to  meet  unforeseen  conditions.  Adherence  to  a  routine  system  will 
not  be  required,  and  the  interference  of  superiors  will  be  limited  to 
the  correction  of  errors  and  the  indication  of  omissions. 

All  instruction  must  be  conducted  with  a  view  to  fitting  the 
trooper  to  play  his  part  in  war. 

Equitation,  the  use  of  arms,  and  the  cultivation  of  morale  are 
the  essential  elements. 

21.  In  the  daily  tasks  constant  effort  should  be  made  to  develop 
in  the  trooper  a  taste  for  physical  exercise;  to  perfect  his  knowledge 
of  the  horse  and  of  his  capacity  and  limitations  and  of  the  care  that 
should  be  given  him;  and  to  assure  the  proper  care,  fit,  and  adjust- 
ment of  the  equipment  and  the  habitual  care  of  arms. 

22.  The  instruction  in  small-arms  practice  and  swordsmanship 
must  be  conducted  with  the  view  of  giving  to  the  trooper  complete 
confidence  in  his  ability  to  overcome  his  enemy  with  whatever 
weapon  he  may  be  called  upon  to  meet  him. 

23.  Instruction  in  field  service  should  be  so  arranged  as  to  pre- 
pare the  trooper  for  the  duties  that  will  fall  to  him  in  campaign,  to 
develop  and  guide  his  initiative,  and  to  instill  in  him  the  spirit  of 
the  offensive.  It  should  include  instruction  in  semaphore  signaling 
and  in  first  aid  to  the  injured. 

24.  Instructors  must  endeavor  from  the  first  to  acquire  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  character  and  aptitude  of  each  trooper  under  their  charge. 
They  should  exercise  patience  and  avoid  familiarity.  The  work 
should  be  so  regulated  that  all  troopers  will  have  at  least  one 
mounted  exercise  daily  except  Sunday. 


28  COLLECTIVE  INSTRUCTION. 

26.  Before  beginning  work  the  instructor  will  assure  himself  that 
those  under  his  charge  are  neatly  dressed  in  proper  uniform,  and 
that  horses  are  properly  groomed  and  equipments  in  order. 

Saddles  will  be  habitually  stripped  with  the  exception  of  the 
arms  required,  but  sufficient  instruction  will  be  given  in  full  field 
equipment  to  assure  proper  preparation  for  field  service. 

26.  Kecruit  instmction  will  receive  the  special  attention  of  the 
captain  and  will  be  so  conducted  as  to  prepare  the  recruit,  as 
quickly  as  is  consistent  with  thorough  work,  to  take  his  place  in 
ranks. 

This  will  be  accomplished  when  the  recruit: 

(a)  Is  able  to  ride  his  horse  on  the  bit  with  one  hand  at  all  gaits. 

(b)  Has  learned  to  care  for  his  horse,  pack  his  saddle,  and  take 
proper  care  of  his  arms  and  equipments. 

(c)  Has  mastered  the  use  of  his  arms  mounted  and  dismounted. 

(d)  Has  acquired  an  elementary  knowledge  of  field  service. 
The  captain  is  the  judge  as  to  when  this  proficiency  has  been 

attained.  Undue  haste  in  placing  the  recruits  in  ranks  must  be 
avoided,  since  it  leads  to  loss  of  time  in  the  school  of  the  platoon  and 
squadron. 

Collective  Instruction. 

27.  The  time  which  should  be  apportioned  to  each  item  of  col- 
lective instruction  must  vary  with  the  circumstances.  Ample 
time  must  be  allotted  to  the  school  of  the  squadron. 

During  the  time  devoted  to  the  instruction  of  the  larger  units, 
commanders  of  the  smaller  units  must  take  advantage  of  all  oppor- 
tunities to  continue  the  instruction  of  their  commands. 

The  captain  will  decide  when  the  instruction  in  the  school  of  the 
squadron  shall  be  begun.  He  will  assure  himself  before  under- 
taking this  instruction  that  each  lieutenant  has  brought  his  platoon 
to  a  proper  state  of  preparation. 

The  colonel  designates  the  period  to  be  devoted  to  the  school  of 
the  regiment. 

The  training  of  regiments  in  brigades,  and  of  brigades  in  divisions, 
with  the  proper  complement  of  horse  artillery  and  auxiliary  troops, 
is  important,  both  to  insure  cooperation  and  to  give  practice  to  the 
higher  leaders  and  their  stalfs. 

A  reasonable  period  of  the  time  available  for  such  training  should 
be  devoted  to  drill  to  render  the  force  supple  and  handy. 


THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED. 

28.  The  object  of  this  school  is  to  develop  the  strength  and 
agility  of  the  trooper,  to  give  him  a  military  bearing,  to  fix  in  him 
the  habit  of  sustained  attention  and  instant  obedience,  to  prepare 
him  for  instruction  in  mounted  combat  with  the  saber  and  pistol, 
and  to  train  him  in  dismounted  combat  with  the  rifle. 

In  order  to  make  rapid  progress  in  those  exercises  which  form 
the  basis  of  instruction  of  the  trooper,  it  is  necessary  that  the  les- 
sons should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  given  individually. 

29.  The  instructor  explains  briefly  each  movement,  first  exe- 
cuting it  himself  if  practicable.  He  requires  the  recruits  to  take 
the  proper  positions  unassisted  and  does  not  touch  them  for  the 
purpose  of  correcting  them,  except  when  they  are  unable  to  correct 
themselves.  He  avoids  keeping  them  too  long  at  the  same  move- 
ment, although  each  should  be  understood  before  passing  to  an- 
other. He  exacts  by  degrees  the  desired  precision  and  uniformity. 
Recruits  should  be  allowed  to  stand  at  ease  frequently.  During 
these  pauses  the  instructor  will  not  be  idle,  but  opportunity  will 
be  taken  to  talk  to  the  men,  to  encourage  them  to  ask  questions, 
and  so  to  develop  their  confidence  and  common  sense. 

30.  In  order  that  all  may  advance  as  rapidly  as  their  abilities 
permit,  the  recruits  are  grouped  according  to  proficiency  as  instruc- 
tion progresses.  Those  who  lack  aptitude  and  quickness  are  sepa- 
rated from  the  others  and  placed  under  experienced  drillmasters. 

Insteuction  WiTHonT  Arms. 

31.  For  preliminary  instruction  a  number  of  recruits,  usually 
three  or  four,  are  formed  as  a  squad. 

To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  commands:  FALL  IN. 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  and  are  arranged  by  the  instruc- 
tor in  single  or  double  rank,  with  or  without  intervals. 

The  instructor  makes  use  of  such  parts  of  the  school  of  the  pla- 
toon as  may  be  necessary  in  marching  the  squad  to  and  from  the 
ground  and  in  instruction.  He  keeps  in  mind,  however,  that  this 
instruction  is  individual  and  that  the  collective  instruction  begins 
in  the  platoon. 

To  dismiss  the  squad:  DISMISSED 

29 


30  INSTRirCTION  WITHOITT  ARMS. 

POSITION  OF  THE  TROOPER,  DISMOUNTED,  OR  ATTENTION. 

32.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the  con- 
formation of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45°. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips;  chest  lifted  and  arched;  shoulders  square  and 
falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam  of  the 
breeches. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawn  in  so  that  the 
axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical;  eyes  to  the  front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls  of 
the  feet. 

THE   RESTS. 

33.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT;  REST; 
AT  EASE;  and,  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places,  at  attention,  at  the  command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but  is 
not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place  and 
is  required  to  preserve  silence  but  not  immobility. 

1.  Parade,  2.  REST.  Carry  the  right  ffot  6  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent;  clasp  the  hands,  without  con- 
straint, in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  fingers  joined,  left  hand 
uppermost,  left  thumb  clasped  by  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the 
right  hand;  preserve  silence  and  steadiness  of  position. 

34.  To  resume  the  attention:  ATTENTION. 

The  men  take  the  position  of  the  trooper,  dismounted. 

EYES   RIGHT   OR   LEFT. 

36.  1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique,  eyes 
fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the 
same  rank.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to 
the  front. 


SETTING-UP  EXERCISES.  81 

FACINGS. 

36.  To  the  flank:  1.  Right,  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  face  to  the  right,  turn- 
ing on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the  ball  of  the 
left  foot;  place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right.  Left  face  is 
executed  on  the  left  heel  in  the  corresponding  manner. 

37.  To  the  rear:  1.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half  foot -length  to  the  rear 
and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel  without  changing  the  position 
of  the  left  foot;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel 
and  right  toe;  place  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

SALUTE    WITH  THE   HAND. 

38.  1.  Hand,  2.  SALUTE. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the 
tip  of  forefinger  touches  the  lower  part 
of  the  headdress  above  the  right  eye, 
thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
palm  to  the  left,  forearm  inclined  at 
about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight. 
(2)  Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the  side,  ^^-aawsai^  i  g»m 
The  salute  is  made  only  with  the  right  ^  ^ 

When  saluting,  officers  and  men  look     ildnQ  On LU  I  L 

toward  the  person  saluted. 

If  uncovered,  stand  at  attention,  without  saluting. 
For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  ''Honors." 

Setting- Up  Exeecises. 

30.  The  object  of  these  exercises  is  to  improve  the  bearing  of  the 
recruit  and  to  develop  his  strength,  agility,  and  endurance. 

The  instructor  should  avoid  all  constraint  in  these  exercises  and 
endeavor  to  vary  them  in  such  a  way  as  to  render  the  work  attrac- 
tive. He  should  adapt  his  requirements  to  the  abilities  of  the 
troopers  under  hie  charge  and  endeavor  to  arouse  a  spirit  of 
emulation. 

Only  such  exercises  are  herein  prescribed  as  are  necessary  to 
strengthen  and  supple  the  muscles  m  ordinary  use  and  to  develop 


32  SETTING-TTP  EXERCISES. 

the  respiratory  organs.  The  instructor  may  make  use  of  such  of  the 
exercises  prescribed  in  the  authorized  Manuals  of  Gymnastics  as 
may  appear  to  him  to  be  suited  to  the  progress  and  development  of 
the  recruit. 

40.  Should  the  troopers  be  formed  in  ranks  the  instructor  first 
causes  the  rear  rank  to  move  back  to  a  suitable  distance  and  then 
gives  the  command: 

1.  On  (such)  troopei?,  2.  At  (so   many)   yards  interval,  3. 
MARCH. 
The  troopers  take  the  prescribed  interval  and  face  to  the  front. 
To  assemble:  1.  On  (such)  trooper,  2.  ASSEMBLE. 
All  movements  are  executed  from  the  position  of  attention. 

INITIAL  POSITIONS. 

41.  Whenever  the  setting-up  exercises  require  an  initial  position 
the  instructor  indicates  it  and  causes  it  to  be  taken  at  the  command : 
IN  POSITION. 

Hands  at  the  breast. 

The  arms  are  bent,  forearms  at  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  hands 
opened  and  extended  in  prolongation  of  the  forearms,  fingers  joined, 
palms  downward;  the  shoulders  are  kept  low  and  carried  back. 

Hands  on  hips. 

The  hands  are  placed  on  the  points  of  the  hips,  the  fingers 
extended  and  joined  in  prolongation  of  the  forearms,  the  thumbs  in 
rear;  the  elbows  are  drawn  back;  the  shoulders  are  kept  low  and 
carried  back. 

Straddle. 

Carry  the  right  foot  about  24  inches  to  the  right  of  the  left,  the 
weight  of  the  body  borne  equally  on  the  two  legs. 

EXERCISES   OF  THE   ARMS,   LEGS,   AND   TRUNK. 

42.  After  causing  the  initial  position  to  be  taken,  in  case  that 
should  be  necessary,  the  instructor  announces  the  movement  to  be 
executed  and  commands:  COMMENCE. 

The  troopers  execute  the  movement  without  endeavoring  to 
regulate  on  each  other.  A  maximum  of  amplitude  is  allowed  in 
the  exercises,  but  violent  movements  must  be  avoided  and  the 
parts  of  the  body  not  embraced  in  the  exercise  kept  immobile. 

When  the  troopers  are  familiar  with  the  exercises  they  may  be 
executed  in  unison.    The  instructor  indicates  the  cadence. 


SETTING-TTP  EXERCISES.  88 

The  flexions  of  the  body  and  lower  limbs  are  always  executed 
slowly. 

The  movement  is  repeated  until  the  command  HALT,  when  it 
is  concluded  without  haste  and  the  position  of  attention  resumed. 

43.  Raising  the  arms. 

Raise  and  extend  the  arms  to  the  front  at  a  distance  apart  equal 
to  the  width  of  the  shoulders,  the  palms  toward  each  other,  until 
the  arms  are  in  prolongation  of  the  body  and  force  them  back  as 
far  as  possible;  lower  the  arms,  still  extended,  to  the  front  and 
return  to  the  position  of  attention. 

44.  Lateral  extension  of  the  arms  (from  hands  at  the  breast). 
Extend  the  arms  laterally  at  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  carrying 

them  as  far  to  the  rear  as  possible,  the  palms  of  the  hands  down- 
ward, the  shoulders  kept  low  and  forced  back  without  bending  or 
hollowing  the  back;  return  to  the  initial  position. 

45.  Rotation  of  the  arms. 

Execute  the  first  motion  of  raising  the  arms,  then  lower  them  and 
extend  them  laterally,  palms  of  the  hands  downward;  carry  the 
arms  to  the  rear  as  far  as  possible,  turning  the  palms  of  the  hands 
toward  each  other,  and  return  to  the  position  of  attention. 

46.  Flexion  of  the  leg-s  (from  hands  on  hips). 

Rise  upon  the  toes;  bend  the  legs,  spreading  the  knees  apart  with 
the  heels  elevated  and  joined,  and  sit  down  on  the  heels,  keeping 
the  body  erect;  rise  again  on  the  toes;  resume  the  initial  position. 

47.  Extension  of  the  right  or  left  leg  to  the  front,  rear, 
or  laterally  (from  hands  on  hips). 

Raise  the  right  or  left  leg  to  the  front,  rear,  or  laterally  with  the 
foot  extended;  resume  the  initial  position. 

48.  Bend  to  the  front  (from  hands  on  hips). 

The  body  is  inclined  slowly  to  the  front  with  the  back  bent  and 
the  head  in  prolongation  of  the  trunk.  Return  slowly  to  the 
initial  position. 

49.  Bend  to  the  right  (from  straddle,  hands  on  hips). 

The  body  is  slowly  inclined  laterally  without  deranging  the 
position  of  the  hips.  The  head,  shoulders,  and  arms  conform  to 
the  movement  of  the  trunk.    Return  slowly  to  the  initial  position. 

60.  Rotation  of  the  body  (from  straddle,  hands  on  hips). 

Turn  the  body  slowly  from  right  to  left  and  from  left  to  right 
mthout  deranging  the  position  of  the  hips.  The  head,  shoulders, 
and  arms  conform  to  the  movement  of  the  trunk.  Return  slowly 
to  the  initial  position.  \ 


34  RUNNING  AND  JUMPING. 

61.  Being  at  attention  or  at  the  straddle:  BREATHING 
EXERCISE. 

Inhale  a  deep  breath,  keeping  the  mouth  closed.  Follow  with 
a  complete  expiration. 

Every  gymnastic  drill  and  every  series  of  violent  exercises  ahould 
be  concluded  with  breathing  exercises. 

Running. 

62.  Running  is  the  most  effective  means  of  developing  the 
respiration.  It  increases  endurance  and  accustoms  the  trooper  to 
the  violent  exertion  necessary  in  dismounted  combat. 

This  exercise  must  be  conducted  in  accordance  with  a  prudent 
system  of  progression  in  order  to  avoid  harmful  excess,  and  care 
must  be  taken  not  to  exceed  the  limit  of  endurance  of  the  troopers. 

63.  A  noncommissioned  officer  is  placed  at  the  head  of  the  squad 
to  set  the  pace. 

The  length  of  the  step  in  running  is  36  inches.  The  weight  of 
the  body  is  borne  on  the  toes.  The  body  is  inclined  forward  and 
the  knees  bent.  The  hands,  closed,  are  at  the  height  of  the  hips, 
the  elbows  a  little  to  the  rear,  and  the  arms  have  a  natural  swinging 
motion. 

The  running  is  preceded  by  several  minutes  of  marching  at 
quick  time.  Then  the  running  step  is  taken  up,  the  pace  being 
slow  at  first  and  gradually  increasing  to  the  cadence  of  double  time. 
After  a  few  minutes  the  pace  is  increased  to  the  limit  of  speed  of 
the  slowest  men.  The  increased  pace  should  not  be  maintained, 
for  recruits,  for  more  than  50  yards. 

In  order  to  avoid  becoming  winded  or  out  of  breath  the  expira- 
ration  should  always  be  as  complete  as  possible. 

Jumping. 

64.  These  exercises  are  for  the  purpose  of  developing  the  energ.\ 
and  agility  of  the  trooper,  and  consist  of  high  jumps,  broad  jumps, 
and  downward  jumps.  They  are  executed  separately  or  in  corabi- 
na,tion. 

In  executing  the  standing  jumps  the  trooper  bends  bis  legs, 
raises  his  heels  slightly,  and  carries  his  arms  more  or  less  to  the 
rear.  Ho  then  vigorously  straightens  his  legs  in  order  to  clear  the 
obstacle,  raising  his  arms  in  the  air  in  cii^e  of  a  high  jump  and 


STEPS  AND  MARCHINGS.  35 

carrying  tliem  to  the  front  in  case  of  a  broad  jump.  He  extends 
his  legs  while  his  body  is  falling  and  bends  them  sufficiently  to 
lessen  the  shock  on  alighting;  the  arms  are  extended  without 
stiffness. 

In  executing  the  running  jumps  the  trooper  takes  a  vigorous 
start  at  a  fast  pace,  shortening  the  steps  when  near  the  obstacle. 
He  then  gives  himself  an  impulse  with  either  foot,  raising  his  arms 
upward  or  to  the  front,  and  alights  as  in  the  standing  jump. 

During  the  outdoor  drills  the  troopers  are  trained  in  jumping 
with  the  rifle  in  hand  over  such  obstacles  as  are  likely  to  be  met 
with  in  campaign. 

56.  The  instructor  should  devote  a  short  period  during  each 
drill  in  individual  instruction  to  gymnastic  exercises. 

Swimming. 

66.  Instruction  and  practice  in  swimming  will  be  given  to  all 
recruits  as  early  as  practicable. 

Advantage  will  be  taken  of  all  subsequent  opportunities  to  (jarry 
forward  this  instruction  until  the  trooper  is  able  to  swim  fully 
clothed  and  with  full  equipment.  To  avoid  ruining  the  rifle  and 
belts  a  few  dummy  equipments,  simulating  in  size  and  weight  the 
articles  carried  on  the  soldier's  person  in  campaign  should  be  ex- 
temporized for  this  purpose. 

Good  swimmers  will  be  found  in  every  body  of  troops,  and  these 
should  be  utilized  to  instruct  those  who  can  not  swim. 

Steps  and  Marchings. 

57.  All  steps  and  marchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except  right 
step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches,  measured 
from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  120  steps  per 
minute.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches 
and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

All  steps  and  marchings,  and  movements  involving  marching, 
are  executed  in  qidck  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in  double 
time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the  command;  in  the  latter  case 
double  time  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command. 


36  STEPS  AND  MARCHINGS. 

QUICK  TIME. 

58.  Beiug  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  hi  quick  time:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the 
right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  inarch,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and  plant 
it  without  shock;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and 
plant  it  as  above;  continue  the  march.     The  arms  swing  naturally. 

59.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march  in 
double  time:  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to 
the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march.,  raise  the  forearms,  fingers 
closed,  until  the  hands  are  at  the  height  of  the  hips,  elbows  slightly 
to  the  rear;  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and  cadence  of 
double  time,  swinging  the  arms  freely  from  the  shoulder. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  miareh,  given  as 
either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick  time,  and 
then  step  oTf  in  double  time. 

To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double  time;  resume  the  quick 
time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO    MARK   TIME. 

60.  Being  in  march:  1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command,  m.arch,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot;  bring  up  the  foot  in  rear  and 
continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each  foot  about  2 
inches  and  planting  it  on  line  with  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  m.arch,  raise  and  phut  the.- 
fppf  9s  dAsrriborl  nbovo. 

SfDE   .STEP. 

61.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Right  step,  2.  MARCH. 
Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right;  bring  the 

left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  the  cadence  of 
quick  time. 


I 


STEPS  AND  MARCHINGS.  37 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  executed 
in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
other  command. 

BACK   STEP. 

62.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH. 
Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  executed 
in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without  other 
command. 

TO   HALT. 

63.  To  stop  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1.  Squad, 
2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and  place  the  first  foot 
by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the  hands  by 
the  sides. 

TO    MARCH    BY   THE    FLANK. 

64.  Being  in  march:   I.  By  the  right  fiank,  2.  MARCH. 

The  troopers  individually  fac^e  io  the  right  in  marching  and  .step 
otf  in  the  new  direction. 

TO    MARCJl    TU    TJIE    JlEAlt. 

65.  Being  in  march:  1.  Troopers  to  the  rear,  2,  MARCH. 
Turn  to  the  right  about,  taking  four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the 

cadence,  and  then  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

CHANGE    STEP. 

66.  Being  in  march:  1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the  toe  of  the  right 
foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  command 
inarch  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  s:round. 


38  INSTEUCTION  WITH  ARMS. 

Individual  Instruction  With  .Irms. 
armament  for  garrison  duty,  dismounted. 

67.  Complete  armament:  Rifle  and  pistol. 

For  guard,  drill,  and  inspection:  As  may  be  directed. 
For  duty  out  of  ranks,  as  orderly,  witness,  etc.:  Pistol  and  gar- 
rison belt,  or  garrison  belt  alone,  as  may  be  directed. 
Full  dress  or  dress:  Rifle  and  garrison  belt. 
The  saber  is  not  worn  dismounted. 
Spurs  are  not  worn  on  dismounted  duty. 

MANUAL   OP   THE    RIFLE. 

68.  As  soon  as  practicable  the  recruit  is  taught  the  nomencla- 
ture, care,  and  use  of  his  rifle;  when  fair  progress  has  been  made 
in  the  instruction  without  arms,  he  is  taught  the  manual  of  arms; 
instruction  without  arms  and  that  with  arms  alternate. 

69.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  rifle: 

First.  The  rifle  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the  cliam- 
])er  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically  ordered.  When  so 
loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually  carried  locked; 
that  is,  with  the  safety  lock  turned  to  tlie  ''safe."  At  all  othei- 
times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the  trigger  pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  rifles  are  im- 
mediately inspected  at  the  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS: 
3.  Order  (Right  shoulder,  port),  4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine  they  are  re- 
moved and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  ''off"  except  when  cartridges 
are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  FaU  in  is  executed  with  the  rifle  at  the  order  arms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  without  arms.  On 
resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  anns  is  taken. 

Fifth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  rifle  is 
brought  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  march,  the  three 
motions  corresponding  with  the  first  three  steps.  Movements  may 
be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  ])re]:>aratory  command 
with  the  words  at  trail,  as,  1.  At  trail,  forward,  2.  MARCH; 
the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE.  89 

When  the^facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  taking  inter- 
val, and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the  order,  raise  the  rifle 
to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and  resume  the  order  on  halting. 

Sixth.  The  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The  execu- 
tion of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 

Seventh.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as  when 
without  arms. 

70.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the  manual  of 
arms: 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  (center  of 
gravity)  the  thumb  clasps  the  rifle;  the  sling  is  included  in  the 
grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  rifle  '' diagonally  across  the  body" 
the  position  of  the  rifle,  left  arm  and  hand  are  the  same  as  in  port 
arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the  manual, 
the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the  butt  of  the  rifle  about 
3  inches  from  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  the  left  hand  above  and 
near  the  right,  steadying  the  rifle,  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
forearm  and  wrist  straight  and  inclining  downward,  all  fingers  of 
the  right  hand  grasping  the  rifle.  To  complete  the  order,  lower 
(he  rifle  gently  tu  the  ground  with  the  right  hand,  drop  the  left 
quickly  by  the  side,  and  take  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Allowing  the  rifle  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to  the  ground, 
or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  arm  to  produce  effect  in  executing  the 
manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick  time;  the 
recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to  the  de- 
tails of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  acquired  as  they 
become  accustomed  to  handling  their  rifles. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  movements  are, 
for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and  executed 
in  detail;  in  this  case  the  command  of  execution  determines  the 
prompt  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  commands,  two, 
three,  four,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first  cautions: 
By  the  numbers;  all  movements  divided  into  motions  are  then 
executed  as  above  explained  until  he  cautions:  Without  the 
numbers,  or  commands  movements  other  than  those  in  the  manual 
of  arms. 


40  MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular  positions 
of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without  re- 
gard to  the  previous  position  of  the  rifle. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue  the  rifle  may 
be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 

71.  Position  of  order  of  arms  standing:  The  butt  rests  evenly  on 
the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  toe  of, 
and  touching,  the^right  shoe,  arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally, 
right  hand  holding  the  rifle  between  the  thumb  and  fingers. 

72.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  carry  the  rifle  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left  hand  at 
the  balance,  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the  body. 
(TWO)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand, 

73.  Being^at  order  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally  across 
the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with  both  hands;  the  right,  palm  down, 
at  the  small  of  the  stock;  the  left,  palm  up,  at  the  balance;  barrel 
up,  sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the  junction  of  the 
neck  with  the  left  shoulder;  right  forearm  horizontal;  left  forearm 
resting  against  the  body;  the  rifle  in  a  vertical  plane  parallel  to 
the  front. 

74.  Being  at  present  aims:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  rifle  diagonally  across  the  body  and  take  the  position 
of  port  arms. 

76.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  rifle  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body  and  take  the  position  of  present  arms. 

76.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand;  lower  and  carry  the  rifle  to  the  right 
with  the  left  hand;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just  above  the 
lower  band;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the  next  to  the 
last  position  in  coming  to  the  order.     (TWO)  Complete  the  order. 

77.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally  across 

the  body;  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  butt,  embracing  it, 
the  heel  between  the  first  two  fingers.  (TWO)  Without  changing 
the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the  rifle  on  the  right  shoulder, 
barrel  up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  45°  from  the  horizontal, 
trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  right  elbow  near  the 
side,  the  rifle  in  a  vertical  plane  perpendicular  to  the  front;  carry 


MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE.  41 

the  left  hand,  thumb,  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  to  the 
small  of  the  stock,  tip  of  the  forefinger  touching  the  cocking  piece, 
wrist  straight  and  elbow  down.  (THREE)  Drop  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

78.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO) ,  (THRIVE)  Execute  order  arms  as  described  from  port  arms. 

79.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.     (TWO),  (THREE)  As  in 

right  shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

80.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

81.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (THREE)  Execute  present  arms. 

82.  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.    (TWO),  (THREE),  (FOUR)  Execute  right 

shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

83.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the  left  shoul- 
der, barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder;  at  the 
same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel  between  first 
and  second  fingei*s,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on  the  stock.  (TWO) 
Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder,  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  command  arms 
execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence  to  the  position 
ordered. 

84.  Being  at  left  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Grasp  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock, 
(TWO)  Carry  the  rifle  to  the  right  with  the  right  hand,  regrasp  it 
with  the  left,  and  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

86.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly 
bent;  carry  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  barrel 
to  the  left;  grasp  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  just  below  the  stack- 
ing swivel,  and  with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  left. 

Being  at  parade  rest:  ATTENTION. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  rifle  opposite  the 
right  hip. 


42  MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE. 

86.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Trail,  2.  ARMS. 

Raise  the  rifle,  right  arm  slightly  bent,  and  incline  the  muzzle 
forward^so  that  the  barrel  makes  an  angle  of  about  30°  with  the 
vertical. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconvenience  to  others, 
the  rifle  may  be  grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle  lowered 
until  the  rifle  is  horizontal;  a  similar  position  in  the  left  hand  may 
be  used. 

87.  Being  at  trail  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Lower  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

88.  Beingatright  shoulder  arms:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  forearm 

horizontal,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of  cocking  piece;  look  toward 
the  person  saluted.  (TWO)  Drop  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn  head 
and  eyes  to  the  front. 

With  the  rifle  on  the  left  shoulder,  the  salute  is  rendered  lu  -a 
corresponding  manner  with  the  right  hand. 

89.  Beingat  order  or  trail  arms:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
('arry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the  hiuid 

down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger  againsl 
the  rifle  near  the  muzzle;  look  toward  the  person  saluted.  (TWO) 
Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

90.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command,  take  the  position  of  port  arms.  (TWO) 
Seize  the  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand,  turn  the  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back  and  glance  at  the 
chamber.  Having  found  the  chamber  empty,  or  having  emptied 
it,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

91.  Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order  (right  shoulder, 
port),  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command,  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the 
handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms.  At  the  com- 
mand Arms  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO  DISMISS. 

92.  f^Kdng  at  halt:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port,  4. 
ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 


TO  STACK  AND  TAKE  ARMS.  43 

TO  STACK  AND  TAKE  ARMS. 

93.  Being  in  line  in  double  rank,  at^a  halt,  and  having  counted 
fours:  STACK  ABMS. 

Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  rifle  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt  between  his  feet,  barrel 
to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front  and  opposite  the 
center  of  the  interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  raising 
the  stacking  swivel;  each  even  number  of  the  rear  rank  then  passes 
his  rifle,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  his  file  leader,  who  grasps  it  between 
the  bands  with  his  right  hand  and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in 
advance  of  that  of  his  own  rifle  and  opposite  the  right  of  the  interval, 
the  right  hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages  with  that  of  his  own 
rifle;  each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  raises  his  rifle  with  the 
right  hand,  carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front;  the  left  hand, 
guiding  the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower  hook  of  the  swivel 
of  his  own  rifle  with  the  free  hook  of  that  of  the  even  number  of  the 
rear  rank;  he  then  turns  the  barrel  outward  into  the  angle  forme<^l 
by  the  other  two  rifles  and  lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground,  to  fhe 
right  of  and  against  the  toe  of  his  right  shoe. 

Rifles  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose  rifles. 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  rifles  are  laid  on  them  by  the  even 
numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  iiandling  rifles,  he  (.akes  the  position 
of  attention . 

94.  Being  in  line  behind  the  stacks:  TAKE  ARMS. 

The  loose  rifles  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of  the  front 
rank;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  own  rifle  with 
the  left  hand,  the  rifle  of  his  rear-rank  man  with  his  right  hand, 
grasping  both  between  the  bands;  each  odd  number  of  the  front 
rank  grasps  his  rifle  in  the  same  way  with  the  right  hand,  disen- 
gages it  by  raising  the  butt  from  the  ground  and  then,  turning  the 
rifle  to  the  right,  detaches  it  from  the  stack;  each  even  number 
of  the^ront  rank  disengages  and  detaches  his  rifle  by  turning  it  to 
the  left,  and  then  passes  the  rifle  of  his  rear-rank  man  to  him,  and 
all  resume  the  order. 

95.  Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files.  No.  1  rear 
rank  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in  making  and  breaking  the 
stack;  the  stacks  made  or  broken,  he  resumes  his  i)Ost. 

In  single  rank  the  stack  is  made  and  broken  by  No.  2.  No.  3 
steps  back  and  covers  No.  2,  and  the  stack  is  made  and  broken  as 
above  described,  and  No.  3  resumes  his  place. 


44  LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS. 


KNEELING  AND   LYING   DOWN. 


96.  If  standing:  KNEEL. 

Half  face  to  the  right;  carry  the  right  toe  about  1  foot  to  the  left 
rear  of  the  left  heel;  kneel  on  right  knee,  sitting  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible on  the  right  heel;  left  forearm  across  left  thigh;  rifle  remainf 
in  position  of  order  arms,  right  hand  grasping  it  above  the  lower 
band. 

97.  If  standing  or  kneeling:  LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but  with  right  knee  against  left  heel;  carry  back  the  left 
foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  body  about  35°  to  the  right; 
rifle  horizontal,  barrel  up,  muzzle  off  the  ground  and  pointed  to  the 
front;  elbows  on  the  ground;  left  hand  at  the  balance,  right  hand 
grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  opposite  the  neck.  This  is  the 
position  of  order  arms,  lying  down. 

98.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down:  KISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked 
l)y  the  left  keel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  the  body  on  both  knees;  stand  up,  faced 
to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

99.  If  lying  down:  KNEEL. 

Raise  the  body  on  both  knees;  take  the  position  of  kneel. 

100.  In  double  rank,  the  positions  of  kneeling  and  lying  down 
lire  ordinarily  used  only  for  the  better  utilization  of  cover. 

Wlien  deployed  as  skirmishers,  a  sitting  position  may  be  taken 
instead  of  the  position  kneeling. 

LOADINGS   AND   FIRINGS. 

101.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same  whether 
standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  firings  are  always  exe- 
cuted at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  lying  down  in  double  rank,  the  rear  rank  does 
not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

102.  Rifles  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded  with- 
out command  until  the  command  unload  or  inspection  anns, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is  exhausted . 


LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS.  46 

103.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out.  This 
may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  setting.  Both  are 
indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing,  but  may  be  omitted 
when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is  unmistakable;  in  such 
case  battle  sight  (the  leaf  laid  fiat)  is  used  if  no  sight  setting  is 
announced. 

104.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  announcement 
need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is  necessary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming  point 
or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced,  until  a 
change  is  ordered. 

105.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting;  if  the 
announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is  taken  at  the  first  com- 
mand for  firing. 

106.  When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to  accurate 
firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

To  load. 

107.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  With  dummy 
(blank  or  ball)  cartridges,     2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load,  each  front-rank  man  or  skirmisher  faces 
half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  1  foot,  to 
such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and  steadiness  of 
the  body;  raises,  or  lowers,  the  rifle  and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand 
at  the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  muzzle  at  the 
height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the  cut-off  up.  With  the  right 
hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes  a  loaded  clip  and 
inserts  the  end  in  the  clij)  slots,  places  the  thumb  on  the  powder 
space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers  extending  around  the  rifle 
and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine  floor  plate;  forces  the  cartridges 
into  the  magazines  by  pressing  down  with  the  thumb;  w^ithout 
removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the  bolt  home,  turning  down  the  handle; 
turns  the  safety  lock  to  the  "safe"  and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small 
of  the  stock.  Each  rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes 
a  similar  position  opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front- 
rank  man,  muzzle  of  the  rifle  extending  beyond  the  front  rank, 
and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  rifles  being  held  as 
nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 


46  LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS. 

108.  For  instruction  in  loading:  i.  Simulate,  2.  LOAD. 

Executed  as  above  described,  except  that  the  cut-off  reniaius 
"off"  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simulated. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  tiring; 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used.  Later,  blank 
cartridges  may  be  used. 

109.  The  rifle  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turning  the 
magazine  "off."  The  magazine  may  be  filled  in  whole  or  in  part 
while  "off"  or  "on"  by  pressing  cartridges  singly  down  and  back 
until  they  are  in  the  proper  place.  The  use  of  the  rifle  as  a  single 
loader  is,  however,  to  be  regarded  as  exceptional. 

To  unload. 

110.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 
bolt  alternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  cartridges  arc 
ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is  closed 
by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly  forward  to  free  it  from  the  stud 
holding  it  in  place  when  the  chamber  is  open,  pressing  the  follower 
down  and  back  to  engage  it  under  the  bolt,  and  then  thrusting  the 
bolt  home;  the  trigger  is  pulled.  The  cartridges  are  then  picked 
up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the  belt,  and  the  rifle  is  brought  to 
the  order. 

To  set  the  sight. 

111.  RANGE,  ELEVEN  HTINDRED  (EIGHT-FIFTY, 
ETC.),  or  BATTLE  SIGHT. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.  The  instructor  ex- 
plains and  verifies  sight  settings. 

To  fire  by  volley. 

1 12.  1.  HEADY,  2.  AIM,  3.  Squad,  4.  FIRE. 

At  the  commajid  ready,  turn  the  safety  lock  to  the  "ready"; 
at  the  command  aim,  raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands  and  support 
the  butt  firmly  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  right 
thumb  clasping  the  stock,  barrel  horizontal,  left  elbow  well  under 
the  rifle,  right  elbow  as  high  as  the  shoulder;  incline  the  head 
slightly  forward  and  a  little  to  the  right,  cheek  against  the  stock, 
left  eye  closed,  right'eye  looking  through  the  notch  of  the  rear 
sight  so  aa  to  perceive  the  object  aimed  at,  second  joint  of  fore- 


LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS.  47 

nger  resting  lightly  against  the  front  of  the  trigger  and  ta,king  up 
he  slack;  top  of  front  sight  is  carefully  raised  into,  and  held  in, 
he  line  of  sight. 

Each  rear-rank  man  aims  through  the  interval  to  the  right  of 
lis  file  leader  and  leans  slightly  forward  to  advance  the  muzzle  of 
lis  rifle  beyond  the  front  rank. 

In  aiming  kneeling,  the  left  elbow  rests  on  the  left  knee,  point  of 
)lbow  in  front  of  kneecap.  In  aiming  sitting,  the  elbows  are  sup- 
Dorted  by  the  knees. 

In  aiming  lying  down,  raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands,  rest  on  both 
(Ibows,  and  press  the  butt  firmly  against  the  right  shoulder. 

At  the  command  fire,  press  the' finger  against  the  trigger;  fire 
;v^ithout  deranging  the  aim  and  without  lowering  or  turning  the 
•ifle;  reload. 

113.  To  continue  the  firing:  1.  AIM,  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE. 
Each  command  is  executed  as  previously  explained.     Load 

from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and  thrusting  home 
;he  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the  safety  lock  at  the 
*  ready." 

To  fire  at  loilL 

114.  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  others,  comes  to  the  ready, 
aims  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point  or  target,  fixes, 
loads,  and  continues  the  firing  until  ordered  to  suspend  or  cease 
firing. 

116.  To  increase  (decrease)  the  rate  of  fire  in  progress  the 
instructor  shouts:  FASTER  (SLOWER). 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots  per  min- 
ute at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close  ranges,  devoting  the 
minimum  of  time  to  loading  and  the  maximum  to  deliberate 
aiming.  To  illustrate  the  necessity  for  deliberation,  and  to  habit- 
uate men  to  battle  conditions,  nmall  and  comparatively  indiH- 
t\nci  targets  are  de^io^nated. 

To  fire  hy  clip. 

116.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  fixe  at  will,  except  that  each 
man,  after  having  exhausted  the  (Cartridges  then  in  the  rifle,  sus- 
pends fixing. 


48  USE  OF  COVER. 

To  suspend  firing . 

117.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and 
repeats  same,  if  necessary,  or  commands:  SUSPEND  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  rifles  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in  a  position  of 
readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing,  sights  unchanged.  The 
men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aiming  point,  or  the  place 
at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which  it  is  expected  to 
reapi)ear. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  cease  firing. 

To  cease  firing. 

118.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  rifles  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the  position 
of  load,  the  cut-off  turned  down  if  firing  from  magazine,  the 
cartridge  is  drawn  or  the  empty  shell  is  ejected,  the  trigger  is 
pulled,  sights  are  laid  down,  and  the  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes  of 
position  or  to  steady  the  men. 

119.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given  at 
any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing  whether  the 
firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

THE   USE   OF   COVER. 

120.  The  recruit  should  be  given  careful  instruction  in  the 
individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advantage  of 
natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and  effectively  upon 
the  enemy;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy,  he  must  do  so  steadily  and 
as  rapidly  as  possible;  he  must  conceal  himself  as  much  as  possible 
while  firing  and  while  advancing. 

To  teach  him  to  fire  easily  and  effectively,  at  the  same  time 
concealing  himself  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  he  is  practiced  in 
simulated  firing  in  the  prone,  sitting,  kneeling,  and  crouching 
positions,  from  behind  hillocks,  trees,  heaps  of  earth  or  rocks,  from 
depressions,  gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or  windows.  He  is  taught 
to  fire  around  the  right  side  of  his  concealment  whenever  possible, 
or,  when  this  is  not  possible,  to  rise  enough  to  fire  over  the  top  of 
his  concealment. 


OBSERVATION.  4a 

When  these  details  are  understood,  he  is  required  to  select  cover 
with  reference  to  an  assumed  enemy  and  to  place  himself  behind 
it  in  proper  position  for  firing. 

121.  The  disadvantage  of  remaining  too  long  in  one  place,  how- 
ever good  the  concealment,  should  be  explained.  He  should  be 
taught  to  advance  from  cover  to  cover,  selecting  cover  in  advance 
before  leaving  his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running  rapidly 
toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  poor  target.  He  should  be  trained  in 
springing  from  a  prone  position  behind  concealment,  running  at 
top  speed  to  cover  and  throwing  himself  behind  it.  He  should 
also  be  practiced  in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover  by  crawling,  or 
by  lying  on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the  right  hand,  and  push- 
ing himself  forward  with  the  right  leg. 

He  should  be  taught  that,  when  fired  on  while  acting  independ- 
ently, he  should  drop  to  the  ground,  seek  cover,  and  then  endeavor 
to  locate  his  enemy. 

122.  The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover  is  con- 
tinued in  the  combat  exercises  of  the  platoon,  but  he  must  then  be 
taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the  platoon  or  squadron  and  the 
effectiveness  of  its  fire  is  of  greater  importance  than  the  question 
of  cover  for  individuals.  He  should  also  be  taught  that  he  may 
not  move  about  or  shift  his  position  in  the  firing  line  except  to  get 
a  better  view  of  the  target. 

OBSERVATION. 

123.  In  order  to  develop  the  faculty  of  rapid  and  accurate 
observation,  which  is  of  great  importance  in  campaign,  the  recruit 
should  be  trained  in  taking  notice  of  his  surroundings,  at  first  from 
selected  positions  and  later  at  the  various  gaits. 

He  should  be  practiced  under  various  conditions  of  weather  in 
recognizing  colors  and  forms;  in  pointing  out  and  naming  military 
features  of  the  ground ;  in  observing  the  effect  of  direction  of  light 
on  distinctness  of  objects;  in  recognizing  at  gradually  increasing 
distances  the  animate  and  inanimate  objects  ordinarily  met  with 
in  the  field;  and  in  counting  distant  objects  and  in  estimating  the 
size  of  groups,  such  as  herds  of  animals  and  bodies  of  troops. 

124.  In  the  training  of  men  in  the  mechanism  of  the  firing  line, 
they  should  be  practiced  in  repeating  to  one  another  target  and 
aiming  point  designations  and  in  quickly  locating  and  pointing 

34396^—14 4 


50  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL. 

out  a  designated  target.  They  should  be  taught  to  distingidsh, 
from  a  prone  position,  distant  objects,  particularly  troops,  both 
with  the  naked  eye  and  with  field  glasses.  Similarly,  they  should 
be  trained  in  estimating  distances. 

MANUAL   OP  THE   PISTOL. 

125.  Instruction  under  this  head  is  first  given  on  foot. 

The  recruit  is  first  made  familiar  with  the  mechanism  of  the  pis- 
tol, the  names  of  the  principal  parts,  and  the  method  of  cleaning, 
assembling,  and  oj)erating  it. 

When  a  lanyard  is  used,  the  snaps  are  attached  to  the  butt  of  the 
pistol  and  the  magazine;  the  sliding  loop  is  passed  over  the  head 
and  drawn  snug  against  the  right  armpit.  The  lanyard  should  then 
be  of  just  such  length  that  the  arm  can  be  extended  without  con- 
straint. 

126.  The  pistol  being  in  the  holster,  to  raise  pistol: 
1.  Raise,  2.  PISTOL. 

At  the  command  Raise,  unbutton  the  flap  of  the  holster  with  the 
right  hand  and  grasp  the  stock,  back  of  hand  outward. 

At  the  command  Pistol,  draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster,  reverse 
it,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock  "^dth  the  thumb  and  last 
three  fingers ;  forefinger  outside  of  the  guard ;  barrel  to  the  rear  and 
inclined  to  the  front  at  an  angle  of  about  30°;  hand  as  high  as  the 
neck  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the  point  of  the  right  shoulder.  This 
is  the  position  of  raise  pistol.  When  dismounted,  with  intervals, 
carry  the  right  foot  about  24  inches  to  the  right  and  place  the  left 
hand  in  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand. 

127.  1.  Inspection,  2.  PISTOL. 

Execute  raise  pistol  if  not  in  that  position .  Lower  the  pistol 
under  the  left  hand,  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand;  pistol 
pointing  to  the  left  front  and  downward;  with  the  left  hand,  back 
up,  pull  back  the  slide  until  the  slide  stop  is  engaged,  and  resume 
raise  pistol.  If  there  be  no  magazine  in  the  pistol,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  engage  the  slide  stop  with  the  right  thumb . 

If  dismounted,  the  left  hand  is  raised  to  the  position  of  the  bridle 
hand  while  manipulating  the  mechanism. 

128.  1.  Return,  2.  PISTOL. 

Being  at  raise  pistol,  lower  the  pistol  and  raise  the  flap  of  the 
holster  with  the  right  thumb;  insert  the  pistol  in  the  holster  and 
push  it  doT\Ti;  button  the  flap  with  the  right  hand.  If  the  pistol 
be  loaded,  and  not  at  ''safe,"  engage  the  safety  lock  with  the  right 
thumb  at  the  command  Return. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL.  61 

Being  at  inspection  pistol,  lower  the  pistol  as  in  executing  in- 
spection pistol  and  with  the  left  thumb  release  the  magazine  catch 
slightly  disengage  the  empty  magazine)  and  the  slide  stop  (to 
release  the  slide);  engage  the  magazine,  lower  the  hammer  gently, 
and  return  the  pistol  as  previously  explained. 

129.  LOAD. 

Being  at  raise  pistol  lower  the  pistol  as  in  executing  inspection 
pistol  and  release  the  magazine  catch ;  pass  the  pistol  into  the  left 
hand,  back  down,  and  with  the  right  hand  remove  the  empty 
magazine  and  insert  a  loaded  one;  pass  the  pistol  into  the  right 
hand;  draw  back  the  slide  and  release  it  to  insert  a  cartridge  into 
the  chamber;  engage  the  safety  lock  and  resume  raise  pistol. 

If  it  be  desired  to  insert  a  loaded  magazine  but  not  to  load  the 
pistol,  the  command  is  INSERT  MAGAZINE.  Executed  as 
prescribed  for  load  except  that  slide  is  not  drawn  back. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  the  motions  of  loading  and  firing 
without  using  cartridges.  Loading  and  pointing  practice  should 
be  given  mounted,  at  all  gaits. 

No  cartridges  will  be  used,  except  when  indicated  in  the  first 
command,  thus:  1.  With,  ball  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

130.  UNLOAD. 

Executed  as  in  load.  The  magazine  is  slightly  disengaged  and 
the  slide  drawn  back  in  order  to  eject  the  cartridge  from  the  cham- 
ber; the  magazine  again  engaged,  and  raise  pistol  resumed. 

131.  WITHDRAW  MAGAZINE. 

Executed  as  in  load,  except  that  no  magazine  is  inserted,  and  the 
slide  is  not  drawn  back. 

132.  Before  dismissing  the  squad,  pistols  will  be  unloaded  and 
magazines  withdrawn,  in  order  to  prevent  loaded  or  partially 
loaded  magazines  being  left  in  the  pistol. 

Firings. 

133.  Being  at  raise  pistol:. 
1.  At  (such  object),  2.  FIRE. 

At  the  first  command,  push  down  the  safety  lock,  or  cock  the 
pistol  and  direct  the  eyes  toward  the  object,  turning  the  head  and 
shoulders  in  that  direction. 

At  the  command  fire,  thrust  and  point  the  pistol  at  the  object, 
arm  nearly  or  quite  extended,  keeping  the  eyes  on  the  object,  and 
fire;  resume  the  raise  pistol. 

To  fire^agaiu  at  the  samc^objocl:  I.   Squad,  2.  FIRE. 


52  MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER. 

134.  The  pistol  being  in  the  holster: 
1.  At  {such  object),  2.  FIRE. 

At  the  first  command,  direct  the  eyes  and  turn  the  head  and 
shoulders  toward  the  object. 

At  the  command  fire,  quickly  draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster, 
point  it  at  the  object,  push  down  the  safety  lock,  and  fire. 

135.  An  almost  imperceptible  pause  may  be  allowed  between 
the  thrusting  and  firing  in  which  to  correctly  point  the  pistol. 
Deliberate  aiming,  however,  should  not  be  encouraged.  After 
firing  without  cartridges,  pause  an  instant  to  see  if  the  pistol  is 
(M^rrectly  pointed,  to  get  the  personal  error. 

The  instructor  must  take  into  account  individual  peculiarities 
in  order  to  secure  the  best  results  in  firing;  in  such  cases  departure 
from  the  text  is  permissible. 

WTien  mounted,  lean  slightly  forward,  bearing  on  the  stirrups; 
in  firing  to  the  front,  lean  w^ell  to  the  right  and  slightly  forward,  to 
avoid  burning  or  frightening  the  horse. 

To  fire  at  ivill. 

136.  1.  Fire  at  WiU,  2.  At  (such  object),  3.  COMMENCE 
FIRING,  4.  CEASE  FIRING. 

The  trooper  fires  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with  careful  pointing 
at  each  shot. 

At  the  command  cease  iiring,  the  firing  will  stop,  and  the  men 
resume  the  raise  pistol. 

137.  Firing  practice  will  be  conducted  on  the  principles  ex- 
plained in  the  Small- Arms  Firing  Manual. 

MANUAL    OF   THE    SABER. 

138.  For  this  instruction,  dismounted,  the  saber  in  the  scabbard 
is  carried  in  the  left  hand. 

In  the  position  of  attention  the  saber  will  be  held  upright  by 
the  side,  gustrd  to  the  front,  the  shoe  of  the  scabbard  resting  on  the 
ground  close  to  the  left  foot  and  just  in  front  of  the  heel.  The  left 
arm  will  be  extended,  the  fingers  and  thumb  grasping  the  scabbard, 
back  of  the  hand  outward. 

In  the  necessary  movements  on  foot  with  the  saber  in  hand  the 
saber  is  carried  with  the  hilt  to  the  front  and  higher  than  the  shoe 
of  the  scabbard.  A  hook  is  provided  on  the  belt  on  which  the 
.saber  may  be  carried  when  the  left  hand  is  otherwi.^e  <jccupied,  ais 
when  carrying  equipments = 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER.  63 

Officers,  dismounted,  may  carry  the  saber  in  the  hollow  of  the 
left  arm,  elbow  bent,  forearm  horizontal,  guard  of  the  saber  to  the 
front,  blade  vertical. 

139.  The  instructor  will  impress  upon  the  recruit  from  the  first 
that  he  is  provided  with  a  saber  for  the  sole  purpose  of  enabling 
him  to  kill  with  it  in  war,  when  he  will  invariably  use  it  mounted, 
and  that  instruction  on  foot  is  little  more  than  a  necessary  prelimi- 
nary to  the  training  which  he  will  receive  later  on  in'  mounted 
fighting. 

140.  If  the  squad  is  in  ranks  the  instructor  causes  the  ranks  to 
be  opened  and  intervals  to.be  taken  before  drawing  saber. 

141.  1.  Draw,  2.   SABER. 

At  the  command  draw,  grasp  the  scabbard  with 
the  left  hand  about  4  inches  from  the  mouth, 
place  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh,  and  carry 
the  hilt  to  the  front;  turn  the  head  slightly  to  the 
left  without  deranging  the  position,  and  glance  at 
the  saber  knot;  engage  the  right  wrist  in  the 
saber  knot  and  give  it  two  turns  inward  to  secure 
it;  grasp  the  hilt  with  the  right  hand  and  draw 
the  saber  about  6  inches  from  the  scabbard,  and 
look  to  the  front. 

At  the  command  saber,  draw  the  saber  quickly, 
raising  the  arm  to  the  front  and  upward  to  its  full 
length,  saber  in  prolongation  of  the  arm.  Make 
a  short  pause  with  the  saber  raised,  then  bring  it 
down  with  the  blade  against  the  hollow  of  the  right 
shoulder,  guard  to  the  front,  right  hand  at  the  hip, 
the  third  and  fourth  fingers  on  the  back  of  the  grip  and  the  elbow 
back. 

The  left  hand  holds  the  scabbard  as  at  attention. 

This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber  dismounted. 

142.  1.  Return,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  return,  grasp  the  scabbard  as  in  draw  saber 
and  carry  the  opening  to  the  front.  Carry  the  saber  to  the  front 
with  arm  half  extended  until  the  thumb  is  about  6  inches  in  front 
of  the  chin,  the  blade  vertical,  guard  to  the  left,  the  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  side  of  the  grip,  the  little  finger  joined  with  the 
others. 

At  the  command  saber,  move  the  wrist  to  opposite  the  left 
shoulder,  lower  the  blade  and  pass  it  across  and  along  the  left  arm, 
point  to  the  rear.     Turn  the  head  to  the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  upon 


64 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER. 


Port  Saber 


the  opening  of  the  scabbard;  raise  the  right  hand  and  insert  the 
blade  in  the  scabbard  and  push  it  home.  Disengage  the  wrist 
from  the  saber  knot  and  resume  the  position  of  attention. 

143.  Being  at  the  position  of  carry  saber. 
1.  Present,  2.  SABEK. 

Without  changing  the  position  of  the  left  hand,  execute  at  the 
command  saber  what  is  prescribed  in  para- 
graph 142  at  the  command  return,  except 
that  the  grip  is  held  in  the  full  grasp.  The 
saber  is  said  to  be  held  in  the  full  grasp  when 
all  four  lingers  grasp  the  grip,  the  thumb 
""X/  extending  along  the  back  in  the  groove,  the 

f       '      y  fingers  pressing  the  back  of  the  grip  against 

the  heel  of  the  hand. 

Officers  at  the  command  1.  Present,  exe- 
cute present  saber  as  described  above;  at 
the  command  2.  SABEK,  lower  the  saber 
until  the  point  is  12  inches  from  the  ground 
and  directed  to  the  front,  guard  to  the  left,  right  arm  straight,  hand 
beside  the  thigh.     Mounted  the  point  is  lowered  to  the  level  of  the 
stirrup. 

144.  Being  at  the  carry  saber. 
1.  Port,  2.  SABER. 

Carry  the  right  foot  about  24  inches  to  the  right,  bring  the  left 
hand  to  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand  and  raise  the  saber  to  a 
vertical  position,  guard  to  the  front,  grip  held  in  the  full  grasp,  right 
hand  aboutl2 
inches  in  front  of 
the  shoulder. 

To  resume  the 
carry:  1.  Carry, 
2.  SABER. 

145.  Being  at 
carry  saber,  or 
in  any  position: 
GUARD. 

Carry  the  right 
foot  about  24 
inches  to  the  right  and  bend  the  knees  to  simulate  the  position 
mounted.  Incline  the  body  to  the  front  from  the  waist  (not  the 
hips).  Let  the  blade  fall  to  the  front  to  a  position  nearly  horizon- 
tal, elbow  well  away  from  the  body,  forearm  and  saber  forming  one 


Ouardi  to  the^ /JRi<^t  TVont 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER.  56 

straight  line,  guard  to  the  right,  point  at  the  height  of  the  adver- 
sary's breast,  the  left  hand  in  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand. 

146.  Being  at  the  carry  saber. 
1.  Inspection,  2.  SABER. 

Carry  the  right  hand  upward,  arm  half  extended  until  the  thumb 
is  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  grip  held  in  the  full  grasp,  blade  ver- 
tical, guard  to  the  left.  Make  a  slight  pause,  then  loosen  the  grasp 
on  the  grip  and  turn  the  saber  wiSi  the  guard  to  the  left.  Again 
make  a  slight  pause,  then  resume  the  first  position  and  return  to 
the  carry. 

147.  Saber  exercise  is  conducted  and  instruction  given  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  "Saber  Exercise." 


r 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  TROOPER,  MOUNTED. 

148.  The  object  of  this  school  is  to  train  the  trooper  in  horse- 
manship and  in  the  ready  use  of  his  arms  while  mounted. 

The  instructor  must  first  develop  the  confidence  of  the  recruit, 
supple  him,  and  give  him  a  proper  seat.  Progress  should  be  suited 
to  his  capacity  and  exempt  him  as  far  as  practicable  from  falls  or 
other  accidents.  This  will  be  followed  by  instruction  in  the  use 
of  the  aids  and  the  means  employed  to  train  the  horse  to  obey  them. 

When  the  recruit  has  acquired  confidence  in  his  ability  to  ride' 
and  control  his  horse  he  will  be  instructed  in  the  use  of  arms 
mounted. 

Instruction  is  given  individually;  ever>^  new  movement  is  made 
the  object  of  a  particular  lesson  given  successively  to  each  trooper. 

During  the  exercise  the  instructor  avoids  general  remarks,  and 
in  the  correction  of  faults  he  addresses  by  name  those  committing 
them. 

He  passes  frequently  from  one  trooper  to  another,  repeating 
advice  and  endeavoring  to  impress  upon  them  the  principles 
embodied  in  the  regulations,  without  endeavoring  to  use  the  lan- 
guage of  the  text. 

The  instructor  has  no  fixed  position.  He  may  be  on  foot  or 
mounted.  For  the  first  lessons  it  is  advantageous  to  remain  on  foot 
so  as  to  better  explain  movements  and  correct  faults. 

He  should  always  maintain  an  attitude  and  bearing  that  will 
serve  as  an  example  to  the  troopers  under  his  charge. 

Steady,  well  trained  horses  are  selected  for  the  first  lessons. 
The  troopers  exchange  horses  from  time  to  time  during  the  lesson 
on  indication  from  the  instructor. 

There  should  be  frequent  rests,  especially  with  recruits.  The 
time  may  be  used  profitably  in  questioning  the  troopers  respecting 
the  instruction  they  have  received. 

149.  In  all  exercises  the  instructor  varies  the  gait  so  as  not  to 
weary  the  troopers  or  the  horses.     The  mounted  instruction  is  con- 

56 


THE  STANDARD  REQUIRED.  57 

ducted  without  hurry.  The  mounted  suppling  exercises  are 
practiced  during  the  entire  period  of  instruction. 

The  exercise  begins  and  ends  at  a  walk. 

160.  During  the  exercises  the  recruits  are  taught  the  rules  for 
the  care  of  horses  (par.  300),  until  the  instructor  is  satisfied  by  means 
of  questions  that  they  are  thoroughly  familiar  with  them. 

The  Standard  Required  of  Men  and  Horses. 

151.  To  be  a  good  militaiy  horsemait  each  trooper  should: 
(a)  Have  a  strong  seat. 

(6)  Be  able  to  apply  correctly  the  aids  by  which  a  horse  is 
controlled. 

(c)  Be  capable  of  covering  long  distances  on  horseback  with 

the  least  possible  fatigue  to  his  horse. 

(d)  Be  able  to  use  his  horse  to  the  utmost  advantage  in  a 

mounted  fight. 
{■e)  Be  capable  of  riding  across  country. 
(/)  Under  proper  directions  be  able  to  train  an  unbroken  hors? 

and  improve  a  badly  trained  horse. 
(g)  Have  a  practical  knowledge  of  the  care  of  horses  both  in 
garrison  and  in  the  field,  understand  how  to  detect  and 
treat  the  minor  ailments  to  which  they  are  liable,  and  be 
a  good  groom. 
All  officers,  in  addition  to  being  good  military  horsemen  and 
instructors  in  riding,  must  be  able  to  train,  and  direct  the  training 
of,  remounts. 

162.  A  trained  charger  or  troop  horse  must  be: 
(a)  Well  balanced  and  capable  of  carrying  a  heavy  weight  over 

long  distances  with  minimum  loss  of  condition. 
(6)  Handy  and  quick  in  obeying  the  correct  aids. 

(c)  Steady,  both  in  and  out  of  ranks. 

(d)  Capable  of  being  ridden  with  one  hand  at  any  pace  either 

in  the  company  of  other  horses  or  alone. 

(e)  Active  on  his  legs  and  a  good  jumper  over  all  kinds  o( 

obstacles. 
(/)'  Unafraid  of  entering  deep  water  or  of  swimming, 
(g)  Accustomed  to  arms. 


68  PKEBAKATORY  EXEKCISES. 

Preparatory  Exercises. 

Stand  to  horse. 

To  lead  out. 

The  stirrup. 

To  mount  and  dismount. 

To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  to  separate  them. 

Position  of  the  trooper  mounted. 

Suppling  exercises. 

To  vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground. 

Posting. 

To  rest. 

To  dismiss  the  squad. 

GENERAL   RULES. 

153.  For  the  prepai-atory  exercises  the  horses  are  saddled  and 
equipped  with  the  snaffle  bit  only,  saddles  stripped.  Spurs  are 
not  worn . 

These  exercises  embrace  all  that  is  necessary  to  give  the  recruit 
confidence,  to  supple  him,  to  give  him  steadiness  in  the  saddle, 
and  to  prepare  him  to  benefit  by  instruction  in  the  first  principles 
of  equitation. 

The  recruits  are  disposed  on  the  track  behind  a  leader,  or 
mounted  upon  well-broken  horses  held  on  the  longe,  or  each  recruit 
is  accompanied  by  an  old  trooper,  who  holds  the  horse  of  the 
recruit  by  a  strap  buckled  to  the  snaffle. 

The  instructor  determines  the  order  in  which  the  various  exer- 
cises are  to  be  employed,  according  to  the  aptitudes  and  defects 
of  the  recruits  under  his  charge.  He  must  keep  in  mind  that 
these  various  exercises  are  for  the  pui*pose  of  teaching  the  trooper 
his  correct  position  on  horseback  at  the  different  gaits,  and  of  pre- 
paring him  to  acquire  independence  in  the  use  of  the  aids,  instruc- 
tion in  which  will  be  given  in  subsequent  lessons. 

These  exercises  are  conducted  at  fii'st  in  a  riding  school  or  on  an 
inclosed  course  out  of  doors. 

The  troopers  lead  their  horses  to  the  school  by  hand  and  return 
them  to  the  stable  in  the  same  manner. 

When  they  have  received  sufficient  instruction  they  go  and 
return  mounted. 

In  order  to  inspii*e  confidence  in  the  troopers  and  to  enable 
them  as  soon  as  possible  to  remain  long  on  horseback  without 
weariness,  they  should  be  permitted  to  use  the  stirrups  in  the  first 


PREPARATORY  ^EXERCISES.  69 

lessons.  They  are  taught  to  tuck  them  up  (first  at  a  walk  and  then 
at  the  faster  gaits)  only  after  they  have  become  accustomed  to  the 
movement  of  the  horse. 

The  instructor  mounts  the  recruits  outside  the  riding  school  or 
inclosure  as  soon  as  their  progress  warrants  it.  Each  of  the  horses 
may  be,  at  first,  held  in  check  by  an  old  trooper  as  previously 
indicated . 

STAND  TO   HORSE. 

164.  Each  trooper  places  himself,  facing  to  the  front,  on  the 
near  side  of  the  horse,  eyes  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  horse's 
head,  so  that  he  can  see  along  the  front,  and  takes  the  position  of 
attention,  except  that  the  right  hand,  nails  down,  grasps  the  reins, 
the  forefinger  separating  them,  about  6  inches  from  the  bit. 

TO   LEAD   OUT. 

165.  The  troopers  standing  to  horse,  to  leave  the  stable  or  picket 
line,  the  instructor  commands:  LEAD  OUT. 

Each  trooper,  holding  his  hand  well  up  and  firm,  leads  his  hoi-se, 
without  looking  at  him,  to  the  place  designated  by  the  instructor. 

If  the  horse  shows  a  ciisj)Osition  to  rush  or  to  resist  being  led,  the 
trooper  takes  the  snaffle  reins  from  the  horse's  neck,  seizes  the  end 
of  the  reins  in  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right  hand  holding  the 
reins  near  the  bit  leads  the  horse  as  before.  When  leading 
through  a  low  or  narrow  doorway,  the  horse  should  be  quieted  by 
the  voice  or  caresses  and  not  allowed  to  pass  through  hurriedly. 
To  prevent  the  horse  from  rushing  through  a  narrow  doorway  the 
instructor  may  direct  the  trooper  to  face  toward  the  horse,  holding 
one  rein  in  each  hand  close  to  the  bit,  and  lead  him  by  stepping 
backward;  after  passing  the  doorway  the  trooper  leads  the  horse 
as  before. 

156.  Upon  entering  the  riding  school  or  inclosure  the  instructor 
disposes  thetroopei-s  upon  the  middle  line  at  intervals  of  one  horse- 
length,  the  troopers  at  stand  to  horse  and  the  horses  correctly 
disposed  and  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  troopers. 

A  horse  is  correctly  disposed  when  he  stands  squarely  on  all  four 
feet,  having  his  head,  neck,  and  body  in  line. 


60  TO  MOUNT  AND  DISMOUNT. 

STIRRUPS. 

1 57.  The  stirrups  are  properly  adjusted  when,  the  trooper  being 
properly  seated  and  the  legs  falling  naturally,  the  tread  of  the 
stirrup  is  about  one  inch  and  a  half  above  top.  of  the  heel  of  the 
shoe. 

The  stirrupa  should  bear  only  the  weight  of  the  leg;  about  one- 
third  of  the  foot  should  be  inserted  in  the  stirrup,  so  that  the  balJ 
of  the  foot  rests  on  the  tread,  the  heel  lower  than  the  toe. 

To  cause  the  flat  of  the  stirrup  strap  to  rest  against  the  leg  the  toe 
is  inserted  in  the  stirrup  with  the  frcmt  branch  on  the  outside. 

Placing  too  much  weight  on  the  stirrui)  disturb.^  the  seat  and 
contracts  the  leg,  hindering  its  freedom  of  action. 

If  the  toe  is  not  inserted  far  enough  the  trooper  risks  losing  hi? 
stirrup;  if  inserted  too  far  suppleness  is  diminished. 

The  heel  is  carried  naturally  lower  than  the  toe  if  the  ankle  joint 
is  not  rigid. 

For  the  extended-gallop,  in  the  charge,  for  the  use  of  weapons, 
and  for  leaping  obstacles  the  foot  is  inseited  full}^  in  the  stirrup. 

168.  The  instructor  exercises  the  troopers  in  casting  off  and 
resuming  the  stirrups,  at  first  at  a  walk  and  later  at  the  faster  gaits. 

He  teaches  them  during  the  rests  while  on  foot  to  adjust  the 
stirrups  by  comparing  the  length  of  the  strap  with  that  of  his  arm. 

The  instructor  frequently  exercises  the  troopers  in  riding  without 
stirrups,  especially  at  the  gallop  and  in  leaping  obstacles. 

TO   MOUNT  AND   DISMOUNT. 

169.  Being  at  stand  to  horse,  at  the  command  MOUNT,  face 
to  the  right,  take  a  step  to  the  right  to  be  opposite  the  shoulder  of  the 
horse;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  end  of  the  reins  in  the  right  hand 
and  pull  them  taut  enough  to  give  a  gentle,  even  bearing  on  the 
horse's  mouth;  cross  the  reins  flat  on  the  crest  and  grasp  them  with 
the  left  hand,  which  also  holds  a  lock  of  the  mane.  Place  the  left 
foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  necessary,  and 
bring  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle. 

Place  the  right  hand  upon  the  cantle,  rise  by  an  effort  of  the 
right  leg  aided  by  the  arms,  the  left  knee  bent  and  pressed  against 
the  saddle,  the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  slightly  forward  to 
prevent  the  saddle  from  turning;  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side 
of  the  left.  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  pommel,  pass  the  right 
leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without  touching  it,  and  sit  do\vn 


THE  REINS.  61 

lightly  in  the  saddle.  Put  the  right  foot  in  the  atirrup,  assirttod  by 
the  right  hand,  if  necessary;  take  a  rein  in  each  hand,  the  rein 
coming  into  the  hand  under  the  little  finger  and  passing  out  over 
the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger,  the  thumbs  closed  on  the  reins, 
the  bight  of  the  reins  falling  to  the  right.  The  reins  should  be  so 
held  that  the  trooper  feels  lightly  the  horse's  mouth;  the  forearms 
horizontal,  wrists  straight,  elbows  to  the  rear  but  not  held  against 
the  sides;  hands  about  9  inches  apart,  backs  outward. 

The  instructor  takes  care  that  the  recruit  in  adjusting  the  reins 
provokes  no  movement  and  deranges  in  no  manner  the  position  of 
the  horse's  head. 

The  instructor  cautions  the  trooper  to  avoid  touching  the  horse 
with  the  left  toe  in  mounting;  this  fault  begets  nearly  all  the 
resistance  of  horses  to  standing  quietly  while  being  mounted. 

160.  At  the  command  DISMOUNT,  pass  the  right  rein  into 
the  left  hand  and  grasp  with  this  hand  a  lock  of  the  mane ;  remove 
the  right  foot  from  the  stirrup  and  ]:)lace  the  right  hand  on  the 
pommel.  Rise  upon  the  left  stirrup,  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent, 
over  the  croup  without  touching  the  horse  and  bring  the  right  foot 
by  the  side  of  the  left  (making  a  plight  pause  when  the  rifle  is 
carried),  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle,  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  inclined  slightly  forward.  Descend  lightly  to  the  ground 
and  take  the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 

The  troopers  are  also  trained  to  mount  and  dismount  on  the  off 
side. 

TO   TAKE    THE    REINS   IN    ONE    HAND   AND   TO    SEPARATE    THEM. 

161.  At  the  command:  IN    LEFT  HAND  TAKE  REINS, 

place  the  left  hand  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  pass  the  right 
rein  into  the  left  hand,  separating  it  from  the  left  rein  by  the  little 
finger:  let  the  right  hand  fall  by  the  side. 

162.  At  the  command:  IN  BOTH  HANDS  TAKE  REINS, 
grasp  the  right  rein  with  the  right  hand  and  replace  the  hands 
9  inches  apart. 

The  reins  are  taken  in  the  right  hand  and  again  separated  in  a 
similar  manner. 

163.  To  adjust  the  reins  the  trooper  brings  the  wrists  together 
and  grasps  with  one  hand,  above  and  near  the  opposite  thumb, 
the  rein  that  he  desires  to  shorten. 


62  POSITION  OF  THE  TROOPER. 

164.  The  instructor  causes  the  reins  to  be  dropped  and  retaken 
by  the  commands  DROP  REINS  and  RETAKE  REINS. 

At  the  first  command  the  trooper  drops  the  reins  behind  the 
pommel  and  lets  the  hands  fall  by  the  side. 

The  reins  are  dropped  as  an  exceptional  measure  and  always 
with  precaution  against  accident. 

POSITION    OF   THE   TROOPER,    MOUNTED. 

165.  The  position  described  below  should  be  considered  a 
standard  toward  which  all  troopers  should  gradually  approximate. 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  the  saddle  and  as  far  forward 
as  possible. 

The  thighs  turned  without  constraint  upon  their  flat  side,  clasp- 
ing the  horse  evenly  and  stretched  only  by  their  own  weight  aiid 
that  of  the  lower  legs. 

The  knees  bent  and  flexible. 

The  lower  legs  falling  naturally,  the  calves  in  contact  with  the 
horse  without  pressure;  the  toes  dropping  naturally  when  the 
trooper  is  without  stirrups. 

The  back  supple  and  never  hollowed. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  easy,  free,  and  erect. 

The  shoulders  thrown  back  evenly. 

The  arms  free,  the  elbows  falling  naturally. 

The  head  erect  without  stiffness. 

Eyes  alert  and  sweeping  the  horizon. 

The  reins  held  as  heretofore  described. 

This  position  may  be  modified  by  the  instructor  to  suit  vary- 
ing conditions  and  unusual  conformations. 

166.  The  body  and  the  lower  legs  are  movable  and  should  be 
under  the  control  of  the  trooper,  either  acting  intermittently  as 
aids  for  guiding  the  horse  or  as  a  means  of  combatting  his  resist- 
ance, or  continuously  as  a  means  of  binding  him  to  the  horse  while 
following  his  movements. 

The  thigh,  on  the  other  hand,  should  remain  fixed  immovably 
to  the  saddle  except  while  posting  at  the  trot.  This  fixity  should  be 
obtained,  not  by  the  pressure  of  the  knees,  but  by  the  clinging  of 
the  buttocks,  which  is  secured  by  the  suppleness  of  the  loins  and 
the  relaxation  of  the  thighs. 

If  the  buttocks  are  too  far  back  the  trooper  is  unable  to  con- 
form to  the  moveraentfi  of  the  horse  and  carries  f forward  the  upper 


SUPPLING  EXERCISES.  63 

part  of  the  body.  This  defect  is  remedied  by  sitting  well  for- 
ward in  the  dip  of  the  saddle. 

If  the  thigh  is  too  nearly  horizontal  the  trooper  is  doubled  up 
and  his  power  of  action  diminished;  if  the  thigh  is  too  nearly  ver- 
tical the  trooper  is  on  the  crotch  and  lacks  ease. 

To  sum  up:  The  trooper  should  take  a  sittmg  position  with  the 
thighs  inclined  downward. 

The  various  defects  of  position  are  overcome  by  suitable  suppling 
exercises. 

SUPPLING   EXERCISES. 

167.  Before  a  recruit  is  allowed  to  mount  a  horse  he  should 
receive  instruction  on  a  dummy  horse  with  a  view  to— 

(a)  Strengthening  the  muscles  used  in  riding. 

(b)  Giving  him  the  correct  seat. 

(c)  Giving  him  balance  and  confidence  in  his  ability  to  maintain 
his  seat. 

(d)  Accustoming  him  to  keep  the  thighs  constantly  pressed 
against  the  horse. 

(e)  Leading  him  to  acquire  independence  in  the  use  of  the  aids. 

168.  These  exercises  should  be  given  on  the  horse  after  the 
recruit  has  acquired  a  fair  degree  of  confidence  in  his  seat.  They 
serve  to  supple  the  loins  and  assure  independence  of  action  for 
the  different  parts  of  the  body. 

The  instructor  is  especially  careful  that  the  movement  of  one 
part  of  the  body  does  not  react  on  any  other  part;  for  example,  that 
an  exercise  of  the  right  arm  does  not  disturb  the  left  arm  nor  the 
position  of  loins  or  legs. 

169.  The  exercises  herein  indicated  are  recommended  as  the 
most  useful,  but  they  are  not  the  only  ones  in  which  the  troopers 
may  be  exercised. 

Instructors  may  add  other  suitable  exercises  for  the  purpose  of 
varying  the  work  and  adding  to  its  interest. 

Any  movement  is  proper  which  engages  the  trooper's  attention 
and  leads  him  to  forget  that  he  is  on  horseback  and  thereby  brings 
about  relaxation. 

The  end  desired  is  attained  by  the  frequency  and  variety  of  the 
exercises;  the  instructor  must  carefully  avoid  prolonging  a  move- 
ment to  weariness,  which  inevitably  brings  on  rigidity. 

He  must  likewise  avoid  any  movement  that  would  result  in 
lifting  the  buttocks  from  the  saddle  or  in  sinking  the  loins  and 
bollowing  the  back. 


64  SUPPLING  EXEEGISES. 

170.  To  execute  the  exercises,  a  movement  is  announced  and 
the  command  COMMENCE  is  given.  The  movement  is  then 
continued  and  repeated  until  the  command  HALT. 

The  troopers  take  the  reins  in  one  or  both  hands,  drop  and 
retake  them,  as  necessary,  without  command. 

Flexion  of  the  loins. 

171.  At  the  command:  BEND  TO  THE  RIGHT,  the  trooper, 
without  deranging  the  position  of  his  hands,  executes  the  movement 
prescribed  at  this  command  in  the  school  of  the  trooper,  dis- 
mounted. 

At  the  command:  STROKE  YOUR  HORSE  ON  THE 
RIGHT  FLANK,  sit  down  in  the  saddle  by  pushing  the  buttocks 
forward,  turn  the  body  at  the  hips,  and  leaning  backward  but  not 
to  the  side,  place  the  right  hand  as  low  as  possible  on  the  horse's 
flank. 

Rotation  of  the  loins. 

172.  At  the  command:  STROKE  YOUR  HORSE  ON  THE 
LEFT  HAUNCH  WITH  THE  RIGHT  HAND,  turn  in  the 
saddle  without  deranging  the  seat  or  the  position  of  the  thighs  and 
stroke  the  horse  on  the  left  haunch  with  the  right  hand,  taking 
care  to  avoid  opening  out  the  left  elbow  or  pulling  on  the  reins. 

Rotation  of  the  arm. 

173.  With  the  arm  extended  describe  slowly,  and  with  uniform 
movement,  a  circle  from  below  upward  and  from  front  to  rear, 
keeping  the  head  erect  and  high  while  the  arm  is  descending. 

Rotation  of  the  thigh. 

174.  Remove  the  knee  from  the  saddle  and  carry  it  back, 
straightening  the  leg;  turn  the  knee  in  as  much  as  possible  and 
then  replace  the  thigh  flat  upon  the  saddle. 

Raising  the  thighs. 

176.  Raise  the  knees  only  so  much  as  is  necessary  to  detach  the 
thighs  and  lower  legs  from  the  saddle,  and  incline  the  upper  part 
of  the  body  slightly  backward.  If  the  trooper  is  sitting  too  far 
back  in  the  saddle  the  instructor  directs  hira  to  draw  himself  for- 
ward by  grasping  the  pommel. 


SUPPLING  EXERCISES.  65 

This  position  compels  the  trooper  to  supple  his  body  in  order  to 
keep  his  seat. 

When  his  equilibrium  is  well  established,  the  trooper  gently 
replaces  his  thighs  upon  the  saddle,  being  careful  to  keep  his  loins 
in  the  same  position  as  during  the  movement. 

This  exercise  fixes  the  loins  in  place,  and  puts  them  in  proper 
condition  to  maintain  the  balanced  seat.  It  is  executed  only  at 
a  walk  or  at  a  slow  trot. 

Flexion  of  the  leg. 

176.  Bend  the  leg  slowly  without  deranging  the  position  of  the 
knee  or  that  of  the  body. 

Flexion  of  the  ankle. 

177.  Trace  with  the  designated  foot,  by  a  slow  and  uniform 
movement,  a  circle  from  below  upward  and  from  outward  inwardly 
without  disturbing  the  position  of  the  leg. 

SUPPLING   EXERCISES    WITH  THE   HORSE   IN   MOTION. 

178.  The  exercises  which  have  been  taught  at  the  halt  are 
repeated  at  the  different  gaits,  except  as  indicated. 

To  put  the  squad  in  march  the  instructor  designates  a  trooper 
to  act  as  leader  and  causes  him  to  take  the  track;  he  then  causes 
the  recruits  to  take  their  places  in  column  of  files  behind  the 
leader. 

The  instructor  limits  his  explanations  to  the  essential  principles 
for  putting  the  horse  in  motion  and  stopping  him. 

The  troopers  are  restricted  to  letting  tteir  horses  follow  those  in 
front. 

179.  At  first  the  pace  of  the  trot  should  be  moderate.  It  may 
be  increased  to  normal  when  the  troopers  have  acquired  sufficient 
steadiness  of  seat  to  maintain  a  correct  position  at  that  gait. 

180.  As  soon  as  the  troopers  have  acquired  a  fair  security  of  seat 
at  the  trot  and  have  grown  accustomed  to  a  fast  gait,  the  instructor 
begins  to  train  them  at  the  gallop.  The  first  lessons  are  given  on 
a  large  circle  so  that  the  horses  will  have  less  tendency  to  pull. 
The  troopers  retain  their  stirrups  until  they  have  gained  con- 
fidence. The  instructor  causes  them  to  abandon  the  stirrups 
when  he  believes  that  sufficient  progress  has  been  made, 

34395°— 14— 5 


66  VAULTING. 

The  gallop  should  be  employed  very  early  in  the  iiistruetioii ; 

it  is  the  most  favorable  gait  for  suppling  the  loins. 

181.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  causes  the  trooper  to  take  the 
reins,  he  teaches  him  to  keep  touch  with  the  mouth  of  the  horse, 
while  lea\dng  the  horse  the  free  use  of  his  neck,  by  following  its 
movements  with  his  hands. 

The  c-adence  at  the  increased  gaits  is  easy  to  follow  with  the 
reins  lightly  held.  In  a  short  time  the  man  follows  instinctively 
the  movement  of  the  neck. 

Constant  effort  should  be  made  to  overcome  stiffness  of  the  arms 
and  shoulders,  which  is  the  usual  cause  of  a  heavy  hand. 

TO    VAULT   INTO    THE    SADDLE   AND   TO    THE    GROUND. 

182.  At  the  command:  VAULT  INTO  THE  SADDLE,  face 
to  the  right,  let  go  the  reins  with  the  right  hand,  seize  the  left 
rein  with  the  left  hand,  nails  down,  take  a  step  to  the  right  so  as 
to  be  opposite  the  horse's  shoulder;  grasp  the  reins  and  a  lock  of 
the  mane  as  directed  for  mounting  with  stirrups;  place  the  right 
hand  upon  the  pommel;  spring  upward  and  forward,  bearing  the 
weight  upon  the  wrists;  remain  a  moment  in  this  position,  then 
throw  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without  touching 
it  and  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle.     Take  a  rein  in  each  hand. 

TO    VAULT  TO    THE    GROUND. 

183.  At  the  command:  VAULT  TO  THE  GROUND,  pass 
the  crossed  reins  into  the  left  hand,  as  has  been  explained  for 
mounting  with  stirrups,  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  wath  the  left 
hand  and  place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel.  Rise  upon  the 
wrists;  pass  the  right  leg,  bent,  over  the  croup  without  touching 
it,  carry  it  to  the  side  of  the  left;  remain  a  moment  in  this  position 
and  come  lightly  to  the  ground,  the  heels  joined,  the  knees  bent. 
Take  the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 

184.  To  vault  to  the  ground  and  into  the  saddle  without  pause 
the  instructor  commands:  VAULT  TO  THE  GROUND  AND 
INTO  THE  SADDLE. 

The  troopers  are  frequently  exercised  in  vaulting  into  the 
saddle  and  to  the  ground,  and  to  the  ground  and  into  the  saddle 
from  both  sides. 

During  the  early  lessons  these  movements  are  to  be  executed 
only  at  the  halt. 


Costing.  m 

When  the  instruction  is  well  advanced  the  recruits  will  be 
trained  to  vault  into  the  saddle  and  to  the  ground  while  the  horse 
is  in  motion.  During  the  exercises  at  the  trot  and  gallop  the 
trooper  when  dismounted  keeps  pace  with  the  horse  at  the  shoulder, 
by  means  of  the  galloping  step,  which  he  executes  (keeping  one 
hand  on  the  withers)  by  a  succession  of  leaps,  rising  and  alighting 
with  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  forehand  of  the  horse,  keeping  the 
left  or  right  foot  in  advance,  according  as  he  is  on  the  left  or  right 
side  of  the  horse,  and  supporting  his  weight  on  the  balls  of  the 
feet.  Frequent  short  rests  should  be  given  in  order  not  to  strain 
or  unduly  fatigue  men  who  are  not  accustomed  to  the  exercises. 

The  vault  into  the  saddle  while  marching  is  executed  as  pre- 
scribed from  the  halt  except  that  the  trooper  is  at  the  galloping 
step;  that  he  springs  forward  as  he  rises,  and  that  as  he  drops 
into  his  seat  he  catches  against  the  flank  with  his  leg  to  avoid 
passing  over  the  horse. 

Vaulting  to  the  ground  is  executed  as  prescribed  from  the  halt, 
except  that  when  the  legs  are  joined  the  trooper  presses  the  left 
leg  against  the  side  of  the  horse  to  push  his  body  clear,  and  alights 
on  the  ground  faced  to  the  front  and  takes  the  galloping  step. 

POSTING. 

186.  Posting  is  habitually  employed  when  the  troopers  have 
stirrups  and  understand  their  use. 

It  is  executed  as  follows:  The  horse  moving  at  a  trot,  the  trooper 
inclines  the  upper  part  of  his  body  forward,  then  supporting  hmi- 
self  on  the  stirrups  while  maintaining  the  clinging  of  his  knees, 
he  rises  under  the  impulsion  of  the  horse,  maintains  his  position 
detached  from  the  saddle  while  the  succeeding  impulse  is  pro- 
duced, again  sits  down  in  the  saddle,  and  continues  in  this  w^ay, 
always  avoiding  every  other  impulse. 

At  the  beginning  the  mechanism  of  posting  is  made  easier  to  the 
trooper  by  causing  him  to  stroke  the  horse's  neck  or  to  grasp  a  lock 
of  the  mane  with  either  hand,  thus  determining  the  forward  inclina- 
tion of  the  body. 

Its  proper  execution  requires  that  the  seat  shall  be  raised  mod- 
erately, that  contact  with  the  saddle  shall  be  resumed  gently  and 
without  shock,  that  the  full  support  of  the  stirrup  is  obtained,  while 
keeping  the  lower  leg  steady,  that  the  ankle  joint  shall  be  supple, 
and  that  the  heel  shall  be  kept  lower  than  the  toe. 


TO  DISMISS. 


186.  Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  rest  is  executed  as 
in  the  school  of  the  trooper,  dismounted,  except  that  Hie  troopers 
hold  the  reins  and  keep  their  horses  in  place. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  halt,  at  the  command:  REST,  or  being 
in  march,  at  the  command:  ROUTE  ORDER,  the  men  are  per- 
mitted to  turn  their  heads,  to  talk,  and  to  make  slight  changes  of 
position,  but  not  to  lounge  on  their  horses. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  at  ease  is  executed  as 
in  the  school  of  the  trooper,  dismounted. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  command:  AT  EASE,  the  men  are 
permitted  to  turn  their  heads  or  to  make  slight  changes  of  position, 
but  preserve  silence. 

To  resume  the  attention:  ATTENTION. 

Each  trooper  if  dismounted  takes  the  position  of  stand  to  horse; 
if  mounted,  he  takes  the  position  of  the  trooper  mounted. 

TO   DISMISS. 

187.  The  troopers  bein<^  dismounted,  in  line:  1.  By  the  right 
(left,  or  right  and  left)^2.  FALL  OUT. 

The  trooper  on  the  right  leads  his  horse  1  yard  to  the  front  and 
then  directly  to  the  stable  or  picket  line.  .Each  of  the  other 
troopers  executes  in  succession  the  same  movement,  so  as  to  follow 
the  horse  next  on  the  right,  at  a  distance  of  1  yard. 

Being  in  column  of  files,  half-squads,  or  squads,  at  the  command : 
FALL  OUT,  the  leading  trooper  or  the  trooper  on  the  right  of 
each  unit  leads  out  as  prescribed  and  is  followed  by  the  other 
troopers  in  turn.  The  troopers  remove,  clean,  and  put  the  equip- 
ments in  place,  and  care  for  and  secure  their  horses  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  instructor. 

The  instructor,  having  satisfied  himself  by  inspection  that  the 
horses  and  equipments  are  properly  cared  for,  and  that  the  pre- 
cautions required  on  their  return  from  exercise  have  been  observed, 
orders  the  men  to  fall  in,  marches  them  to  the  squadron  parade, 
and  dismisses  them  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  trooper, 
dismoimted. 

188.  STAND  TO  HEEL:  Each  man  stands  at  attention,  1 
yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  heel  post.  At  the  picket  line  he 
stands  at  attention,*  1  yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  horse. 


WORK  ON  THE  S^NAFFLE.  60 

•    Work  on  the  Snaffle. 

The  legs  and  reins. 

The  walk. 

To  gather  the  horse. 

To  move  forward  and  to  halt. 

To  turn  to  the  right  or  left.  ^ 

To  march  to  the  right  or  left. 

Circling. 

The  Trot. 

The  Gallop. 

Change  of  gaits. 

The  About. 

Change  of  hand. 

Circling  individually. 

Increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait. 

To  back  and  halt. 

To  leave  the  ranks. 

Jumping  obstacles. 

Exercises  on  varied  ground. 

GENERAL    PRINCIPLES. 

189.  When  tlie  troopers  have  become  familiar  with  the  move- 
ments of  the  horse  at  each  gait  and  have  begun  to  find  and  keep  a 
seat  in  the  saddle,  the  instructor  advances  them  to  work  on  the 
snaffle  for  the  purpose  of  teaching  them  the  use  of  the  aids,  increas- 
ing their  confidence  and  suppleness,  and  confirming  them  in  their 
seats. 

The  exercises  indicated  for  work  on  the  snaffle  depend  for  their 
effect  upon  very  simple  actions,  the  only  ones  the  recruits  need  be 
taught. 

It  is  important  that  in  these  exercises  the  recruits  ride  only  docile 
1  and  well-trained  horses. 

The  instructor  returns  frequently  to  the  suppling  exercises,  and 
causes  each  trooper  to  execute  during  rests  the  movements  that  he 
has  indicated  to  him  as  especially  adapted  to  correct  his  faults  of 
position. 

The  horses  are  ec[uipped  with  the  snaffle  bit  and  bare  saddles  and 
the  troopers  are  without  spurs  at  first. 

The  exercises  are  conducted  in  the  riding  school  or  outside  in  a 
rectangle,  the  comers  of  which  are  marked  by  elevated  and  con- 


^0  WORK  ON  THE  SNAFFLE. 

spicuous  objects.  These  rectangles  are  of  suflSicient  dimensions 
to  enable  the  troopers  to  exercise  with  freedom  while  remaining 
under  the  eye  of  the  instructor,  and  within  reach  of  his  voice. 
The  instructor  changes  the  ground  as  soon  as  the  tracks  are  worn 
to  the  extent  that  the  horses  follow  them  mechanically.  He 
avoids  placing  his  rectangle  parallel  to  adjacent  rectangles*  roads, 
paths,  or  fences,  so  that,  from  the  first,  the  trooper  is  compelled 
to  direct  his  horse. 

190.  Work  on  the  snaffle  permits  much  practice  at  will  (indi- 
vidual exercises)  in  which  the  troopers  are  absolutely  independent 
of  each  other,  the  only  obligation  being  to  maintain  the  gait  and  to 
march  to  the  proper  hand  when  on  the  track.  The  rectangle  serves 
only  to  indicate  directions;  each  trooper  practices  as  if  he  were 
alone  without  regard  to  distance  or  alignment.  The  movements 
are  executed  anywhere  within  the  rectangle. 

The  commands  do  not  involve  immediate  compliance.  The 
troopers  conform  to  them  when  their  place  on  the  track  and  the 
state  of  preparation  of  their  horses  put  them  in  proper  position  to 
execute  steadily  the  movement  directed.  Each  should  choose  his 
ground  so  as  to  avoid  interfering  with  his  neighbors. 

When  troopers  meet  each  keeps  to  the  right. 

191.  To  reunite  the  troopers  in  the  riding  squad  the  instructor 
commands:  CLOSE  ON  (such)  TROOPER.  The  designated 
trooper  takes  the  track  and  continues  at  the  gait  at  which  he  was 
riding,  or  at  that  ordered.  The  others  move  by  the  shortest  line 
and  place  themselves  on  the  track  in  single  file  at  a  distance  of  4 
feet  from  head  to  croup  and  move  at  the  gait  of  the  leading  trooper. 

192.  To  make  an  explanation  or  to  give  instruction  to  all  the 
troopers  at  the  same  time  the  instructor  commands:  COME  TO 
ME.  The  troopers  move  at  the  gait  at  which  they  were  riding 
or  at  that  designated  and  by  the  shortest  line  so  as  to  group  them- 
selves about  the  instructor. 

193.  The  troopers  being  grouped  about  the  instructor,  or  exer- 
cising at  will,  are  placed  on  the  track  by  the  command:  TAKE 
THE  TRACK  TO  THE  RIGHT. 

194.  The  troopers  are  usually  marched  to  and  from  the  riding 
school  in  column  of  half -squads  or  squads.  The  Instructor  avails 
himself  of  the  opportunity  to  instruct  them  In  the  movements 
indicated  in  the  school  of  the  platoon. 


THE  LEGS  AND  REINS.  Tl 

THE  LEGS  AND   REINS. 

196.  The  means  at  the  disposal  of  the  trooper  for  controlling 
the  FAOvements  and  gaits  of  the  horse  are  called  the  aids.  The 
most  essential  are  the  legs  and  reins. 

196.  The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  to  increase  his 
pace  or  gait,  and  to  engage  the  hindquarters  or  move  them  laterally. 
The  legs  act  by  the  pressure  of  the  calves.  If  pressure  alone  is 
insufficient  the  trooper  increases  the  action  by  blows  with  his 
calves. 

The  spur  is  used  when  necessary  to  add  to  the  power  of  the  leg 
action.  It  is  essential  to  obtain  from  the  horse  perfect  obedience 
to  the  action  of  the  legs.  He  should  respond  to  the  simultaneous 
action  of  both  legs  by  engaging  his  hindquarters  and  moving  for- 
ward ;  to  the  predominant  action  of  one  leg  by  moving  his  haunches 
to  the  opposite  side.  The  action  of  the  leg  should  cease  as  soon  as 
obedience  is  obtained. 

197.  The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  to  move,  to  slacken 
or  increase  his  gait,  or  to  change  direction. 

A  slight  bearing  of  the  bit  on  the  mouth  of  the  horse  is  called 
contact;  this  should  be  constant. 

The  reins  are  held  in  the  full  hand,  the  thumb  pressing  them 
lightly  upon  the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger.  By  means  of  closing 
and  relaxing  the  fingers  and  flexing  the  wrist,  arm,  and  shoulder, 
the  trooper,  while  maintaining  contact  and  keeping  the  reins  taut, 
follows  easily  the  movements  of  the  head  of  the  horse  without 
anticipating  or  interfering  with  these  movements.  The  hand  is 
then  said  to  be  passive.  It  is  kept  so  as  long  as  the  trooper  is  not 
required  to  change  the  gait  or  direction. 

198.  In  gathering  the  horse  or  in  increasing  or  diminishing  the 
gait,  the  trooper  closes  his  fingers  upon  the  reins  without  raising 
the  hands  and  exercises  an  action  from  front  to  rear. 

This  action  should  not  be  continuous;  the  trooper  acts  by  alter- 
nately contracting  and  relaxing  the  fingers,  the  hands  remaining 
low  and  preserving  contact  in  the  intervals  between  the  actions. 
This  is  known  as  the  effect  of  the  direct  rein. 

199.  The  action  of  the  hand  in  changing  direction  operates  in 
two  ways: 

First.  When  the  trooper  opens  the  right  rein,  the  head  and  neck 
are  drawn  toward  the  right  and  the  horse  turns  his  head  to  that 
side.    This  use  of  the  rein  is  known  as  the  open  rein. 


.72  GATHERING  THE  HOESE. 

The  hand  should  be  carried  freely  to  the  right,  the  wrist  remain- 
ing in  prolongation  of  the  forearm,  without  drawing  the  rein  to  the 
rear. 

Second.  When  the  trooper  bears  the  left  rein  against  the  neck,  the 
head  may  be  bent  to  the  left,  but  the  neck  is  pressed  to  the  right 
and  the  horse  turns  in  that  direction.  This  is  known  as  the  action 
of  the  bearing  rein. 

This  is  the  normal  use  of  the  reins  in  changing  direction,  since  the 
trooper  generally  has  but  one  hand  available  for  directing  his 
horse. 

The  bearing  rein  should  act  without  traction  from  front  to  rear 
and  intermittently  like  the  direct  rein. 

200.  All  action  of  the  reins  should  diminish  in  intensity  when 
obedience  to  it  begins,  and  cease  entirely  as  soon  as  the  desired 
result  is  secured. 

201.  The  instructor,  in  teaching  troopers  to  avail  themselves 
of  their  legs  and  reins,  is  governed  by  the  preceding  considerations, 
and  from  the  first  watches  vigilantly  the  action  of  the  aids. 

The  hand  should  always  be  kept  low.  The  most  thoughtful 
care  should  be  exercised  in  the  combined  application  of  the  aids, 
80  that  they  may  not  be  opposed  to  each  other  in  their  action*  that 
is,  one  favoring  the  intended  movement,  the  other  opposing  it. 

During  work  on  the  snaffle  the  troopers  are  trained  in  riding  with 
one  hand. 

THE    WALK. 

202.  The  walk  is  a  gait  in  which  the  feet  are  lifted  in  succession 
and  put  down  in  the  order  of  their  lifting.  If  the  right  front  foot 
begins  the  gait  the  other  feet  are  lifted  in  the  following  order:  Left 
rear,  left  front,  right  rear. 

The  walk  should  be  free.  Its  speed  is  about  117  yards  per 
minute. 

TO    GATHER  THE   HORSE. 

203.  Before  the  horse  is  required  to  execute  any  movement  he 
should  be  given  a  preparatory  signal.  It  makes  no  difference  what 
the  movement  is  to  be,  the  signal  is  always  the  same.  Its  object 
is  to  attract  his  attention  and  to  prepare  him  for  a  movement.  This 
is  called  gathering  the  horse. 

Having  a  Light  pressure  of  the  bit  against  the  horse's  mouth  and 
a  Hght  feel  of  the  lower  leg  against  the  horse's  side,  in  order  to 
gather  him,  increase  the  pressure  of  the  lower  leg  against  the  side. 


TO  MOVE  PORWARD.  73 

heels  well  sho^ved  down,  and  slightly  increase  the  pressure  of  the 
bit  against  the  bars  by  squeezing  the  fingers  on  the  reins.  Increase 
these  two  pressures  until  the  elastic  movement  of  the  horse  under 
the  rider  indicates  that  he  has  observed  the  signal. 

If,  when  at  a  halt,  the  horse  backs,  or  when  marching  decreases 
the  gait,  the  fingers  have  been  contracted  too  much.  If,  when  at 
a  halt,  the  horse  moves  forward,  or  when  marching  he  increases 
the  pace  or  gait,  the  impulse  given  with  the  legs  has  not  been  met 
by  the  fingers. 

Each  force  should  exactly  balance  the  other,  and  the  horse,  held 
between  the  two,  should  seemingly  grow  into  an  elastic  body  under 
the  rider. 

TO   MOVE   FORWARD   AND   TO   HALT. 

204.  Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command:  Forward,  the  trooper 
gathers  his  horse.  At  the  command:  MARCH,  he  closes  his  legs, 
more  or  less  vigorously  according  to  the  sensitiveness  of  the  horse, 
until  the  horse  moves  forward  at  the  walk,  the  hand  remaining 
passive. 

205.  Being  at  the  walk,  at  the  command:  HALT,  sit  down  in 
the  saddle  and  gather  the  horse;  then  increase  the  pressure  of  the 
legs  and  carry  back  the  weight  of  the  body  by  curving  the  back 
outward  and  act  by  the  direct  rein  until  the  horse  stops. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  slackens  the  gait  ever  so  little,  relax  sligthly 
the  pressure  of  the  fingers  and  legs  to  reward  him  for  his  obedience. 
Then  reapply  and  again  relax  until  the  horse  has  completed  the 
movement  desired. 

The  men  must  be  impressed  with  the  fact  that  they  increase  the 
pressure  of  the  legs  in  order  to  cause  the  horse  to  bring  his  hind 
■feet  up  under  him  to  act  as  brakes  in  stopping  himself.  Also  that 
they  must  carry  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the  rear  to  help  hold 
these  brakes  in  place,  and  that  the  horse,  when  the  rider  closes 
his  legs,  steadies  him  with  the  reins,  and  carries  his  weight  to  the 
rear,  decreases  the  gait;  while,  if  the  rider  closes  his  legs  and 
slightly  carries  his  weight  forward,  he  increases  the  gait. 

Normally  all  the  tension  that  is  necessary  in  decreasing  the  gait 
is  obtained  by  contracting  the  fingers  on  the  reins  as  the  body 
moves  to  the  rear  and  the  hands  maintain  their  relative  position 
to  it.  If  this  is  not  sufficient,  turning  the  wrists  will  give  addi- 
tional pressure.  The  elbows  should  never  be  carried  toward  the 
rear.^  In  decreasing  the  gait  a  steady  pull  against  the  mouth  must  be 
particularly  avoided. 


74  MAECHINOS. 

BY  THE    RIGHT  FLANK. 

206.  1.  By  the  Right  Flank,  2.  MARCH.  Gather  the  horse; 
carry  both  hands  to  the  right  until  the  horse  has  turned  through  an 
arc  of  90°  and  then  replace  the  hands  and  move  straight  in  the 
new  direction.  During  the  movement  the  legs  maintain  impul- 
sion and  hold  the  horse's  body  so  that  it  follows  the  curve  on  which 
he  is  turning — that  is,  if  the  horse  carries  his  haunches  to  the  inside 
of  this  curve,  the  action  of  the  inside  leg  should  predominate;  if 
he  carries  his  haunches  to  the  outside  of  the  curve,  then  the  action 
of  the  outside  leg  should  predominate. 

When  the  trooper  holds  the  reins  in  both  hands  he  makes  use 
simultaneously  of  the  open  rein  and  the  hearing  rein.  With  the 
reins  in  one  hand  he  makes  use  of  the  hearing  rein  only. 

The  action  of  the  reins  in  turning  is  governed  by  the  principles 
explained  in  paragraph  199.  The  trooper  carries  the  hands  in  the 
direction  toward  which  he  wishes  to  turn  and  displaces  them  only 
to  the  extent  necessary. 

207.  The  ohlique  represents  a  half  turn  to  the  right  or  left. 

TO    MARCH   TO    THE    RIGHT   HAND. 

208.  The  trooper  is  said  to  march  to  the  right  or  left  hand 
according  to  whether  he  has  his  right  or  left  side  toward  the  interior 
of  the  riding  school. 

At  the  command:  MARCH  TO  THE  RIGHT  HAND,  the 
trooper  directs  his  horse  straight  toward  the  track,  and  arriving 
there  turns  toward  the  side  indicated. 

The  troopers  are  distributed  over  the  whole  circumference  of  the 
track.  They  endeavor  to  keep  their  horses  collected  and  moving 
straight  to  the  front,  and  to  preserve  a  free  and  even  gait. 

In  order  to  instruct  in  marching  upon  fixed  points,  distinctive 
marks  are  placed  on  the  walls  of  the  riding  hall  or  outside  the 
rectangle  to  serve  as  points  of  direction. 

The  instructor  observes  that  the  troopers  maintain  the  gait 
ordered  while  turning  at  the  corners  and  that  they  approach  the 
corners  closely  at  the  walk  and  trot;  he  permits  a  larger  radius  at 
the  gallop. 

209.  As  soon  as  the  troopers  understand  the  principles  of  con- 
trolling their  horses  the  instructor  frequently  causes  them  to  exer- 
cise at  will  in  the  interior  of  the  riding  hall  or  rectangle;  the  troop- 


THE  TBOT.  76 

ers  ride  at  the  gait  ordered,  remaining  inside  the  track  and  executing 
the  exercises  on  their  own  initiative. 

210.  The  instructor  also  exercises  the  troopers  in  riding  their 
horses  at  a  designated  gait  upon  a  distant  object.  This  exercise 
is  begun  as  soon  as  possible  and  is  continued  during  the  whole 
course  of  instruction  and  combined  progressively  with  the  jumping 
of  obstacles  and  the  use  of  arms. 

CIRCLING. 

211.  The  troopers  being  on  the  track,  at  the  command:  IN 
CmCLE,  the  leader,  followed  by  the  other  troopers,  rides  on  a 
circle  between  the  two  tracks. 

The  trooper  takes  care  to  incline  his  body  inward  in  the  same 
degree  as  the  body  of  the  horse,  without  advancing  or  drawing  to 
the  rear  his  outside  shoulder. 

At  the  command:  TAKE  THE  TRACK,  the  leader  takes  the 
track  to  the  hand  toward  which  he  is  marching  and  is  followed  by 
the  other  troopers. 

THE    TROT. 

212.  The  trot  is  a  gait  in  which  the  horse  springs  from  one 
diagonally  disposed  pair  of  feet  to  the  other;  between  the  beats  all 
the  feet  are  in  the  air.  The  rate  of  the  maneuvering  trot  is  8  miles 
per  hour  or  235  yards  per  minute.  For  purposes  of  individual 
instruction  the  rate  may  be  reduced  to  6  or  6 J  miles  per  hour  by 
the  command :  SLOW  TROT.  At  the  command :  TROT,  the  rate 
of  8  miles  per  hour  is  resumed . 

The  trot  alternating  with  the  walk  is  the  gait  best  adapted  for 
long  road  marches. 

\Vhen  trotting  without  stirrups  the  trooper  endeavors  to  reduce 
the  shock  by  suppling  his  back. 

THE    GALLOP. 

213.  The  gallop  is  the  most  rapid  of  the  gaits.  It  must  not  be 
used  unnecessarily  over  long  distances,  particularly  on  hard  roads 
and  when  the  sad.dle  is  packed.  However,  when  the  rapidity  of 
the  regulation  trot  is  not  sufficient,  the  trooper  out  of  ranks  should 
take  the  gallop  in  preference  to  increasing  the  speed  of  the  trot. 

214.  The  varieties  of  the  gallop  are: 

The  maneuvering  gallop,  which  is  at  the  rate  of  12  miles  per  hour, 
or  352  yards  per  minute. 


76  THE  GALLOP. 

-The  extended  gallop^  which  is  at  the  rate  of  16  miles  per  hour,  or 
469  yards  per  minute. 

The  school  gallop,  which  is  at  the  rate  of  about  8  miles  per  hour. 

The  horse  is  said  to  gallop  on  the  right  foot  when  the  right  front 
and  right  hind  foot  are  more  advanced  than  the  corresponding 
left  feet.  ,  ., 

When  the  feet  are  advanced  in  the  inverse  ordei'  the  horse  is  said 
to  gallop  on  the  left  foot. 

The  gallop  is  marked  by  three  beats  and  a  period  of  suspension. 

If  the  horse  be  galloping  on  the  right  foot,  the  fii'st  beat  is  marked 
by  the  left  hind  foot,  the  second  by  the  nearly  simultaneous  placing 
of  the  right  hind  and  left  for^  feet,  and  the  third  by  the  placing  of 
the  right  fore  foot. 

In  galloping  on  the  left  foot  the  beats  are,  right  hind,  left  hind, 
and  right  fore,  left  fore. 

A  horse  gallops  true  when  he  gallpps  on  the  right  foot  in  turning 
to  the  right  and  on  the  left  foot  in  turning  to  the  left. 

He  gallops /aZse  when  he  gallops  on  the  left  foot  in  turning  to  the 
right,  or  conversely. 

A  horse  is  disunited  when  he  gallops  lead  right  with  his  fore  feet 
and  lead  left  with  his  hind  feet  or  conversely. 

215.  The  gallop  should  be  begun  on  the  circle  because  the 
horses  thus  start  off  more  calmly  and  the  trooper  is  enabled  to  regu- 
late the  pace  by  describing  a  circle  of  greater  or  less  radius. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  breaks  into  the  gallop  the  trooper  moves  in 
cadence  with  his  horse.  The  back  and  legs  unite  in  the  rythm  of 
the  gait,  the  hands  accompany  gently  and  without  exaggeration 
the  movements  of  the  head  and  neck. 

During  the  gallop  the  command  at  ease  is  frequently  given. 
The  troopers  execute  the  suppling  exercises  which  have  been  indi- 
cated as  necessary  in  each  case;  they  abandon  themselves  com- 
pletely to  the  motion  of  the  horse  and  thus  acquire  ease  and  flexi- 
bility. Prolonged  periods  at  the  gallop  on  calm  and  free-moving 
horses  are  most  favorable  for  easily  obtaining  this  result. 

CHANGES   OF   GAIT. 

216.  To  pass  from  the  halt  or  the  walk  to  the  trot  or  the  gallop, 
the  means  prescribed  for  passing  from  the  halt  to  the  walk  are 
employed  and  continued  until  the  desired  gait  is  taken. 

To  pass  from  a  higher  to  a  lower  gait,  or  to  halt,  the  means  pre- 
scribed for  passing  from  the  walk  to  the  halt  are  employed  and 
continued  until  the  desired  gait  is  taken  or  the  horse  has  stopped. 


CHANGES  OF  GAIT.  77 

The  commands  are: 

1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH;  1.  GaUop,  2.  MARCH;  1.  Walk, 
2.  MARCH;  and  HALT. 

THE   ABOUT. 

217.  At  the  command :  1.  Troopers  right  about,  2.  MARCH, 
each  trooper  turns  his  horse  until  he  finds  himself  facing  in  the 
opposite  direction  and  moves  to  his  new  front. 

TO   CHANGE   HANDS. 

218.  At  the  command:  CHANGE  HANDS,  each  trooper  after 
having  passed  the  corner  and  marched  a  horse-length  on  the  long 
side  directs  himself  toward  the  diagonal  corner  so  as  to  take  the 
track  to  the  opposite  hand  and  at  about  two  horse-lengths  from 
the  corner.  Troopers  pass  those  going  in  an  opposite  direction  by 
keeping  to  the  right. 

CIRCLING   INDIVIDUALLY. 

219.  At  the  command:  TROOPERS  CIRCLE  TO  THE 
RIGHT,  each  trooper  describes,  in  accordance  with  the  principles 
explained  in  par.  206,  a  complete  circle  tangent  to  the  track,  and 
with  a  radius  less  than  half  the  length  of  the  short  side,  and  retakes 
the  track  at  the  point  where  he  quitted  it. 

The  trooper  moves  his  horse  on  the  circle  by  the  means  pre^rribed 
for  moving  by  tbe  flank. 

INCREA8TNCV  AND    DECREASING   THE    GAIP, 

220.  To  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  or  gait  the  trooper  epaploye 
the  means  prescribed  for  passing  from  the  halt  to  the  walk  or  from 
the  walk  to  the  halt  to  the  extent  necessary  to  obtairi  the  desired 
result. 

The  horse  in  increasing  the  pace  at  the  walk  increases  the  ampli- 
tude of  the  movement  of  his  head  and  neck  to  the  same  degree  as  he 
increases  the  length  of  his  step;  he  accelerates  the  movement  of  the 
head  as  he  increases  the  cadence  of  his  step. 

The  trooper  aids  these  movements  by  yielding  the  hand  and  giv- 
ing the  horse  greater  freedom  of  movement.  He  maintains  contact 
with  the  bit  so  that  he  can  exercise  a  gradual  restraining  influence 
with  the  direct  rein  when  he  feels  the  horse  is  about  to  spring  into 
the  trot. 


78  BACKING. 

To  decrease  the  pace  at  a  walk  the  trooper  makes  use  of  the  direct 
rein  and  legs  as  in  coming  to  the  halt.  The  step  is  shortened  and 
the  cadence  decreased. 

To  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  at  the  trot  the  same  means  are 
used.  The  exercises  in  increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait  afford 
excellent  practice  for  the  trooper  in  the  use  of  the  aids  and  good 
training  for  the  horse  in  obeying  them,  but  the  trooper  out  of  ranks 
should  use  only  the  regulation  gaits. 

The  instructor  may  cause  the  pace  of  the  gallop  to  be  increased 
or  decreased  in  the  riding  school  but  the  maneuvering  gallop  and 
the  extended  gallop  only  should  be  used  in  work  on  long  lines. 

Changes  of  pace  are  executed  at  the  cautions:  SLOW  WALK; 
SLOW  TROT;  SLOW  GALLOP,  and  WALK  OUT;  TROT 
OUT;  EXTENDED  GALLOP.  The  normal  pace  is  taken  at 
the  commands:  WALK,  TROT,  GALLOP. 

TO    BACK   AND   HALT. 

221.  1/ Backward,  2.  MARCH.  At  the  first  command  gather 
the  horse;  at  the  second  command  use  the  direct  rein  until  the 
horse  commences  to  back,  then  relax  the  fingers  and  continue  to 
use  the  direct  rein  intermittently  to  cause  the  horse  to  continue  to 
back  and  to  prevent  him  from  rearing. 

At  the  command:  HALT,  cease  the  action  of  the  hands. 

The  trooper  carefully  avoids  raising  the  horse's  head.  An  ele- 
vated position  of  the  head,  by  constraining  the  muscles  of  the  loins, 
renders  the  backward  movement  much  more  difficult  for  the  horse. 

If  the  horse  throws  his  haunches  to  one  side,  the  trooper  increases 
the  action  of  the  rein  on  that  side  by  opening  it  widely  so  as  to 
straighten  the  horse  by  opposing  the  shoulders  to  the  haunches. 
The  action  of  the  open  rein  may  be  aided  or  even  replaced  by  that 
of  the  bearing  rein. 

If  the  horse  refuses  to  back  he  should  be  made  to  take  one  or  two 
steps  forward  to  flex  the  muscles  of  the  hindquarters  and  advantage 
then  be  taken  of  this  flexed  condition  to  cause  him  to  back . 

222.  The  training  of  the  trooper  in  the  use  of  the  aids  is  effected 
partly  by  changes  of  gait,  increase  and  decrease  of  pace,  and  partly 
by  the  exercises  herein  described .  When  the  troopers  have  learned 
to  use  the  aids  correctly  the  instructor  causes  them  to  execute 
changes  of  direction  combined  with  changes  of  gait. 


JUMPING.  7f 

TO   LEAVE   THE   RANKS. 

223.  The  instructor  places  the  troopers  in  single  rank  near  one 
end  of  the  riding  school.  The  rank  is  formed  by  the  command: 
FORM  RANK,  The  troopers  move  by  the  shortest  line,  at  the 
walk,  or  at  the  gait  ordered,  and  form  in  single  rank  in  rear  of  the 
instructor. 

The  instructor  then  causes  them  to  leave  the  rank  individually 
by  calling  them  by  name. 

The  designated  trooper,  avoiding  abrupt  means,  rides  quietly  to 
the  front  and  moves  forward  on  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  front 
of  the  squad.  He  takes  the  track  on  reaching  it,  to  the  hand 
designated,  or  halts  at  a  designated  spot. 

This  movement  can  be  executed  w^hile  the  squad  is  marching 
at  any  gait.  When  the  squad  is  halted  the  trooper  always  leaves 
the  rank  at  the  walk,  the  faster  gait,  if  one  is  taken,  not  being 
begun  until  the  horse  has  completely  left  the  rank. 

The  troopers  are  also  practiced  in  going  through  the  rank  both 
in  the  direction  of  its  march  and  in  the  opposite  direction. 

These  exercises  develop  the  willingness  and  docility  of  the 
horses  and  it  is  well  to  execute  them  frequently. 

The  instructor  avoids  forming  the  squad  parallel  to  the  sides  of 
the  riding  school  or  on  well-marked  lines.  He  thus  inculcates  in 
the  trooper  the  habit  of  placing  himself  in  the  direction  of  his 
chief  and  then  directing  his  horse  independently. 


224.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  to  train  the  trooper  to 
clear  obstacles  of  every  nature  that  he  may  encounter  on  varied 
terrain,  so  that  he  may  thus  remain,  under  all  circumstances  when 
alone  in  the  field,  master  of  his  gait  and  direction. 

Jumping  is  also  an  excellent  means  of  training  the  rider;  it  con- 
firms the  seat,  increases  the  pliancy  of  the  hand  and  arm,  strength- 
ens the  legs  and  develops  boldness  and  steadiness. 

The  work  over  obstacles  should  be  begun  early  and  continued 
during  the  whole  course  of  instruction. 

Progress  must  be  regulated  prudently  and  methodically;  undue 
haste  is  liable  to  destroy  the  confidence  of  the  trooper  and  the 
willingness  of  the  horse. 

This  instruction  comprises  two  distinct  parts : 

The  mechanism  of  jumping. 

The  conduct  of  the  horse  at  the  obstacle. 


80  JUMPING. 

226.  The  troopers  are  familiarized  with  the  mechanism  of 
jumping  by  first  placing  bars  on  the  ground  across  the  track  and 
later  low  obstacles,  and  causing  the  troopers  to  ride  their  horses 
over  them  without  concerning  themselves  with  the  conduct  of  the 
horses. 

The  instructor  endeavors  in  this  exercise  to  cause  the  troopers 
to  maintain  their  seats  and  remain  in  their  saddles  by  the  supple- 
ness of  their  backs,  and,  above  all,  to  keep  their  hands  low  and 
passive,  thus  permitting  the  horse  to  use  his  head  and  neck  in 
keeping  his  balance. 

The  horse  that,  in  going  over  an  obstacle,  has  the  free  use  of  his 
head  and  neck,  jumps  willingly,  calmly,  and  without  fatigue. 
The  trooper  endeavors  to  keep  in  unison  with  his  horse  whatever 
changes  in  rythm  or  pace  the  latter  may  make. 

The  jump  is  made  as  follows:  On  arriving  near  the  obstacle 
grasp  the  horse  with  the  legs,  keeping  the  body  upright,  the  hands 
low  and  passive;  at  the  moment  the  horse  rises  bend  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  forward  at  the  waist,  the  buttocks  remaining  in 
the  saddle;  as  the  horse  alights  sit  well  down  in  the  saddle  without 
displacing  the  hands. 

226.  When  the  troopers  are  sufficiently  familiar  with  the 
mechanism  of  jumping  and  with  the  use  of  the  aids  the  instructor 
teaches  them  to  conduct  their  horses  over  obstacles  by  causing 
them  to  jump,  individually,  obstacles  placed  off  the  track. 

In  general,  the  horse  should  jump  at  the  gait  at  which  he  ap- 
proaches the  obstacle. 

On  approaching  the  obsta,cle  the  trooper  selects  the  point  at 
which  he  wishes  to  jump  and  conducts  his  horse  straight  toward 
it,  the  reins  separated,  the  legs  close  to  maintain  the  forward 
movement. 

[f  the  horse  hesitates  on  approaching  the  obstacle,  anticipate 
his  resistance  by  stimulating  him  vigorously  with  the  legs, 

If  the  horse  avoids  the  obstacle,  stop  him,  quiet  him,  then  take 
him  directly  in  front  of  the  obstacle  and  urge  him  with  the  legs  to 
make  him  jump. 

If  the  horse  stops  short  in  front  of  the  obstacle  ride  back  and  put 
him  at  it  again. 

If  the  horse  bolts  or  gets  out  of  hand  pull  him  up  without,  how- 
ever, hampering  him  when  he  takes  the  leap. 

All  horses  lacking  in  calmness  or  willingness  should  be  put  back 
in  training  over  small  obstacles. 


ON  VARIED  GROUND.  81 

0 

227.  Jumping  is  first  practiced  with  stirrups.  When  the  troopers 
have  become  accustomed  to  it,  have  confidence  in  themselves 
and  are  sufficiently  sure  of  their  hands,  they  are  made  to  jump 
frequently  without  stirrups  to  assure  their  seat  and  prevent  their 
being  thrown  when  deprived  of  their  habitual  means  of  support. 

228.  Obstacles  for  jumping  are  comprised  in  two  classes: 

1.  Those  which  require  a  leap  of  breadth  only,  such  as  ditches, 
water  jumps,  etc.,  and  which  are  designated  as  broad  jumps. 

2.  Those  which  require  a  leap  of  height,  such  as  hedges,  fences, 
walls,  etc.,  and  which  are  designated  as  high  jumps. 

The  dimensions  of  the  obstacles  are  increased  in  proportion  to 
the  progress  of  the  troopers.  They  should  be  limited  to  8  feet  for 
broad  jumps  and  3  feet  for  liigh  jumps. 

Artificial  obstacles  should  have  a  sufficient  width  of  front  to 
prevent  the  horses  from  avoiding  them  easily. 

High  jumps  are  as  a  rule  taken  at  a  gallop  of  moderate  i)ace,  and 
broad  jumps  at  an  extended  gallop.  For  broad  jumps  it  is  impor- 
tant that  the  pace  should  be  increased  as  the  obstacle  is  approached 
so  that  the  horse  shall  be  at  full  speed  when  he  makes  the  leap. 
The  horse  must  have  free  use  of  his  head  and  forehand  during  and  after 
the  jump, 

229.  The  troopers  are  prepared  for  jumping  in  formed  bodies 
by  jumping  first  in  pairs,  then  in  fours,  separated  by  considerable 
distances. 

The  preservation  of  the  distances  separating  the  groups  is  a 
means  of  verifying  the  training  of  men  and  horses  in  tms  exercise. 

A  body  of  troops  jumps  obstacles  encountered  in  its  march  with- 
out changing  gait  or  formation,  intervals  between  troopers  and 
distances  between  ranks  being  increased  as  necessary. 

EXERCISES   ON  VARIED  GROUND. 

230.  The  exercises  on  varied  ground  have  for  their  object  the 
training  of  the  troopers  in  riding  their  horses  across  country,  in 
making  them  familiar  with  obstacles  which  they  will  encounter 
in  campaign,  and  in  regulating  their  gait  so  as  to  husband  the 
strength  of  their  horses  in  covering  great  distances. 

This  work  is  begun  at  an  early  period  of  the  training;  its  dif- 
ficult features,  such  as  jumping  obstacles,  are  graduated  to  fit  the 
progress  of  the  trooper,  the  end  being  to  increase  his  confidence 
and  skill. 


82  ON  VARIED  GROUND. 

The  instructor  conducts  his  class  across  fields,  through  woods, 
and  in  general  over  the  most  varied  terrain  at  his  disposal. 

He  may  divide  the  squad  into  small  groups,  each  under  a  cor- 
poral, who  conducts  the  group  and  regulates  the  gait  over  a  route 
designated  by  the  instructor. 

231.  The  instructor  inculcates  in  the  troopers  the  principles 
which  should  govern  them  when  left  to  their  own  devices.  They 
are  as  follows: 

On  leaving  the  stable,  move  at  a  walk  for  a  short  time  in  order  to 
get  the  horse's  legs  under  him. 

Vary  the  gaits  but  do  not  depart  from  the  regulation  pace  pre- 
scribed for  each. 

Choose  for  the  rapid  gaits  nearly  level  ground.  Going  up  hill 
rapidly  necessitates  great  effort  on  the  part  of  the  horse,  and  going 
down  hill  at  a  rapid  gait  exposes  him  to  injuries  from  the  saddle 
and  equipment,  and  is  hard  on  his  forelegs. 

Extend  progressively  the  periods  at  the  faster  gaits. 

Regulate  the  periods  spent  at  the  intermediate  gaits  by  the 
degree  of  rapidity  with  which  the  total  distance  must  be  covered. 

Seek,  under  all  circumstances,  soft  footing,  to  save  the  horse's 
legs,  and  keep  him,  therefore,  on  the  edge  of  metalled  roads 
rather  than  in  the  middle. 

Choose  hard  ground  when  smooth  and  level  in  preference  to 
ground  that  is  heavy  or  uneven. 

Finish  at  a  walk,  more  or  less  prolonged  as  the  journey  has  been 
more  or  less  long  and  trying,  so  that  the  horse  shall  always  come 
in  with  a  dry  skin  and  normal  respiration. 

232.  To  these  general  principles,  which  must  be  practically 
demonstrated,  the  instructor  adds  such  counsel  as  his  experience 
dictates  and  such  remarks  as  the  nature  and  state  of  the  terrain 
may  render  advisable. 

The  following  rules  cover  the  majority  of  circumstances  that  will 
arise: 

To  ascend  a  steep  slope,  yield  the  hand  as  soon  as  the  horse  has 
been  given  his  direction;  carry  forward  the  upper  part  of  the  body 
and  seize  a  lock  of  the  mane  near  the  middle  of  the  neck  under 
the  reins. 

To  descend  a  steep  slope,  let  the  reins  slip  through  the  hand  and 
give  the  horse  complete  liberty  of  action;  lean  back,  and  if  neces- 
sary grasp  the  can  tie  with  the  right  hand. 

Troopers  should  be  practiced  in  crossing  a  V-shaped  ditch, 
about  18  feet  wide  and  10  feet  deep,  so  that  they  go  down  one  side 


WORK  ON  THE  BIT.  88 

and  up  the  other.  This  is  a  valuable  exercise,  as  no  horse  will 
face  the  opposite  bank  unless  the  head  is  left  free. 

Long,  steep  slopes  should  be  ascended  slowly  and  quietly. 

All  slopes  should  be  descended  directly;  short,  steep  slopes^ 
should  be  ascended  directly;  long  slopes  may  be  ascended  ob- 
liquely if  the  surface  is  not  slippery. 

In  difficult  ground,  the  horse  should  be  allowed  to  take  the 
initiative;  his  instincts  are  a  more  reliable  guide  than  the  aids  of 
the  trooper. 

If  marshy  ground  must  be  crossed  go  slowly  and  avoid  following 
in  trace.  If  the  horse  goes  down  and  becomes  nervous  and  begins 
to  plunge,  dismount  and  lead. 

The  trooper  must  seek  every  means  to  spare  his  horse,  above  all 
when  carrying  the  full  pack;  where  possible  to  pass  natural  obsta- 
cles without  jumping  this  should  be  done;  the  heavily  loaded 
horse  crosses  many  obstacles,  for  example,  wide  ditches,  with 
greater  security  and  less  effort  by  climbing  than  by  jumping. 

When  the  bottom  of  the  ditch  is  boggy  it  will  generally  be  pref- 
erable to  jump  from  bank  to  bank. 

In  particularly  difficult  places,  the  trooper  should  dismount  and 
lead,  the  horse  following.  All  horses  should  be  trained  in  this 
method  of  passing  obstacles;  a  little  of  this  training  makes  it  easy 
to  cross  considerable  obstructions  on  foot. 

Work  on  the  Bit. 

Kolding  and  handling  the  reins. 

Use  and  effect  of  the  bit  and  snaffle. 

Employment  of  the  spur. 

Repetition  with  the  bit  of  the  work  on  the  snaffle. 

The  turn  in  place. 

Work  at  fixed  distances. 

Changing  the  diagonal  in  posting. 

Work  on  long  lines. 

233.  Work  on  the  bit  is  the  most  important  element  of  the 
instruction  in  equitation.  The  instructor  causes  this  work  to  be 
taken  up  as  soon  as  the  troopers  have  acquired  a  fair  seat  and  a 
sufficient  knowledge  of  the  use  of  the  aids. 

234.  The  trooper  at  stand  to  horse  and  in  leading  holds  both 
reins  as  prescribed  for  the  snaffle  rein.  The  bit  rein  is  not  removed 
from  the  horse's  neck  in  leading. 


54  HANDLING  THE  REINS. 

In  mounting  and  dismounting  the  trooper  manipulates  both 
reins  as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  snaffle.  After  dismounting, 
before  leading  to  the  stable  or  picket  line,  he  unhooks  the  curb 
chain. 

HOLDING   AND   HANDLING  THE   REINS. 

236.  Proper  handling  of  the  reins  being  an  important  element 
in  horsemanship,  the  instructor  exercises  the  troopers  in  it  both 
at  a  halt  and  at  all  gaits. 

The  normal  method  of  liolding  the  reins  for  military  riders  is  to 
take  both  reins  in  the  left  hand.  The  bit  reins  are  separated  by 
the  third  (ring)  finger,  the  right  snaffle  rein  between  the  first  and 
second  fingers,  the  left  snaffle  rein  under  the  little  finger,  all  of  the 
reins  passing  out  of  the  hand  over  the  second  joint  of  the  first 
finger,  upon  which  the  thumb  presses  them  mth  sufficient  force  to 
hold  them  in  place;  the  bight  falls  to  the  right  of  the  horse's  neck. 
The  elbow  falls  naturally,  the  wrist  and  hand  in  line  with  the 
forearm,  the  finger  nails  toward  the  body. 

Since  the  trooper  in  mounted  combat  needs  the  right  hand  for 
his  weapon  (sw^ord  or  pistol)  he  must  be  thoroughly  trained  in 
riding  with  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  in  riding  on  the  curb  bit. 

236.  The  instructor  explains  to  the  troopers  that  they  can: 

(a)  Ride  the  horse  on  the  bit,  relaxing  the  snaffle  reins,  which  is 
the  normal  method  in  combat; 

(6)  Ride  the  horse  on  the  snaffle,  relaxing  the  bit  rein,  an  excep- 
tional method,  used  with  horses  that  carry  the  neck  arched,  or 
that  have  especially  sensitive  mouths; 

(c)  Ride  the  horse  on  both  reins,  supporting  the  horse  with  both 
snaffle  and  bit;  this  is  the  normal  method  used  at  drill  and  on  the 
march,  at  rest  and  in  jumping. 

237.  When  the  trooper  is  not  called  upon  to  make  immediate 
use  of  his  arms  it  is  usually  advantageous  to  hold  the  reins  in  both 
hands.  In  this  case  he  can  use  the  right  hand  for  holding  either 
the  right  snaffle  rein,  or  both  right  reins. 

To  take  the  right  snaffle  rein  in  the  right  hand,  the  trooper  seizes 
that  rein  in  front  of  the  left  hand  with  the  right  hand,  the  little 
finger  next  to  the  reins,  and  holds  it  as  when  riding  with  one  rein; 
he  places  his  right  hand  on  a  level  with  the  left  hand,  the  bight 
of  the  rein  coming  out  under  the  thumb. 

When  the  trooper  wishes  to  take  both  right  reins  in  the  right 
hand  he  holds  them  in  the  full  grasp,  the  reins  separated  by  the 
little  finger,  enaffle  rein  underneath.    This  method  is  preferably 


HANDLING  THE  REINS.  86 

employed  in  riding  across  country,  in  jumping  over  obstacles,  in 
galloping  a  horse,  etc. 

When  seizing  the  right  rein  or  reins  in  the  right  hand  the  left 
hand  allows  the  reins  to  slip  through  the  fingers  but  does  not  let 
them  go;  the  two  reins  passing  from  the  left  to  the  right  hand  thus 
form  a  "bridge"  across  the  horse's  neck,  a  useful  thing  if  the  horse 
stumbles  or  refuses  to  jump.  This  method  of  holding  the  reins 
is  taken  at  the  command:  IN  BOTH  HANDS  TAKE  REINS. 

During  the  rests  and  at  route 
order  the  troopers  alternate  in     Takm^  rems  />?  /jot//  /?a/?c/s 
taking  the  reins  in  the  right 
hand,  the  left  hand,  and  both 
hands.    They  thus  avoid  be- 
coming fatigued,  advancing  the 
shoulder,   or,  by  carrying  the 
reins  to  one  side,  giving  to  the 
horse  a  false  carriage  of  the  head       j^/t  re//?  s/?ddec/ 
and    neck.    The    method    for 
holding  the  reins  in  the  right  hand  is  similar  to  that  for  reins  in 
the  left  hand. 

To  allow  his  horse  to  ease  his  head  and  neck  at  the  walk  or  at 
the  halt  the  trooper  opens  his  fingers  without  changing  the  position 
of  his  hand  so  as  to  permit  complete  relaxation. 

When  the  trooper  has  the  sword  or  pistol  in  hand  he  may  use  the 
right  hand  to  adjust  his  reins  or  to  separate  them  momentarily  but 
he  must  exercise  great  care  to  keep  the  point  of  his  sword  or  the 
muzzle  of  his  pistol  elevated  to  avoid  wounding  his  neighbors. 
The  troopers  must  be  frequently  practiced  in  riding  with  the  reins 
in  one  hand. 

238.  To  adjust  the  reins,  seize  them  with  the  thumb  and  first 
finger  of  the  right  hand  above  the  left  thumb;  slightly  open  the 
fingers  of  the  left  hand,  raise  the  right  hand,  feel  lightly  and  evenly 
the  horse's  mouth  with  both  reins  and  close  the  fingers  of  the  left 
hand  on  the  reins. 

The  troopers  are  exercised  frequently  in  changing  from  both 
reins  to  the  snaflie  reins  and  the  reverse. 

To  shorten  the  reins,  seize  the  rein  or  reins  to  be  shortened  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  first  finger  of  the  right  hand  above  the  left 
thumb.  To  lengthen  the  reins,  seize  the  rein  or  reins  to  be  length- 
ened between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  below 
the  left  hand. 

In  executing  these  movements,  the  hands  should  be  displaced 
as  little  as  possible. 


«6  EFFECT  OF  BIT  AND  SNAFFLE. 

USE   AND   EFFECT   OF  THE   BIT  AND   SNAFFLE. 

239.  The  effects  of  the  bit  reins  are  similar  to  those  of  the  snaf- 
fle, but  more  pronounced,  even  when  they  are  produced  by  lighter 
action  of  the  hands. 

The  bit  acts  on  the  bars  and  gains  in  power  from  the  leverage 
afforded  by  the  curb  chain,  wliile  the  snaffle  acts  directly  on  tae 
angle  of  the  lips. 

240.  To  demonstrate  these  effects  to  the  troopers,  the  instruc- 
tor causes  them  first  to  take  the  snaffle  reins  alone  and  execute 
thus  several  simple  movements.  He  then  causes  them  to  take  the 
bit  reins  alone  and  execute  the  same  movements.  He  points  out 
the  difference  between  the  two  means  of  control. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  trooper  to  take  the  bit  reins  alone 
in  the  left  hand  and  terminates  this  instruction  by  the  employ- 
ment of  the  four  reins  in  one  hand. 

241 .  The  principal  effects  of  the  bit  reins  are  produced  by  carry- 
ing the  hand  forward,  to  the  rear,  to  the  right  or  to  the  left. 

If  the  hand  is  carried  forward,  the  action  of  the  reins  decreases 
until  it  disappears;  tliis  movement  of  the  hand  is  limited  to  the 
amount  necessary  to  avoid  opposition  to  the  forward  movement  of 
the  horse. 

If  the  hand  is  carried  to  the  rear,  the  two  reins  are  stretched 
equally  (direct  rein);  the  impression  received  by  the  bars  of  the 
horse's  mouth  produces  a  decrease  in  pace  or  gait,  or  even  a  move- 
ment to  the  rear. 

It  the  hand  is  carried  to  the  right,  the  right  rein  becomes  slack  and 
no  longer  produces  any  effect;  the  left  rein  becomes  taut,  and  presses 
the  neck  to  the  right;  the  horse  is  thus  caused  to  turn  to  the  right 
(bearing  rein) . 

If  the  hand  is  carried  to  the  left,  the  opposite  effect  is  produced. 

The  effect  of  the  bearing  rein  produced  by  one  hand  may  not 
suffice  to  cause  a  change  of  direction.  The  trooper  should  then 
separate  the  reins  and  make  use  of  the  open  rein. 

By  using  alternately  the  bit  and  snaffle,  the  trooper  saves  the 
mouth  of  a  horse  that  bores,  the  alternate  action  permitting  the 
trooper  to  change  from  pressure  on  the  bars  to  pressure  on  the  lips 
and  conversely. 

242.  In  all  movements  the  trooper  keeps  the  arm  bent  and 
softens  the  effect  produced  by  the  hand  by  keeping  supple  the 
joints  of  the  fingers,  wrist,  shoulder,  and  elbow. 


THE  SPTTR.  S7 

EMPLOYMENT   OF  THE    SPUR. 

243.  The  spur  is  an  aid  whicli  augments  tlie  effect  produced 
by  the  leg. 

The  trooper  employs  it  in  rear  of  and  near  the  girth  by  touching 
the  horse  with  it,  once  or  oftener,  according  to  his  sensitiveness 
and  degree  of  submission. 

REPETITION   WITH  THE   BIT  OP  THE   WORK  ON  THE   SNAFFLE. 

244.  All  the  exercises  of  the  work  on  the  snaffle  are  repeated 
in  the  work  on  the  bit.  This  repetition  is  for  the  purpose  of  per- 
fecting the  troopers  in  the  use  of  the  aids  and  confirming  the  cor- 
rectness and  regularity  of  the  various  gaits. 

The  movements  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  work  on  the 
snaffle,  always  keeping  in  mind  the  greater  power  of  the  bit  as 
compared  to  the  snaffle. 

In  the  execution  of  the  about  the  instructor  may  cause  the 
trooper  to  regain  the  track  on  an  oblique  line  wliile  keeping  the 
horse  parallel  to  the  track,  by  increased  pressure  of  the  outer  leg. 

For  example,  when  the  right  about  has  been  completed  and  the 
trooper  starts  to  oblique  to  the  track  he  should  carry  his  left  leg 
to  the  rear  to  push  the  hindquarters  to  the  right,  so  that  the  horse 
in  moving  crosses  his  forelegs  slightly  and  his  body  remains  par- 
allel to  the  track.  The  movement  is  limited  to  a  few  steps.  The 
hand  remains  passive  if  the  horse  does  not  increase  the  gait;  it 
acts  as  a  restraint  in  case  he  does. 

The  abouts  and  individual  circlings  are  executed  with  radii 
which  are  reduced  more  and  more  preparatory  to  the  turn  in  place. 

THE   TURN  IN   PLACE. 

246.  The  turn  in  place  consists  in  making  the  horse  turn  on 
his  own  ground,  displacing  the  shoulders  to  one  side  and  the  hind- 
quarters to  the  other. 

At  the  command:  TO  THE  RIGHT,  TURN  IN  PLACE,  halt, 
carry  the  hand  to  the  right  and  rear  to  move  the  shoulders  to  the 
right;  use  the  right  leg  at  the  same  time  to  move  the  hindquarters 
to  the  left. 

The  turn  in  place  to  the  left  is  made  by  inverse  means. 

To  preserve  the  horse's  willingness  it  is  essential  to  move  him 
forward  briskly  as  soon  as  the  turn  in  place  is  completed. 


88  CHANGING  DIAGONAL. 

246.  In  order  to  enable  the  trooper  to  grasp  the  mechanism  of 
the  turn  in  place  and  to  obtain  the  necessary  calmness  and  regu- 
larity, the  turn  in  place  is  executed  slowly  at  first,  but  the  rapidity 
indispensable  for  the  employment  of  this  movement  in  individual 
mounted  combat  must  be  obtained  by  gradual  progression. 

WORK   AT   FIXED   DISTANCES. 

247.  The  work  in  the  riding  school  at  fixed  distances  com- 
prises the  movements  executed  in  the  individual  insti'uction, 
but  the  movements  are  executed  in  unison  at  command  and  the 
troopers  follow  and  conform  to  movements  of  the  leader. 

The  work  therefore  requires  of  the  troopers  more  precision  and 
exactness  in  the  use  of  the  aids  and  serves  to  prepare  them  for 
work  in  ranks. 

For  the  instructor  it  is  a  check  on  the  results  accomplished. 

The  instructor  forms  the  troopers  in  one  or  two  squads;  when 
there  are  two  squads,  he  designates  that  one  of  the  two  leaders 
upon  whom  the  other  will  regulate. 

The  troopers  follow  the  leaders,  maintaining  a  distance  of  4  feet 
from  head  to  croup. 

CHANGING  THE  DIAGONAL  IN  POSTING. 

248.  The  right  fore  and  left  hind  foot  constitute  the  right 
diagonal;  the  left  fore  and  right  hind  foot,  the  left  diagonal. 

In  posting,  the  trooper  is  said  to  post  on  the  right  diagonal  when 
after  rising  he  sits  down  in  the  saddle  at  the  instant  the  right  fore 
foot  comes  to  the  ground. 

It  is  important  to  instruct  the  trooper  to  post  for  a  time  on  one 
diagonal  and  then  change  to  the  other,  so  that  the  horse's  legs  will 
each  perform  the  same  amount  of  work  and  the  chance  of  injury 
from  the  equipment  will  be  reduced. 

To  automatically  insure  that  the  posting  is  done  as  much  on  one 
diagonal  as  on  the  other  the  troopers  may  be  required  to  post  on 
the  left  diagonal  when  riding  to  the  left  hand  on  the  track,  and  on 
the  right  diagonal  when  riding  to  the  right. 

The  instructor  occasionally  requires  each  trooper  to  inform  him 
on  w^hich  diagonal  he  is  posting. 

To  teach  the  trooper  to  change  the  diagonal  the  instructor  directs 
him  to  diminish  the  weight  borne  on  the  stirrups  and  to  retain  his 


WORK  ON  LONG  LINES.  89 

seat  in  the  saddle  for  two  successive  beats  of  the  horse's  feet  instead 
of  one,  and  then  to  rise  as  before. 

The  trooper  will  then  find  himself  posting  on  the  diagonal  oppo- 
site to  the  one  on  which  he  was  posting  before. 

WORK   ON   LONG  LINES 

249.  This  work  is  carried  out  in  a  rectangle  of  large  dimensions. 
The  troopers  are  there  exercised  at  all  gaits,  but  with  the  move- 
ments restricted  to  changes  of  direction,  pace,  or  gait. 

The  end  sought  is  complex:  To  confirm  the  horse  in  moving  on 
a  straight  line;  to  increase  his  ^allingness  in  isolating  him  to  a 
greater  extent;  to  regulate  his  gaits;  to  familiarize  the  trooper 
with  the  regulation  and  extended  gallop;  to  exercise  the  troopers 
in  squads  in  single  rank,  to  prepare  them  for  work  in  the  platoon 
and  to  accustom  them  to  following  a  leader;  finally  to  cause  the 
troopers  and  horses  to  acquire  the  calmness  indispensable  in  the 
faster  gaits. 

The  troopers  are  dispersed  at  large  distances  over  the  whole  of 
the  track.  When  they  are  in  squads,  a  trooper  in  the  center  is 
designated  to  act  as  center  trooper;  his  comrades  regulate  on  him. 

The  instructor  limits  his  commands  to  indicating  the  gait  or 
the  movement  to  the  trooper  or  squad  which  is  passing  in  front  of 
him.    The  others  observe  and  conform. 

Advantage  is  taken  of  this  work  to  teach  the  trooper  to  obey 
signals  and  trumpet  calls. 

250.  The  angles  of  the  rectangle  are  marked  by  elevated 
objects  easily  distinguished. 

To  permit  the  instructor  to  control  the  gaits  the  dimensions  of 
the  rectangle  should  be  235  by  118  yards.  These  two  distances 
represent  approximately  the  distances  covered  by  the  horse  in 
one  minute  at  the  trot  and  walk,  respectively.  The  sum  of  a 
side  and  end,  taking  into  consideration  the  distance  lost  in  round- 
ing; the  corner,  represents  the  distance  covered  by  a  horse  in  one 
minute  at  the  regulation  gallop. 

To  cover  the  distance  which  a  horse  is  required  to  make  in  one 
minute  at  the  extended  gallop,  one  side  and  two  ends  are  used. 

In  the  work  at  the  gallop  the  instructor  must  devote  his  efforts 
to  securing  that  calmness  and  regularity  of  pace  required  in  pro- 
longed drills  or  exercises. 

When  the  horses  move  calmly  at  the  regulation  gallop  they  are 
exercised  in  the  extended  gallop. 


00  WORK  ON  LONG  LINES. 

251.  The  troopers  are  next  prepared  to  participate  in  the  charge 
by  exercising  them  in  galloping  at  full  speed  over  a  distance  of 
60  to  75  yards.  The  movement  is  executed  successively  by  the 
troopers.  Each  trooper  when  his  name  is  called  gradually  yields 
the  hand  sufficiently  to  give  the  horse  the  necessary  liberty  in 
extending  his  neck  while  maintaining  support,  increases  the  gallop 
to  full  speed  and  yells:  Charge. 

In  charging  the  trooper  bends  the  body  forward,  pushes  his  feet 
fully  into  the  stirrups  upon  which  he  supports  his  weight,  gives 
his  horse  if  necessary  a  touch  of  the  spur,  and  holds  him  in  the 
direction  indicated. 

The  exercises  are  facilitated  at  first  by  grouping  the  troopers 
by  twos. 

To  pass  from  the  charge  to  the  gallop,  employ  the  means  pre- 
scribed for  decreasing  the  gait. 

In  order  not  to  fatigue  the  horse  by  repeated  charges,  or  by 
charges  executed  on  hard  ground,  the  individual  charge  should 
be  made  a  part  of  each  of  several  instruction  hours,  and  should 
always  be  executed  on  a  track  or  piece  of  ground  specially  adapted 
to  this  work. 

262.  The  work  in  the  large  rectangles  should  be  completed  by 
work  in  ope7i  order. 

In  this  work  the  troopers  are  formed  in  successive  lines  of  four 
troopers  each,  with  distances  and  intervals  of  three  or  four  yards. 

The  instructor  causes  the  troopers  thus  formed  to  move  in  all 
directions  and  at  all  gaits,  and  causes  them  to  execute  the  move- 
ments prescribed  in  the  work  on  the  snaffle  and  bit  with  and 
without  arms. 

Satisfactory  execution  of  this  work  requires  that  each  trooper 
shall  keep  his  place  exactly  with  reference  to  the  others,  and  that 
the  movements  shall  be  executed  with  precision  and  in  unison. 

The  individual  instruction  on  horseback,  begun  with  the  recruit, 
must  be  kept  up  during  the  trooper's  entire  service. 

For  the  older  troopers  prolonged  work  at  the  trot  without  stir- 
rups is  of  great  utility.  With  trained  and  hardened  troopers, 
capable  of  withstanding  fatigue,  it  confirms  the  seat  and  renders 
easy  the  correction  of  faults  of  position. 

Squadron  and  platoon  commanders  must  exercise  the  trained 
troopers  in  riding  across  country  or  on  varied  terrain  at  rapid  gaits 
and  thus  train  them  in  husbanding  the  strength  of  their  mounts 
while  using  them  fully  for  the  end  in  view;  they  should  perfect 
them  in  the  use  of  arms  by  constant  practice  on  dummies  and  in 


MANTTAL  OF  THE  SABER,  KaXTNTED. 


91 


combat  exercises,  and  endeavor  above  all  to  make  of  them  feartess 
horsemen,  confident  in  their  ability  to  defeat  the  enemy  in  mounted 
combat. 

The  individual  worth  of  each  trooper,  together  with  his  feeling 
of  invincibility,  gives  to  the  organization  the  confidence  and 
audacity  which  enables  the  leader  to  undertake  ttie  most  darmg 
enterprises. 

Use  op  Arms  Mounted. 

Manual  of  the  Saber. 

Manual  of  the  Kifle. 

Manual  of  the  Pistol. 

Inspection  of  arms. 

263.  The  troopers  are  exercised  in  the  use  of  arms  mounted  as 
soon  as  they  are  sufficiently  confirmed  in  their  seat  and  instructed 
in  the  use  of  the  aids  to  avoid  interference  with  their  progress  iu 
equitation. 

The  employment  of  the  saber  mounted  is  taught  as  prescribed 
in  the  Saber  Exercise;  the  use  of  the  pistol  in  firing  mounted,  as 
prescribed  in  the  Small- Arms  Firing  Manual. 

MANUAL   OF   THE    SABER,    MOUNTED. 

254.  The  saber  suspended  from  the  Uft  side  of  the  saddle— 


Saber 

Mouritecf 


1 .  Draw,  2.  SABEB.  Pass  the  right  hand  over  the  reins  and 
execute  with  it  rapidly  what  is  prescribed  for  drawing  the  saber 
on  foot;  place  the  pommel  near  me  hip  and  resting  on  top  of  the 


92  MANXTAI.  OP  THE  SABER,  MOUNTED. 

thigh,  flat  of  the  blade  against  the  point  of  the  shoulder.    This  is 
the  position  of  carry  saber,  mounted. 
266.  The  saber  suspended  from  the  right  side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Draw.  Turn  the  head  to  the  right  without  deranging  the 
position  of  the  body  and  glance  toward  the  hilt,  engage  the  right 
wrist  in  the  saber  knot,  pull  the  hilt  forward,  seize  the  grip  in 
the  full  hand,  nails  to  the  right,  draw  the  blade  6  inches  from  the 
scabbard,  and  look  to  the  front. 

2.  SABEB.  Draw  the  saber  as  prescribed  on  foot  and  take 
the  position  of  carry  saber. 

266.  The  troopers  are  also  exercised  in  drawing  the  saber  as 
quickly  as  possible  at  the  single  command:  DRAW  SABER. 

To  return  saber. 

267.  The  scabbard  suspended  from  the  left  side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Return.     Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot. 

2.  SABER.  Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot,  supporting  the 
back  of  the  blade  against  the  left  forearm  until  the  point  is  en- 
gaged in  the  scabbard. 

This  command  is  given  only  at  a  halt  or  when  marching  at  a 
walk. 

268.  The  scabbard  suspended  on  the  right — 

1.  Return.    Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot. 

2.  SABER.  Carry  the  wrist  opposite  the  right  shoulder,  lower 
the  blade  to  the  right  of  the  horse's  neck,  let  the  grip  turn  in  the 
hand  so  that  the  hand  grasps  the  guard  at  the  pommel,  back  of 
the  hand  up,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  and  fix  the  eyes  on  the 
opening  of  the  scabbard,  raise  the  hand,  insert  the  blade  and  push 
it  home,  disengage  the  wrist  from  the  saber  knot,  and  turn  the 
head  to  the  front. 

T\Tien  the  saber  is  carried  on  the  right  the  return  saber  is  exe- 
cuted, so  far  as  possible,  at  the  halt. 

269.  1.  Inspection,  2.  SABER.     1.  Present,   2.  SABER. 
Executed  as  when  dismounted. 

260.  GUARD.  Thrust  the  feet  home  in  the  stirrups  and 
crouch  slightly  in  the  saddle,  bending  forward  from  the  waist. 
Otherwise  as  explained  dismounted. 

261.  In  the  charge  in  close  order  the  trooper  in  the  front  rank 
assumes  the  position  indicated  in  paragraph  251,  the  body  almost 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER,  MOUNTED. 


9S 


front  Rank 
Char§\n§  Pos\t\on  ^n  C\o5e  Order 


Guard-    j^jm 

Charging    ^M  ^osWion 
as  jfilm  f"ora^ers 
and     \9Ml  \n  W\e\et 


CV\ar|\n|  pos\t\on 
m  close  order. 


H  MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE,  HOXTNTED. 

in  a  horizontal  line  over  the  horse's  neck,  the  ann  fully  extended 
to  the  front,  the  saber,  in  the  full  grasp,  in  prolongation  of  the 
arm,  guard  up,  finger  nails  to  the  right,  point  at  the  height  of  the 
eye.  When  difficult  ground  is  encountered  the  UoojfeT  takes  the 
position  of  guard  while  passing  it. 

In  charging  in  double  rank  those  troopers  who  are  in  the  rear 
rank  or  who  are  directiy  in  rear  of  others  take  the  position  of  port 
saber. 

In  the  mel^e  the  troopers  take  the  position  of  guard  toward  the 
nearest  enemy,  crouching  slightly  in  the  saddle  and  alive  to  all 
possible  attacks. 

MANUAL   OF  THE   RIFLE,    MOUNTED. 

262.  Before  standing  to  horse  the  trooper  attaches  his  rifle  to  his 
belt  by  passing  the  muzzle  up  through  tiie  belt  ring  and  engaging 
the  snap  hook  of  the  belt  ring  into  the  trigger  guard. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  upon  any  preparatory  command,  except 
for  mounting  or  securing  horses,  unsling  the  rifle  from  the  belt  ring 
and  take  the  position  of  order  arms,  removing  the  snaffle  reins  from 
the  horse's  neck  and  passing  the  right  arm  through  them,  if 
necessary. 

If  a  command  to  secure  horses  is  given,  link  or  couple  first,  and 
then  unsling  the  rifle. 

To  mount,  proceed  as  without  the  rifle.  When  seated  in  the  sad- 
dle grasp  the  rifle  at  the  bolt  with  the  left  hand,  barrel  to  the  front, 
place  the  butt  of  the  rifle  in  the  bucket,  steadying  the  latter  with 
the  left  foot,  if  necessary,  and  take  the  position  of  the  trooper, 
mounted. 

To  dismount:  At  the  preparatory  command  seize  the  rifle  at  the 
bolt  with  the  left  hand,  give  it  a  quick,  forcible  pull,  lifting  the 
butt  from  the  bucket,  and  let  the  rifle  hang  from  the  belt. 

MANUAL    OF  THE    PISTOL,    MOUNTED. 

263.  Raise  pistol,  return  pistol,  and  inspection  pistol  are 
executed  as  when  dismounted.  The  pistol,  when  carried  out  of 
the  holster  mounted  is  kept  at  the  position  of  raise  pistol. 

Load,  unload,  and  withdraw  magazine  are  executed  as  when 
dismounted,  care  being  taken  in  handling  the  pistol  with  the  left 


INSPECTION  OF  ARMS,  MOUNTED.  95 

hand  not  to  release  the  hold  on  the  reins  and  to  disturb  the  position 
of  the  hand  as  little  as  possible. 

In  manipulating  the  slide  the  muzzle  is  pointed  downward  and 
to  the  left  front  to  avoid  injury  to  man  or  horse  in  ease  of  acci- 
dental discharge. 

INSPECTION  OP  ARMS,    MOUNTED. 

264.  The  troopers  being  mounted,  fully  armed,  sabers  drawn: 
1.  Inspection,  2.  ABMS. 

The  inspection  begins  on  the  right.  As  the  inspector  approaches 
the  rank,  the  first  two  troopers  execute  the  first  motion  of  inspec- 
tion saber;  the  first  trooper,  as  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of  him, 
executes  the  second  and  third  motions  of  inspection  saber;  the 
second  trooper,  as  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of  him,  executes 
the  second  and  third  motions  of  inspection  saber,  the  fi.rst  trooper 
at  this  instant  resuming  the  carry,  and  the  third  trooper  executing 
the  first  motion  of  inspection  saber.  The  first  trooper  then  returns 
saber.  As  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of  the  other  troopers  the 
movements  are  executed  successively  as  just  explained. 

Each  trooper,  as  soon  as  he  has  returned  saber,  comes  to  the 
position  of  inspection  pistol. 

If  the  squad  is  in  two  ranks,  they  are  opened  before  the  sabers 
are  drawn  preparatory  to  inspection. 

The  instructor  inspects  the  sabers  of  both  ranks  before  inspecting 
the  pistols. 

In  inspecting  pistols,  as  the  inspector  passes  to  the  next  trooper 
on  his  left,  each  trooper  returns  pistol. 

266.  To  inspect  the  rifles  or  to  inspect  the  dress  and  equipment 
of  the  squad  more  minutely,  the  instructor  dismounts  the  squad, 
and  without  forming  ranks  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

The  troopers  take  the  snaffle  reins  off  the  horse's  neck,  pass  the 
right  arm  through  the  reins,  unsling  the  rifle,  and  come  to  the  order 
The  inspection  of  rifles  is  then  conducted  as  when  dismounted, 
except  that  each  trooper,  as  soon  as  he  has  been  inspected,  slings  his 
rifle,  places  the  reins  over  the  horse's  neck,  and  stands  to  horse. 

To  inspect  the  pistols  dismounted,  the  command  inspection 
pistol  is  given.  The  men  attach  the  rifle  to  the  belt,  and  with 
the  right  arm  through  the  snaffle  rein,  execute  inspection  pistol. 
As  the  inspector  passes  each  trooper  he  returns  pistol  and  takes 
the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 


ADDITIONAL  INSTRUCTION  IN  EQUITATION  FOR 
NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS  MOUNTED  ON 
TRAINED   HORSES. 

THE  INSTRUCTOR. 

266.  The  instructor  must  have  a  well-defined  progressive 
scheme  suited  to  the  needs  of  the  troopers  under  instruction,  the 
successive  steps  of  which  he  should  be  able  to  explain  clearly  in 
simple  language.  He  should  be  able  not  only  to  recognize  unerr- 
ingly the  cause  of  any  difficulty  the  trooper  meets,  but  also  to  point 
out  the  means  of  remedy,  and  in  case  of  need,  to  apply  these  means 
readily  and  skillfully  himself.  He  should  never  give  explanations 
during  fast  gaits.  He  should  bear  in  mind  that  progress  does  not 
come  from  the  mere  execution  of  the  movement,  but  from  tie 
way  in  which  it  is  executed.  He  should  try  to  introduce  some 
new  and  unexpected  feature  into  each  day's  work,  in  order  to 
hold  the  trooper's  interest. 

Every  effort  should  be  made  to  maintain  good  nature;  it  is  the 
best  aid  to  suppling.  Instructors  and  pupils  must  ever  bear  in 
mind  that  the  greatest  obstacle  to  good  horsemanship  is  bad  temper 
of  either  rider  or  mount. 

The  instructor  should  let  no  individual's  fault  in  seat  or  manage- 
ment of  the  horse  pass  without  correction,  for  it  is  only  by  incessant 
criticism  of  the  same  errors  that  a  bad  habit  can  be  eradicated. 

The  preparatory  work  briefly  given  in  these  regulations  admits 
of  further  development  to  meet  unforeseen  difficulties  that  may 
arise.  The  extent  of  such  development,  while  conforming;  to  the 
spirit  of  the  system,  should  be  left  to  the  instructor's  judgment. 

THE  AIDS. 

267.  The  rider  conveys  his  wishes  to  the  horse  mainly  through 
the  medium  of  his  hands  and  legs.  As  these  wishes  should  be  con- 
veyed in  the  smoothest  possible  manner,  it  follows  that  he  should 
at  all  times  be  in  direct  communication  with  his  mount;  he  can 
maintain  this  communication  only  by  riding  with  a  slight  pressure 
of  the  bit  against  the  horse's  mouth  and  with  a  light  feel  of  the  calf 
against  the  horse's  side. 

The  responsiveness  of  the  horse  to  the  aids  depends  upon  the 
manner  in  which  they  are  applied .    The  application  must  be  inter- 
mittent; that  is,  when  an  aid  is  employed  to  effect  a  movement,  the 
9S 


THE  SEAT.  97 

action  must  be  relaxed  as  a  reward  for  obedience  the  moment  the 
horse  yields  in  the  slightest.  The  aids  should  be  reapplied  and 
released  and  reapplied  and  released  until  the  horse  has  yielded  and 
completed  the  movement  desired.  They  must  be  applied  gently 
and  firmly  with  a  maximum  use  of  the  leg  and  a  minimum  use  of 
the  bit.  Riders  can  not  be  too  strong  in  their  legs  for  equitation 
work  and  very  few  of  them  are  sufficientlv  light  and  delicate  in  the 
use  of  their  hands.  Most  of  the  trouble  tte  trooper  has  in  handling 
his  horse  can  be  traced  directly  to  too  little  use  of  the  legs  and  too 
much  use  of  the  hands. 

Successful  results  come  from  the  correct  employment  of  the  aids. 
First,  by  their  intermittent  use  as  before  described.  Second,  by 
using  them  in  proper  relationship,  and  not,  for  example,  demanding 
one  thing  with  the  legs  and  contradicting  with  the  hands.  This  is 
a  very  common  fault.  It  is  also  a  common  error  for  a  man  to  apply 
one  leg  to  swing  the  haunches  and  unconsciously  contradict  it  witn 
his  other  leg.    Third,  by  using  them  gently. 

THE   SEAT. 

268.  As  successful  results  come  from  the  correct  application  of 
the  aids,  so  the  successful  application  of  the  leg  aids  depends  upon 
the  seat,  which  may  be  defined  to  be  the  ability  of  the  rider  to  keep 
his  balance  under  all  circumstances,  whatever  the  reactions  of  the 
horse.  A  good  seat  is  the  first  essential,  because  it  is  the  basis  of 
stability  and  therefore  of  confidence.  Its  attainment  is  aided  by 
the  acquirement  of  the  correct  ^* position  of  the  trooper  mounted*'* 
and  by  the  suppling  exercises. 

The  rider's  position  is  in  all  probability  correct  if  he  has  a  good, 
firm  hold  with  the  upper  leg,  his  legs  and  heels  are  well  shoved 
down,  his  feet  are  approximately  parallel  to  the  horse's  side,  his 
calves  have  a  light  feel  of  the  horse's  sides  at  about  the  rear  edge  of 
the  girth,  and  his  stirrup  straps  hang  vertically. 

The  importance  of  getting  the  lower  legs  to  the  rear  as  indicated 
can  not  be  overestimated.  They  are  the  logical  rudders  for  the 
horse,  as  they  control  practically  all  of  his  body  in  rear  of  the  fore- 
hand. They  drive  his  haunches  under  him  to  assist  him  to  start, 
back,  stop,  turn,  or  jump, 

A  light  pressure  of  the  calf  must  be  maintained  against  the  horse's 
side,  for  otherwise  the  "rider  can  not  apply  his  legs  with  sufficient 
nicety  to  bring  his  horse  to  a  high  state  of  responsiveness.  If  a  horse 
is  too  sensitive  to  the  legs,  or  nervous,  and  is  ridden  with  legs  free 


99  INCREASE  OF  GAIT. 

from  the  sides  except  when  a  movement  is  desired,  the  animal 
becomes  unsteady,  due  to  lack  of  support  from  the  legs  and  to  their 
irregular  application. 

Many  men  find  trouble  in  keeping  the  stimip  straps  vertical  and 
tlie  heels  lower  than  the  toes.  Both  difficulties  are  due  to  the  thighs 
working  up  toward  the  horizontal.  This  fault  is  con-ected  by  get- 
ting the  heels  lower  than  the  toes  by  a  movement  of  the  ankle  "joint, 
then,  still  keeping  the  heel  in  this  position,  bending  the  knees  so 
as  to  cany  the  feet  to  the  rear  until  the  stii*rup  straps  are  vertical. 
In  very  diflicult  cases  the  stirrup  straps  should  be  tied  to  the  girtli 
80  as  to  hang  vertically. 

The  toes  should  not  be  permitted  to  turn  out  excessively,  else 
the  pressure  with  the  inside  of  the  thigh  and  knee  will  be  lost.  The 
feet  should  be  kept  in  to  the  horse's  side  and  not  shoved  out. 

In  order  to  have  a  good  seat  the  whole  body,  especially  the  ankle 
joints,  must  be  supple. 

TO   MOVE   FORWARD   OR  TO   INCREASE   THE   GAIT. 

269.  Executed  as  described  in  the  school  of  the  trooper.  As 
soon  as  the  horse  begins  to  move,  or  to  increase  the  gait,  gradually 
relax  the  fingers,  and  when  he  has  attained  the  gait  or  pace  desired, 
relax  the  legs  to  their  normal  pressure. 

Many  horses  do  not  respond  promptly.  First,  because  the  horse 
has  not  been  sufficiently  gathered  to  attract  his  attention.  When 
this  is  the  case,  his  attention  should  be  further  attracted  at  the 
command  of  execution  by  elevating  the  hands  a  little  and  increasing 
the  pressure  of  the  fingers  on  the  reins,  so  as  to  pick  up  his  head 
slightly  at  the  moment  the  leg  pressure  is  increased  to  shove  him  to 
the  front.  Second,  instead  of  slioving  the  horse  against  the  bit 
with  the  legs  at  the  command  of  execution,  the  rider  frequently 
shoves  his  hands  to  the  front  and  allows  the  reins  to  become  slack. 
When  the  reins  are  allowed  to  slacken  thus,  the  horse  usually  fails 
to  move  off  promptly,  and  when  he  does  it  is  in  a  sleepy  manner. 
This  is  one  of  the  most  difficult  faults  to  correct,  and  in  the  begin- 
ning requires  constant  attention.  Third,  because  lazy  horses  do 
not  respond  readily  to  calf  pressure.  With  them  the  rider  should 
open  out  the  legs  from  the  horse's  side  and  bring  them  back  witli 
several  smart  blows  of  the  calf,  or,  if  necessary,  of  the  heels  as  well. 
He  should  be  very  careful  to  relax  the  fingers  as  the  horse  moves  to 
the  front.  Such  horses  can  gradually  be  trained  to  respond  readily 
to  calf  pressure.  Fourth,  because  the  aids  are  not  applied  in  proper 
relationship.    A  few  minutes  should  then  be  spent  m  iadividual 


DECREASE  Ot  GAIT.  ^9 

instruction  of  the  men.  Fifth,  because  the  horse  is  not  siifBciently 
trained  to  appreciate  the  meaning  of  the  aids;  patience  and  carr^dng 
out  the  foregoing  hints  will  overcome  this  difficulty. 

THE   HANDS. 

270.  As  stated  under  ''Aids"  the  trooper  should  ride  with  a 
light  elastic  feel  of  the  bit  against  the  horse's  mouth.  This  is  called 
a  light  hand.  It  is  obtained  by  keeping  all  of  the  muscles  of  the 
arm,  hands,  and  fingers  elastically  relaxed.  The  hands  should  be 
perfectly  steady,  with  no  motion  of  the  shoulders  or  elbows.  The 
reins  should  be  held  in  the  hands  with  just  enough  elastic  contrac- 
tion of  the  fingers  and  thumbs  to  keep  them  from  slipping.  Such 
motion  as  is  necessary  to  follow  the  slightest  movements  of  the 
horse's  mouth  should  be  made  in  the  finger  and  wrist  joints  only. 

By  careful  insistence  upon  the  foregoing  the  troopers  will  rapidly 
acquire  light  hands;  steady  shoulders,  steady  hands,  and  relaxed 
fingers  should  be  demanded  of  them  at  all  times. 

A  few  men  in  seeking  light  hands  ride  with  loose  reins — ''no 
hand.'*  This  should  be  avoided  because,  the  rider  having  lost 
communication  with  the  horse's  mouth,  the  animal  is  not  under 
instant  control. 

TO   DECREASE   THE   GAlT. 

271.  The  fingers  should  be  relaxed  every  second  or  two.  The 
faster  the  gait  the  more  care  should  be  given  to  this  intermittent 
action. 

It  must  be  impressed  on  the  troopers  that  in  decreasing  the  gait 
a  maximum  pressure  of  the  legs  and  a  minimum  pressure  on  the 
mouth  must  be  used .  Pain  in  the  mouth  always  provokes  resistance 
to  the  bit,  and  the  horse  shows  this  resistance  by  shoving  his  nose 
out  and  setting  his  jaws  against  the  hand. 

272.  The  object  of  the  half -halt  is  to  diminish  the  pace  of  the 
horse,  to  improve  his  bearing  and  balance  during  movement,  to 
restore  lost  balance,  or  to  counteract  pulling  andnurrying  in  the 
gait. 

In  the  half-halts  the  rider  renews  pressure  with  the  legs  and 
increases  the  action  of  the  reins  as  if  to  bring  the  horse  to  a  stop. 
But,  through  vigorous  action  of  the  rider's  legs,  the  horse's  hind 
legs  are  kept  Weil  uiider  him  so  that  their  proper  impulse  is  main- 
tained.   Ill  this  way  the  horse  is  prevented  from  giving  up  tlie 


100  THE  GALLOP. 

impulse  of  the  hind  legs  and  losing  his  balance  under  the  indica- 
tions of  the  reins.  It  is  effected  according  to  need;  if  only  an 
improvement  in  bearing  is  aimed  at,  the  application  of  these  aids 
in  a  minor  degree  may  give  satisfactory  results. 

In  increasing  the  tension  on  the  reins  the  fingers  are  closed  and 
the  wrist  turned  from  below  upward  and  bent  from  front  to  rear, 
care  being  taken  not  to  lose  contact  with  the  mouth. 

TO    CHANGE    DIRECTION. 

273.  In  changing  direction  it  is  difficult  to  say  which  leg  the 
rider  uses  more  strongly,  as  it  depends  upon  the  speed,  the  size  of 
the  circle,  and  the  degree  of  training  of  the  horse.  The  horse's  body 
should  follow  approximately  the  curve  on  which  he  is  moving,  ft 
should  be  impressed  upon  the  trooper  that  the  legs  act  first  and  are 
the  principal  aids  in  turning;  that  the  secret  of  smooth  turning  is 
legs  well  back  and  horse  well  collected;  also,  that  the  horse's  head 
must  not  be  pulled  around  to  the  inside  with  the  inside  rein — a 
most  difficult  fault  to  correct. 


274.  A  few  steps  without  resistance  and  with  the  horse  under 
control  are  better  than  many  without  these  conditions.     Go  slowly. 

Care  should  be  taken  to  rein  in  as  a  fore  foot  is  to  move  and  to 
relax  only  slightly — not  sufficiently  to  allow  the  horse  to  stop  or  the 
reins  to  slacken. 

The  hoi-se  should  not  be  forced  back  when  he  is  rigid  and  set 
against  the  hand.  He  should  be  induced  to  move  slightly  to  the 
front,  or  to  move  the  haunches  to  one  side;  then  advantage  is  taken 
of  the  movement  to  try  again-  to  back  him. 

THE    GALLOP. 

275.  Take  the  trot,  and  gradually  increase  the  pace.  Place  tlie 
left  leg  well  in  rear  of  the  girth,  the  right  on  the  girth,  and  urge  the 
horse  quietly  forward  with  both  legs,  the  left  hand  lowered  a  little 
and  the  fingers  slightly  contracted  on  the  reins.  With  the  aids 
thus  applied  and  with  the  trot  gradually  increased  the  horse  should 
spring  into  the  gaUop  lead  right.  ^Vhen  the  horse  takes  the  correct 
leiid  he  should  be  held  at  a  free  gallop,  the  rider  maintaining  the 
aids  as  described,  so  as  to  keep  him  from  a  change  of  lead .     Troopers 


CHANGE  OF  LfiAto^JTirMPING.  101 

who  fail  to  obtain  the  gallop  le^d.riglvt^Jip^aM  Boir*^5(3  fc"  Bring  their 
horses  to  the  trot  promptly  and  start  over  again. 

Troopers  must  not  be  allowed  to  look  down  to  see  if  the  horse  is 
going  to  take  the  correct  lead,  for  if  they  do,  they  will  not  apply  the 
aids  correctly.  After  the  horse  has  actually  broken  into  the  gallop 
the  rider  can  glance  at  the  leading  shoulder  and  see  if  the  lead  is 
correct.  He  should,  however,  soon  get  out  of  this  habit,  and  learn 
to  feel  the  lead  the  horse  has.  If  the  horse  is  galloping  with  the  lead 
right,  it  is  easy  to  keep  the  left  leg  against  the  side  and  there  is  a 
strong  tendency  for  the  right  leg  to  fly  out  to  the  front.  Also,  the 
rider  will  feel  a  throw  in  the  saddle  from  left  to  right. 

Care  should  be  taken  in  closing  the  fingers  on  the  left  rein  that  the 
head  is  not  pulled  to  the  left. 

The  legs  induce  the  gallop,  the  hands  do  little  more  than  demand 
some  collection.  The  slower  the  trot,  however,  the  more  the  horse 
must  be  gathered  between  the  hands  and  legs. 

CHANGE    OF   LEAD  AT  THE   GALLOP. 

276.  To  change  the  lead  when  the  direction  of  the  curve  changes, 
the  trooper  applies  the  aids  for  the  lew  lead  just  as  the  horse  enters 
upon  the  change  of  direction — the  new  curve. 

There  will  be  little  trouble  in  getting  the  change  of  lead,  provided 
the  leg  aids  for  the  new  lead  are  firmly  applied  as  the  horse  enters 
the  new  curve. 

The  instructor  should  see  that  the  troopers  sit  up  and  apply  the 
leg  aids  without  interference  by  the  hands. 

JUMPING. 

277.  In  jumping  the  same  calmness  that  is  desired  in  all  other 
work  should  be  sought  in  both  men  and  horses.  Here  also  supple- 
ness is  the  secret  of  a  good  jumping  seat  and  hands. 

The  trooper  should  come  up  to  the  jump  with  an  elastic  hold  with 
his  legs,  to  include  the  calves,  the  buttocks  well  down  in  the  saddle, 
the  fingers  relaxed  on  the  reins  and  with  all  rigidity  out  of  the  back, 
shoulders,  and  arms,  so  that  the  body  from  the  hips  up  will  follow, 
the  movements  of  the  horse  without  affecting  the  legs,  which,  dur- 
ing the  entire  jump,  should  maintain  their  elastic  hold  on  the 
horse's  sides.  The  upper  portion  of  the  body  should  remain  verti- 
cal. This  will  require  a  slight  leaning  to  the  front  as  the  horse  rises 
to  the  jump  and  a  slight  swaying  to  the  rear  as  he  lands.    The  hands 


l^  TKAX>"1UQ  HEMOUNTS. 

shoul4rou{;^n  K.v:.>nd  tii^fii^gfjia  relaxed.  The  arma  should  yield 
as  the  hoi*se  extends  his' neck  to  jiimp.  If  this  does  not  give  suffi- 
cient rein,  the  horse  should  be  able  to  obtain  it  through  the 
relaxed  fingers. 

No  rushing  should  be  allowed.  When  the  horse  rushes  there  is  a 
great  tendency  to  grip  tlie  reins  in  an  effort  to  hold  him  as  the  jump 
is  approached.  No  matter  how  much  a  horse  rushes,  the  trooper 
must  be  taught  to  relax  the  fingers  by  the  time  he  arrives  within 
15  feet  of  the  obstacle. 

Everything  should  be  done  to  vary  the  type  and  location  of 
jumps  as  this  will  do  much  to  avoid  rushing. 

CAUTIONS. 

278.  All  roughness  with  horses  either  while  mounted  or  dis- 
mounted must  be  eliminated  and  men  taught  to  realize  that  the 
more  perfect  the  horseman  the  less  apparent  the  effort  to  control 
his  mount. 

Steadiness  of  elbows  and  shoulders  and  suppleness  of  the  muscles 
must  never  be  lost  sight  of  for  a  moment.  This  suppleness  is  the 
keynote  of  good  horsemanship.  The  natural  tendency  is  to  con- 
tract the  muscles  and  attempt  to  save  oneself  by  clutching  with  the 
hands.  The  horseman  must  overcome  these  impulses,  and  in  any 
sudden  movement  of  tlie  horse,  learn  to  relax  the  body  entirely; 
at  the  same  time  taking  an  elastic  hold  with  his  legs,  but  not  making 
any  special  contraction  of  the  fingers  on  the  reins.  This  instinctive 
contraction  is  the  hardest  of  all  to  overcome  and  often  takes  years  of 
practice. 

A  few  minutes'  riding  without  stirrups  should  be  had  daily;  no 
man  can  really  ride  who  is  not  perfectly  at  home  without  them.  In 
riding  without  stiiTups  the  legs  sliould  hang  well  down  and  in  rear 
of  the  stirrup  straps.  The  legs  must  not  be  gripped  tightly,  simply 
a  light,  elastic  feel.  The  muscles  of  all  the  rest  of  the  body,  espe- 
cially of  the  back  and  fingers,  must  be  relaxed  and  supple.  The 
reins  should  be  very  long  at  the  start.  The  riding  without  stir- 
rups should  not  be  continued  long  enough  to  tire  or  disgust  the 
men. 

TRAINING   REMOUNTS. 

279.  The  time  required  to  train  thoroughly  a  remount  for  the 
cavalry  service  depends  upon  so  many  conditions,  such  as  the  ani- 
mal's age,  condition,  temperament,  capacity,  and  conformation, 


TRAINING  REMOUNTS.  10$ 

and  the  skill,  zeal,  industry,  and  ability  of  instructors  and  riders, 
that  it  can  only  be  stated  approximately.  With  young  and  unde- 
veloped horses  two  >ears  can  be  profitably  employed.  Recourse 
should  then  be  had  to  a  more  extended  system  of  equitation  than 
can  well  be  embodied  in  these  regulations,  and  free  use  should  be 
made  of  the  knowledge  and  skill  of  the  graduates  of  the  Mounted 
Service  School.  But  in  emergencies,  such  as  preparation  for  war, 
mature  horses  of  good  conformation  and  in  excellent  condition  can 
be  molded,  in  about  three  months'  time,  under  competent  instruc- 
tors and  riders,  into  mounts  fulfilling  fairly  well  the  requirements 
of  the  trooper's  horse.  To  meet  such  emergencies,  the  following 
suggestions  are  given. 

280.  When  received  in  the  regiment  the  remounts  are  placed 
under  the  care  of  the  senior  veterinarian  and  isolated  for  the  mini- 
mum time  necessary.  They  are  then  distributed  to  the  squadrons. 
^  During  the  period  of  training  the  young  horse  should  alv/ays  be 
ridden  by  the  same  rider.  Training  takes  precedence  over  all  other 
squadron  work  except  the  instruction  of  reciniits.  For  this  reason 
tne  troopers  selected  for  it  should  be  relieved  from  guard  and  fatigue 
duty  during  the  period  of  training.  They  should  be  chosen  for  their 
love  of  horses  and  their  patience  and  gentleness.  All  concerned  in 
the  training  should  be  well  instructed  and  skilfull  riders  or  there  is 
no  hope  of  success. 

The  various  means  of  training  are  left  to  the  initiative  of  the  in- 
structor, but  they  should  all  be  based  upon  two  fundamental  prin- 
ciples— the  winning  of  the  horse's  confidence  and  a  methodical 
progression  on  the  part  of  the  rider,  founded  upon  the  association 
of  sensations.  He  should  never  lose  sight  of  the  benefit  to  be 
derived  from  a  training  that  progresses  methodically  and  without 
haste. 

The  best  test  of  the  instructor's  ability  is  the  condition  of  the 
horses,  the  cleanness  of  their  limbs,  and  their  temper  at  the  end 
of  their  training. 

The  instructor  should  constantly  bear  in  mind  these  precepts: 

Never  begin  work  without  being  absolutely  sure  of  what  is  to 
be  done. 

Proceed  in  the  horse's  education  from  the  known  to  the  unknown; 
from  the  simple  to  the  diflicult. 

Always  use  exactly  the  same  effects  to  obtain  the  same  results. 

Remember  that  in  the  execution  of  every  movement  position 
should  precede  action. 


104  THE  LOKGE. 

Never  ask  anything  of  a  horse  while  he  is  still  under  the  impres- 
sion of  a  preceding  movement. 

Never  combat  two  resistances  at  the  same  time. 

Never  attribute  to  ignorance  or  bad  temper  of  the  horse  the  con- 
sequences of  ignorance  or  lack  of  skill  on  the  part  of  the  rider. 

Introduce  the  new  features  near  the  end  of  a  lesson;  then  caress 
the  horse  and  dismount. 

It  is  pertinent  to  these  rules  to  remember  that  during  the  whole 
course  of  the  young  horse's  education  a  little  progress  every  day 
should  satisfy;  demand  that,  but  no  more. 

Remounts  are  not  to  be  considered  completely  trained  until 
they  are  able  to  execute  all  that  is  required  of  them  in  the  school 
of  the  trooper,  and  have  been  accustomed  to  firing,  to  the  music 
of  bands,  to  fluttering  of  flags  or  pennons,  and  all  the  other  sights 
and  sounds  peculiar  to  military  formations  and  evolutions.  Ad- 
vantage should  be  taken  of  every  opportunity  during  work  in  the 
open  to  curry  forward  this  training  of  the  horse  in  fearlessness  of 
sights  and  sounds  to  which  he  is  not  accustomed. 

281.  Work. — Work  is  most  important  in  training.  It  develops 
the  horse  and  keeps  his  health  and  temper  in  balance.  If  he  does 
not  work,  he  grows  fat  and  becomes  too  playful,  blemishes  him- 
self under  his  own  weight,  increased  by  his  rider's,  and  spoils  his 
mouth  by  struggling  against  the  hand.  Yet  he  should  be  in  rather 
high  condition. 

His  work  should  be  long  out  of  doors  (fully  an  hour  and  a  half) 
and  sliort  indoors  (not  more  than  a  half  hour  at  a  time). 

282.  Leading. — Leading  by  the  side  of  steady,  ola  horses  during 
the  first  days  is  an  excellent  exercise  for  remounts.  It  accustoms 
them  to  strange  objects  and  calms  them.  They  should  be  led  first 
on  one  hand  and  then  on  the  other,  so  that  the  neck  will  not  always 
be  bent  to  the  same  side. 

283.  The  longe. — All  horses  should  be  perfectly  trained  in 
work  on  the  longe. 

The  first  lessons  are  so  important  that  they  should  be  given  by 
the  instructor  himseh,  or  by  a  noncommissioned  oflicer  of  expe- 
rience and  proved  skill.  If  well  given,  only  a  few  of  short  duration 
will  be  necessary. 

The  cavesson  should  be  v^ide  enough  and  well  padded.  It 
should  be  adjusted  so  that  in  work  on  the  circle  the  eye  on  the 
aide  away  from  the  trainer  can  not  be  injured;  placed  high  enough 
not  to  hinder  breathing;  and  in  order  that  its  action  on  the  horse '§ 
no8«  may  not  be  violent,  it  should  not  have  too  much  play. 


THE  LONGE.  105 

The  driving  whip  is  held  in  the  right  hand  when  the  horse 
works  to  the  left  and  vice  versa,  the  butt  coming  out  on  the  side 
of  the  thumb.  It  is  kept  out  of  sight  as  much  as  possible,  and  only 
used  to  threaten  or  for  light  touches.  It  should  never  have  a  lash 
on  the  end. 

The  instructor  holds  the  longe  in  his  right  hand  about  18  inches 
from  the  horse's  head,  the  other  end  folded  (not  coiled)  in  con- 
venient lengths,  is  held  in  the  left  hand.  After  patting  the  horse 
he  moves  forward,  pulling  lightly  on  the  longe,  clucking  at  the 
same  time  to  the  horse;  he  moves  in  this  manner  with  the  horse 
around  the  riding  hall  or  inciosure  on  straight  lines  and  gradually 
sharpened  curves.  He  stops  frequently,  saying  "Whoa,"  pats 
the  horse  and  then  passes  to  the  right  side,  changes  the  longe  in 
his  hands  and  commences  the  same  work  to  the  right  hand.  When 
the  horse  moves  forward  at  the  cluck,  stops  at  command,  and  moves 
willingly  and  without  pulling,  the  instructor  stops  moving  on 
straight  lines,  lets  the  longe  slide  a  little,  and  puts  the  horse  on  a 
small  circle  of  about  2  yards  radius;  he  himself  moves  on  a  concen- 
tric circle,  a  little  in  rear  of  the  horse's  shoulders,  so  as  to  keep 
him  moving.  He  often  stops  the  horse,  goes  to  him  and  pats  him, 
and  then  moves  him  forward  again. 

The  horse  is  worked  on  the  circle  to  the  other  hand  in  the  same 
manner.  If  he  hesitates  to  move  forward,  the  instructor  slips  to 
the  rear  and  toward  the  croup,  while  yielding  the  hand  that  holds 
the  longe.  If  need  be,  an  assistant  may  help  him.  The  important 
thing  is  not  to  be  abrupt  with  the  horse,  and  not  to  frighten  him  and 
run  the  risk  of  making  him  pull. 

When  the  horse  moves  easily  and  quietly,  at  the  walk,  to  both 
hands,  on  the  small  circle,  the  rest  of  the  training  is  easy. 

The  instructor  makes  the  horse  take  the  trot,  and  then  the  gallop; 
to  quicken  the  gait  he  uses  the  voice  or  shows  the  whip;  at  first  he 
always  accompanies  the  horse  in  his  circular  movement,  keeping 
in  rear,  abreast  of  the  haunches;  if  he  wishes  to  stop  him  he  moves 
toward  the  shoulders  and  little  by  little  he  reduces  his  own  circle 
until  he  stands  still. 

The  length  of  the  radius  varies  with  the  increase  of  the  gait.  A 
slow  trot  on  a  small  circle  is  an  excellent  exercise  for  the  colt;  but 
the  extended  trot  and  the  gallop  on  a  cramped  circle  would  be 
dangerous  to  horses  whose  joints  are  not  strong. 

If  the  horse  tries  to  escape,  yield  slightly  to  his  movement,  then 
resist  with  the  hand  and  bring  him  back  little  by  little. 


106  SADDLING. 

If  he  stops,  point  the  whip  toward  the  croup  to  make  him  move 
forward;  if  he  cuts  in  on  the  circle  point  the  whip  toward  the  shoul- 
ders to  force  him  out. 

If  he  pulls  violently  on  the  longe  at  the  fast  gaits,  it  is  because 
the  instructor  has  proceeded  too  fast  in  the  beginning.  Rest  him 
often  and  begin  the  work  again  at  the  walk  and  slow  trot  on  the 
small  circle. 

The  early  lessons  may  be  made  easier  by  using  the  corners  of  the 
riding  hall.  The  wall  may  be  useful  in  stopping  a  horse  that  is 
out  of  hand.  The  voice,  loud  at  first,  should  find  the  same  obe- 
dience when  used  more  gently. 

The  longe  also  transmits  the  instmctor's  will;  by  light  horizontal 
oscillations,  the  horse  is  kept  from  the  center;  l^y  more  or  less  marked 
movements,  his  gait  is  slowed  or  he  is  stopped  when  he  does  not 
obey  the  voice. 

If  the  work  on  the  longe  has  been  well  directed,  the  horse  should 
be  calm  and  evenly  gaited  on  the  circle;  pass  freely  from  one  gait 
to  another  at  the  simple  indication  of  the  voice;  come  toward  or  go 
away  from  the  center  according  to  the  freedom  given;  in  a  word,  be 
on  the  hand  with  the  sliglitly^tretched  longe,  as  later  he  should 
be  with  a  light  tension  on  the  reins. 

284.  Saddling. — When  the  horse  is  quieted  by  work  and  per- 
fectly gentle  on  the  cavesson,  take  advantage  of  that  to  teach  him 
gradually  to  bear  the  girths — a  lesson  which,  if  given  in  the  stable, 
might  prove  difficult.  The  saddle  is  first  put  on  without  stirmps 
or  stirrup  straps;  the  girth,  quite  loose  at  first,  is  tightened  gradu- 
ally during  the  work.  When  the  horse  is  accustomed  to  the  con- 
tact of  saddle  and  girth,  the  stirrups  are  added  and  allowed  to  hang 
down  on  each  side  at  the  walk  and  trot.  He  is  thus  prepared  for 
the  mounting  lesson,  which  becomes  easy;  saddling  and  mounting 
a  young  horse  for  the  first  time  on  the  same  day  generally  arouses  his 
resistance. 

285.  Mounting  lesson. — The  instructor  selects,  according  to 
circumstances,  the  most  opportune  moment  for  giving  the  mount- 
ing lesson,  always  taking  advantage  of  the  calmness  from  fatigue 
at  the  end  of  the  period  of  instruction. 

This  lesson  may  also  be  given  during  the  work  on  the  longe,  but 
always  after  the  horse  has  been  quieted  by  exercise.  The  instructor 
personally  directs  the  first  lesson,  which  is  given  to  each  horse 
individually.  The  greatest  gentleness  and  patience  are  here 
necessary. 


MOUNTED  WORK.  107 

Accompanied  by  an  assistant,  carrying  a  measure  of  oats  if  need 
be,  he  places  himself  squarely  in  front  of  the  horse  and  pats  him, 
taking  hold  of  him  only  in  case  of  necessity;  the  rider  approaches 
the  horse's  head,  pats  him  on  the  forehead,  over  the  eyes,  on  the 
neck  and  haunches.  He  strikes  the  saddle,  lowers  and  raises  the 
stirrups,  then  takes  the  reins,  leaving  them  very  long.  He  mounts 
without  hurry  but  without  hesitation.  If,  during  the  lesson,  the 
horse  moves  out  of  place  or  backs  away,  he  goes  back  to  the  hea,d, 
draws  the  horse  forward  with  the  snaffle  reins  and  quietly  begins 
again. 

The  rider  in  putting  his  foot  in  the  stirrup  is  careful  to  pomt  his 
toe  down  and  not  to  touch  the  horse's  side;  this  might  disturb  him. 
He  should  not  stop  after  raising  himself  in  the  stirrup;  that  would 
break  the  equilibrium  and  run  counter  to  the  end  sought.  He 
should  use  his  right  hand  in  taking  the  right  stirrup;  in  feeling  for 
it  with  the  toe  he  may  frighten  the  horse. 

In  general,  he  should  avoid  putting  the  horse  in  march  as  soon  as 
he  is  in  the  saddle,  so  that  the  idea  of  the  forward  movement  will 
not  be  associated  in  the  horse's  brain  with  receiving  the  rider's 
weight. 

It  is  best  the  first  few  times  to  end  the  day's  work  with  the 
mounting  lesson  and  send  the  horse  to  the  stable  as  a  reward. 

If  a  horse  is  found  very  difficult,  the  instructor  immediately 
puts  him  back  on  the  cavesson. 

The  mounting  lesson  should  be  given  on  both  the  right  and 
left  sides.  This  instruction  of  the  colt  should  be  thorough.  Ab- 
solute docility  must  be  obtained  even  in  the  midst  of  noise  and 
movement.  However,  it  is  well  not  to  require  too  much  at  the 
very  beginning. 

286.  Training  to  bear  the  saber. — The  longe  may  be  utilized 
to  accustom  the  colt  to  the  saber.  As  with  all  new  requirements, 
ii  is  wise  to  wait  until  the  close  of  work  to  give  the  lesson. 

Only  the  scabbard  is  put  on  at  first.  When  the  horse  bears 
it  without  fear  the  blade  is  added,  and  he  is  then  exercised  at 
the  various  gaits.  This  work,  it  is  understood,  is  interspersed 
with  halts,  caresses,  and  frequent  rests. 

This,  however,  is  only  a  step  toward  the  series  of  exercises 
during  work  on  the  road  which  accustom  the  horse  to  the  saber. 

287.  Mounted  work. — It  is  carried  on  both  out  of  doors  and 
ii^  the  riding  hall.  As  soon  as  the  young  horse  accepts  his  rider 
his  conditioning  should  be  begun  and  continued  without  inter 


108  BENDING  EXERCISES. 

raption,  and,  whenever  possible,  take  place  out  of  doors.  Al- 
though the  young  horse  acquires  his  full  strength  most  rapidly 
in  the  fresh  air  and  on  straight  lines,  the  first  lessons  should  be 
given  in  the  riding  hall  to  enable  the  instnictor  to  exercise  closer 
watch,  to  study  better  the  men  and  horses,  and  to  avoid  the  always 
possible  accidents. 

The  mingling  of  old  horses  with  the  remounts  has  a  very  good 
influence  at  the  beginning. 

The  riding  hall  is  used  also  when  the  weather  requires  it.  Ad- 
vantage should  be  taken  of  the  opportunity  to  give  the  remounts 
the  Gist  lessons  of  the  aids. 

288.  First  lessons  of  aids. — This  preliminary  education  is 
quite  necessary  to  permit  the  horse  to  be  handled  out  of  doors. 
It  consists  in  teaching  him  to  move  forward  at  the  call  of  the  legs, 
to  slow  up  and  stop  at  the  pressure  of  the  legs  and  tension  on 
tlie  reins,  and  to  turn  under  their  action. 

289.  Movement. — The  basis  of  all  training  is  freedom  in  the  for- 
ward movevient.  From  the  first  the  horse  must  be  taught  to  respond 
to  tlie  legs. 

290.  Bending  exercises. — To  place  the  horse's  head  in  position 
(to  arch  his  neck  correctly),  the  trainer  standing  near  the  horse's  right 
sPioulder  takes  the  right  rein  in  the  left  hand  and  the  left  rein  in  the 
right  hand,  the  hands  about  4  inches  from  the  snafile,  plays  with  the 
bit  and  gently  draws  in  the  reins  toward  the  withers  as  the  horse 
drops  his  nose.  When  the  horse  relaxes  his  lower  jaw  by  opening 
the  mouth  and  carries  in  his  head  so  that  his  face  is  nearly  per- 
pendicular to  the  ground  and  his  muzzle  level  with  the  upper 
part  of  his  shoulder,  the  trainer  relaxes  the  reins  and  makes  much 
of  him. 

To  bend  the  neck  to  the  right: 

The  horse's  head  being  in  position,  the  trainer  (dismounted) 
gently  drawing  in  on  the  right  rein,  carries  the  horse's  head  a 
little  to  the  right,  the  left  hand  supporthig  the  effects  of  the  right. 
The  horse's  head  should  be  kept  at  the  same  height.  The  trainer 
should  be  contented  with  a  little  progress  at  each  lesson.  Grad- 
ually and  with  the  greatest  patience  and  gentleness  the  horse 
is  brought  to  carry  his  head  around  90°,  his  face  still  remaining 
nearly  perpendicular  to  the  ground  and  his  muzzle  at  the  height 
of  the  upper  part  of  the  shoulder.  The  neck  should  not  only 
be  flexed  (arched)  at  the  poll  but  also  bent  to  the  right  (always 
at  the  poll). 


THE  TURNINGS.  109 

The  horse's  head  should  invariably  be  brought  back  into  position; 
the  movement  is  made  smoothly  and  without  haste,  the  hands 
regulating.     The  horse  is  then  caressed. 

These  supplings  are  repeated  mounted  as  soon  as  the  horse 
understands  what  is  wanted. 

291.  To  turn  on  tlie  forehand.— 1.  On  the  forehand,  2.  To 
the  right,  3.  MARCH.  At  the  first  command,  gather  the  horse 
and  get  him  well  between  the  hands  and  legs;  at  the  third  com- 
mand, slip  the  right  leg  slightly  to  the  rear,  heel  well  shoved  down, 
and  increase  its  pressure  until  the  horse  yields  and  moves  his 
haunches  a  step  to  the  left,  then  slightly  relax  the  pressure  to 
reward  him  for  his  obedience;  apply  again,  and  relax  until  the 
horse  has  completed  the  movement  step  by  step.  The  horse's 
neck  must  be  held  straight  and  he  must  be  held  in  place  by  the 
reins  and  left  leg,  which  acts  with  a  good  pressure  at  the  girth. 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  trooper  does  not  pull  the  horse's 
head  around  with  the  right  rein;  also  that  the  left  leg  is  held  well 
against  the  horse's  side,  so  as  to  steady  his  movements,  prevent 
him  from  ba<:king,  from  swinging  his  haunches  faster  or  farther 
than  is  desired,  and  keej)  him  well  collected  and  ready  to  move 
to  the  front  promptly,  as  is  necessary  in  wheeling  by  fours. 

Horses  which  do  not  yield  to  pressure  of  the  leg  may  be  made 
to  do  so  by  tapping  the  leg  against  the  side. 

Many  old  horses  have  contracted  the  habit  of  fighting  the  spur 
when  applied  and  swing  against  the  leg.  If  the  trooper  is  careful  to 
press  and  relax  at  each  step  the>  will  usually  give  up  the  habit. 

In  obstinate  cases  the  leg  caii  be  reinforced  by  light  taps  of  the 
whip  just  in  rear  of  the  applied  leg.  The  taps  should  cease  as  soon 
as  the  horse  yieds  the  haunches;  then  start  again  for  another  step. 

This  movement  should  not  be  practiced  a  great  deal  with  young 
horses,  or  with  those  which  do  not  promptly  go  up  against  the  bit 
when  the  legs  are  closed  to  move  them  to  the  front. 

292.  To  turn  on  the  haunches. — 1.  On  haunches,  2.  To  the 
right,  3.  MABCH.  At  the  first  command,  gather  the  horse  well. 
At  the  command  march,  carry  the  right  hand  slightly  to  the  right 
so  as  to  lead  the  forehand  a  step  in  that  direction.  At  the  same 
time  slip  the  left  leg  slightly  to  the  rear  and  increase  its  pressure 
sufficiently  to  keep  the  haunches  in  place.  As  the  horse  moves  the 
forehand  in  response  to  the  opening  out  of  the  right  rein,  bring  the 
left  rein  into  play  by  contracting  the  fingers  on  it,  the  tension 
being  in  the  direction  of  the  right  hock.    The  right  leg  must  be 


110  TWO-TRACKS. 

held  close  to  the  side  to  steady  the  horse  and  keep  him  from  back- 
ing. The  rider's  weight  is  carried  slightly  toward  the  right  hind 
leg.  As  the  forehand  moves  to  the  action  of  the  reins,  the  fingers 
are  slightly  relaxed  as  a  reward  and  contracted  again  for  another 
step. 

See  that  the  rider's  legs  and  weight  are  placed  as  described,  for 
there  is  a  tendency  to  carry  the  legs  away  from  the  sides;  and  also 
that  the  contraction  of  the  fingers  on  the  left  rein  does  not  become 
a  pull,  causing  the  horse  to  back  or  to  bend  the  neck  to  the  left. 
Be  satisfied  with  a  few  steps  at  first. 

293.  Backing. — In  obstinate  cases  do  a  little  work  dismounted. 
Stand  facing  the  horse's  head,  a  snaflie  rein  in  each  hand.  Start 
to  lead  the  horse  forward  and,  just  as  he  moves,  press  him  to  the 
rear  with  the  bit.  Relax  slightly  and  press  him  again  as  each 
forefoot  is  to  be  moved.  If  the  horse  fails  to  move  a  foot,  stepping 
on  it  will  cause  him  to  do  so. 

294.  Two-tracks. — In  this  movement  the  shoulders  and 
haunches  follow  two  parallel  tracks.  When  executed  to  the  right 
the  left  feet  cross  in  front  of  the  right  feet,  or  conversely  when 
executed  to  the  left. 

It  is  obtained  by  the  action  of  the  left  rein  against  the  neck  and 
pressure  of  the  left  leg  against  the  horse's  side  sUghtly  in  rear  of 
the  girth;  the  shoulders  and  haunches  are  thus  pushed  toward  the 
right  and  the  curve  of  the  horse's  body  is  convex  toward  the  side 
to  which  he  moves;  his  motion  is  in  a  direction  oblique  to  that  in 
which  he  is  facing.  If,  however,  it  is  desired  to  continue  along 
the  original  path  in  two  tracks  the  horse  is  first  placed  slightly 
across  it.     He  must  be  held  well  between  the  hands  and  legs. 

All  two-track  movements  are  very  fatiguing  to  the  young  horse 
and  should  not  be  prolonged  beyond  a  few  steps.  Undue  persis- 
tence would  make  him  refuse;  he  would  strike  his  j)astern  joints 
while  crossing  his  feet  and  would  resist  to  escape  pain  caused  by 
the  blows. 

The  movement  should  not  be  required  along  a  wall,  for  the  horse 
would  depend  upon  it  for  guidance  instead  of  upon  the  aids. 
Besides,  through  fear  of  striking  the  wall,  horses  frequently  hesitate 
to  pass  the  foot  nearest  the  wall  in  front  of  the  other  foot. 

The  terms  viside  and  outside  when  used  to  refer  to  the  horse's 
shoulder,  leg,  or  foot  in  the  two-track  and  shoulder-in  are  to  be 
understood  to  mean  that  member  v/hich  is  on  the  corresj)onding 
side  of  the  curve  formed  by  th6  horse's  body  in  executing  the 


SHOTTLDEE-IN. 


Ul 


Leff^oMer/h 


movement  and  not  to  refer  to  their  situation  with  reference  to  the 
wall  of  the  inclosure,  or  the  curve  on  which  the 
horse  is  progressing:. 

Whichever  be  the  hand  toward  which  the 
trooper  is  moving  the  horse  may  thus  be  placed 
and  worked  either  with  the  right  or  left 
shoulder  in. 

295.  Shoulder-in. — If  the  displacement 
of  the  forehand  in  two-tracks  is  slightly  ac- 
centuated by  the  hand  and  leg,  the  horse 
passes  from  ''two-tracks"  to  ''shoulder-in." 
The  movement  is  executed  bv  the  com- 
mands: RIGHT  SHOULDER  IN, 
STRAIGHTEN;  LEFT  SHOULDER 
IN,    STRAIGHTEN. 

To  place  the  horse  in  right  shoulder-in,  and 
work  him  in  the  most  favorable  attitude,  the 
shoulders  are  moved  off  the  line  of  march  by 
the  action  of  the  right  rein  (open  rein),  as- 
sisted by  the  leg  on  the  same  side;  this  puts 
the  horse  in  the  first  step  of  a  turn.  As  soon 
as  he  is  in  this  oblique  and  curved  position, 
the  line  of  direction  previously  followed  is 
taken  again,  all  the  while  keeping  the  horse 
bent  and  crossing  his  feet.  The  right  rein, 
now  a  bearing  rein,  acting  in  the  direction 
of  the  left  haunch,  bends  the  neck  to  the 
right  and  pushes  the  horse's  whole  body  to 
the  left  along  the  original  line  of  progression. 
The  right  leg  acting  slightly  in  rear  of  the 
girth  also  aids  in  moving  the  haunches  to  the 
left.  The  left  hand  after  having  yielded 
limits  the  bend  of  the  neck,  strengthens  the 
action  of  the  right  rein,  and  also  draws  the 
forehand  to  the  left;  the  left  leg  acts  on  the 
girth  to  keep  up  the  forward  movement. 

This  exercise  gives  the  horse  suppleness 
and  great  freedom  of  all  parts  of  the  body,    c,  ■j.t-j.    l     i^ 
At  the  trot  it_  is  the  best  of   all  gymnastic  /^^g^^  S/?ou/<:/er  m 
exercises.     It  is  easy  to  execute  and  its  re- 
sults are  excellent  and  quick.    The  movement  at  the  gallop  is  of 
little  value  in  suppling. 


112  OBSTACLES. 

It  is  given  on  the  circle  at  first.  Little  by  little  the  horse  is  made 
to  understand  it  by  carrying  him  off  the  circle  a  few  steps,  and  then 
after  caressing,  straightening  him  and  beginning  again.  As  soon  as 
he  understands  what  is  required  and  the  movement  is  well  executed 
at  a  walk,  it  is  repeated  at  the  trot. 

It  should  not  be  executed  on  the  track;  for  the  horse,  attracted 
by  the  latter,  seeks  to  return  to  it,  and  consequently  only  bends  his 
neck  instead  of  yielding  his  shoulders,  the  very  opposite  of  the 
object  sought. 

For  good  execution  of  the  movement  the  hand  holding  the  inside 
slioulder  in  should  act  rather  steadily  on  a  short  rein  and  not  by 
pulling  from  front  to  rear. 

The  horse  should  be  frequently  exercised  in  the  shoulder-in,  care 
being  taken  to  alternate  the  shoulders  and  to  move  to  the  front  for 
several  steps  between  the  changes.  The  supplings  must  last  a 
very  short  time  only, 

296.  Gallop. — With  some  old  horses  which  have  habitually  gal- 
loped with  one  lead  it  will  be  very  difficult  to  get  the  other  lead. 
In  these  cases,  or  when  time  is  too  limited  to  practice  proper  metli- 
ods,  the  following  rough  method  will  serve  the  purpose: 

If  the  horse  habitually  gallops  lead  left  and  a  lead  right  is  desired, 
take  a  good  extended  trot  on  the  right  hand,  approach  the  knee 
guard  of  the  riding  hall  at  an  angle  of  about  45°  with  the  horse  well 
up  against  the  bit,  and  just  as  the  horse  reaches  the  guard  kick  hard 
with  the  left  heel  and  let  him  move  along  the  track  to  the  right  at 
the  gallop.  In  all  probability  the  lead  right  will  be  had;  if  so, 
maintain  it  for  some  time,  using  the  correct  aids.  A  few  of  these 
lessons  will  be  sufficient. 

297.  Obstacles. — The  longe  should  be  used  in  the  young  horse's 
first  lessons  in  jumping.  The  obstacles  should  in  the  beginning  be 
low,  and  be  gradually  increased  to  about  3  feet  in  height  as  the 
horse  gains  in  strength  and  cleverness.  When  he  has  become 
thoroughly  obedient  and  willing  he  should  be  led  in  the  open  over 
varied  obstacles  such  as  ditches,  little  brooks,  up  and  down  steep 
slopes,  etc.  Horses  should  be  taught  to  lead  freely  under  all  con- 
ditions. 

CAUTIONS. 

298.  If  suppleness  is  obtained  in  the  man,  then  with  training, 
suppleness  and  willing  obedience  will  be  obtained  in  the  horse. 
Suppleness  is  a  necessity  for  a  good  seat  and  light  hands.    Light 


CAUTIONS.  ^^* 

hands  are  a  necessity  for  relaxed  muscles  of  the  jaw,  poll,  and  neck. 
These  are  necessary  for  lightness  and  willing  obedience  in  the  horse. 

Quiet  halts  by  use  of  the  legs  and  weight  of  the  body  with  relaxed 
fingers  will  gradually  teach  the  horse  to  halt  without  setting  the 
jaw  against  the  hand. 

Moving  to  the  front  promptly  again  will  produce  responsiveness 
to  the  legs. 

These  halts  can  be  reduced  gradually  to  half -halts  and  finally  to 
forward  and  backward  movements,  reciprocally  following  each 
other  for  a  few  steps  in  each  direction  only.  This  will  develop 
great  lightness  and  balance.  The  forward  and  backward  or  half- 
halt  and  forward  movements  should  merge  into  each  other  so 
smoothly  that  there  is  no  perceptible  abruptness.  Suppleness, 
limbering  up,  free  play  of  the  shoulders,  and  engaging  of  the 
haunches  can  be  developed  by  work  on  circles,  serpentines,  and 
figures  of  eight. 

Steadiness  will  be  developed  by  long,  well-cadenced  trots. 

Quietness  will  come  with  even  gaits  and  long,  swinging  gallops, 

34396*°— 1 


CARE  OF  HORSES. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

299.  A  most  important  duty  of  the  cavalry  officer  is  keeping  his 
horses  in  such  training  and  health  as  will  enable  them  to  do  their 
work  to  the  best  advantage.  The  proper  performance  of  this  duty 
requires  careful  instruction  of  the  men  in  the  treatment,  stabling, 
management,  watering,  feeding,  grooming,  and  exercising  of  the 
horses,  and  such  continuous  supervision  and  inspection  by  officers 
as  will  insure  that  instructions  are  understood  and  are  being  carried 
out. 

Cavalry  officers  should  make  themselves  thoroughly  acquainted 
with  the  natural  history  and  physiology  of  the  horse,  and  with  the 
effects  of  different  methods  of  treatment,  changes  of  diet,  etc.,  upon 
his  system  and  powers  of  endurance. 

They  should  have  a  familiar  knowledge  of  the  symptoms  and 
methods  of  treatment  of  the  diseases  that  are  common  to  horses, 
whatto  do  in  emergencies,  and  a  good  knowledge  of  the  effects  of 
the  medicines  supplied  to  the  squadron.  They  should  also  be 
practically  familiar  with  the  principles  of  horseshoeing. 

Sore  backs  are.  as  a  rule,  the  result  of  carelessness  or  neglect;  the 
immediate  cause  may  be  faulty  adjustment  of  the  saddle  or  equip- 
ment or  bad  riding. 

At  each  halt  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  should  inspect 
the  adjustment  of  saddles  and  equipment  of  their  men  and  should 
at  no  time  tolerate  lounging  in  the  saddle. 

Horses  when  received  in  the  regiment  are  assigned  to  squadrons 
according  to  color,  under  direction  of  the  commanding  officer. 
They  are  branded  on  the  hoof  of  one  fore  foot  with  the  letter  of  the 
squadron  and  the  number  of  the  regiment  on  the  same  line;  as  D  7. 
Their  purchase  number  is  found  tatooed  on  the  inside  of  the 
upper  lip. 

Captains  make  permanent  assignments  of  horses;  after  a  horse  is  so 
assigned,  his  rider  will  not  exchange  him  nor  allow  him  to  be  used 
by  any  other  person  without  permission. 

114 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  115 

RULES  FOR  THE  CARE  OP  HORSES. 

300.  All  troopers  must  be  taught  and  must  thoroughly  under- 
stand the  following  rules  for  the  care  of  horses: 

Horses  require  gentle  treatment.  Docile  but  bold  horses  are  apt 
to  retaliate  upon  those  who  abuse  them,  while  persistent  kindness 
often  reclaims  vicious  animals. 

Before  entering  a  horse's  stall  and  when  coming  up  behind  him, 
speak  to  him  gently,  then  approach  quietly. 

Never  kick,  strike  about  the  head,  or  otherwise  abuse  a  horse. 

Never  punish  a  horse  except  at  the  time  he  commits  an  offense, 
and  then  only  in  a  proper  manner. 

Give  the  horse  an  opportunity  to  drink  before  leaving  the  picket 
line  or  stable,  and  before  putting  the  bit  in  his  mouth.  In  cold 
weather  warm  the  bit  before  putting  it  in  the  horse's  mouth. 

Never  take  a  rapid  gait  until  the  horse  has  been  warmed  by  gentle 
exercise. 

When  a  horse  is  brought  to  the  stable  or  picket  line  in  a  heated 
condition,  never  allow  him  to  stand  uncovered;  put  a  blanket  on 
him  and  rub  his  legs,  or  walk  him  until  he  is  cool.  If  he  is  wet,  put 
him  under  shelter,  not  in  a  draft,  and  rub  him  with  a  wisp  until  dry. 

Never  feed  grain  to  a  horse  when  heated.  Hay  will  not  hurt  a 
horse  however  heated  he  may  be. 

Never  water  a  horse  when  heated,  unless  the  exercise  or  march 
is  to  be  immediately  resumed.  Sponging  out  the  mouth  and  nos- 
trils is  refreshing  to  the  heated  horse  and  will  not  hurt  him. 

Never  throw  water  on  any  part  of  a  horse  when  heated. 

Never  allow  a  horse's  back  to  be  cooled  suddenly.  To  cool  the 
back  gradually,  remove  the  blanket  and  replace  it  with  the  dry 
side  next  the  horse,  and  replace  the  saddle,  girthing  it  loosely. 

Never  put  the  horse  up  for  the  night  until  he  is  thoroughly  clean, 
especially  around  his  legs,  pasterns,  and  feet. 

Individual  men  returning  from  mounted  duty  or  pass  will  report 
their  return  to  the  noncommissioned  ofhcer  in  charge  of  stables,  who 
will  inspect  each  horse  and  see  that  he  is  properly  cared  for. 

STABLES  AND    STABLE   MANAGEMENT. 

301.  Foul  air  and  dampness  are  the  causes  of  many  diseases  of 
the  horse;  hence  the  importance  and  economy  of  spacious,  clean, 
dry,  and  well-ventilated  stables. 


116  STABLE  MAliAGEMENT. 

The  picket  line  should  be  established  in  the  immediate  vicinity 
of  the  stable.  The  floor  of  the  picket  line  should  be  raised,  and 
trenches  to  carry  off  the  rain  should  be  provided,  so  that  the  ground 
upon  which  the  horses  stand  may  be  kept  dry. 

Paddocks,  with  shade  and  water,  should  be  provided  near  the 
stables;  if  there  is  no  shade,  shelter  from  the  sun  should  be  ex- 
temporized. The  picket  line  and  paddock  should  be  sprinkled  to 
keep  down  the  dust;  crude  oil  may  be  used  to  advantage.  Bed- 
ding racks  should  be  provided  near  each  stable. 

The  horses  are  assigned  stalls  and  places  on  the  picket  line  by 
platoons,  and  as  nearly  as  practicable  according  to  their  usual  place 
in  ranks.  The  name  and  hoof  number  of  the  horse  with  the  name 
of  his  rider  is  placed  over  the  stall. 

The  stable  sergeant  takes  immediate  charge  of  the  stables,  picket 
line  and  paddock,  forage,  and  stable  property  in  general. 

The  stable  sergeant  is  responsible  tliat  the  stables  and  their  sur- 
roundings are  kept  at  all  times  thoroughly  policed  and  free  from 
smells;  he  is  usually  assisted  by  one  or  more  stable  orderlies. 

Sufficient  men  are  detailed  as  stable  police  to  perform  the  general 
police  and  except  at  night  to  collect  all  manure  as  soon  as  it  is 
dropped,  either  in  stables,  on  the  picket  line,  or  in  the  paddocks. 
The  stable  police  also  assist  in  the  feeding,  watering,  and  bedding  of 
the  horses. 

Manure  and  foul  litter  must  not  be  allowed  to  accumulate  in  or 
near  the  stables,  but  must  be  carried  to  the  manure  heap  daily. 

In  the  morning,  stalls  are  cleaned  and  the  stables  policed  under 
direction  of  the  stable  sergeant. 

The  bedding  is  taken  up,  carefully  shaken  out,  and  sorted.  All 
parts  of  the  bedding  which  can  be  used  again  are  taken  to  the 
bedding  racks  and  spread  thereon  for  a  thorough  drying;  parts 
which  can  not  be  used  again  are  sent  to  the  manure  heap.  Special 
attention  is  necessary  in  this  matter,  as  the  allowance  of  straw  is 
insufficient  under  most  favorable  conditions.  In  the  evening  the 
dried  bedding,  mixed  with  such  fresh  straw  or  bedding  as  may  be 
necessary,  is  laid  down.  The  bed  must  be  soft  and  even,  with  the 
thickest  part  toward  the  manger. 

If  practicable,  all  woodwork  within  reach  of  the  horses  should  be 
protected  with  sheet  metal  or  pamted  with  a  thin  coat  of  gas  tar; 
other  woodwork  and  brick  should  be  painted  a  light  shade  and 
then  kept  clean  and  free  from  dust. 

Feed  boxes  must  be  kept  clean;  they  should  be  washed  from 
time  to  time  with  dilute  vinegar  and  always  after  feeding  bran 
mash  or^other  soft  food. 


GROOMING.  117 

During  the  day,  except  in  very  cold  or  stormy  weather,  the 
horses,  when  not  being  used  or  fed,  should  stand  at  the  picket  line 
or  in  the  paddocks.  In  hot  climates,  however,  if  there  is  not  suffi- 
cient shade  on  the  picket  line  or  in  the  paddocks,  it  is  better  to 
keep  the  horses  in  the  stables  during  the  heat  of  the  day. 

Smoking  in  the  stables  is  prohibited. 

One  or  more  covered  lights  should  be  provided  in  the  stables  at 
night. 

STABLE   DUTY. 

302.  Captains  are  responsible  for  the  proper  performance  of 
stable  duty.  In  addition  to  the  grooming,  they  will  require  such 
other  duty  as  may  be  necessary  to  keep  the  stables,  horses,  and 
equipment  in  proper  condition. 

Mounted  work  must  be  followed  immediately  by  "stables";  the 
horses  are  then  thoroughly  groomed,  the  saddlery  cleaned  and  put 
away  in  perfect  order. 

All  squadron  officers  will  be  present  at  this  time,  the  platoon 
leaders  superintending  the  work  of  their  platoons. 

The  horses  should  also  be  brushed  off  before  going  out  to  drill  or 
jrcise  in  the  morning,  and  in  the  evening  before  being  led  in. 


GROOMING. 


303.  Grooming  is  essential  to  the  general  health  and  condition 
of  the  domesticated  horse.  Horses  improperly  groomed,  with 
ragged  manes,  unkempt  pasterns,  and  feet  improperly  looked  after, 
are  an  indication  of  an  inefficient  organization.  Clean  horses  prop- 
\  erly  equipped  and  smartly  turned  out  add  to  the  esprit  of  an  organ- 
ization and  give  a  fair  indication  of  its  discipline  and  efficiency. 

The  grooming  is  done  by  platoon,  under  the  supervision  of  the 
platoon  commander  and  the  platoon  sergeant,  assisted  by  the  non- 
commissioned officers  of  the  platoon. 

It  is  not  to  be  done  in  a  formal  or  routine  manner  but  in  such  a 
way  as  to  bring  results.  Unless  it  is  done  in  the  stable,  or  where 
there  will  be  danger  of  fire,  the  men  will  be  allowed  to  smoke,  and 
cheerful  but  not  disorderly  conversation  will  be  encouraged. 
When  a  trooper  has  finished  his  work  and  it  has  been  inspected,  he 
should  be  allowed  to  attend  to  other  duties  or  be  dismissed. 

According  to  circumstances,  the  platoon  or  the  squadron  may 
be  marched  to  or  from  the  stables  or  the  men  may  be  allowed  to  go 
and  return  individually. 


1^  GROOMING. 

On  returning  from  a  drill  or  exercise,  and  usually  in  the  field, 
the  horses  are  unbridled,  girths  are  loosened,  and  they  are  watered 
and  fed.  The  men  are  then  free  to  put  on  stable  clothes,  relieve 
themselves,  and  prepare  for  the  work  of  grooming  and  to  care  for 
their  equipments  while  the  horses'  backs  are  being  cooled  under 
the  pressure  of  the  saddle.  The  men  then  begin  their  stable  work 
comfortably  and  deliberately. 

The  captain  or  the  officer  in  charge  supervises  generally  the 
grooming  and  care  of  saddlery  of  the  platoons,  holding  the  platoon 
commander  responsible  and  calling  his  attention  to  any  deficien- 
cies or  neglects. 

The  first  sergeant  assists  the  captain  or  officer  in  charge  in  coor- 
dinating the  work  of  the  platoons  and  stable  force. 

The  horses  of  the  officers,  of  the  first  sergeant,  and  of  the  four 
platoon  sergeants  are  groomed  by  designated  troopers.  All  other 
noncommissioned  officers  and  men  groom  their  own  mounts.  Extra 
horses  and  those  whose  riders  are  absent  are  groomed  by  men 
assigned  to  the  work  by  the  platoon  sergeant. 

The  principal  use  of  the  currycomb  is  to  clean  the  brush,  and  for 
this  purpose  a  piece  of  hard  wood  with  channels  along  its  surface 
answers  equally  well. 

The  currycomb  should  never  be  used  on  the  legs  from  the  knees 
and  hocks  downward  nor  about  the  head,  and  when  occasionally 
required  to  loosen  dried  mud  or  matted  hair  on  the  fleshy  parts  of 
the  body  it  must  be  applied  gently. 

To  groom  the  horse  proceed  as  follows: 

Take  the  currycomb  in  the  right  hand,  fingers  over  back  of 
comb,  and  the  brush  in  the  left  hand;  first  clean  the  legs  of  the 
near  side,  then  take  the  currycomb  in  the  left  hand  and  the  brush 
in  the  right  and  clean  the  legs  of  the  off  side.  The  legs  will  thus 
have  time  to  dry  while  the  rest  of  the  grooming  is  being  done. 
Next  return  to  the  near  side,  change  the  brush  and  comb  into  the 
other  hands  and  begin  brushing  at  the  upper  part  of  the  neck,  the 
mane  being  thrown  to  the  other  side  out  of  the  way;  thence  proceed 
to  the  chest,  shoulders,  back,  belly,  flanks,  loins,  and  rump.  The 
principal  working  of  the  brush  should  follow  the  direction  of  the 
hair,  but  in  places  difficult  to  clean  it  may  be  necessary  to  brush 
against  it,  finishing  by  leaving  the  hair  smooth.  After  every  few 
strokes  clean  the  brush  from  dust  with  the  currycomb. 

In  using  the  brush  the  man  should  stand  well  away  from  the 
horse,  should  keep  his  arm  stiff,  and  should  throw  the  weight  of 
the  body  against  the  brush. 


GKOOMING. 

Points  of  the  Horse.        %^JA 


119 


Heaa, 

,  Muzzle. 
,  Nostril. 
,  Forehead. 
,  Jaw. 
,  Poll. 

Xeck. 

,  6,  Crest. 

,  Throttle  or  wind- 
pipe. 


Fore  quarter. 

,  Shoulder  blade. 
Point  of  shoulder. 
Bosom  or  breast. 
11.  True  arm. 
Elbow. 

Forearm  (arm). 
Knee. 

Cannon  bone. 
Back  sinew. 


8,8, 


17,  Fetlock  or  past  ern 

joint. 

18,  Coronet. 

19,  Hoof  or  foot. 

20,  Heel. 

JSody  or  middle  piece. 

21,  Withers. 

22,  Back. 

23,  23,  Ribs  (forming 

together  the 
barrel  orchest). 
21,  24,  The  circumfer- 
ence of  the 
chest  at  this 
point,  called 
the  girth. 

25,  The  loins. 

26,  Tl)e  croup. 

27,  The  hip. 

28,  The  flank. 

29,  Sheath. 


30,  The   rf>ot  of   the 

dock  or  tail. 

Hind  quarter. 

31,  The     hip     joint, 

round, or  whirl- 
bone. 

32,  The  stifle  joint. 

33,  33,  Lower  thigh  or 

ga^kiii. 

34,  The  quarters. 
36,  The  hock. 

36,  The  point  of  the 

hock. 

37,  The  curb  place. 

38,  The  cannon  bone. 

39,  The  back  sinew. 

40,  Pastern  or  fetlock 

joint. 

41,  Coronet. 

42,  Hoof  or  foot. 

43,  Heel. 

44,  Spavin  place. 


120  GROOMING. 

'    Having  finished  the^near  side,  again  take  the  brush  in  the  right 
hand  and  the  currycomb  in  tlie  left  hand  and  begin  on  the  off  side. 

Having  done  with  the  brush,  rub  or  dust  off  the  horse  with  the 
grooming  cloth,  wipe  about  the  face,  eyes,  and  nostrils,  arrange  the 
mane  and  tail,  and  clean  the  dock.  Finally  go  over  the  legs  once 
more  and  clean  out  the  hoofs.  In  cleaning  the  mane  and  tail  begin 
brushing  at  the  end  of  the  hair  and  gradually  work  up  to  the  roots, 
separating  the  locks  with  the  fingers  so  as  to  get  out  all  scurf  and 
dirt.  Tails  require  frequent  washing  with  warm  water  and  soap. 
The  skin  under  the  flank  and  between  the  hind  quarters  must  be 
soft,  clean,  and  free  from  dust. 

Currycombs,  cards,  or  common  combs  must  never  be  applied  to 
the  mane  or  tail;  the  brush,  fingers,  and  cloth  are  freely  used  on 
both. 

The  wisp  is  used  when  the  horse  comes  in  wet  and  also  for  stimu- 
lating the  coat.  It  is  made  by  twisting  or  plaiting  straw  into  a 
rope.  The  ends  are  then  bent  together,  cut  off  square,  and  rubbed 
on  a  board  until  they  form  a  soft,  even  straw  brush. 

The  wisp  should  be  worked  foi-^^^ard  and  backward  well  into  the 
coat,  so  that  full  advantage  may  be  obtained  from  the  friction. 
After  finishing  with  the  wisp  the  coat  should  be  laid  flat. 

Hand  rubbing  is  beneficial.  When  a  horse  has  had  very  hard, 
exhausting  work,  his  legs  should  be  hand  rubbed  and  afterwards 
bandaged,  taking  care  that  the  bandages  are  not  tight.  An  ex 
hausted  horse  should  also  be  given  stimulants  and  warm  ^ruel. 

The  value  of  grooming  is  dependent  upon  the  force  with  which 
the  brush  is  used  and  the  thoroughness  of  the  other  work. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  should,  by  continuous  per- 
sonal supervision,  see  that  the  grooming  is  properly  done. 

No  horse  should  be  considered  in  order  until  he  is  thoroughly 
clean;  his  mane  and  tail  brushed  out,  and  laid  flat;  his  eyes  and 
nostrils  wiped  or  washed,  and  hoofs  put  in  order. 

The  pasterns  and  that  part  of  the  mane  where  the  crownpiece  of 
the  bridle  rests  should  be  neatly  trimmed,  and  the  mane  and  tail 
plucked. 

At  each  ''stables"  the  horses'  feet  and  shoeing  are  carefully 
examined.  Horses  requiring  shoeing  are  reported  to  the  platoon 
sergeant,  who  notifies  the  stable  sergeant. 

Each  horse  should  be  inspected  by  an  officer  before  the  man  who 
has  groomed  him  is  permitted  to  leave. 


WATERING.  121 

The  sheath  will  be  kept  clean  by  washing,  when  necessary,  with 
warm  water  and  castile  soap. 

A  good  discharge  from  the  cavalry  should  carry  with  it  the  pre- 
sumption that  the  holder  is  a  good  horse  manager  and  groom. 

WATERING. 

304.  Except  when  they  are  heated,  it  is  desirable  that  horses 
should  have  free  access  to  water  at  all  times.  As  this  is  usually 
impossible,  it  becomes  necessary  to  water  at  stated  times. 

Horses  should,  if  possible,  be  watered  before  feeding,  or  not  until 
two  hours  after  feeding.  As  horses  rarely  drink  in  the  early  morn- 
ing, the  watering  must  follow  the  feeding,  but  after  the  proper 
interval,  if  practicable. 

A  horse  requires  from  5  to  15  gallons  of  water  daily,  depending 
upon  the  temperature  and  upon  the  work  he  is  doing.  Except  in 
very  cold  weather,  horses  should  be  watered  at  least  three  times 
daily — in  the  morning,  before  the  noon  feeding,  and  before  the 
evening  feeding.  In  warm  weather,  water  drawn  from  a  cold  well 
or  spring  should  be  allowed  to  stand  long  enough  for  the  chill  to  pass 
off  before  the  horse  is  allowed  to  drink. 

On  the  march  the  oftener  the  animals  are  watered  the  better, 
especially  as  it  is  not  usually  known  when  another  watering  place 
will  be  reached.  By  watering  from  buckets  many  watering  places 
not  otherwise  available  may  be  utilized. 

If  a  mounted  command  has  to  march  a  long  distance  without 
water,  so  that  it  will  be  necessary  to  encamp  en  route,  the  animals 
are  fed,  but  denied  water  until  just  before  starting,  when  they  are 
permitted  to  drink  freely.  The  command  marches  in  the  afternoon 
and  does  not  encamp  until  it  has  accomplished  at  least  half  of  the 
distance;  it  moves  early  the  next  morning  to  reach  water. 

Horses  must  be  watered  quietly  and  without  confusion;  the  man- 
ner in  which  this  duty  is  performed  is  a  good  test  of  the  discipline 
of  a  mounted  command. 

The  horses  are  led  or  ridden  at  a  walk  to  and  from  the  watering 
place.  No  crowding  will  be  allowed,  nor  will  any  horse  be  hurried 
or  have  his  head  jerked  up  from  the  water. 

The  horses  are  watered  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the 
senior  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  present  at  stables  or  at 
other  time  of  watering;  an  officer  should  always  be  present  when  the 
horses  of  other  commands  are  liable  to  be  met  at  the  watering  places. 


122  PEEDING. 


FEEDING. 


306.  Horses  should  be  fed  three  times  a  day — at  reveille,  in  the 
middle  of  the  day,  and  at  night.  This  rule  must  be  rigidly  enforced 
on  the  march,  the  noon  grain  feed  being  carried  on  the  horse.  Ordi- 
narily one-third  of  the  grain  ration  is  fed  each  time.  Hay,  as  a  rule, 
is  not  fed  in  the  morning,  but  about  one-third  of  the  ration  should  be 
fed  at  noon,  except  on  the  march,  and  the  remainder  at  night. 

The  use  of  bran  once  or  twice  a  week  is  important  for  stabled 
horses.  In  spring  or  early  summer  they  should  be  grazed.  A  lump 
of  rock  salt  should  be  kept  in  each  manger. 

Before  feeding  hay  it  should  be  thoroughly  shaken  out  with  a 
fork,  so  as  to  get  rid  of  dust  and  seed;  it  is  also  advisable  to  moisten 
the  hay  before  giving  it  to  the  horse.  The  grain,  if  possible,  should 
be  run  over  wire  screens  or  allowed  to  fall  through  the  air  so  as  to 
remove  dust. 

It  is  advisable  to  feed  at  least  a  portion  of  the  allowance  of  hay 
before  feeding  the  grain. 

Grain  should  never  be  fed  or  placed  in  the  mangers  until  it  is  cer- 
tain that  the  horses  are  thoroughly  cool. 

In  the  morning  the  horses  are  usually  fed  at  or  before  reveille. 
The  noon  feed  of  hay  is  usually  placed  in  the  mangers  while  the 
organization  is  at  drill,  but  the  grain  is  not  fed  until  the  horses  are 
thoroughly  cool.  The  evening  feed  is  placed  in  the  mangers  after 
the  stable  has  been  thoroughly  policed  for  the  night. 

All  horses  do  not  require  the  same  amount  of  forage;  the  amount 
given  each  horse  must  be  based,  therefore,  upon  his  individual 
requirements. 

When  forage  can  not  be  obtained,  grazing  should  be  required  at 
every  spare  moment,  especially  early  in  the  morning  when  dew  is 
on  the  grass. 

All  forage  received  by  an  organization  should  be  checked  for 
weight  and  to  see  that  it  is  up  to  contract  specifications.  All 
officers  should  be  familiar  with  the  characteristics  of  good  forage 
and  the  manner  in  which  it  is  commercially  graded  for  contract 
specifications.  To  obtain  this  knowledge,  officers  should  be  en- 
couraged to  visit  large  commercial  stables. 

The  daily  allowance  of  oats,  barley,  or  corn  is  12  pounds  for  each 
horse;  that  of  hay,  14  pounds.  The  allowance  of  straw  for  bedding 
is  100  pounds  per  month  for  each  animal. 

Good  oats  weigh  about  40  pounds  to  the  bushel;  barley,  about 
48  pounds;  com,  about  56  pounds.  Pressed  hay  weighs  about  11 
pounds  per  cubic  foot. 


SICK  HORSES.  123 

The  standard  bushel  in  the  United  States  contains  2,150.4  cubic 
inches.  A  cubic  yard  contains  21.69  bushels.  A  box  16  by  16.8 
by  8  inches  holds  1  bushel;  a  box  12  by  11.2  by  8  inches  holds  half 
a  bushel;  a  box  8  by  8  by  8.4  inches  holds  1  peck;  a  box  8  by  8 
by  4.2  inches  holds  one-half  peck,  or  4  quarts. 

EXERCISING. 

306.  To  keep  a  horse  in  good  condition  he  should  have  two 
hours'  exercise  daily.  This  exercise  should  be  under  the  saddle,  or, 
if  that  is  impracticable,  it  should  be  given  by  leading  beside 
another  horse. 

In  leading  care  must  be  taken  to  lead  as  much  on  the  left  as  on 
the  more  convenient  right  side.  This  can  be  automatically  regu- 
lated by  having  the  leading  done  on  the  right  side  on  the  odd 
numbered  days  of  the  month  and  on  the  left  on  the  even  numbered 
days. 

In  special  cases  it  may  be  given  on  the  longe,  but  this  must  be 
done  under  proper  supervision  or  injury  may  result. 

Turning  a  horse  loose  in  a  paddock  does  not  give  him  proper 
exercise,  and  if  the  paddock  is  a  large  one,  where  he  can  get  up 
speed,  it  results  in  giving  him  a  taste  for  freedom  which  inspires 
a  high-spirited  animal  to  try  to  get  rid  of  his  rider  when  he  feels 
like  having  a  run. 

The  horse  should  associate  the  control  of  a  rider  with  the  pleasure 
of  all  exercise,  so  that  he  may  accept  it  naturally  as  a  fixed  habit. 

It  is  objectionable  for  one  man  to  lead  more  than  one  extra  horse 
for  exercise,  as  the  gaits  must  then  be  more  restricted,  and  on 
ordinary  roads  the  footing  for  some  of  the  horses  will  be  poor. 

If  a  large  space  is  available  for  paddock  purposes  it  should  be 
divided  into  several  inclosures,  giving  space  for  a  part  of  the 
animals  to  move  about  quietly  in  each,  but  not  enough  to  encourage 
them  to  gallop. 

SICK   HORSES. 

307.  Horses  on  sick  report  are  under  the  immediate  charge  of 
the  stable  sergeant,  assisted  by  the  farrier. 

When  a  veterinarian  is  present  he  should  prescribe  the  treatment 
to  be  given  to  sick  horses,  and  he  should  inspect  all  sick  horses  at 
least  once  daily. 

The  veterinarian  should  also  visit  each  organization  at  least  once 
a  day  at  one  of  the  stated  ''stables;"  he  should  be  freely  consulted 


124  SHOEING. 

as  to  minor  ailments  and  as  to  the  means  of  keeping  the  horses  in 
fit  condition. 

In  the  absence  of  a  veterinarian  the  sick  horses  are  treated  by 
the  stable  sergeant  under  the  direction  of  the  captain. 

Serious  disease  is  best  avoided  by  immediate  and  constant 
attention  to  minor  ailments,  galls,  etc. 

If  a  horse  sustains  an  injury,  neglects  his  food,  refuses  water,  or 
gives  any  evidence  of  sickness,  his  condition  should  be  reported 
at  once  to  the  stable  sergeant.  It  is  the  duty  of  any  man  observing 
such  condition  to  make  the  necessary  report. 

SHOEING. 

308.  Horses  will  be  sliod  according  to  the  principles  outlined 
in  the  authorized  manual. 

All  officers  must  understand  the  principles  of  proper  shoeing 
and  be  able  to  supervise  the  work  of  the  horseshoers. 

A  trooper  should  know  how  to  put  on  a  shoe  in  an  emergency; 
the  following  extracts  from  the  manual  are  therefore  here  incor- 
porated : 

The  Army  Horseshoer,  1912. — ^The  foot  should  be  prepared  so  that 
it  will  approximate  as  nearly  as  possible  to  a  state  of  nature,  and 
only  such  trimming  is  allowed  as  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the 
purpose  of  fitting  and  securing  the  shoe. 

The  knife  must  never  be  used  on  the  bars  or  on  the  frog.  The 
bars  strengthen  the  hoof  and  assist  in  its  expansion.  Cutting, 
therefore,  weakens  them  and  prevents  them  from  performing  their 
function. 

The  practice  of  using  the  knife  to  trim  tlie  bars  or  to  cut  a  notcli 
at  the  junction  of  the  frog  and  bar  at  the  heel  (called  opening  the 
heels  in  civilian  shops)  always  tends  to  produce  contracted  feet. 

Never  use  a  knife  on  the  hoof  of  a  horse  that  has  been  running 
barefoot  nor  on  flat  feet. 

Ragged  parts  of  the  frog  may  be  cut  awa^v  by  careful  use  of  the 
nippers. 

With  a  flat  foot  it  is  frequently  necessary  to  remove  a  part  of  the 
outer  edge  of  the  wall  in  order  that  the  nails  mav  be  driven  in  the 
white  line  where  they  belong.  This  is  the  only  case  where  it  is 
permitted  to  rasp  the "^outside  wall.  The  outer  coating  of  the  wall 
and  the  layers  of  dead  horn  on  the  sole  and  frog  serve  to  retain  the 
moisture  in  the  hoof. 


SHOEING.  125 

The  hot  shoe  must  never  be  applied  to  the  horse's  foot  under  any 
circumstances. 

When  shoes  are  left  on  the  feet  for  too  great  a  length  of  time  corns 
and  other  ailments  result.  Ordinarily  a  shoe  should  be  removed 
once  a  month.  The  lightest  shoe  that  will  last  for  this  time  is  the 
best  shoe.  It  should  carefully  follow  the  form  of  the  foot,  or  if  the 
foot  is  broken  the  shoe  follows  the  original  shape  of  the  foot.  Its 
length  is  regulated  by  the  bulb  of  the  frog. 

The  ground  surface  of  the  shoe  should  be  level  and  smooth, 
except  for  use  in  snow,  when  the  shoe  with  the  ground  surface  con- 
caved prevents  balling.  That  portion  of  the  upper  surface  which 
presses  against  the  bearing  surface  of  the  foot  must  be  level,  smooth , 
and  accurately  shaped  to  support  it,  and  when  the  upper  shoe  sur- 
face is  wider  than  the  bearing  surface  the  inner  edge  must  be  con 

root  ^ -^  -  -^>^  ^<? 

prepdrecf/br/'. .^^^^^ ^c/^rfer 

if  A ^Svl~  -h-f^o/r?t  of 

So/e  ~  -  -(•f-        yf  J^s^      \  I  /     '^^^  ^^^^ 

3i/ /tress 

Su/d  of  fro^ 


caved  to  avoid  excessive  sole  pressure.  This  is  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant requisites  of  correct  horseshoeing.  Concussion  of  the  sole 
against  the  inner  edge  of  the  upper  shoe  surface  invariably  pro- 
duces soreness. 

One  side  of  the  shank  of  a  horse  nail  is  flat.  The  other  side  is  con- 
cave and  also  has  a  bevel  near  the  point.  This  bevel  as  it  enters 
into  the  horn  forces  the  point  of  the  nail  in  the  direction  of  the  other 
side  (flat  side).  Therefore  in  driving  a  nail  always  hold  it  with  the 
flat  side  toward  outside  edge  of  the  shoe. 

Nails  should  come  out  at  a  height  of  not  more  than  1  inch  from 
the  bottom  of  the  hoof. 

In  garrison,  at  the  discretion  of  the  colonel  or  of  the  commanding 
officer,  the  horses  may  be  left  unshod,  but  shoes  will  be  kept  fitted 
for  each  hovse  ready  to  be  put  qi;\. 


126  SHOEING. 

Inspection  of  shoeing. — The  following  examination  should  be 
made  while  the  horse  is  standing  on  a  level  floor  with  the  foot  on 
the  ground: 

(a)  Are  the  axes  correct  when  viewed  from  the  front  and  from 
the  side? 

(6)  Does  the  shoe  follow  the  outer  line  of  the  wall  to  the  last  nail 
hole  and  from  there  extend  outward,  allowing  about  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  at  the  heel  for  expansion?  Has  the  rule  against  rasping  the 
hoof  to  fit  the  shoe  been  violated? 

(c)  Is  the  toe  clip  in  the  center  properly  made  and  properly 
seated? 

(d)  Are  the  nails  driven  at  the  proper  height  and  proper  distance 
apart?    Have  any  old  stubs  been  left  in  the  wall? 

(e)  Are  the  clinches  well  turned  and  set  in,  of  the  proper  size, 
and  have  they  been  smoothed  off  but  not  rasped  sufficiently  to 
weaken  them? 

The  foot  should  then  be  raised  and  the  examination  continued. 

(/)  Is  the  shoe  of  the  proper  size  and  weight;  the  last  nail  hole 
back  of  the  bend  of  the  quarter? 

(g)  Has  enough  horn  been  removed ;  has  too  much  been  removed ; 
is  the  foot  level? 

(h)  Does  the  shoe  rest  evenly  on  the  wall,  covering  the  buttresses 
and  showing  no  air  space  at  any  point? 

(i)  Is  the  shoe  properly  concaved  so  as  to  avoid  pressure  on  the 
sole? 

(j)  Has  the  knife  been  used  on  the  bars,  sole,  or  frog? 

(k)  Are  the  nails  well  seated  and  of  the  proper  size? 

(I)  Are  the  heels  of  the  shoe  correct  in  width  and  thickness  and 
are  they  properly  rounded  without  sharp  edges  or  points?  Is  their 
length  even  with  the  bulb  of  the  frog? 


CARE   OF   SADDLERY. 

309.  The  saddlery  and  equipment  must  always  be  cleaued  after 
use.  This  duty,  like  the  care  of  the  horse,  is  to  be  regarded  as  part 
of  the  mounted  duty  itself;  thus  a  drill  ia  not  over  until  horse^  sad- 
dlery, arms,  and  equipments  have  been  put  again  in  condition. 
According  to  need  the  leather  is  simply  wiped  off  with  a  damp 
sponge  or  well  soaped  and  cleaned.  In  no  case  must  it  be  soaked 
with  water. 

If  the  soap  used  does  not  contain  a  sufficient  amount  of  free  oil 
the  leather  must  be  oiled  to  keep  it  pliable.  A  mixture  of  one-half 
neat's-foot  oil  and  one-half  mutton  tallow,  well  rubbed  in,  keeps 
leather  in  good  condition.  Special  care  is  taken  to  keep  the  under- 
side of  the  skirts  of  the  saddle  and  the  parts  which  do  not  come  in 
contact  with  the  clothing  well  oiled.  The  seat  and  outside  of  the 
skirts  will  rarely  require  oil. 

^  Metal  parts  are  kept  clean  and  free  from  rust;  they  may  require 
oiling  if  not  regularly  used. 

The  saddle  blanket  must  be  kept  clean  and  soft  and  free  from 
wrinkles.  After  use  it  must  be  dried  and  then  well  shaken  (un- 
folded). 1 1  must  never  ba  folded  wet  and  left  thus  with  the  saddle. 
Provision  will  be  made  in  the  saddle  room  or  stables  for  hanging 
it  up  to  dry. 

In  the  field  its  use  as  bedding  for  the  men  will  not  be  allowed 
and  special  care  will  then  be  exercised  to  keep  it  free  from  dirt. 

When  necessary  the  blanket  should  be  thoroughly  cleansed  by 
repeated  immersions  in  tepid  soapsuds  and  hung  over  a  pole  or 
line  to  dry  without  wringing  or  pressing  it. 

FiTTTNG  THE   SADDLE. 

310.  There  are  six  axioms  in  saddle  fitting: 

(a)  The  withers  must  not  be  pinched  nor  pressed  upon, 

(b)  The  central  line  of  the  back  must  have  no  pressure  put  upon  it. 

(c)  The  shoulder  blades  must  have  full  and  unhampered  move- 
ment. 

(d)  The  loins  must  not  carry  weight. 

(e)  The  weight  must  be  put  upon  the  ribs  through  the  medium 
of  the  muscles  covering  them. 

(/)  The  weight  must  be  evenly  distributed  over  a  surface  which 
extends  from  the  play  of  the  shoulders  to  the  last  true  rib. 

127 


128  FITTING  THE  SADDLE. 

The  regulation  saddle  adjusts  itself  automatically  to  the  width 
of  the  horse's  back.  This  automatic  adjustment  is  brought  about 
by  applying  all  the  weight  that  is  to  come  upon  the  side  bars, 
through  their  center  cf  rotation,  thus  leaving  the  side  bar  of  the 
loaded  saddle  free  to  adapt  itself  to  the  varying  width  of  the  back. 

In  order  to  preserve  this  freedom,  no  attachments  of  any  kind 
should  be  placed  on  the  side  bar,  other  than  as  issued,  and  no 
weight  should  be  permitted  to  rest  on  the  side  bars  other  than  that 
transmitted  to  them  through  the  hinges.  The  can  tie  roll  support 
and  straps  have  been  devised  especially  to  raise  the  roll  and  keep 
all  weight  off  tlie  side  bars. 

While  the  side  bars  adapt  themselves  automatically  to  tlie  slope 
of  the  horse's  back  it  is  necessary  to  ascertain  whether  they  bear 
evenly  on  the  back  and  whether  the  arch  and  seat  are  clear  of  the 
spine. 

To  determine  this  the  saddle  is  placed  first  on  the  naked  back, 
the  front  of  the  side  bar  resting  in  the  pit  of  the  shoulder  (the  hol- 
low back  of  the  shoulder  blade).  If  there  is  then  sufficient  clear- 
ance of  the  withers  and  backbone  no  trouble  will  be  encountered 
when  the  saddle  is  put  on  with  a  blanket. 

A  new  blanket  is  then  folded  and  placed  in  proper  position  on 
the  back  and  the  saddle  placed  on  the  blanket  so  that  the  front  end 
of  the  side  bar  approaches  closely  the  shoulder  blade  without  press- 
ing upon  it.  The  blanket  is  pushed  well  up  into  the  pommel  arch. 
The  saddle  is  now  girthed  and  a  man  placed  in  the  saddle.^ 

It  must  be  kept  in  mind  that  the  blanket  reduces  the  width  of 
the  pommel  arch  and  narrows  the  saddle  across  the  top  of  the  side 
bars. 

The  fit  of  the  saddle  can  never  be  determined  without  seeing 
a  man  in  it;  parts  may  appear  out  of  harm's  way,  when  no  weight 
is  in  the  saddle,  which  are  brought  dangerously  close  under  the 
pressure  of  a  man's  weight. 

The  first  thing  to  ascertain  is  the  freedom  from  pressure  on  the 
withers ;  the  hand  must  pass  readily  between  the  blanket  and  the 
withers,  over  the  top  as  well  as  along  the  side. 

In  applying  this  test  the  man  in  the  saddle  should  lean  forward 
and  the  examiner  must  not  be  satisfied  with  anything  less  than 
the  introduction  of  the  entire  hand. 

The  next  thing  is  to  ascertain  freedom  from  pressure  on  the 
shoulder  blade.  This  is  done  by  passing  the  hand  underneath  the 
blanket  from  the  front  until  the  play  of  the  shoulder  blade  can  be 
felt.  The  foreleg  is  raised  and  advanced  to  its  full  extent  to  the 
front  by  an  assistant  while  the  hand  is  in  this  position.    If  thi^ 


FITTING  THE  SADDLE.  129 

can  be  done,  while  the  man  in  the  saddle  is  leaning  forward,  with- 
out pinching  the^  fingers  between  the  side  bars  and  the  shoulder 
blade  the  fit  m  this  respect  is  satisfactory.  The  test  should  be  made 
on  both  shoulders. 

If  the  fingers  are  pinched  the  shoulder  blades  will  be  pinched 
and  the  saddle  must  be  raised  by  folding  the  saddle  blanket  up  on 
each  side,  so  as  to  ^lace  extra  thickness  under  the  bars  or  by  placing 
extra  felt  on  the  side  bars. 

The  rear  ends  of  the  bars  are  next  tested  for  loin  pressure  with 
the  man  in  the  saddle  leaning  back.  The  flat  of  the  hand  should 
find  ready  admission  between  the  ends  of  the  bars  and  the  loins. 

Assuming^  that  the  above  defects  have  been  remedied  the  saddle 
should  be  ridden  in  for  half  an  hour  or  more  to  ascertain  whether 
the  pressure  of  the  side  bars  is  evenly  distributed. 

On  completion  of  the  ride  the  saddle  is  carefully  ungirthed  and 
lifted  from  the  blanket  without  disturbing  it  in  any  way.  The 
blanket  will  be  found  to  bear  the  imprint  of  the  side  bars  and  an 
examination  of  this  depression  will  show  at  a  glance  whether  the 
bars  press  evenly  from  top  to  bottom  and  from  front  to  rear. 

The  examination  must  be  quickly  made  as  the  blanket  soon 
loses  the  impression  of  the  side  bars. 

Any  irregularity  in  the  fit  of  the  side  bars  may  be  remedied  by 
the  introduction  of  pieces  of  felt  to  fill  up  the  spaces  between  the 
side  bars  and  the  blanket.  With  very  little  practice  these  pieces 
of  felt  may  be  cut  to  the  required  shape  and  thickness  with  a  very 
sharp  knife.  Some  edges  will  need  to  be  as  thin  as  a  knife  edge; 
other  parts  may  require  the  addition  of  more  than  one  thickness. 

After  determining  where  these  pieces  of  felt  are  to  rest  on  the 
wooden  side  bars  they  are  placed  in  the  upper  and  inner  side  of 
the  felt  coverings  of  these  bars  and  fastened  in  the  proper  place  with 
a  few  stitches  of  thread. 

The  most  radical  alterations  in  the  fit  of  the  side  bar  can  be 
effected  with  these  strips;  the  method  is  simple  and  quick,  and  does 
not  require  a  trained  workman. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  no  matter  how  much  care  may  be 
taken  in  fitting  a  saddle,  such  fitting  is  only  adapted  to  the  horse 
in  the  condition  in  which  he  is  at  the  time.  ^ 

On  active  service  the  saddles  require  daily  attention.  They 
should  be  inspected  as  regularly  as  are  the  feet.  Every  weak 
point  in  the  fit  of  a  saddle  in  the  squadron  should  be  known  and  the 
remedy  arranged  for.  In  no  other  way  is  it  possible  to  bring  horBea 
through  severe  work  with  sound  backs. 

343960— 14 9 


THE  PLATOON. 

311.  The  platoon  is  an  element  of  the  squadron,  bnt  may  be 
need  independently. 

The  movements  of  the  platoon  as  part  of  the  squadron  and  8p  an 
independent  unit  are  taught  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon. 
Collective  training  begins  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon. 

312.  The  men  of  the  squadron,  except  the  first  sergeant,  the 
quartermaster  sergeant,  and  the  stable  sergeant,  are  assignod  to 
platoons  by  the  captain. 

The  Pj^atoon  Mounted. 
(Plates  I  to  IX.) 

313.  Formation  of  the  platoon. — The  normal  formation  is  in 
line  in  double  rank.  The  squad  consists  of  four  files,  and  is  com- 
manded by  a  noncommissioned  officer  or  selected  private.  The 
platoon  consists  of  four  squads.  \Mien  the  platoon  is  much  reduced 
it  may  be  formed  in  three  squads.  The  right  and  left  squads  are 
commanded  by  sergeants.  The  squad  leader  of  the  first  (right)  squad 
is  posted  as  No.  1  of  the  front  rank  of  his  squad;  the  squad  leader 
of  the  second  squad  (a  corporal)  is  posted  as  No.  4  of  the  front  rank 
of  his  squad;  the  squad  leader  of  the  third  squad  (a  corporal)  is 
posted  as  No.  1  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  squad;  the  squad  leader  of 
the  fourth  squad  is  posted  as  No.  4  of  the  front  rank  of  his  squad. 
Other  corporals  are  posted  as  No.  1  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  squad 
and  No.  4  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  fourth  squad.  The  corporal  on  the 
left  of  the  right  center  squad  is  known  as  the  center  corporal.  "WTien 
there  are  but  three  squads  in  the  platoon  the  center  corporal  takes 
position  as  No.  2  of  the  front  rank  of  his  squad,  and  the  comnaander 
of  the  third  squad  is  posted  on  the  left  of  its  front  rank,  and  is  cov- 
ered by  a  corporal.  The  right  and  left  sergeants  exercise  super- 
vision over  their  half-platoons,  and  when  they  leave  their  position 
for  this  purpose  the  corporals  who  follow  them  in  the  rear  rank  assume 
charge  of  their  squads.  WTien  there  are  but  three  squads  the  right 
sergeant  supervises  the  center  and  right  squads.  The  senior  ser- 
geant in  the  platoon  is  posted  as  file  closer  one  horse-length  in  rear 
of  the,center  of  the  platoon, 

130 


TO  FORM  THE  PLATOON.  181 

By  proper  interchange,  troopers  must  be  equally  instructed  in 
riding  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  but  those  whose  duties  require 
them  to  occasionally  leave  the  ranks  and  those  riding  white  or 
^ray  horses  are  placed  in  the  rear  rank.  WTien  a  vacancy  occurs 
in  the  front  rank  after  formation  it  is  filled  by  the  rear-rank  troopcM' 
of  the  file. 

The  chief  of  platoon  is  the  leader  of  his  platoon;  in  line  he  is 
followed  at  one  horse-length  by  the  center  corporal  and  in  column 
by  the  leading  fraction.     He  is  herein  referred  to  as  the  leader. 

314.  To  form  the  platoon.-  -The  leader  takes  place,  mounted, 
facing  the  position  where  he  wishes  the  platoon  to  form  and  com- 
mands: FORM  PLATOON.  The  center  corporal  places  himtelf 
at  stand  to  horse  6  yards  from  the  leader  and  facing  him.  The 
other  troopers  of  the  front  rank  take  place  in  line  with  him  and  on 
his  right  and  left,  the  leader  of  the  right  squad  on  the  right  of  the 
rank,  the  horses  18  inches  apart.  The  front  rank  is  completed  to 
16  or  12  men.  The  rear  rank  forms  at  one  horse-length  from  the 
front  rank.  The  file  closer,  dismounted,  supervises  the  formation 
from  the  rear.  The  leader  commands:  COUNT  FOURS.  The 
platoon  counts  fours  from  right  to  left  in  each  rank. 

In  case  the  number  of  troopers  for  the  rear  rank  is  less  than  the 
number  established  in  the  front  rank,  the  file  closer  will  leave  the 
necessary  vacancies  in  the  rear  rank  in  place  of  No.  3  in  squads 
from  left  to  right;  if  the  number  available  for  the  rear  rank  be  still 
insufficient,  the  necessary  places  as  No.  2  of  the  rear  rank  will 
similarly  be  left  vacant. 

If  it  is  necessary  to  verify  absentees,  the  file  closer  takes  position 
on  line  with  the  leader  in  front  of  the  right  file  and  calls  the  roll. 

316.  To  dismiss  the  platoon. — As  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  trooper,  the  troopers  falling  out  from  both  ranks. 

316.  The  leader  is  responsible  for  the  regularity  of  gait;  the 
platoon  conforms  to  his  movements.  The  platoon  when  properly 
instructed  maneuvers  habitually  by  signal,  aided  by  the  voice 
when  necessary. 

The  file  closer  supervises  from  the  rear,  maintaining  discipline 
and  cohesion  in  the  ranks,  thus  permitting  the  leader  to  devote 
himself  entirely  to  leading. 

In  instruction,  the  leader  may  leave  the  conduct  and  the^  com- 
mand of  the  platoon  to  his  next  subordinate  and  place  himself 
where  he  can  best  observe  the  execution  of  the  movement. 


MS  OUTLINE  OF  IKTSTRITCTION. 

Movements  are  practiced  progressively  from  walk  to  gallop,  the 
gallop  not  being  attempted  until  the  platoon  m  thoroughly  pro- 
ficient at  the  slower  gaits. 

The  distance  of  one  horse-length  between  ranks  is  that  suited 
to  ordinary  conditions,  and  may  be  increased  when  bad  ground, 
dust,  or  any  other  reason  makes  more  room  desirable. 

317.  The  platoon  must  be  drilled  frequently  with  16  files,  and 
in  single  rank  with  24  or  32  men  in  rank,  frequently  with  swords 
drawn.  The  platoon  will  be  trained  in  tactical  exercises  and 
maneuvers. 

318.  The  platoon  must  be  taught  to  jump  obstacles  in  line  and 
in  column,  the  instruction  beginning  with  increased  distance 
between  the  ranks. 

OUTLINE    OF  INSTBUCTION. 

Close  order: 

(a)  Mount  and  dismount. 

(b)  Dress. 

(c)  Open  aiid  close  ranks. 

(d)  Rein  back. 
(c)  March  in  line. 

(/)  Formation  of  single  rank. 

(g)  Change  of  direction. 

(h)  Turn. 

(i)  Oblique. 

(j)  Column  of  squads  (platoon  coliiftin),  half-squads,  and 

files. 
(k)  Deployment  into  liiie  from  column. 
(I)  Rally  and  assembly. 
(m)  Charge. 
E  attended  order: 
(a)  As  forageirs. 
(6)  Line  of  squads. 

(c)  Charge  as  foragers. 

(d)  Scouts. 
To  fight  on  foot. 
Employment  of  the  platoon. 


CLOSE  OEBER.  idS 

CLOSE    ORDER. 

To  mount  and  dismount. 

319.  The  platoon  being  formed,  at  the  command:  1.  PRE- 
PARE TO  MOUNT,  Nos.  1  and  3  move  forward  one  horse-length; 
and  at  2.  MOUNT,  troopers  mount;  3.  FORM  RANK,  rear  num- 
bers move  up  into  places;  the  leader  and  the  file  closer  take  their 
places. 

At  the  command:  1.  PREPARE  TO  DISMOUNT,  the  leader 
and  Nos.  1  and  3  move  forward  one  horse-length.  At  tlie  commajid: 
2.  DISMOUNT,  all  dismount  and  stand  to  horse. 

320.  The  platoon  dismounted  in  four  ranks  niay  be  formed  in 
two  ranks  by  the  command:  FORM  RANK.  Nos.  2  and  4  aligi^ 
themselves  on  1  and  3. 

32 1 .  The  single  rank  mounts  and  dismounts  in  a  similar  manner. 


322.  At  the  command:  DRESS,  the  center  and  flank  non- 
commissioned oflScers  place  themselves  on  a  line  one  horse-length 
in  rear  of  the  leader  and  establish  the  line  upon  which  the  troopers 
form,  touching  stirrups  lightly  toward  the  center  and  glancing  to 
both  right  and  left  to  see  that  they  are  on  the  line.  The  leader 
stands  fast. 

The  rear-rank  troopers  arrange  themselves  exactly  in  rear  of 
their  front-rank  men,  at  one  horse-length.  They  dress  upon  the 
flank  and  center,  as  prescribed  for  the  front  rank.  At  the  com- 
mand: FRONT,  the  dressing  ceases,  and  eyes  are  turned  to  the 
front. 

To  open  and  clos.$  ranks. 

323.  Being  in  line,  to  open  ranks:  1.  Open  ranks,  2.  INARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  reins  back  to  two  horse- 
lengths  from  the  front  rank,  each  trooper  being  careful  to  keep  the 
direction  of  his  front-rank  man.  The  leader  moves  forward  one 
horse-length  and  faces  his  platoon.  The  fi|e  closer  reins  back  to 
^^p  horse-lengths  from  the  rear  rank. 

1.  Close  ranks,  2.  MARCH.  At  the  coimno-pd  march,  the 
rear  rank  closes  to  one  horse-length,  and  the  leader  and  the  file 
closer  resume  tl^eir  places. 


134  THE  MARCH  IN  LINE. 

2'o  rein  bach. 

324.  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH,  the  leader  and  all  the  platoon 
rein  back,  until  the  command:  1.  Platoon,  2.  HALT. 

To  march  in  line  and  to  halt. 

325.  At  the  command:  1.  Foi-ward,  2.  MARCH,  the  leader 
and  all  the  platoon  move  forward  together.  The  center  corporal 
follows  in  trace  of  the  leader,  keeping  his  distance  carefully.  The 
troopers  in  each  rank  while  dressing  upon  the  center  likewise  regu- 
late their  movements  by  those  of  the  leader,  yielding  to  pressure 
from  the  center  and  resisting  pressure  from  the  flanks.  They 
should  look  and  march  in  the  direction  set  by  the  leader,  glancing 
toward  him  occasionally. 

The  flank  sergeants,  by  maintaining  carefully  gait  and  direction 
and  by  supervising  the  troopers  of  their  half-platoon,  contribute 
greatly  to  the  regularity  of  movements.  Corrections  relating  to 
alignment  or  crowding  in  ra.nks  must  be  made  calmly  and  grad- 
ually. 

The  platoon  is  halted  by  the  command:  1.  Platoon,  2.  HALT. 
The  platoon  dresses  without  command.  The  march  in  line  should 
be  practiced  frequently  at  all  gaits  and  for  long  distances,  avoiding 
halts  as  far  as  possible.  The  leader  should  always  point  out  the 
direction. 

326.  The  platoon  passes  from  the  walk  to  the  trot  and  to  the 
gallop  at  the  command:  1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH;  1.  Gallop,  2. 
MARCH.  To  return  to  the  trot  or  walk:  1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH; 
1.  Walk,  2.  MARCH.  The  platoon  may  be  started  from  the  halt, 
at  the  trot,  or  gallop,  and  may  be  halted  from  any  gait  where  cir- 
cumstances require.  In  changing  gait  a  distance  of  at  least  three 
horse-lengths  should  be  passed  over  after  the  preliminary  command 
or  signal  is  given  and  before  the  new  gait  is  begun. 

Obstacles  in  the  line  of  march. 

327.  Where  an  obstacle  is  encountered  which  interferes  with 
the  march  of  only  a  few  troopers,  these  fall  back  without  command 
and  resume  their  places  after  passing  it. 

When  a  terrain  covered  with  obstacles  is  encountered,  the 
platoon  opens  out,  alignment  is  no  longer  kept,  and  each  trooper 


SINGLE  RANK.  135 

chooses  his  route,  keeping  an  eye  on  his  leader,  who  continues  to 
regulate  the  gait  and  direction.  Where  a  passage  is  encountered 
which  is  too  narrow  to  permit  the  front  of  the  platoon  to  pass,  and 
when  the  leader  does  not  wish  to  break  into  column,  he  commands: 
AT  WILL.  The  center  corporal  remains  in  rear  of  the  leader;  as 
many  as  practicable  of  the  troopers  to  the  right  and  left  of  the 
center  move  up  on  line  with  the  leader.  The  flank  sergeants  and 
troopers  who  can  not  find  room  pass  to  the  line  of  the  file  closer  and 
all  close  up,  head  to  croup,  with  their  horses'  heads  opposite  the 
intervals  in  front.  At  the  command:  ASSEMBLE,  the  platoon 
re-forms. 

328.  If  caught  in  a  defile  or  when  circumstances  require  a  rapid 
withdrawal,  the  leader  commands:  1.  Troopers  to  the  rear. 
The  troopers  gain  space  in  which  to  turn;  2.  MARCH;  each 
trooper  makes  a  left  about.  The  platoon  inverted,  ranks  re- 
formed, now  follows  the  file  closer  in  the  new  direction.  The 
leader  regains  the  front  of  his  platoon  at  the  first  opportunity.  He 
re-forms  his  platoon  as  soon  as  practicable  bv  the  command :  AS- 
SEMBLE, or  1.  Troopers  to  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

Single  rank, 

329.  Single  rank  may  be  used  to  attack  a  weak  or  disordered 
enemy  or  to  diminish  the  vulnerability  of  the  platoon  under  fire; 
it  should  never  be  used  against  compact  cavalry. 

The  platoon  in  line,  at  the  command:  1.  Single  rank,  2. 
MARCH,  the  troopers  of  the  front  rank  open  out  to  the  right  and 
left  and  each  trooper  of  the  rear  rank  moves  up  on  the  left  of  his 
front-rank  man.     If  necessary,  fours  may  be  counted. 

To  resume  double  rank:  1.  Double  rank,  2.  MARCH,  the 
rear-rank  troopers  diminish  the  pace  and  resume  their  places  in 
the  rear  rank;  the  ranks  close  toward  the  center. 

Change  of  direction. 

330.  The  change  of  direction  is  only  a  special  case  of  the  march 
in  Line;  the  leader  conducts  the  platoon  in  the  new  direction. 

The  platoon  follows  the  leader  as  in  the  march  in  Une,  and  the 
troopers  remain  closed  and  ahgned  toward  the  center,  increasing 
or  diminishing  their  pace  or  gait  accordingly.  On  completing  the 
change,  the  leader  indicates  the  new  direction. 


THE  PLATOON  COLUMN. 


The  turn. 


331.  The  turn  is  but  a  special  case  of  the  change  of  direction; 
its  object  is  to  facilitate  the  movements  of  the  platoon  in  the 
squadron.  In  the  turn  the  leader  moves  at  the  gait  of  the  march; 
at  the  walk,  if  from  the  halt;  or,  at  the  gait  ordered. 

332.  The  platoon  being  in  line,  1.  Bight  turn  (Right  half- 
turn,  incline  to  the  right),  2.  MARCH.  The  leader  indicates 
the  direction  to  be  taken  after  the  turn  and  rides  on  a  circle;  at  a 
walk,  with  a  radius  of  half-platoon  front,  plus  3  yards;  at  a  trot  of 
half-platoon  front,  plus  6  yards,  and  at  a  gallop  of  half-platoon 
front,  plus  9  yards.  The  troopers  of  the  rear  rank  incline  outward 
during  the  turn,  so  as  to  gain  ground  toward  the  marching  flank, 
and  those  nearest  the  pivot  move  their  horses'  haunches  toward  the 
marching  flank,  so  as  to  clear  the  ground  for  the  following  unit. 

To  oblique. 

333.  At  the  command:  1.  Troopers,  right  oblique,  2. 
MARCH,  the  leader  and  the  troopers  execute  individually  a  half- 
turn  to  the  right,  and  then  march  at  an  angle  of  45°  to  the  original 
direction,  each  trooper's  right  knee  in  rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the 
trooper  on  his  right.  The  platoon  moves  in  the  new  direction, 
regulating  by  the  right,  the  front  parallel  to  the  original  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

T?ie  platoon  column. 

334.  The  platoon  column  (column  of  squads)  is  a  formation  for 
route  and  maneuver.    The  distance  between  fours  is  4  feet. 

Column  of  squads  from  line  is  formed  from  the  right  only.  The 
platoon  being  at  a  halt  or  marching:  1.  Column  of  squads,  2. 
MARCH.  At  the  command  march  the  right  squad  moves  for- 
ward, the  leader  taking  position  one  horse-length  in  front  of  it. 
The  other  squads  follow  in  succession  by  the  shortest  route  as  soon 
as  they  have  the  necessary  space,  each  taking  its  place  in  rear  of 
the  preceding  squad.  Under  supervision  of  the  squad  leader, 
each  four  aligns  itself  on  the  left  trooper.  The  file  closer  takes 
position  4  feet  in  rear  of  the  platoon. 

Should  it  be  necessary  to  reduce  the  length  of  the  column  without 
changing  the  formation,  the  command:  CLOSE  INTO  THE  IN- 
TERVALS is  given.    The  rear-rank  troopers  of  the  leading  squad 


HALF-SaiTABS  AND  FILES.  IS*? 

close  and  ride  in  rear  of  the  interval  to  the  left  of  their  front-rank 
troopers,  their  horses*  noses  on  line  with  the  croups  of  the  horses 
in  front.  The  succeeding  squads  increase  their  pace,  close,  and 
successively  take  the  same  formation,  the  front-rank  troopers 
riding  in  rear  of  the  intervals  to  the  right  of  the  corresponding 
numbers  in  the  preceding  rear  rank. 

At  the  command:  TAKE  DISTANCE,  the  fours  drop  back  to 
a  distance  of  4  feet,  and  the  troopers  follow  in  trace. 

335.  The  platoon  in  line  or  column  may  be  moved  for  short 
distances  to  either  flank  or  to  the  rear  by  the  commands:  1.  Fours 
right,  or  Fours  right  about,  2.  liiABCH.  Each  four  in  each 
rank  turns  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

336.  To  change  direction,  the  leader  leads  the  platoon  in  the 
new  direction  or  commands:  1.  Column  right  (half  right),  or  1. 
Incline  to  the  right,  2.  MAKCH.  The  leading  four  executeg 
right  turn,  the  pivot  maintaining  the  gait  and  moving  with  a  radius 
of  2  yards;  the  others  move  forward  and  turn  to  the  right  on  the 
same  ground. 

337.  The  column  moves  to  the  rear  by  changing  direction  180°. 
The  leader  conducts  the  head  of  the  column  by  example  and 

signal,  or  commands:  1.  Right  about,  2.  MABCH. 

The  leader  can,  if  circumstances  require  it,  command:  1.  Troop- 
ers to  the  rear,  2.  MAKCH. 

The  troopers  in  each  rank  open  out  to  right  and  left,  and  each 
executes  an  individual  left  about.  The  file  closer  then  leads 
temporarily. 

Column  of  half-squads  and  column  of  files, 

338.  The  column  of  half-squads  is  a  formation  for  route  and 
maneuver.  Being  in  line  or  platoon  column,  at  the  command: 
1.  Column  of  half -squads,  2.  MARCH,  the  platoon  breaks  by 
half-squads  according  to  the  principles  laid  down  for  breaking  by 
squads. 

Colunm  of  files  is  formed  by  similar  commands  and  means  from 
line  or  column. 

The  column  of  half -squads  or  of  files  moves  forward,  changes 
gait  or  direction,  moves  to  the  rear,  halts,  and  forms  line  by  the 
same  commands  and  means  as  the  platoon  column.  The  column 
of  half-squads  closes  into  the  intervals  by  the  same  commands  and 
means  as  the  column  of  squads. 

The  platoon  in  column,  column  of  haH-squads,  or  files  is  mounted 
and  dismounted  by  the  same  commands  as  in  line.    The  troopers 


138  THE  CHARGE. 

open  out  to  the  right  and  left  frontjn  platoon  column  or  column 
of  half-squads. 

gf  Being  m  column  of  half-squads  the  leader  commands:  1.  Column 
of  squads,  2.  MAKCH.  Files  3  and  4  of  the  leading  squad  form 
on  the  left  of  files  1  and  2  by  an  oblique.  Each  of  the  other 
squads  forms  in  a  similar  manner  when  near  its  place  in  column 
and  closes  to  4  feet. 

Platoon  column  or  column  of  half-squads  is  formed  in  a  similar 
manner  from  column  of  files. 

The  deployment  into  line  from  column. 

339.  To  form  Hue  from  column,  the  leader  moves  in  the  direc- 
tion toward  which  he  wishes  to  form  line  and  commands:  1.  Line, 
2.  MAKCH.  The  leading  squad  obliques  by  trooper  to  the  right 
and  then  forms  in  liue,  leaving  space  for  the  second  squad  to 
follow  with  the  center  corporal  in  rear  of  the  leader.  The  remain- 
ing squads  move  to  their  places,  each  on  the  left  of  the  preceding 
squad.  Line  is  formed  from  column  of  half-squads  or  from  col- 
umn of  files  on  the  same  principles. 

340.  For  emergency,  line  may  be  formed  directly  to  the  right 
from  column  of  squads,  half-squads,  or  files  by  the  rally. 

The  rally  and  assembly. 

341.  The  platoon  being  dispersed  or  in  any  formation,  at  the 
command:  RALLY,  the  troopers  move  at  a  gallop  by  the  shortest 
line  and  form  in  double  rank,  without  regard  to  their  regular 
places,  in  rear  of  the  leader. 

342.  To  resume  the  normal  formation,  the  leader  commands: 
ASSEMBLE,  and  indicates  the  gait.  Exposure  to  fire  should 
be  avoided. 

The  charge. 

343.  The  charge  in  line  is  the  normal  attack  of  the  platoon  iu 
close  order. 

The  essential  conditions  to  its  success  are  cohesion  and  vigor  in 
the  shock. 

The  charge  should  begin  at  a  short  distance  from  the  enemy, 
and  the  gaits  employed  to  reach  the  charging  point  will  depend 
upon  the  terrain  as  known  or  as  indicated  by  the  ground  scouts, 
the  condition  of  the  horses,  and  other  circumstances. 

The  charge  must  be  pushed  home. 


THE  m£:l£e.  139 

In  these  exercises  the  enemy  should  always  be  outlined  or 
represented,  and  the  plan  of  the  exercise  should  be  carefully 
explained. 

344.  The  platoon  with  sabers  drawn,  marching  at  the  gallop, 
or  at  the  extended  gallop,  the  leader  commands,  before  reaching 
the  point  where  the  charge  is  to  begin:  1.  To  attack,  and  when 
at  about  50  yards  from  the  enemy,  2.  CHARGE.  At  the  com- 
mand charge,  repeated  by  all  the  troopers,  each  pushes  his  horse 
to  full  speed  and  takes  the  charging  position.  In  order  to  utilize 
fully  the  individual  audacity,  physical  force,  and  skill  of  the 
more  efficient  men  as  an  example  to  the  others,  it  is  important 
that  the  boldest  troopers  on  the  best  horses  be  not  restrained. 
The  short  duration  of  the  charge  permits  of  this  personal  initiative 
without  sacrificing  cohesion. 

To  avoid  attracting  the  attention  of  the  enemy,  loud  commands 
and  the  repetition  of  '* charge"  may  be  omittedT 

345.  The  charge  terminates  with  the  pursuit  or  the  m^lee. 
The  success  of  the  melee  depends  upon  the  individual  bravery 
and  skill  of  the  trooper  and  the  training  of  his  horse.  The  troop- 
ers use  the  point,  shouting  at  each  thrust,  "point,"  and  seek  the 
officers  of  the  enemy. 

The  melee. 

346.  The  m^lee  should  not  be  practiced  immediately  after  the 
charge,  as  this  tends  to  create  a  false  impression.  The  aim  is  to 
charge  through,  re-form,  and  charge  back.  The  melee,  however, 
may  be  imposed  by  the  enemy,  and  must  therefore  be  practiced, 
but  as  a  separate  exercise. 

The  platoon  marching  in  line,  at  the  command:  MELEE,  the 
troopers  leave  the  ranks,  mingle,  and  carry  out  the  exercise  pre- 
scribed for  individual  combat.  The  melee  may  be  terminated  by 
the  rally  or  the  pursuit.  At  the  command:  PURSUE  (or  the 
sounding  of  the  charge),  the  troopers  at  full  speed  pursue  the 
represented  enemy.  To  terminate  the  pursuit,  the  leader  com- 
mands: RALLY,  or  ASSEMBLE,  or  soimds  the  recall. 

EXTENDED    ORDER. 

347.  The  platoon  takes  extended  order  from  any  formation  and 
in  any  direction.  When  possible  the  extension  should  be  made 
upon  terrain  protected  from  the  enemy's  fire. 


im  EXTENDED  OBDER. 

Asforagers. 

348.  The  platoon  being  in  any  formation,  at  the  command: 
1.  As  foragers  (or  as  foragers  at  so  many  yards),  2.  MA^EICH, 
the  troopers  move  out  at  a  gallop  to  right  and  left  of  the  center  cor- 
poral, each  rear-rank  trooper  moving  up  on  the  line  to  the  left  of 
his  front-rank  man.  If  the  interval  between  troopers  is  not  indi- 
cated in  the  command,  it  is  4  yards. 

The  foragers  move  forward  and  to  a  flank,  halt,  change  direction 
and  gait  upon  the  command  of  the  leader,  who  can  rally  or  assemble 
them  in  any  direction.  When  practicable,  the  rally  and  assembly 
should  be  made  under  cover.  At  the  command :  1.  Troopers,  to 
the  rear,  2.  MARCH,  each  trooper  turns  to  the  left  about.  To 
move  to  the  front:   1.  Troopers  forward,  2.  MABCH. 

In  line  of  foragers,  at  the  command  halt,  the  troopers  halt  faced 
to  the  front. 

The  line  of  sqvxds, 

349.  The  platoon  being  in  any  formation,  halted  or  marching, 
at  the  command:  1.  Line  of  squads,  2.  MABCH,  each  squad 
moves  at  a  gallop  to  its  place,  led  by  the  squad  leader,  who  marches 
in  front  of  his  squad.  Squad  leaders  take  sufficient  interval  to 
allow  for  extension  into  line  of  foragers. 

The  line  of  squads  possesses  the  advantage  of  having  the  squad 
under  the  direct  control  of  the  squad  leader. 

Squads  may  be  deployed  as  foragers,  formed  in  single  rank, 
column  of  half-squads,  or  of  flies,  according  to  mission,  terrain, 
enemy's  flre,  etc.  In  deploying  as  foragers  the  troopers  extend 
on  No.  2  of  the  front  rank.  When  not  leading  his  squad,  the  squad 
leader  takes  his  place  in  the  line. 

The  dispersion  of  the  platoon  in  depth  by  successive  squads 
affords  the  means  of  crossing  a  flre-swept  zone  with  small  groups. 
The  movement  is  executed  at  a  gallop  at  the  command:  1. 
Squads,  2.  At  so  many  yards  distance,  3.  MABCH.  The 
squads  may  be  extended  during  the  movement. 

360.  The  platoon  must  maneuver  and  fight  in  extended  as  well 
as  in  close  order.  Foragers  and  squads  must  be  trained  to  fight  on 
foot,  to  take  advantage  of  cover,  to  check  the  enemy,  to  capture 
patrols,  to  search  thickets,  woods,  etc. 

The  line  of  squads  moves  forward,  to  the  rear,  and  by  the  flank, 
changes  direction,  and  halts  by  the  same  commands  as  the  line  of 
foragers,  the  squad  leaders  giving  the  necessary  commands  for 
their  squads. 


SCOUTS  AND  PATROLS.  141 

The  charge  as  foragers, 

361.  Being  in  line  of  foragers,  the  leader  draws  his  weapon,  the 
troopers  following  his  example,  and  then  commands:  1.  Gallop, 
2.  MARCH,  3.  To  attack,  4.  CHARGE.  The  principles  laid 
down  for  the  charge  in  close  order  apply.  When  the  pistol  is  used 
the  leader  takes  position  in  the  line  at  the  command  charge.  The 
troopers  of  each  file  support  each  other,  and  the  platoon  endeavors 
to  envelop  the  enemy.  Small  bodies  may  cnarge  as  foragers 
directly  from  any  formation,  at  the  command:  AS  FORAGERS, 
CHARGE. 

The  rally  and  assembly  are  executed  as  prescribed  for  close  order. 


362.  Scouts  are  of  two  classes: 
(a)  Ground  scouts. 
(6)  Reconnoitering  scouts. 

The  role  of  ground  scouts  is  solely  to  ascertain  whether  the 
ground  in  the  vicinity  is  passable  for  cavalry,  to  indicate  obstacles 
and  the  best  points  of  passage. 

The  reconnoitering  scouts  are  employed  to  guard  against  surprise 
and  gain  information;  their  numbers  and  movements  will  depend 
upon  circumstances.  They  fire  only  to  give  warning  or  in  self- 
defense.  The  leader  designates  the  noncommissioned  officers  and 
men  to  compose  the  group  of  scouts  or  details  an  entire  squad: 
1.  Such  squad  as  scouts,  2.  (Such  object  or  mission),  :i. 
MARCH;  or  the  whole  platoon  may  be  dispersed  as  scouts: 
1.  Platoon,  as  scouts,  2.  (Ridge  to  the  left),  3.  MARCH. 

Troopers  should  be  trained  as  scouts,  including  methods  of 
communication,  early  in  their  instruction. 


363.  (a^  Security. 

(6)  Reconnoitering. 

Security  patrols  are  detached  for  the  immediate  protection  of  a 
command.  A  combat  patrol  is  a  security  patrol  which  exercises 
its  functions  during  combat. 

Reconnoitering  patrols  are  sent  to  greater  distances  to  obtain 
information. 

The  troopers  should  be  practiced  in  acting  as  scouts  and  patrols 
to  bodies  larger  than  the  platoon. 


142  FIGHTING  ON  FOOT. 

To  Fight  on  Foot. 

364.  When  giving  the  command  for  dismounted  action,  the 
leader  will  take  a  position  from  which  he  can  plainly  indicate  the 
direction  toward  which  the  dismounted  men  are  to  be  led. 

To  facilitate  movement  of  the  led  horses,  the  platoon  is  generally 
formed  into  column  of  squads  before  dismounting  to  fight  on  fool. 
Under  special  circumstances,  however,  dismounted  action  may  be 
taken  from  any  formation.  When  foragers  are  to  fight  on  foot,  the 
squads  assemble,  dismount,  and  again  deploy  on  foot.  In  emer- 
gencies foragers  may  dismount  to  fire,  holding  the  horses  on  the 
lariat  or  by  the  bight  of  the  rein  over  the  right  arm.  The  horses 
may  later  be  linked  by  the  command:  LINK  HORSES.  The 
horse  holders  mount. 

The  leader,  dismounted,  commands  the  dismounted  platoon. 

No.  4  is  the  horse  holder,  except  when  he  is  a  noncommissioned 
officer,  in  which  case  No.  3  is  horse  holder.  No.  2  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  first  squad  takes  the  leader's  horse.  The  horse  of  No.  1 
of  the  front  rank  of  the  first  squad  is  linked  to  that  of  No.  3;  No.  2, 
with  the  platoon  leader's  horse  on  his  right,  assists  in  leading  the 
first  four  horses.  The  file  closer  remains  mounted  in  command  of 
the  led  horses. 

The  horse  holders  may  be  dismounted  when  circumstances 
clearly  indicate  that  an  early  movement  of  the  led  horses  is  not 
probable. 

Sergeants  in  assisting  the  leader  go  where  their  presence  is  neces- 
sary; corporals  remain  in  ranks,  but  direct  their  squads  and  set 
the  example,  being  the  first  to  go  forward  and  the  last  to  retreat. 

In  the  absence  of  the  link,  the  horses  may  be  fastened  together 
by  passing  the  reins  through  the  halter  ring  and  tying  them  in  a 
slipknot  so  that  the  horses'  heads  shall  be  about  2  feet  apart. 

In  defensive  positions,  all  the  horses  may  be  fastened  in  couples 
by  tying  the  snaflle  reins  of  each  horse  to  the  cantle  of  the  saddle 
of  another;  or  they  may  be  linked  together  in  a  circle  and  left 
to  the  care  of  one  horse  holder,  who  dismounts;  or  this  horse  holder 
may  hold  the  horses  of  Nos.  4  by  the  reins.  The  horses  of  each 
half  platoon  may  be  tied  in  a  circle  to  a  coiled  lariat  or  a  stirrup 
strap. 

366.  The  led  horses  should  be  as  near  the  dismounted  line  as  a 
protected  situation  will  allow;  they  are  not  changed  while  this  con- 
dition lasts,  unless  the  dismounted  line  makes  a  material  change 
of  position. 


FIGHTING  ON  FOOT.  US 

The  horses  while  linked  by  fours  must  be  drilled  at  all  gaits — 
in  leading,  in  changing  direction,  forming  line,  etc.,  as  when 
mounted. 

356.  At  the  command:  TO  FIGHT  ON  FOOT,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3 
dismount;  No.  3  passes  his  snaffle  reins  over  his  horse's  head,  and 
gives  them  to  No.  4,  who,  holding  the  bight  in  his  left  hand,  grasps 
them  with  his  right,  at  about  6  inches  from  the  bit;  No.  2  links  his 
horse  to  the  halter  ring  of  No.  3;  No.  1  links  to  No.  2;  the  reins  of 
Nos.  1  and  2  and  the  bit  reins  of  No.  3  are  placed  behind  the  pom- 
mel, and  the  left  stirrup  crossed  in  front  of  the  pommel.  When 
No.  3  is  the  horse  holder  Nos.  2  and  4  give  him  their  reins,  which  he 
holds  in  his  right  hand.  If  the  horses  are  to  be  coupled  or  other- 
wise secured,  the  leader  indicates  the  method  before  dismounting. 

As  soon  as  the  horses  are  properly  secured  the  squad  leader  leads 
his  squad  at  a  run  to  its  place  in  rear  of  the  platoon  leader,  where  he 
forms  it  in  double  rank.  In  going  into  dismounted  action,  dash 
and  spirit  should  characterize  the  movement. 

The  leader  may  dismount  a  portion  of  his  platoon  by  the  com- 
mand: 1.  No.  1  (or  such  numbers),  2.  TO  FIGHT  ON  FOOT. 

357.  The  platoon  leader  after  having  detached  the  necessary 
vedettes  turns  the  platoon  over  to  the  file  closer  and  proceeds, 
followed  by  a  connecting  link,  to  reconnoiter.  The  reconnaissance 
completed,  the  leader  rejoins  his  platoon  or  directs  that  it  be  led  to 
a  certain  point,  indicating  the  best  method. 

While  there  is  little  to  fear  from  hostile  fire,  the  leader  advances 
the  platoon  in  line  or  line  of  squads,  so  as  to  take  advantage  of 
cover. 

To  cross  dangerous  ground,  occupy  a  position,  or  open  fire:  1.  As 
Bkirmishers  (or  as  skirmisliers  at  so  many  yards) ,  2 .  MARCH. 
The  troopers  extend  at  double  time,  as  in  the  deployment  as 
foragers.  If  no  interval  be  ordered,  it  will  be  1  yard.  In  emer- 
gencies the  deployment  may  be  made  immediately  after  dis- 
mounting, the  command  as  skirmishers  being  given  immediately 
after  the  command  to  fight  on  foot. 

The  skirmishers  advance  either  by  platoon  or  by  squads:  they 
endeavor  to  gain  ground  without  rigid  attention  to  dress,  and  regu- 
late their  movements  on  that  fraction  of  the  platoon  which  is  most 
advanced. 

THE   ASSAULT. 

358.  To  assault  the  leader  commands:  PREPARE  TO 
ASSAULT,    The  men  cease  firing,  each  inserts  a  fresh  clip  and 


144  THE  PLATOON  DISMOUNTED. 

the  leader  then  commands:  CHARGE,  which  is  repeated  by  all, 
and  leads  the  platoon  at  a  run  to  the  assault. 

On  reaching  the  enemy *s  position  a  rapid  fire  is  opened  from  the 
full  magazine.  If  the  enemy  be  not  dislodged,  and  there  is  no 
time  to  reload,  the  pistol  may  be  used. 

THE   RALLY. 

369.  To  get  his  platoon  rapidly  in  hand,  the  leader  commands: 
RALLY.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  squad  leaders,  the 
skirmishers  form  at  double  time,  in  single  rank,  and  at  the  order, 
in  rear  of  the  platoon  leader. 

THE   ASSEMBLY. 

360.  To  re-form  the  platoon  (double  rank),  the  leader  commands : 
ASSEMBLE. 

TO   MOUNT. 

361.  The  leader  leads  the  platoon  to  the  vicinity  of  the  led 
horses  or  causes  the  latter  to  be  advanced  to  meet  the  platoon,  and 
commands:  MOUNT. 

At  the  command:  STAND  TO  HORSE,  the  troopers  move 
quickly  but  quietly  to  their  horses,  unlink,  and  stand  to  horse. 

If  the  signal  to  horse  is  sounded  the  horses  are  brought  up  at 
the  gallop  and  the  platoon  moves  rapidly  to  meet  them. 

The  Employment  of  the  Platoon. 

362.  (a)  Alone,  as  for  exploration  and  security,  etc. 

(5)  In  the  squadron,  as  advance  or  rear  guard,  detached 
posts,  flank  guard,  etc. 

(c)  In  cooperation  with  other  arms,  as  for  scouting,  cover- 

ing, and  aiding  in  the  attack. 

(d)  In  small  operations,  as  foraging,  demolitions,  escort, 

attack  on  a  convoy,  ambuscade,  etc. 

The  Platoon  Dismounted. 

363.  Its  formations  and  movements  conform  to  those  of  the 
platoon  mounted,  with  the  natural  modifications. 

THE   assembly. 

364.  At  the  command:  ASSEMBLE,  the  platoon  forms  aa  pre- 
scribed for  the  mounted  formation.    The  troopers  take  a  h^t 


THE  PLATOON  DISMOTTNTED.  146 

touch  of  elbow  toward  the  center;  the  center  corporal  is  2  yards 
in  rear  of  the  leader;  the  rear  rank  is  2  yards  in  rear  of  the  front 
rank,  and  the  file  closer  is  2  yards  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the  rear 
rank. 


366.  At  the  command:  DRESS,  the  troopers  establish  them- 
selves on  a  line  2  yards  in  rear  of  their  leader.  They  yield  to  pres- 
sure coming  from  the  center,  keeping  a  light  touch  of  elbows  in  that 
direction.  At  the  command:  FRONT,  eyes  are  cast  to  the  front 
and  the  platoon  stands  at  attention. 

THE   MARCH  IN  LINE. 

366.  In  changes  of  direction  and  turns,  the  leader  moves  so  that 
the  marching  flank  can  keep  the  regular  step. 

THE   TURN. 

367.  The  radius  of  the  leader  or  of  the  center  corporal  is  half  the 
front  of  the  unit,  plus  1  yard. 

EXCEPTIONAL  MOVEMENTS  TO   THE   REAR,    OR  FLANK. 

368.  For  an  exceptional  movement  to  the  rear,  the  command  is* 
1.  Troopers  about,  2.  MARCH.  The  troopers  turn  individually 
to  the  right  about. 

369.  Under  special  circumstances  movements  may  be  made  to 
either  flank  or  to  the  rear,  by  squads  or  by  fours.  In  turning  by 
squads,  the  command  is:  1.  Squads  right  (or  squads  right 
about),  2.  MARCH;  the  rear  rank  closes  to  10  inches  at  the  pre- 
paratory command.  Exceptionally  the  line  may  be  moved  to  the 
flank  by  the  command:  1.  Troopers  right,  2.  MARCH. 

TO   OBLIQUE. 

^  370.  The  troopers  make  a  half  face  and  move  in  the  new  direc- 
tion.   If  halted,  the  troopers  face  to  the  front. 

COLUMN   OF   SQUADS. 

371.  In  columns  of  squads  or  half-squads  the  distance  between 
ranks  is  32  inches.  At  the  preparatory  command  for  forming  col- 
umn, the  rear  rank  closes  to  10  mches. 

34396"— 14 10 


146 


THE  PLATOON. 


THE  PLATOON. 


\m 


•<^v   -0>   csO    -CD   c<3    -CD  O  -Oc<=5  •*-* 
N,0   ciO   -<3   «0   •<=>  ciD  ^r>cCD 


'v^^^ 


\ 


\ 


^ 


•C5   'sCD   •<->  cCD   *iCD  «^<ID  -CTJ  «0 
^  ^LD  -o  ?<:d  ^D  .=0  -<=j  ^  __^ 

-CD    ^   -CD   eiZ:>    ^D    c<:5   ^=3  ^  "CJ 
•<Z5   .::CD  "CD   c<Z)   ^Z3   cCD  "^^  cC^ 


t=:| 


p^ 


ij 


cS-<:5  =0  ^r>  c:CD 

S>-<='  cCD  ^:^   cCD  . 

^^  -C3  cCD  -CD    cO 

^-->    -CD  c=iD  ^3    <=c5 


148  THE  PLATOON. 

jj^  TVxeTWoon 

JLLL  Tortnm^L>ne,  ^rom  PWtoon  Column 

l.Unt.     2MAKCH 

bmmmmhbh 


A/> 


«JM 


%%  wo 


« 


THE  PLATOON. 


148 


-G)  ::^?^ 


«<£> 


160  THE  FLATOOW. 


^    / 


V 


^     /  '^  aCD  :C^      ^ 

S^                 S  S  ^            -CD  «=CD 

^  co  ^D  cc::> 

c-f:)     -cD^z)  ^3  •CD*<:3     ^r^  ^ 

cO>  =<^  '■*^  '<^ 

§      I 


/ 


mmmmm 


2   ; 

I  t 


H 


<:3 


THE  PLATOON.  *fl 


9« 


II- 

35 


I  5  1^  iiPi  -''  ^* 


^ 


4«  -<^ 


N 


152 


THE  PLATOON. 


■ffli 


the:  platoon 


^••*'    Horses  \mkea  te§ttV\tr 
T  m  a  c\rclt 


horses  of  each  V\a\f  p\ai:oor\ 
t\ea  in  cirde  to  a  coWed  \anat 
or  to  a  stirrup  strap 


*► 

►  r 


v;- 


,r>' 


'-; 


,->' 


Uorses  linked  m fours 
One  man  holdrnf  rfc\AS  of 
^    horses  0^ 


^ 


The  platoon  column  dismounting  to  fi^ht  on  foot 


THE  PLATOON. 


158 


M 


The:  Platoon 


LiNL  or   Squads 


(in  iin^lt  rank) 


(As  y»^r^ 


••*•»•         I  «  I  «  I  I  ,        t  I  i  t  (  1 1  I  I  I  I  I  « 

I 

C'"  columni  of  VtMuads) 


Cln  columns  of  f  ites) 


IM 


THE  PLATOON. 

THE  PLATOON  K 

•  Scjuads    Zkxxo^idiita(\ce    3  MARCH 


iOOjiS 


yyijAh 


iOOjdi 


(^Extidcddbfora^rs) 

300^ 


/ 


/ 


•  •  •  *  •  t  I  I  I  I  ,  I  ,  ,  ,  ,  , 

""  ^       I  As  fora|,c 


>      2   MARCH' 


THE  SQITADEON. 

The  Squadron  Mounted. 
(Plates  X  to  XVII.) 

372.  The  squadron  is  the  component  unit  of  the  regiment.  It 
is  composed  normally  of  four  platoons,  known  as  the  fiSst,  second, 
third,  and  fourth,  each  under  a  permanent  leader  assigned  by  the 
captain.  The  object  of  the  School  of  the  Squadron  is  to  train  the 
platoons  to  execute  together  what  they  have  learned  separately, 
and  to  teach  the  squadron  its  movements,  whether  acting  alone  or 
as  part  of  the  regiment. 

The  squadron  executes  the  movements  of  the  platoon.  The 
captain  may  cause  the  platoons  individually  to  execute  a  move- 
ment not  otherwise  provided  for  by  prefixing  the  word  ^'Platoons" 
to  the  command. 

The  squadron  maneuvers  in  squadron  column  or  line  of  platoon 
columns,  forms  Line  for  the  charge,  marches  in  column  of  squads, 
half-squads,  or  files,  takes  extended  order,  and  dismounts  to  %ht 
on  foot. 

The  captain  is  the  leader,  but,  having  indicated  the  direction  to 
the  leader  of  the  directing  platoon,  he  may  leave  his  position. 

THE   SQUADRON  IN  LINE. 

373.  In  line,  the  platoons  are  side  by  side  without  interval. 
The  captain  is  15  yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  second  platoon: 
the  first  sergeant  two  horse-lengths  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the 
squadron. 

When  the  squadron  is  acting  alone,  one  trumpeter  follows  the 
captain.  When  the  squadron  is  in  the  regiment,  all  the  trumpeters 
are  in  ranks. 

The  platoons  are  numbered  from  right  to  left  in  line  and  from 
front  to  rear  in  column. 

374.  Movements  are  executed  on  indication  from  the  captain. 
He  may  direct  a  lieutenant  to  act  as  squadron  leader  and  indicate 
to  him  the  movements  to  be  executed,  supervising  their  execution 
himself. 

When  necessary  to  attract  the  attention  of  his  platoon  leaders, 
the  captain  commands:  ATTENTION.    Platoon  leaders  give  the 

15fi 


166  OTTTLINE  OF  INSTKUCTION. 

command  for  the  movement  ordered,  move  in  the  corresponding 
direction,  and  take  the  prescribed  gait. 

The  platoon  leaders  give  verbal  commands  only  when  dust, 
darkness,  fog,  or  any  other  cause  renders  signals  inadvisable.  Ver- 
bal commands  should  be  no  louder  than  absolutely  necessary.  The 
platoon  leaders  pay  special  attention  to  maintaining  a  regular  gait 
and  preserving  proper  distances  and  intervals. 

The  file  closers,  under  supervision  of  the  first  sergeant,  rectify 
mistakes  and  insure  steadiness  and  cohesion  in  the  ranks. 

376.  The  squadron  should  maneuver  frequently  with  sabers 
drawn.  The  squadron  must  be  frequently  exercised,  with  4 
platoons  of  16  front  each,  even  when  necessary  to  omit  entirely 
the  rear  rank. 

Lieutenants  must  be  practiced  in  commanding  the  squadron  and 
sergeants  in  commanding  platoons. 

376.  The  platoons  being  formed,  the  captain  takes  post, 
mounted,  facing  the  position  where  he  wishes  the  squadron  to  form, 
and  commands:  FORM  SQUADRON.  The  platoons  take  posi- 
tion, mounted,  in  line  or  in  column,  as  directed  by  the  captain,  in 
the  order  of  their  permanent  desi^ation. 

After  the  squadron  is  formed  it  is  maneuvered  without  regard 
to  the  order  of  the  platoons  in  line  or  column,  except  that  in  column 
the  two  right  platoons  and  the  two  left  platoons  follow  each  other. 

To  dismiss  the  squadron^  the  captain  commands:  DISMISS 
YOTJB  PLATOONS. 

OUTLINE   OF   INSTKUCTION. 

Close  order: 


(tt)  Line. 
h)  Chang 
c)  Column  (of  platoons). 


:) 
h)  Change  of  direction. 


(d)  Deployment  into  line. 

(e)  Line  of  platoon  columns. 

(J)  Route  column  by  squads,  half-squads,  and  files. 
(g)  Charge. 
Extended  order: 

(a)  Extended  order  in  line  and  in  column. 

(b)  Foragers. 

(c)  Scouts  and  patrols. 

(d)  Rally. 

(e)  Assembly. 
To  fight  on  foot. 
Employment  of  the  squardroxu 


LINE.  157 

CLOSE    ORDER. 

Line, 

377.  The  march  in  line  conforms  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  platoon.  The  captain  is  in  advance  of  the  leader  of  the 
second  platoon,  who  follows  in  his  trace;  the  other  platoon  leaders 
regulate  on  the  leader  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  platoon  leaders  will,  without  command  of  the  captain,  so 
lead  their  platoons  as  to  pass  obstacles  with  the  greatest  facility, 
and  then  resume  the  original  formation. 

378.  The  squadron  may  be  formed  in  a  single  rank  for  special 
purposes;  as — 

(a)  To  mask  a  movement; 

(6)  To  attack  infantry  or  artillery  under  special  circumstances. 

The  squadron  in  line,  at  the  command:  1.  Single  rank,  2. 
MAKCH,  the  leaders  of  the  first,  third,  and  fourth  platoons  take 
their  intervals  from  the  second;  the  leader  of  the  second  platoon, 
as  soon  as  he  has  the  space,  forms  single  rank;  the  other  platoon 
leaders  take  the  same  formation  and  regulate  on  him.  In  single 
rank  the  first  and  third  platoons  are  echeloned  at  one  horse-length 
on  the  second,  and  the  fourth  at  one  horse-length  on  the  third. 

At  the  command:  1.  Double  rank,  2.  MARCH,  the  platoon 
leaders  re-form  their  platoons  in  double  rank  and  lead  them  to  their 
places  in  line. 

379.  To  gain  ground  to  a  flank,  the  captain  forms  squadron  col- 
umn to  that  flank  and  leads,  or  indicates  the  direction. 

380.  To  march  the  squadron  to  the  rear:  1.  To  the  rear,  2. 
MARCH.     Each  platoon  executes  a  turn  of  180°  to  the  left. 

To  oblique. 

381.  1.  Right  oblique,  2.  MARCH.  Each  platoon  executes 
a  turn  of  45°;  all  regulate  on  the  right  platoon.  The  oblique  by 
trooper  may  be  used  for  short  distances.  The  platoon  leaders  con- 
tinue in  a  line  parallel  to  the  original  front.  To  resume  the  original 
direction:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

Change  of  direction. 

382.  Change  of  direction  by  the  squadron  in  line  is  made  upon 
command  of  the  captain  or  indication  by  hira  of  the  new  point  of 
direction. 


158  COLUMN. 

When  the  change  of  direction  is  executed  at  a  rapid  gait,  the 
platoons  of  the  marching  flank  may  move  in  echelon,  regaining 
their  places  in  line  after  the  change  of  direction  is  completed. 

Squadron  column. 

383.  The  squadron  column  is  a  formation  for  assembly,  march, 
and  maneuver.  The  distance  between  platoons  is  6  or  10  yards, 
according  as  they  have  12  or  16  files.  The  captain  is  15  yards  in 
advance  of  the  leader  of  the  first  platoon. 

The  file  closers  are  on  the  right  of  the  rear  ranks.  The  first  ser- 
geant is  on  the  right  of  the  file  closer  of  the  rear  platoon.  At  the 
command  for  dismounting  in  squadron  column,  the  platoon  lead- 
ers go  to  the  left  flank  of  Qieir  platoons. 

Breaking  from  line  into  squadron  column. 

384.  The  squadron  in  line  to  form  column,  the  captain  com- 
mands: 1.  Coliiinn  (or,  on  such  platoon,  column),  and  indicates 
the  direction;  2.  MABCH.  The  second  platoon,  or  the  platoon 
indicated,  follows  the  captain,  or  goes  in  the  direction  indicated 
by  him;  the  other  platoons  follow. 

Movements  in  squadron  column. 

385.  In  marching  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  platoon 
leaders  put  their  platoons  in  movement  simultaneously,  and  that 
the  pace  be  uniform.  Trace  and  distance  must  be  corrected 
gradually. 

386.  When  passing  a  defile  of  less  width  than  platoon  front,  the 
method  already  given  in  this  case  for  the  platoon  applies.  The 
formation  taken  at  the  command :  AT  WILL,  given  by  the  platoon 
leaders,  is  used  principally  for  passing  short  defiles  without  unnec- 
sarily  lengthening  the  column .  Platoons  are  re-formed  on  emerging 
from  the  defile,  without  command  from  the  captain. 

387.  The  column  must  be  trained  to  follow  the  leader  in  all 
directions  and  at  all  gaits.  The  captain  may  command:  1.  Col- 
umn right,  2.  MARCH. 

»^388.  To  march   to  the  rear:  1.  To   the  rear,   2.  MARCH, 
each  platoon  executes  a  turn  of  180®  to  the  left. 

389.  When  the  squadron  in  column  or  in  column  **at  will"  is 
in  a  defile,  and  it  is  necessary  to  move  to  the  rear,  the  captain 


DEPLOYMENT.  159 

commands:  1.  Troopers  to  the  rear,  2.  MABCH.  Each  platoon 
conforms  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  platoon.  While 
the  captain  is  obliged  to  remain  at  the  rear  of  his  squadron,  his 
orders  are  transmitted  from  platoon  leader  to  platoon  leader,  pre- 
ceded by  the  words:  "Captain's  order." 

390.  The  squadron  column  may  execute  an  oblique  march  by 
the  command:  1.  Right  oblique,  2.  MARCH.  Each  platoon 
executes  a  turn  of  45° .  The  captain  places  himself  in  front  of  the 
leader  of  the  directing  (the  leading)  platoon;  the  other  platoon 
leaders  regulate  so  as  to  keep  in  a  line  parallel  to  the  original  direc- 
tion of  the  column. 

In  the  oblique  by  trooper  the  platoon  leaders  are  careful  to  keep 
in  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  original  front.  This  movement, 
however,  is  only  used  to  gain  short  distances. 

Deployment  into  line, 

391 .  Deployment  forward  is  always  made  fanwise.  In  column, 
to  form  line  to  the  front:  1.  Line,  2.  MARCH.  The  leading 
platoon  follows  the  captain,  and  the  others  move  at  an  increased 
gait;  the  second  to  the  right  front,  the  third  and  fourth  to  the  left 
front.  When  opposite  their  places  in  line,  they  move  straight  to 
the  front. 

If  the  squadron  is  marching  at  the  gallop,  the  captain  slackens  his 
pace  during  the  movement;  the  rear  platoons  extend  the  gallop. 

392.  If  the  captain  wishes  to  deploy  at  any  other  gait,  he  com- 
mands: 1.  Line,  2.  (Gait),  3.  MARCH,  and  regulates  the  move- 
ment of  the  leading  platoon  according  to  the  object  in  view,  or 
halts  it  if  necessary.  The  rear  platoons  move  up  on  the  line  at  the 
gait  ordered. 

393.  In  case  of  absolute  necessity,  the  squadron  may  attack 
before  its  deployment  is  complete;  the  platoons  not  in  line  attack 
in  echelon. 

394.  To  deploy  in  an  oblique  direction,  the  captain  leads  upon 
the  new  objective  and,  when  the  head  of  the  column  has  moved  at 
least  the  length  of  a  platoon  front  in  that  direction,  commands: 
1.  Line,  2.  MARCH. 

395.  When  the  captain  wishes  to  form  line  immediately  toward 
the  flank,  he  commands:  1.  Line  to  the  right,  and  rides  to  his 
position  in  the  new  line.  At  the  command:  2.  MARCH,  the 
directing  platoon  follows  the  captain,  the  other  platoons  are  led  to 


160  DEPLOYMENT. 

their  positions  in  line  abreast  of  it.  Unless  otherwise  indicated, 
when  the  line  is  formed  to  the  right,  the  third  platoon  in  column 
becomes  the  directing  platoon  in  line;  when  line  is  formed  to  the 
left,  the  second  platoon  in  column  becomes  the  directing  platoon. 

396.  Line  of  platoon  columns  is  a  formation  for  march  and 
maneuver.  It  has  the  advantage  of  placing  the  platoon  leaders  in 
front  of  the  squadron,  within  reach  of  the  captain;  it  gives  the 
squadron  a  good  formation  for  the  approach  to  the  attack,  for  moving 
over  bad  ground,  and  for  deploying  quickly  under  fire. 

In  this  formation  the  platoon  columns  are  in  line  at  deploying 
intervals.  The  captain  is  15  yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the 
second  platoon.  The  first  sergeant  is  on  the  right  of  the  file  closer 
of  the  second  platoon. 

The  intervals  between  the  platoons  may  be  increased  or  decreased 
according  to  the  captain's  indications;  the  platoons  extend  or  close 
on  the  directing  platoon  unless  otherwise  indicated;  when  this 
interval  is  6  yards  the  formation  is  called  "Mass.'' 

397.  Line  of  platoon  columns  can  be  taken  from  any  formation. 
It  maneuvers  by  the  commands  for  the  squadron  in  line;  it  obliques 
by  heads  of  columns  and  forms  column  of  squads  to  a  flank.  In 
obliquing  or  in  moving  by  the  flank  or  to  the  rear,  the  heads  of 
platoon  columns  execute  changes  of  direction.  In  moving  to  the 
rear,  the  heads  of  columns  turn  to  the  left. 

398.  The  squadron  in  line  to  form  line  of  platoon  columns: 

1.  Platoon  coliunns,  2.  MARCH.  The  directing  platoon  fol- 
lows the  captain;  the  others  regulate  on  it. 

399.  To  form   line   from   line   of  platoon  columns:  1.  Line, 

2.  MARCH,  the  directing  platoon  deploys  and  follows  the  cap- 
ta,in;  the  others  take  their  interval,  if  necessary,  and  deploy. 

To  form  line  in  an  oblique  direction,  the  captain  changes  direc- 
tion before  ordering  the  deployment. 

400.  The  squadron  in  column  to  form  line  of  platoon  columns: 
1.  Line  of  platoon  columns,  2.  MARCH.  The  first  platoon 
forms  column  and  follows  the  captain;  the  other  platoons  break 
from  the  column  as  in  forming  line  and  tJien  form  column  and  move 
to  their  places. 

401.  Being  in  line  of  platoon  columns  to  form  column:  1.  Col- 
umn (or,  on  such  platoon,  column),  2.  MARCH  The  direct- 
ing platoon  follows  the  captain,  or  goes  in  the  indicated  direction  and 
forms  line  as  soon  as  it  has  cleared;  the  other  platoons  follow,  and 
each,  as  soon  as  it  has  cleared,  forms  line. 


THE  CHARGE.  161 

402.  Route  column  is  a  formation  in  which  the  platoons  are 
placed  one  behind  the  other,  each  in  column  of  squads,  half-squads, 
or  files. 

As  a  rule  the  captain  marches  at  the  head  of  the  column,  the 
leader  of  the  first  platoon  on  his  left,  followed  by  the  first  sergeant 
and  a  trumpeter;  all  distances  are  4  feet.  Except  in  the  rear 
platoon,  the  leaders  ride  in  front  and  the  file  closers  in  rear.  In 
the  rear  platoon  the  file  closer  rides  at  the  head  and  the  leader 
in  rear.  This  formation  is  taken  at  the  command:  1.  Column 
of  squads  (half-squads,  or  files)  or,  On  such  platoon,  colunm. 
of  squads  (half-squads,  or  files),  2.  MARCH.  The  directing 
platoon  breaks  forward;  the  others  enter  the  column  so  that  th© 
two  right  and  the  two  left  platoons  follow  each  other.  The  leaders 
of  the  rear  platoons  follow  the  file  closers  of  the  preceding  pla- 
toons, except  at  the  command:  CLOSE  INTO  THE  INTER- 
VALS, when  the  platoon  leader  of  each  rear  platoon  rides  on  the 
left  of  the  file  closer  of  the  preceding  platoon. 

403.  To  march  the  route  column  to  the  rear,  the  captain  com- 
mands: 1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH.  Each  platoon  executes  a 
left  about. 

404.  The  route  column  is  deployed  in  all  directions  according 
to  the  same  principles  as  the  squadron  column. 

Each  platoon  follows  its  leader  and  forms  line  behind  him  at  his 
indication. 

When  practicable,  the  formation  of  pquadron  line  directly  from 
route  column  should  be  avoided;  it  is  better  to  pass  first  to  column 
or  line  of  platoon  columns. 

406.  To  form  column  from  route  column:  1.  Colunui,  2. 
MARCH.  The  leader  of  the  leading  platoon  forms  his  platoon 
in  line;  the  other  platoons  form  line  successively  when  they  arrive 
at  the  place  that  they  are  to  occupy  in  the  column. 

The  charge, 

406.  The  principles  for  the  platoon  apply.  The  normal  forma- 
tion for  the  charge  is  line,  but  it  may  be  made  in  column. 

407.  Marching  at  the  gallop,  at  the  command:  1.  To  attack, 
the  squadron  takes  the  extended  gallop  and  closes  on  the  captain, 
who  takes  position  on  the  left  of  the  leader  of  the  directing  pla- 
toon. When  at  about  50  yards  from  the  enemy  the  captain  com- 
mands: 2.  CHARGE,  which  is  repeated  by  the  platoon  leaders 

*and  the  troopers. 

34396°— 14 11 


162  EXTENDED  ORDER. 

408.  In  instruction  the  enemy  must  always  be  outlined  or 
represented  by  troopers,  who  may  carry  flags,  under  command  of 
an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer.  In  the  beginning  of  this 
instruction  these  men  will  occupy  fixed  positions;  later  they  will 
be  instructed  to  ride  so  as  to  represent  the  movements  of  an  aggres- 
sive enemy.  The  captain  will  explain  to  the  commander  the  ob- 
ject of  the  exercise  and  tell  him  what  to  do. 

409.  To  combine  a  flank  attack  wdth  the  direct  attack,  the 
captain  designates  a  flank  platoon:  1.  First  (or  fourth)  platoon, 
2.  FLANK  ATTACK.  The  designated  platoon  at  once  moves 
out  and  is  conducted  so  as  to  best  fall  opportunely  upon  the  enemy's 
flank. 

410.  If  the  captain  wdshes  to  guard  against  a  flank  attack  or 
an  enveloping  attack,  he  detaches  a  flank  platoon  to  move  to  the 
menaced  flank  and  to  march  somewhat  in  rear  or  in  advance  on 
that  flank,  ready  to  take  an  enveloping  attack  in  flank  or  to  meet 
a  flank  attack. 

The  movement  is  executed  upon  the  command:  1.  First  (or 
fourth)  platoon,  2.  FLANK  GUARD,  or  2.  FLANK  GUARD 
FORWARD. 

411.  While,  as  a  rule,  cavalry  in  attack  should  always  have  a 
reserve,  a  platoon  is  never  kept  in  rear  except  when  the  captain 
so  directs. 

EXTENDED   ORDER. 

412.  Extended  order  may  be  taken  from  any  formation.  The 
principles  for  the  squadron  are  the  same  as  those  for  the  platoon. 
The  captain,  accompanied  by  the  first  sergeant  and  a  trumpeter, 
goes  wherever  necessary.  Extended  order  by  platoons  may  be 
taken-:  (a)  In  line,  with  the  directing  platoon  somewhat  in  advance 
of  the  others;  or  (b)  in  depth,  by  successive  platoons. 

(a)  1.  Line  of  platoons  (or  on  such  platoon,  line  of  pla- 
toons), 2.  MARCH. 

(6)  1.  Platoons  (or  on  such  platoon),  2.  At  (so  many)  yards 
distance,  3.  MARCH.  The  extension  in  depth  is  made  on  the 
directing  platoon  (or  the  platoon  designated).  Care  must  be 
taken  by  the  platoon  leaders  not  to  increase  the  distance  pre- 
scribed. The  captain  indicates  to  the  directing  platoon  the 
objective,  gait,  and  formation;  the  others  take  the  formation 
ordered  by  the  captain  or  follow  the  example  of  the  directing 
platoon.  During  the  march  the  leaders  may,  when  necessary, 
alter  their  formation. 


FORAGERS— SCOUTS-— THE  RALLY.  163 

Foragers, 

413.  The  squadron  is  extended  as  foragers  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  the  platoon.  The  captain  may  add  to  the 
first  command:  On  {such)  platoon.  The  directing  (or  designated) 
platoon  deploys  as  soon  as  it  has  the  space.  The  other  platoons 
take  their  intervals,  and  each  deploys  on  its  center. 

414.  In  extended  order  in  line  the  directing  platoon  is  12  yards 
in  advance  of  the  others. 

415.  When  the  squadron  is  alone,  a  platoon  should  be  held  in 
reserve  in  close  order  for  emergencies  or  to  provide  a  base  for  rally- 
ing or  assembling. 

When  a  charge  as  foragers  is  combined  with  a  charge  in  line,  the 
foragers  should  be  rapidly  rallied  to  a  flank  to  unmask  the  charge 
inline  which  follows. 

The  line  of  foragers  must  be  exercised  in  moving  to  the  rear  and 
by  the  flank,  and  must  be  able  to  rally  promptly  behind  itAS  leader 
so  as  to  attack  in  line. 

Scouts — Combat  patrols, 

416.  The  squadron  in  its  maneuvers  must  be  frequently  prac- 
ticed in  sending  out  ground  scouts  and  combat  patrols. 

Where  very  bad  ground  is  to  be  crossed  the  ground  scouts  should 
be  under  a  noncommissioned  ofiicer. 

One  or  more  platoons  may  be  detached  for  scouting.  The  captain 
remains  with  the  body  of  the  squadron. 

In  each  platoon  scouts  and  a  combat  patrol  must  be  ready  to 
start  immediately  upon  order  of  the  captain. 

The  rally. 

417.  The  rally  is  in  line,  and  is  made  from  any  formation.  At 
the  command:  RALLY,  the  platoon  leaders  rally  their  platoons 
while  moving  at  the  gallop  toward  the  captain.  The  troopers  form 
in  double  rank  in  rear  of  their  platoon  leaders.  The  first  platoon 
to  arrive  forms  in  rear  of  the  captain  and  becomes  the  directing 
platoon;  the  others  form  to  right  and  left  without  regard  to  normal 
order.  If  there  is  not  room  for  a  platoon  to  come  up  on  the  line, 
it  may  remain  in  echelon. 

The  rally  may  be  resorted  to  from  any  formation  where  the  regular 
method  of  forming  line  would  be  sloiv  or  difficult. 


164  FIGHTING  ON  FOOT. 

The  assembly. 

418.  The  squadron  mounted  is  assembled  in  squadron  column. 
ASSEMBLE:  Each  platoon  leader  assembles  his  platoon  in  line, 
and  then  leads  it  into  the  column  behind  the  captain.  The  pla- 
toons take  place  in  column  in  the  normal  order,  or  as  the  captain 
may  direct. 

Squadron  exercises. 

419.  The  squadron  must  be  exercised  in: 

(a)  Marching  and  deploying  at  the  extended  gallop. 
(6)  Executing  change  of  formation  while  executing  change 
of  direction. 

(c)  Passing  from  one  formation  to  another  before  the  first  is 

completed. 

(d)  Ploying  and  deploying,  including  closing  or  extending 

intervals  without  gaining  ground  to  the  front,  for  con- 
cealment or  to  prepare  for  a  sudden  attack. 

{e)  Attacking  infantry  and  artillery  in  extended  order,  and 
in  rallying  and  assembling  rapidly  from  extended 
order. 

(/)  Making  sliort  movements  by  fours  to  the  flank  and  to 
the  rear. 

{g)  Rapid  separation  of  the  platoons  to  diminish  effect  of 
artillery  fire. 

{h)  Crossing  fire-swept  zones  in  appropriate  formations. 

{%)  Dismounted  combat. 

TO  FIGHT  ON  FOOT. 

420.  The  squadron  when  alone  always  leaves  a  sufficient 
mounted  guard  with  the  led  horses  to  insure  their  safety  and  to 
keep  touch  with  the  squadron.  When  part  of  a  larger  unit,  the 
superior  commander  gives  directions  as  to  the  mounted  ^lard. 
The  led  horses  should  be  kept  under  cover,  assembled  by  squad- 
ron, or  in  rear  of  their  respective  platoons. 

421.  The  captain  proceeds,  with  the  other  officers  and  the  first 
sergeant,  to  reconnoiter.  On  the  offensive  the  captain  indicates  to 
each  platoon  its  objective.  On  the  defensive  he  indicates  the 
points  to  be  held. 

The  captain,  having  completed  his  reconnaissance,  moves  the 
squadron  as  near  to  the  dismounted  position  as  a  consideration  of 
all  the  circumstances  wiU  permit,  designates  the  guard  for  the  led 


THE  ADVANCE.  165 

horses  and  gives  instructions  to  its  commander  and  dismounts  the 
squadron  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
tne  platoon. 

The  horses  of  the  captain  and  his  trumpeter  are  held  by  a  trum- 
peter from  the  ranks  who  remains  mounted.  The  first  sergeant 
remains  with  the  led  horses  unless  directed  by  the  captain  to  ac- 
company the  squadron.  When  necessary,  the  captain  may  desig- 
nate a  mounted  reserve. 

The  advance. 

422.  If  necessary  for  the  squadron  to  advance  a  considerable 
distance  into  an  engagement  (whether  for  attack  or  defense)  it 
moves  in  close  order,  preferably  column  of  squads,  until  the  proba- 
bility of  encountering  hostile  fire  makes  it  advisable  to  deploy. 
After  deployment,  and  before  opening  fire,  the  advance  of  the 
squadron  may  be  continued  in  skirmish  line  or  other  suitable  for- 
mation, depending  upon  circumstances.  The  advance  may  often 
be  facilitated,  or  better  advantage  taken  of  cover,  or  losses  reduced 
by  the  employment  of  the  line  of  platoon  columns  (or  line  of  squads) 
or  by  the  use  of  a  succession  of  thin  lines.  The  selection  of  the 
method  to  be  used  is  made  by  the  captain,  the  choice  depending 
upon  conditions  arising  during  the  progress  of  the  advance.  If  the 
deployment  is  found  to  be  premature,  it  will  generally  be  best  to 
assemble  the  squadron  and  proceed  in  close  order. 

Patrols  are  used  to  provide  the  necessary  security  against  surprise. 

Platoon  columns  are  profitably  used  where  the  ground  is  so  diffi- 
cult or  cover  so  limited  as  to  make  it  desirable  to  take  advantage 
of  the  few  favorable  routes;  no  two  platoons  should  march  within 
the  area  of  burst  of  a  single  shrapnel.  Lines  of  squads  in  column 
of  files  are  of  value  principally  in  facilitating  the  advance  over 
rough  or  brush-grown  ground;  they  afford  no  material  advantage 
in  securing  cover. 

The  advance  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used  to  cross  a  wide 
stretch  swept,  or  likely  to  be  swept,  by  artillery  fire  or  heavy,  long- 
range  fire  which  can  not  profitably  be  returned.  Its  purpose  is 
the  building  up  of  a  strong  skirmish  line  preparatory  to  engaging 
in  a  fire  fight.  This  method  of  advancing  offers  a  less  definite 
target,  hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

The  above  are  suggestions.  Other  and  better  formations  may  be 
devised  to  fit  particular  cases.  The  best  formation  is  the  one 
which  advances  the  line  farthest  with  the  least  loss  of  men,  time, 
and  control. 


166  THE  PIRE  ATTACK. 


The  fire  attack. 


423.  The  principles  governing  the  advance  of  the  tiring  line  in 
attack  are  considered  in  the  School  of  the  Regiment. 

When  it  becomes  impracticable  for  the  squadron  to  advance  as  a 
whole  by  ordinary  means,  it  advances  by  rushes. 

424.  Being  in  skirmish  line :  1.  By  platoon  (squad)  from  the 
right,  2.  RUSH. 

The  platoon  leader  on  the  indicated  flank  carefully  arranges  the 
details  for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution  of  the  rush  and  puts  it 
into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable.  When  about  to  rush,  he  causes 
the  men  of  the  fraction  to  cease  firing  and  to  hold  themselves  flat, 
but  in  readiness  to  spring  forward  instantly.  The  leader  of  the 
rush  (at  the  signal)  commands:  FOLLOW  MS ,  and,  running  at  top 
speed,  leads  the  fraction  to  the  new  line,  where  he  halts  and  opens 
fire.  The  leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line,  if  it  has  not  been 
previously  designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new  line,  the 
next  like  fraction  is  led  or  sent  forward  by  its  platoon  leader,  with- 
out further  command  of  the  captain,  and  so  on,  successively,  until 
the  entire  squadron  is  on  the  line  established  by  the  first  rush. 

In  an  advance  by  rushes,  leaders  of  troops  in  firing  positions  are 
responsible  for  the  delivery  of  heavy  fire  to  cover  the  advance  of 
each  rushing  fraction.  Troops  are  trained  to  change  slightly  the 
direction  of  fire,  so  as  not  to  endanger  the  flanks  of  advanced  por- 
tions of  the  firing  line. 

When  the  squadron  forms  a  part  of  the  firing  line,  the  rush  of  the 
squadron  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the  captain,  as  described  for 
a  platoon  in  the  preceding  paragraph.  The  captain  leads  the  rush; 
platoon  leaders  lead  their  respective  platoons;  during  the  rush  the 
sergeants  follow  the  line  to  insure  prompt  and  orderly  execution  of 
the  advance. 

When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  running,  becomes 
impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that  carries  the  attach  closer 
to  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling,  should  be  employed. 

The  squadron  in  sup'port. 

425.  To  enable  it  to  follow  and  reach  the  firing  line,  the  sup- 
port adopts  suitable  formations,  following  the  principles  hereto- 
fore explained. 

The  support  should  be  kept  assembled  as  long  as  practicable. 
If  after  deploying  a  favorable  opportunity  arises  to  hold  it  for 


SQUADRON  IN  SUPPORT.  167 

some  time  in  close  formation,  it  should  be  reassembled.  It  is 
redeployed  when  necessary. 

The  movements  of  the  support  as  a  whole  and  the  dispatch  of 
reenforcements  from  it  to  the  firing  line  are  controlled  by  the 
colonel. 

A  reenforcement  of  less  than  one  platoon  has  little  influence, 
and  will  be  avoided  whenever  practicable. 

The  captain  of  a  squadron  in  support  is  constantly  on  the  alert 
for  the  colonel's  commands. 

426.  A  reenforcement  sent  to  the  firing  line  joins  it  deployed  as 
skirmishers.  The  leader  of  the  reenforcement  places  it  in  an 
interval  in  the  line,  if  one  exists,  and  commands  it  thereafter  as  a 
unit.  If  no  such  suitable  interval  exists,  the  reenforcement  is 
advanced  with  increased  intervals  between  skirmishers;  each  man 
occupies  the  nearest  interval  in  the  firing  Hne,  and  each  then  obeys 
the  orders  of  the  nearest  squad  leader  and  platoon  leader. 

A  reenforcement  joins  the  firing  line  as  quickly  as  possible  with- 
out exhausting  the  men.  It  may  be  utilized  to  send  forward 
additional  ammunition. 

427.  The  original  platoon  division  of  the  squadron  in  the  firing 
line  should  be  maintained,  and  should  be  broken  up  by  the  mingling 
of  reenforcements  only  when  this  is  unavoidable. 

Upon  joining  the  firing  line,  officers  and  sergeants  accompanying 
a  reenforcement  take  over  the  duties  of  others  of  like  grade  who 
have  been  disabled,  or  distribute  themselves  so  as  best  to  exercise 
their  normal  functions.  Conditions  will  vary,  and  no  rules  can  be 
prescribed.  It  is  essential  that  all  assist  in  mastering  the  increasing 
difficulties  of  control. 

The  squadron  acting  alone. 

428.  In  general,  the  squadron,  when  acting  alone,  is  employed 
according  to  the  principles  applicable  to  the  regiment  acting  alone ; 
the  captain  employs  platoons  as  the  colonel  employs  squadrons, 
making  due  allowance  for  the  difference  in  strength. 

The  support  may  be  smaller  in  proportion,  or  may  be  dispensed 
with. 

429.  The  squadron  must  be  well  protected  against  surprise. 
Combat  patrols  on  the  flanks  are  specially  important.  Each  leader 
of  a  flank  platoon  details  a  man  to  watch  for  the  signals  of  the  patrol 
or  patrols  on  his  flank. 


168  FIRE. 


430.  Ordinarily  rifles  are  loaded  and  extra  ammunition,  if  re- 
quired, is  issued  ])efore  the  squadron  deploys  for  combat. 

In  close  order  the  squadron  executes  the  firings  at  the  command 
of  the  captain,  who  posts  himself  in  rear  of  the  center. 

Firings  in  close  order  will  be  exceptional. 

When  the  squadron  is  deployed,  the  men  execute  the  fi.rings  at 
the  command  of  their  platoon  leaders;  the  latter  give  such  com- 
mands as  are  necessary  to  carry  out  the  captain's  directions,  and, 
from  time  to  time,  add  such  furtiier  commands  as  are  necessary  to 
continue,  correct,  and  control  the  fire  ordered. 

The  voice  is  generally  inadequate  for  giving  commands  during 
fire,  and  must  be  replaced  by  signals  of  such  character  that  proper 
fire  direction  and  control  are  assured.  To  attract  attention,  signals 
must  usually  be  preceded  by  the  whistle  signal  (short  blast).  A 
fraction  of  tlie  firing  line  about  to  nish  should,  if  practicable,  avoid 
using  the  long  blast  signal  as  an  aid  to  cease  firing.  Officers  and  men 
behind  the  firing  line  can  not  ordinarily  move  freely  along  the  line, 
but  each  must  depend  on  the  others'  watchfulness,  in  addition  to 
his  own,  and  make  proper  use  of  the  prescribed  signals.  All  should 
place  themselves  so  as  to  see  their  immediate  superiors  and  subor- 
dinates. 

The  file  closers  assist  by  observing  the  enemy,  the  target,  and  the 
fire  effect,  and  l)y  watching  for  and  transmitting  commands. 

Firing  with  blank  cartridges  at  an  outlined  or  represented  enemy 
at  distances  less  than  100  yards  is  prohibited. 

The  effect  of  fire  and  the  influence  of  the  ground  in  relation 
thereto,  and  the  individual  and  collective  instniction  in  marksman- 
ship, are  treated  in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

Rangts. 

431.  For  convenience  of  reference  ranges  are  classified  as  follow : 

0  to  600  yards,  close  range. 
GOO  to  1 ,200  vards,  effective  range. 
1,200  lo  2,000  yards,  long  range, 
over  2,000  yards,  distant  range. 

432.  The  distance  to  the  target  must  be  determined  as  accu- 
rately as  possible  and  the  sights  set  accordingly.  Aside  from  train- 
ing and  morale,  this  is  the  most  important  single  factor  in  securing 
effective  fire  at  the  longer  ranges. 


THE  TARGET.  169 

Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  position,  the  most 
accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  determining  the  range  will 
generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of  several  estimates,  made  inde- 
pendently. 

Five  or  six  officers  or  men,  selected  from  the  most  accurate  esti- 
mators in  the  squadron,  are  designated  as  range  finders  and  are  spe- 
cially trained  in  estimating  distances. 

Wnenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assembles  the 
range  finders,  points  out  the  target  to  them,  and  adopts  the  mean 
of  their  estimates.  The  range  finders  then  take  their  customary 
posts. 

Classes  of  fire. 

433.  Volley  fire  has  limited  application.  It  has  a  moral  effect, 
both  on  the  troops  employing  it  and  those  subjected  to  it.  It  may 
be  employed  to  restore  control.  In  defense  it  may  be  used  in  the 
early  stages  of  the  action  if  the  enemy  presents  a  large,  compact 
target.  It  may  be  used  by  troops  specially  posted  on  the  flank  or  in 
a  dominant  position  in  rear  of  an  attacking  force  for  the  purpose  of 
aiding  the  advance  hy  fire  of  position.  When  the  ground  near  the 
target  is  such  that  the  strike  of  bullets  can  be  seen  from  the  firing 
line,  ranging  volleys  may  be  used  to  correct  the  sight  setting. 

In  combat,  volley  firing  is  executed  habitually  by  platoon. 

Fire  at  ivill  is  the  class  of  fire  normally  employed  in  attack  or 
defense. 

Clip  fire  has  limited  application.  It  is  principally  used:  (a)  In 
the  early  stages  of  combat,  to  steady  the  men  by  habituating  them 
to  brief  pauses  in  firing;  (6)  to  produce  a  short  burst  of  fire. 

The  target. 

434.  Ordinarily  the  colonel  will  assign  to  the  squadron  an  objec- 
tive in  attack  or  sector  in  defense;  the  squadron's  target  will  lie 
within  the  limits  so  assigned.  In  the  choice  of  target,  tactical  con- 
siderations are  paramount;  the  nearest  hostile  troops  within  the 
objective  or  sector  will  thus  be  the  usual  target.  This  will  ordi- 
narily be  the  hostile  firing  line;  troops  in  rear  are  ordinarily  proper 
targets  for  artillery,  machine  guns,  or,  at  times,  troops  employing 
fire  of  position. 

Change  of  target  should  not  be  made  without  excellent  reasons 
therefor,  such  as  the  sudden  appearance  of  hostile  troops  under 
conditions  which  make  them  more  to  be  feared  than  the  troops 
comprising  the  former  target. 


170  FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL. 

435.  The  distribution  of  fire  over  the  entire  target  is  of  special 
importance. 

The  captain  allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon,  or  each 

Elatoon  leader  takes  as  his  target  that  part  which  corresponds  to 
is  position  in  the  squadron.     Men  are  so  instructed  that  each 
fires  on  that  part  of  the  target  which  is  directly  opposite  him. 

All  parts  of  the  target  are  equally  important.  Care  must  be  exer- 
cised that  the  men  do  not  slight  its  less  ^dsible  parts.  A  section 
of  tlie  target  not  covered  by  fire  represents  a  number  of  the  enemy 
permitted  to  fire  coolly  and  effectively. 

Fire  direction. 

436.  It  is  impracticable  for  the  captain  to  command  the  squad- 
ron directly  in  combat.  His  efficiency  in  managing  the  firing 
line  is  measured  by  his  ability  to  enforce  his  will  through  the 
platoon  leaders.  Having  indicated  clearly  what  he  desires  them 
to  do,  he  avoids  interfering  except  to  correct  serious  errors  or 
omissions. 

437.  The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  the  squadron  or  of  desig- 
nated platoons.  He  designates  the  target,  and,  when  practicable, 
allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon.  Before  beginning  the 
fire  action  he  determines  the  range,  announces  the  sight  setting,  and 
indicates  the  class  of  fire  to  be  employed  and  the  time  to  open  fire. 
Thereafter,  he  observes  the  fire  effect,  corrects  material  errors  in 
sight  setting,  prevents  exhaustion  of  the  ammunition  supply, 
and  causes  the  distribution  of  such  extra  ammunition  as  may  be 
received  from  the  rear. 

Fire  control, 

438.  In  combat  the  platoon  is  the ^rewmf.  From  20  to  35  rifles 
are  as  many  as  one  leader  can  control  effectively. 

Each  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  commands  or  direc- 
tions of  the  captain,  having  first  taken  such  precautions  to  insure 
correct  sight  setting  and  clear  description  of  the  target  or  aiming 
point  as  the  situation  permits  or  requires;  thereafter  he  gives  such 
additional  commands  or  directions  as  are  necessary  to  exact  com- 
pliance with  the  captain's  will.  He  corrects  the  sight  setting 
when  necessary.  He  designates  an  aiming  point  when  the  target 
can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye. 

In  general,  platoon  leaders  observe  the  tar.get  and  the  effect  of 
their  fire  and  are  on  the  alert  for  the  captain's  commands;  they 
observe  and  regulate  the  rate  of  fire.    The  file  closers  watch  the 


FIRE  DISCIPLINE.  171 

firing  line  and  check  every  breach  of  fire  discipline.  Squad 
leaders  transmit  commands  when  necessary,  observe  the  conduct 
of  their  squads  and  abate  excitement,  assist  in  enforcing  fire  discn- 
pline,  and  participate  in  the  firing. 

439.  The  best  troops  are  those  that  submit  longest  to  fire  con- 
trol. Loss  of  control  is  an  evil  which  robs  success  of  its  greatest 
results.  To  avoid  or  delay  such  loss  should  be  the  constant  aim 
of  all. 

Fire  control  implies  the  ability  to  stop  firing,  change  the  sight 
setting  and  target,  and  resume  a  well-directed  fire. 

Fire  discipline. 

440.  ''Fire  discipline  implies,  besides  a  habit  of  obedience,  a 
control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier,  the  result  of  training,  which 
will  enable  him  in  action  to  make  hits  instead  of  misses.  It  em- 
braces taking  advantage  of  the  ground;  care  in  setting  the  sight 
and  delivery  of  fire;  constant  attention  to  the  orders  of  the  leaders, 
and  careful  observation  of  the  enemy;  an  increase  of  fire  when 
the  target  is  favorable,  and  a  cessation  of  fire  when  the  enemy 
disappears;  economy  of  ammunition."  (Small-Arms  Firing 
Manual.) 

In  combat,  shots  which  graze  the  enemy's  trench  or  position, 
and  thus  reduce  the  effectiveness  of  his  fire,  have  the  approximate 
value  of  hits;  such  shots  only,  or  actual  hits,  contribute  toward  fire 
superiority. 

Fire  discipline  implies  that,  in  a  firing  line  without  leaders, 
each  man  retains  his  presence  of  mind  and  directs  effective  fire 
upon  the  proper  target. 

441.  To  create  a  correct  appreciation  of  the  requirements  of  fire 
discipline,  men  are  taught  that  the  rate  of  fire  should  be  as  rapid 
as  is  consistent  with  accurate  aiming;  that  the  rate  will  depend 
upon  the  visibility,  proximity,  and  size  of  the  target;  and  that 
the  proper  rate  will  ordinarily  suggest  itself  to  each  trained  man, 
usually  rendering  cautions  or  commands  unnecessary. 

In  attack  the  highest  rate  of  fire  is  employed  at  the  halt  pre- 
ceding the  assault,  and  in  pursuing  fire. 

442.  In  defense,  when  the  target  disappears  behind  cover,  pla- 
toon leaders  suspend  fire,  prepare  their  platoons  to  fire  upon  the 
point  whare  it  is  expected  to  reappear,  and  greet  its  reappearance 
instantly  with  vigorous  fire. 

443.  For  communication  between  the  firins:  line  and  the  reserve 
or  commander  in  rear,  the  subjoined  signals  (Signal  Code)  are  pre- 


172 


EMPLOYMENT  OF  THE  SaiTADRON. 


scribed.  Id  transmission  their  concealment  from  the  enemy's  view 
should  be  insured.  In  the  absence  of  signal  flags,  the  headdress  or 
other  substitute  may  be  used. 


Letter  of 
alphabet. 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  firing 
line. 

If  signaled  from  the  firing  line 
to  the  rear. 

aaa 

Ammunition  going  forward 

Ammunition  required. 

ccc 

sss 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times) 

Support  going  forward 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no  in- 
structions to  contrary. 
Support  needed. 

0 

Move  forward 

Preparing  to  move  forward. 

hhh 

Halt 

n 

Negative 

Negative. 
Affirmative. 

y 

Affirmative 

The  rally. 

444.  The  rally  is  executed  by  platoon  at  command  of  the  cap- 
tain, as  already  prescribed. 

To  mount. 

445.  The  platoons  mount  simultaneously,  or  as  nearly  as  practi- 
cable, under  the  protection  of  the  reserve;  one  platoon  may  be  left 
dismounted  to  cover  the  retreat  of  the  others  to  their  horses. 

At  the  command:  MOUNT  (or  SUCH  PLATOONS  MOUNT), 
all  the  platoons  or  those  designated  mount  and  form  in  rear  of  the 
captain  in  the  formation  he  indicates.  The  reserve  takes  up  the 
pursuit  or  covers  the  retreat. 

EMPLOYMENT   OF  THE    SQUADRON. 

446.  The  captain  must  cultivate  the  special  abilities  and  utilize 
the  characteristics  of  his  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers. 
He  must  encourage  each  in  the  exercise  of  the  initiative  pertaining 
to  his  position. 

The  squadron,  acting  alone,  may  be  employed  to  explore,  to 
support  a  reconnaissance,  to  seize  a  position,  etc.  It  moves  by  a 
succession  of  rapid  advances.  It  must  protect  itself  by  detach- 
ments and  always  retain  its  liberty  of  action.  Its  best  guaranty 
of  safety  lies  in  its  mobility. 

In  combat  the  captain  may  effect  various  combinations  with  his 
platoons;  as,  for  example,  he  may  attack  with  one  platoon  and 
maneuver  with  the  others. 

The  squadron  in  the  regiment  charges  or  attacks  dismounted  by 
the  same  means  and  according  to  the  same  principles  as  wheii  alone, 


THE  SQUADRON,  DISMOUNTED.  173 

except  that  it  does  not  have  a  support  or  reserve  unless  so  ordered 
by  the  colonel.  Combat  patrols  are  sent  out  by  flank  squadrons 
only.  A  squadron  may  be  employed  for  a  flank  attack  or  as  a  flank 
guard.  It  reconnoiters  positions  or  covers  troops  in  menaced 
directions,  in  which  latter  case  one  or  more  platoons  are  detached 
as  scouts.  It  furnishes  advance  guards,  rear  guards,  advance  posts, 
flank  guards,  and  artillery  supports,  and  may  be  employed  as 
regimental  reserve. 

447.  The  normal  formation  for  attack  against  Cavalry  is  line  in 
double  rank.  The  charge  may  be  made  in  column  to  break 
through  at  some  point  or  when  lack  of  time  or  space  prevents 
forming  line. 

448.  In  attacking  Infantry  the  squadron  should  be  formed  in 
single  rank  or  in  extended  order.  Opportunity  should  be  sought 
for  a  flank  attack.  If  the  frontal  attack  is  necessary,  the  fire-swept 
zone  should  be  crossed  at  a  rapid  gait;  the  pace  should  be  increased 
as  the  enemy's  line  is  approached.  The  line  in  extended  order 
of  groups  may  be  maneuvered  so  that  the  groups  will  converge  in 
the  attack,  thus  causing  a  dispersion  of  the  enemy's  fire. 

In  attacking  dismounted  Cavalry,  seek  out  and  attack  the  led 
horses. 

449.  Artillery  may  be  attacked  in  march  or  in  position.  If  in 
march,  part  of  the  squadron  attacks  the  support  and  the  remainder 
the  carriages.  If  the  Artillery  is  in  position,  the  attack  is  directed 
against  its  flank.  The  captain  gives  to  each  platoon  its  special 
mission;  as,  for  example,  one  platoon  as  foragers  against  the  pieces 
and  the  teams,  while  the  others  attack  the  support,  etc. 

450.  Dismounted  action  is  resorted  to  when  success  through 
mounted  action  seems  improbable,  and — 

(a)  To  make  a  reconnaissance  that  can  not  be  made  mounted. 

(b)  To  attack  or  defend  a  camp. 

(c)  To  seize  and  hold  a  position,  force  a  passage,  etc. 

(d)  To  harass  a  column. 

(e)  To  cover  an  assembly;  hold  an  exit. 
(/)  To  cooperate  by  rifle  fire  with  the  other  arms. 
(g)  To  make  a  fire  attack  in  combination  with  a  mounted 

attack. 


I 


The  Squadron,  Dismounted. 


451.  The  commands  and  movements  for  the  squadron,  dis- 
mounted, are  the  same  as  for  the  squadron  mounted,  except  as 
indicated  in  the  school  of  the  platoon. 


174  THE  SQUADRON. 

31 

ii      \ 


5  5 

2  5.    N  \'S»'      \ 


11         ^     .^^>^ 


>'^>\ 


5  -       -^    v*^  ok**        ^        3  5 
if  5     \0      \X  ^>  \  3  3 


OJ 


V^^' 


"^         .^><*^v**       \ 


lij  Ji   11  i        \     -ii 

-ii<^i^^|i■^■•-l^v,  \     If 

--    --    -^     -^   —'  \^ii 

is 

o 
o 
13 

u     H 
x: 


cc 

<< 

:  -^      i 

■=> 

oJ^       - 1 

c» 

^''            1 

oo 

If'     ^^Ni 

UJ 

-11-               /          -3-"* 

ii._,_2-.  1 

THE  SaUADRON.  17« 


x: 
o 

csi 


\. 


11 

ii 

-S  ii 

£  /ii 


ii  ^^^  /I  K>0^\  /  2 1 
ii-H^^i  ^  ^  >52 
|l^   ^O  i        CO  .11 


H 


-i.       ' 

i        / 

i         "^ 

\  i  / 

^1/ 


176  THE  SaUADRON. 


O 

a: 


o 


<      /    if 


J^  ^         IflHIflfllMlff?/  i  I 

O  S,     ""'"IT"       II 

^  1    i«H«'W«"  /'if- 


/-^  If 

oj  /      ^  5  5 

E         \V^  i|-.-- 5i> 

c3  %\.^V     il   ..  It 

-        %\  ^  "52  5  2 

^  5  2  5  5 

if  il 


THE  SatTADEOir.  177 

THE  SQUADRON  2III 

Line  of  platoon  co\umf\$ 
Route  Column       ^,  ^  -j^  i  ^    ^ 

^,4^,      r  {21  7  z     '"^ 


Mi 


«w    "«     m     m     Hw    \{i      tm     «w 


I         MM  ^  <U<  MM  !!tt 

MM 
I 


1  »»M  f 

MM 

•HI 


,M        ».  To  the  rear        2    MARCH 


3l    fi    if    il 
iiJi-ii-li 


'     M«  \  fi     fl    Ei     Ei 

X  |i    |i    |E    |i 

HH^l  ^  if 

,       MM  '<  ^  •  s  2  ^ 

..      "»  ^         /  S3 

V  T       ^    ;      II 

^  -X  ^-iiii 

i  \  '         i  ii  I 

P-        /    \_|2f  I 

/  v^-^2i.i 
\     ^' li- 

3439P'  — '4 12 


178 


THE  SaUADRON. 


TTV         THE  SQUADRON 


II' 


ibne-Z  MARCH 


i'^^' 


itU     / 

uu  / 

Ml  , 

I 


iiH 


i<sSS' 


,^^^^^ 


.>^ 


A*' 


>»*' 


I  Line 

Z  MARCH 


I 

\  \      ^ 

\  •     / 

iuuhiuuiiui 
\ 
\ 

tlUtliliiitiiil 

utiittttiiiimir 


1  Lme  to\Hen|Vit 

2  MARCH  \, 

{Radius  of  i  I 

^       platoor.  Icdders  j  -^  . 
atlhefeailop)         || 

•/I  platoon  f<"or\V  "^  "j  c  = 

luitmutattt  I  f 

iUimutittui  %  r 

r  s 
I  II. 


iiiUMIUiUM 
/ 

liUilurUiiM 


S  £ 


THE  SaiTADRON. 


179 


CD 

o 
< 

(/) 
uJ 


> 


or 


<vJ 


o 


J5 

CL- 


3  ^ 


22 


3  3 

11- 

ii 


2  2 

ii 

22' 
52 


Q 

or 

< 

DC 
O 

U- 

o 
a: 
< 

:^ 

z 

<c 

.-J 


a- 


2  2 


2  2 

ii 
f  i 

,5  2 

ii 
ii 

2  2 

^ii 

22" 

i  i 


c 


CO 

-J- 

-4-- 


2  2 

,1  i  - 

2  2 

3  2 

2i 


ii 
Ii 
ii 

-  ,2  i  * 

ii 

2  2 


ltd  THE  SaXTADKON. 

I  I  1  »  /I    ^ 

MUU(tM»im«»UlUll|l«lUI   •"OMlllHtlu     »»uiuiimitu  "'VMlUlltU 

ttiiuumimtiiiiOH  I'll  tilt  HitiMiiiiiiiu    ouiiiitiiitiu  *^*'^^>uuuHt 

X^X  ''^^'^^7"  2  MARCH 


1 

,     1  Line 

Uil 
till 

UM 
tMt 
«MI 

tut 

Ml 
tilt 

Z  2  MARCH 

Mil 

•«»l 

Mtt 

Itll 

UM 
II 

7  1  Fore-vard 

V 

2  MARCH 

\'\\\ 

I  Left    OblK)ue    2  MARCH' 


.»       i.  .1.  ; ;               "^     ■    .  '  \V 

Mtl                    Mtt  »tM  ,,„                                                *Sk            '         «*li»ll»lim%% 

*«•                    '>H  »»  ttM                       .   ,                 ,     »\kS           \        UlilUltlllitU      ''i' 

MM              MM  m  „„                 I  Line    of    \         V*V^^     . 

is;       z  2  •*          p'*^°°"   v^V*'V"»*"-»»» 

tut                tMt  Wt  **|*                             Columns     ^^         iiihi^tJUiiMM 

'                •  "  2  MARCH      >^      * 

Take  full  intervals  »  ^'y^f^^mmm 

I  I           »  I                                                                                     \ 

MH  Ml       Mtt  Ml                                                                                 tiUHHUtUM 

llu  !!!S    !!!!  m!                                       'wmmimkimi 


IIM       till       Ml 


<V' 


Majs 


SX 
'''^X. 


1   I  .-a    A*  «*'l  *••*  ••• 

•  Line  ot          4„,            tm          iM           - .  -y^  T^    ^ 

^  MARCH    ^         In!    »    Ml        •M  4^        4/  *        * 

.'  ."•  ."  . '  /  .i  .i  4" 

««MJ»MM|MHMHWIM»»I»M»»WIMM»'*»****"**"*'  />/'               />/'         ^'4^'  4^'' 

••M«WlMlMjHM»MMtlM«M»MMMM»MMIMUM  ,  *                  <>            a,'*  '<'/ 

1                  1                   1                 t  I               d,'  7** 


0  ♦ '  /v 

1  R.iht  Oblique     2  MARCH 

lUl      ^       MN  Ml  '*** 

MM  ST  UM  MM 

r  M?  M- 


THE  SaTTADRON.  181 


THL  SQUADRON  JSS. 

,5         RALLY 

1^-  s5     (to  theflanK  from 

\%^  "^-^SE-     ''"^^   °^  platoon 

^5:5:50^'^  ^ ^-^i  Columns) 

itj/  »Wl'^  UM     \  nil   ^    \  ^  ^ 

Ml  ***»  »*"   ^,       "^C-*"  ^  ^-i. 


MU  WW 

4'  A  ^ 


I  On  1st  platoon, column  of  s(|u8ds  Z.MARCH  , 


M(i  MM 

»M  WW 

MM  MM 

M4I  MU 

M*  IM» 

•  ^ 


iU) 

tok 

»|l| 

»»ti 

iiU 

m 

MU 

»Mi 

4tU 

ItM 

MM 

MM 

THE  REGIMENT. 

The  Composition  op  the  Regiment. 

452.  The  regiment  is  composed  of  six  squadrons  and  a  machine- 
gun  unit.  The  instruction  prescribed  is  applicable  to  a  less  num- 
ber of  squadrons. 

For  purposes  of  maneuver  the  regiment  is  divided  into  half- 
regiments;  when  there  is  an  odd  number  of  squadrons  the  center 
squadron  is  assigned  to  the  right  half-regiment.  If  there  are  only- 
three  squadrons,  the  regiment  is  nevertheless  divided  into  half- 
regiments.  Majors  are  assigned  to  command  of  half-regiments 
when  the  regiment  is  in  echelon  of  half-regiments  or  when  half- 
regiments  are  detached. 

The  instructions  for  the  use  of  the -machine  guns  and  for  training 
machine-gun  units  are  prescribed  in  the  Machine  Gun  Regulations. 

When  the  machine-gun  unit  is  with  the  regiment  its  position  in 
line,  line  of  columns,  or  line  in  extended  order  will  be  in  rear  of 
the  center  or  in  such  position  as  the  colonel  may  direct.  In  column 
the  machine-gun  unit  is  in  rear.  In  campaign  the  machine-gun 
unit  will  be  employed  as  set  forth  in  Machine  Gun  Regulations 
and  in  Employment  of  Cavalry. 

School  op  the  Regiment. 

(Plates  XVIII  to  XXII.) 

463.  In  the  School  of  the  Regiment  the  squadrons  learn  to  apply 
in  the  regiment  what  they  have  been  taught  separately,  and  the 
regiment  learns  the  movements  necessary  to  its  use  whether  acting 
alone  or  as  j)art  of  a  brigade.  The  regiment  should  be  trained  to 
maneuver  with  squadrons  of  64  files. 

464.  To  form  the  regiment,  the  squadrons  having  been  formed, 
the  colonel  commands:  FORM  REGIMENT. 

The  regiment  forms  in  column  of  platoons  in  rear  of  the  colonel, 
the  adjutant  assisting  in  the  formation.  If  the  colonel  wishes  to 
assemble  the  regiment  in  any  other  formation,  he  indicates  it  in 
the  command. 

182 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  REGIMENT.  183 

The  squadrons  have  a  fixed  place  in  the  regiment  only  when  it 
is  first  assembled,  but  as  a  rule  the  squadrons  of  the  same  half- 
regiment  remain  together. 

They  are  numbered  from  right  to  left  in  line  and  from  front  to 
rear  in  column.    The  same  rule  applies  to  the  half-regiments. 

To  dismiss  the  regiment,  the  colonel  commands:  DISMISS 
YOUR  SQUADRONS. 

456.  The  colonel  is  the  leader  of  the  regiment.  The  directing 
squadron  follows  him.  In  line  the  directing  squadron  is  the  center 
or  right  center  squadron.  The  colonel  may,  however,  designate 
any  squadron  as  the  directing  squadron.  In  column  or  in  echelon 
the  leading  squadron  is  the  directing  squadron.  The  captain  of 
the  directing  squadron  follows  the  colonel  at  a  distance  of  30  yards. 
The  other  captains  regulate  on  him.  The  colonel,  when  he  does 
not  wish  to  act  as  leader,  is  free  to  go  where  he  considers  it  expe- 
dient to  be;  in  such  case  his  place  is  taken  b^  a  field  officer,  or  the 
colonel  may  indicate  to  the  captain  of  the  directing  squadron  the 
direction  and  the  gait  to  be  taken. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  is  15  yards  in  rear  of  the  colonel;  the 
adjutant  is  2  yards  on  the  left  of  the  colonel;  the  sergeant  major 
and  chief  trumpeter  are  2  yards  behind  the  colonel  and  adjutant 
and  act  as  messengers.  In  line  the  majors  are  in  front  of  the  centers 
of  their  wings  on  a  line  with  the  lieutenant  colonel;  in  column  they 
are  on  the  left  and  abreast  of  their  leading  units  4  yards  from  the 
column.  The  majors  and  captains  are  permitted  to  approach  the 
colonel  to  hear  and  transmit  his  orders,  the  captains  leaving  the 
conduct  of  their  squadrons  meanwhile  to  the  leaders  of  the  base 
platoons. 

456.  The  colonel  regulates  the  direction  and  gait  and  gives  his 
orders  by  signals,  by  messenger,  or  by  the  voice.  Trumpet  calls 
are  used  exceptionally,  and  then  only  when  the  regiment  is  alone. 
Sabers  are  drawn  and  returned  upon  indication  of  the  colonel. 

To  attract  the  attention  of  his  captains,  give  his  orders,  or  become 
independent  in  his  movements,  the  colonel  conforms  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  captain  in  the  school  of  the  squadron. 

The  majors  supervise  the  movements  in  their  half-regiment. 
They  give  commands  only  when  necessary,  and  repeat  the  colonel's 
commands  only  when  these  have  not  been  understood. 

When  the  colonel  raises  his  arm  (or  his  saber)  the  captains  do 
likewise  and  place  them  selves  so  as  to  understand  the  command 
and  transmit  it  to  their  squadrons. 

Although  the  colonel  gives  his  commands  to  all  the  squadrons, 
the  squadrons  execute  them  only  at  the  command  of  their  captains. 


184  REGIMENTAL  FORMATIOBTS. 

467.  Officers  must  be  frequently  practiced  in  commanding  a  unit 
greater  than  that  pertaining  to  their  grade. 

458.  If  the  colonel  wishes  to  execute  simultaneously  movements 
of  the  squadrons  or  half-regiments  not  otherwise  provided  for,  he 
gives  the  preliminary  command:  1.  Squadrons,  or  1.  Half- 
regiments;  as  for  example,  1.  Squadrons,  2.  Incline  to  the 
right,  3.  M  HCH.  Where  a  command  refers  to  a  half -regiment, 
the  captains  will  wait  for  the  command  of  the  major. 

459.  Movements  prescribed  for  the  squadron  may  be  executed 
by  the  regiment,  unless  special  provision  is  herein  made.  In  all 
formations  and  movements  of  the  regiment  the  captains  conform 
to  the  principles  laid  down  for  the  platoon  leaders  in  the  School 
of  the  Squadron. 

460.  The  regiment,  from  any  formation,  faces  or  gains  ground 
to  a  flank  by  forming  column  of  platoons  to  the  flank,  or  by  turning 
by  platoon. 

461.  At  the  command:  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  M  *  BCH,  each 
platoon  executes  a  left  about.  At  the  command:  1.  Bight 
obhque,  2.  M  RCH,  each  platoon  executes  right  half  turn,  or, 
if  in  platoon  column,  executes  column  half  right. 

462.  The  captains  must  bear  in  mind  the  vital  importance  of  order 
and  cohesion.    Perfect  regularity  in  the  gaits  is  indispensable. 


REGIMENTAL  FORMATIONS. 

(a)  Line. 

(6)  Line  of  columns. 

(c)  Mass. 

(d)  Column  of  platoons. 

(e)  Double  column. 
(/)  Echelon. 

{g)  Route  column. 
(h)  Extended  order. 

Line. 

463.  Line  is  the  formation  for  attack  against  Cavalry.  The 
squadrons  are  placed  as  indicated  in  the  accompanying  plates. 

Although  the  squadrons  are  slightly  echeloned  to  avoid  crowding 
and  give  flexibility,  this  formation  is  called  a  line. 

464.  In  marching  in  line,  the  captains  lead  their  squadrons  so 
as  to  maintain  their  interval  and  distance. 

In  order  to  preserve  cohesion  in  the  attack,  the  echelon  distance  of  12 
yards  and  the  interval  of  6  yard^  between  squadrons  are  the  extreme 
limits,  which  may  be  diminished  but  should  never  be  increased. 


MASS.  185 

Errors  in  direction  or  in  distance  should  he  corrected  gradually. 

466.  To  make  a  slight  change  of  direction  in  the  march  of  the 
regiment  in  line,  the  colonel  leads  in  the  new  direction,  followed  by 
the  directing  squadron.  The  other  squadrons  take  a  parallel 
direction  and  resume  their  places  as  soon  as  possible. 

The  regiment  should  be  frequently  exercised  in  executing  these 
changes  of  direction  while  moving  in  line  at  a  gallop. 

If  it  is  desired  to  execute  a  complete  change  of  front,  at  right 
angles  to  the  former  direction,  the  colonel  commands:  RALLY, 
and  rides  rapidly  to  the  new  front.  The  captains  conduct  their 
squadrons  at  a  gallop  to  the  new  line. 

Line  of  columns. 

466.  The  squadron  columns,  with  deploying  intervals,  are 
parallel,  with  the  heads  echeloned  at  12  yards. 

The  line  of  column  is  a  maneuver  formation  and  is  used  for  an 
approach  preceding  a  deployment. 

This  disposition  of  the  squadrons  facilitates  the  handling  of  the 
regiment  and  the  rapid  formation  of  line. 

The  squadrons  may  vary  their  intervals  in  order  to  conform  to 
the  terrain  or  to  avoid  the  fire  of  the  enemy.  They  should  regain 
their  regular  intervals,  however,  when  a  deployment  is  imminent. 

The  regiment  in  line,  the  colonel  commands:  1.  Line  of  col- 
umns, 2.  M-'RCH. 

Line  is  formed  by  the  command:   1.  Line,  2.  MARCH. 

467.  In  case  of  surprise  on  a  flank,  the  squadron  nearest  the 
enemy  faces  toward  him  and  engages  at  once;  the  other  squadrons, 
as  soon  as  possible. 

Mass. 

468.  Mass  is  a  formation  for  concentration  in  a  position  of  readi- 
ness. Beyond  the  zone  of  the  enemy's  fire,  it  may  be  used  as  a 
formation  for  marching,  under  cover  of  an  advance  guard. 

In  this  formation,  the  squadron  columns  are  parallel,  their  heads 
on  the  same  line  with  intervals  of  12  yards. 

On  account  of  its  great  vulnerability,  mass  should  not  be  used  in  the 
approach;  as  soon  as  troops  in  mass  enter  the  dangerous  zone,  they 
should  open  out. 

In  order  to  pass  from  line  or  from  line  of  columns  into  mass,  the 
colonel  commands:  1.  Mass,  or  on  {such)  squadron,  mass, 
2.  MARCH. 


186  THE  DOUBLE  COLUMN. 

Line  of  columns  is  formed  from  mass  by  the  command:  1.  Line 
of  columns,  or  on  (such)  squadron,  line  of  columns,  2.  MARCH. 
The  deployment  is  made  on  the  same  principles  as  in  the  squadron 
(fan wise) .  The  second  and  third  squadrons  form  on  the  right  of  the 
first. 

The  column  of  platoons, 

469.  Column  of  platoons  is  a  formation  for  march  and  maneuver. 
In  this  order  the  squadron  columns  follow  each  other  at  a  distance 
of  12  yards.  The  captain  of  the  first  squadron  is  15  yards  in  front 
of  the  leader  of  the  first  platoon.  The  other  captains  are  on  the 
right  of  the  leaders  of  their  first  platoons.  To  avoid  checks  on  the 
march  the  distance  between  squadrons  may  be  reduced,  and  squad- 
ron commanders  are  further  authorized  to  uncover  and  overlap  the 
preceding  squadron  temporarily. 

The  regiment  being  in  line,  in  line  of  columns  or  in  mass,  to 
break  into  column  of  platoons,  the  colonel  commands:  i.  Column, 
or  on  (cuch)  squadron  column,  2.  MARCH.  The  regiment 
breaks  into  column  behind  the  directing  or  designated  squadron. 

Deployment  of  the  column  of  platoons. 

470.  The  column  of  platoons  is  formed  to  the  front  in  mass,  or 
in  line  of  columns,  or  in  line  on  the  leading  squadron,  by  the 
command:  1.  Mass  (or  Line  of  columns,  or  line),  2.  MARCH. 

471.  To  form  mass  to  the  right:  1.  Mass  to  the  right,  2. 
MARCH.  The  leading  squadron  changes  direction  to  the  right; 
the  rear  squadrons  change  direction  successively  so  as  to  place 
themselves  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  form  line  of  columns  to  the  right:  1.  Line  of  columns  to  the 
right,  2.  MARCH. 

To  form  line  to  the  right:  1.  Line  to  the  right,  2.  MARCH. 
Each  squadron  forms  line  to  the  right  and  takes  its  place. 

The  double  column, 

472.  The  double  column  is  composed  of  two  parallel  columns 
of  platoons  with  an  interval  of  6  yards.  The  two  leading  squadrons 
are  abreast  of  each  other  and  each  is  followed  in  column  by  the 
other  squadrons  of  the  half -regiment  to  which  it  belongs. 


THE  DOUBLE  COLUMN.  187 

The  regiment  being  in  line,  in  line  of  columns,  in  mass  or  in 
column  of  platoons,  to  form  double  column:  1.  Double  column, 
2.  MARCH.  From  line  the  center  and  left  center  squadrons 
advance  in  column  of  platoons  and  each  is  followed  by  the  other 
squadrons  of  its  half -regiment.  The  squadron  columns  in  each  half- 
regiment  are  moved  by  the  shortest  line  to  their  places  in  column. 

From  line  of  columns  or  mass  the  center  and  left  center  squadrons 
advance  and  the  interval  is  closed  on  the  center  (right  center) 
squadron. 

From  column  of  platoons  the  squadrons  of  the  second  (rear)  half- 
regiment  are  led  to  their  places  in  column  on  the  left  of  the  right 
(leading)  half-regiment. 

The  distance  between  squadrons  is  the  same  as  in  regimental 
column  of  platoons. 

The  leading  squadron  of  the  right  column  is  the  directing 
squadron. 

The  colonel  is  30  yards  in  advance  of  the  captain  of  the  directing 
squadron.  The  lieutenant  colonel  is  15  yards  in  rear  of  the  colonel. 
The  majors  are  on  a  line  with  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  in  front 
of  the  outer  flanks  of  the  leading  platoons  of  their  respective  half- 
regiments. 

Deployment  of  the  double  column. 

473.  The  double  column  is  formed  in  mass,  line  of  columns,  line 
of  platoon  columns,  or  line  to  the  front  by  the  command:  1.  Mass 
(line  of  columns,  line  of  platoon  columns,  or  line),  2. 
MxlRCH.  The  deployment  of  each  half -regiment  is  made  toward 
its  outer  flank  on  the  leading  squadron.  The  leading  squadron 
of  the  left  half-regiment  gains  ground  to  the  left  and  each  squad- 
ron forms  fan  wise. 

474.  To  form  line,  line  of  platoon  columns,  line  of  columns,  or 
mass  to  the  flank:  1.  Line  (line  of  platoon  columns,  line  of  col- 
umns, or  mass),  to  the  right,  2.  MARCH.  The  right  squad- 
rons form  to  the  right  on  the  directing  squadron.  The  first  two 
squadrons  of  the  left  half-regiment  form  successively  on  the  left 
of  the  right  half -regiment;  the  third  forms  on  the  right. 

475.  To  march  the  double  column  to  the  rear:  1.  To  the  rear, 
2.  MARCH.    The  platoons  turn  to  the  left  about. 

476.  To  change  direction,  the  colonel  indicates  the  new  direc- 
tion, or  commands:  1.  Column  right  (half  right);  or  1.  Incline 
to  the  right,  2.  MARCH.  The  double  column  changes  direction, 
regulating  on  the  directing  squadron. 


188  ROUTE  COLUMN. 

The  echelon. 

477.  The  regiment  forms  echelon  of  squadrons  on  the  center  or 
on  a  flank  squadron,  or  echelon  of  half -regiments. 

Echelon  formation  permits  advancing  a  wing  to  overlap  the 
enemy,  at  the  same  time  remaining  ready  to  face  him  at  any  instant 
or  to  avoid  envelopment  by  refusing  a  flank. 

The  intervals  and  distances  are  such  as  to  enable  the  echelons  to 
be  faced  to  a  flank  and  retain  the  echelon  formation,  but  the 
colonel  may  increase  or  diminish  them. 

478.  The  regiment  is  formed  in  echelon  from  any  line  formation 
by  the  command:  1.  On  {such  unit)  in  echelon,  2.  MARCH. 
From  column:  1.  By  the  right  in  echelon  of  squadrons  (half- 
regiments),  2.  MARCH. 

This  command  determines  the  form  of  the  echelon  and  the  size 
of  the  units  composing  it. 

The  designated  unit  becomes  the  directing  echelon  and  follows 
the  commander,  or  moves  in  the  direction  indicated  by  him,  with- 
out change  of  formation. 

479.  Being  in  echelon,  to  form  line:  1.  Line,  2.  MARCH 
Column  is  formed  as  from  line  formations. 

The  route  column. 

480.  The  regiment  is  formed  in  route  column  at  the  commands: 

1.  Route    column,    or   on    {such)   squadron,   route    column, 

2.  MARCH.  The  directing  squadron  (or  the  squadron  designated) 
breaks  into  route  column  behind  the  colonel;  the  others  follow  in 
route  column  at  12  yards.  The  leader  of  the  rear  platoon  of  each 
squadron  rides  in  rear  of  the  right  file.  To  form  column  of  platoons : 
1.  Column  of  platoons,  2.  MARCH.  The  leading  squadron 
forms  column;  the  other  squadrons  close  successively  and  then 
form  column. 

TAne  of  platoon  columns,  or  line  or  column  of  squadron  masses. 

481.  In  the  different  formations  of  the  regiment,  in  line  or  in 
echelon,  the  squadrons  may  be  formed  in  line  of  platoon  columns 
or  in  squadron  mass,  or  the  regiment  iiay  be  formed  in  column  of 
squadron  masses.  In  column  of  squadron  masses  the  distance 
between  squadrons  is  12  yards,  unless  otherwise  indicated  by  the 


THE  CHARGE.  189 

colonel.  Officers  and  file  closers  reduce  their  distance  from  the 
ranks  accordingly. 

In  line  of  platoon  columns  the  squadrons  are  placed  as  in  line 
formation;  in  line  of  squadron  masses  the  squadrons  in  mass  are  at 
intervals  of  12  yards. 

The  line  of  platoon  columns  (or  the  line  of  squadron  masses) 
favors  deployment  to  the  front  and  is  advantageous  in  utilizing  the 
small  folds  of  the  terrain;  however,  it  is  not  favorable  to  a  deploy- 
ment to  a  flank  and  is  more  vulnerable  to  artillery  fire  than  line  of 
squadron  columns  or  extended  and  echeloned  formations.  The 
column  of  squadron  masses  is  used  for  concentration  in  a  sheltered 
position. 

The  regiment  marching  in  line  of  platoon  columns  (or  of  squadron 
masses),  ground  may  be  gained  to  the  right  by  the  command:  1. 
Squadrons,  right  turn,  2.  MARCH. 

The  rally, 

482.  The  rally  of  the  regiment  is  executed  in  line,  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  squadron. 

The  squadron  first  to  arrive  behind  the  colonel  becomes  the  base 
squadron;  the  others  place  themselves  to  its  right  and  left. 

The  assembly, 

483.  The  assembly  of  the  regiment  is  in  mass  and  is  executed 
at  the  command:  ASSEMBLE,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  squadron. 

The  charge. 

484.  The  regiment  executes  the  charge,  conforming  in  a  general 
manner  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  schools  of  the  squadron  and  of 
the  platoon. 

The  outlined  enemy  is  placed  under  the  direction  of  an  officer. 

486.  The  regiment  marching  in  line,  at  the  regulation  gallop, 
sabers  drawn,  the  colonel  commands:  TO  ATTACK.  The  squad- 
rons take  the  extended  gallop  and  the  directing  squadron  closes  on 
the  colonel,  who  takes  position  on  the  left  of  the  captain.  The 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  accompanying  the  colonel 
place  themselves  on  his  left.  The  other  squadrons  conform  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  squadron. 


190  EXTENDED  ORDER. 

At  the  command:  CHARGE,  repeated  by  all  the  officers  and 
men,  the  squadrons  are  launched  straight  to  the  front  and  charge 
home. 

The  command:  RALLY,  is  repeated  by  the  officers. 

The  squadrons  are  rallied  in  rear  of  the  colonel. 

The  squadron  nearest  to  the  colonel  becomes  the  nucleus  of  the 
rally.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  at  this  moment  of  the  action 
to  form,  as  quickly  as  possible,  a  unit  in  compact  order  so  as  to 
make  or  parry  a  new  attack. 

Extended  Order. 

'  486.  The  formation  of  the  regiment  least  vulnerable  to  artillery 
fire  is  a  line  of  columns  or  echelon  of  columns  with  large  intervals, 
moving  at  a  rapid  gait. 

To  cross  ground  without  cover  and  exposed  to  infantry  fire,  or  to 
move  from  cover  to  cover,  the  colonel  may  throw  forward  the 
squadrons  successively,  in  open  order,  the  squadrons  halting  and 
re-forming  behind  each  cover. 

The  colonel  indicates  to  the  squadrons  the  interval  or  the  distance 
which  must  separate  them,  and  to  the  directing  squadron  the 
objective,  the  gait,  and  the  formation  (which  may  be  in  extended 
order).  The  other  squadrons  follow  the  example  of  the  directing 
squadron,  but  the  captains  may  modify  their  formation  according 
to  circumstances. 

This  expedient  of  taking  extended  order  should  under  no  circum- 
stances be  employed  if  the  regiment  is  menaced  by  an  attack  from 
cavalry. 

REGIMENTAL  EXERCISES. 

487.  The  regiment  should  be  exercised: 

(a)  In  mo\dng  and  maneuvering  at  the  extended  gallop. 

(b)  In  executing  change  of  formation  combined  with  a  change  of 
direction. 

(c)  In  passing  from  one  movement  to  another  before  the  first  is 
completed. 

(d)  In  ploying  or  deploying,  protected  by  cover,  without  regard 
to  regulation  formations,  intervals,  or  distances,  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  remain  concealed  or  to  execute  a  sudden  attack  from  behind 
a  crest. 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  191 

Such  movements  executed,  if  necessary,  without  gaining  ground 
to  the  front,  may  be  useful  under  special  circumstances  to  econ- 
omize time  or  space  or  to  act  by  surprise. 

^  (e)  In  crossing  at  an  extended  gallop,  by  platoons  or  squads,  in 
single  or  double  rank,  ground  assumed  to  be  swept  by  fire,  and  in 
rallying  at  one  or  several  points  of  cover  selected  in  advance. 

(/)  In  ''filtering"  in  these  formations  across  covered  and  wooded 
terrain  and  iu  rallying  under  these  conditions. 

(g)  In  rapid  separation  of  squadrons  to  diminish  effect  of  artillery 
fire. 

(h)  In  dismounted  combat. 

(^)  In  the  use  of  machine  guns  in  combination  with  the  regiment 
in  its  various  methods  of  action. 

Dismounted  Action. 

488.  The  regiment  acting  alone  engages  the  necessary  number 
of  squadrons;  one  or  more  squadrons  may  be  held  as  a  mounted 
reserve. 

The  regiment  constitutes  a  force  of  sufiicient  size  to  be  able  to 
maneuver  with  success  by  combining  to  a  certain  extent  fire  action 
and  mounted  attack.  The  division  into  half-regiments  lends  itself 
to  tliis  combination. 

The  regiment,  in  connection  with  other  troops,  may  be  called 
upon  to  engage  all  its  squadrons  dismounted. 

A  guiding  principle  in  dismounted  action  is  that  cavalry  should 
employ  its  mobility  to  compensate  for  its  relative  lack  of  numbers. 

Its  power  to  break  off  the  action  in  one  place  and  resume  it  in 
another,  to  pass,  at  a  favorable  moment,  from  fire  attack  to  mounted 
action,  or  to  withdraw  mounted,  should  never  be  lost  sight  of. 

To  attain  the  surprise  and  rapidity  wliicli  should  characterize, 
when  possible,  the  dismounted  attack  of  cavalry,  the  full  strength 
of  the  firing  line  should  be  developed  from  the  beginning  of  the 
attack. 

Occasions  will  arise,  however,  when  cavalry  will  have  to  drive 
home  a  determined  attack  on  foot,  and  in  such  cases  the  principles 
governing  the  emplos^ment  of  fire  action  by  infantry  must  control. 

489.  The  reconnaissance  is  made  by  the  colonel  accompanied 
by  the  field  officers  and  the  machine-gim  commander. 

The  troops  to  engage  in  the  dismounted  attack  are  taken, 
mounted,  as  near  to  the  position  to  be  occupied  by  the  firing  line 


192  DISMOTJNTED  ACTION. 

as  a  consideration  of  all  the  circumstances,  including  the  safety  of 
the  led  horses,  will  permit. 

The  led  horses  should  be  as  near  to  their  respective  squadrons  as 
safety  from  the  fire  and  view  of  the  enemy  will  permit.  They 
should  maintain  their  relative  positions  with  reference  to  dis- 
mounted units,  and  be  so  faced  as  to  permit  of  the  quickest  possible 
movements  toward  the  dismounted  line,  and  be  under  the  effective 
protection  of  the  reserve. 

For  this  purpose  the  officer  in  charge  will  make  the  necessary 
dispositions,  keeping  constantly  in  touch  with  the  commander  of 
the  dismounted  line  and  making  the  necessary  preparations  for 
rapid  movement  of  the  led  horses. 

490.  In  extended  order,  dismour^ted,  the  squadron  is  the  largest 
unit  to  execute  movements  by  prescribed  commands  or  means. 
The  colonel,  assembling  his  captains  if  practicable,  directs  the 
disposition  of  the  regiment.  He  controls  its  subsequent  move- 
ments by  such  orders  or  commands  as  are  suitable  to  the  occasion. 

In  every  disposition  of  the  regiment  for  dismounted  combat  the 
colonel  should  give  subordinates  sufficient  information  of  the 
enemy,  of  the  position  of  supporting  and  neighboring  troops,  and 
of  the  object  sought  to  enable  them  to  conform  intelligently  to  the 
general  plan. 

The  colonel  should  designate  the  squadrons  which  are  to  con- 
stitute the  firing  line  and  those  which  are  to  constitute  the  support. 
In  attack  he  should  designate  the  direction  of  the  objective,  the 
order  and  front  of  the  squadrons  on  the  attacking  line,  and  the 
directing  squadron. 

In  defense  he  should  designate  the  front  of  each  squadron  and 
the  sector  to  be  observed  b  .•  each. 

491.  When  the  regiment  is  operating  alone  the  colonel  provides 
for  the  reconnaissance  and  protection  of  his  flanks:  if  part  of  a 
larger  force,  the  colonel  makes  similar  provision  when  necessary 
without  orders  from  liigher  authority. 

492.  Long  and  fatiguing  advances  of  the  skirmish  line  are  dis- 
organizing and  should  be  avoided,  but  it  is  a  greater  evil  to  bring 
the  command  mounted  under  heav/  fire  or  to  be  caught  b  such 
fire  wliile  in  dense  columns  or  other  close-order  formation  dis- 
mounted. Advantage  should  be  taken  of  cover  to  effect  the  deploy- 
ment as  near  the  enemy  as  practicable. 

493.  The  colonel  regulates  the  depth  of  the  deployment  and  the 
extent  and  density  of  the  firing  line,  subject  to  such  restrictions  as 


DISMOUNTED  ACTION.  1^ 

a  senior  may  have  imposed.  Squadrons,  or  designated  subdivisions 
and  detachments,  are  conducted  by  their  commanders  in  such 
manner  as  best  to  accomplish  the  mission  assigned  to  them .  Squad- 
rons designated  for  the  firing  line  dismount  and  march  independ- 
ently to  the  place  of  deployment,  form  skirmish  line,  and  take  up 
the  advance.     They  conform  in  general  to  the  directing  squadron. 

494.  The  commander  of  a  regiment,  whether  acting  alone  or  as 
part  of  a  larger  force,  should  hold  a  part  of  his  command  out  of  the 
firing  line.  By  the  judicious  use  of  this  force  he  can  exert  an 
influence  over  his  firing  line  not  otherwise  possible  and  can  control 
witliin  reasonable  limits  an  action  once  begun.  He  should  deploy 
a  sufficient  number  of  squadrons  on  the  firing  line,  retaining  the 
remaining  squadrons  as  a  support  for  that  line.  The  relative 
strength  of  the  firing  line  and  support  will  depend  on  the  front  to 
be  covered  and  the  anticipated  severity  of  the  action. 

If  the  regiment  be  part  of  a  larger  command,  the  number  of 
squadrons  in  the  firing  line  will  generally  be  determined  from  the 
brigade  commander's  order;  the  remainder  constitutes  the  support. 
If  the  regiment  is  acting  alone,  the  support  must  be  strong  enough 
to  maintain  the  original  fire  power  of  the  firing  line,  to  protect  the 
flanks,  and  to  perform  the  functions  of  a  reserve  whatever  be  the 
issue  of  the  action. 

495.  If  the  regiment  is  operating  alone,  the  support  may, 
according  to  circumstances,  be  held  in  one  or  two  bodies  and  placed 
behind  the  center,  or  behind  one  or  both  flanks  of  the  firing  line,  or 
eclieloned  beyond  a  flank. 

If  the  regiment  is  part  of  a  larger  force,  the  support  is  generally 
held  in  one  body. 

The  distance  between  the  firing  line  and  the  supporting  group 
or  groups  will  vary  between  wide  limits;  it  should  be  as  short  as  the 
necessity  for  protection  from  heavy  losses  will  permit.  When 
cover  is  available,  the  support  should  be  as  close  as  50  to  100  yards; 
when  such  cover  is  not  available,  it  should  not  be  closer  than  300 
yards.  It  m.ay  be  as  far  as  500  yards  in  rear  if  good  cover  is  there 
obtainable  and  is  not  obtainable  at  a  lesser  distance. 

496.  In  exceptional  cases,  as  in  an  unexpected  encounter,  it 
may  be  necessary  to  place  an  entire  regiment  or  brigade  in  the 
firing  line,  the  support  being  furnished  by  other  troops.  Such 
deployment  causes  the  early  mingling  of  the  larger  units,  thus 
rendering  leadership  and  control  extremely  difficult. 

34396°-14— 13 


194  THE  ATTACK. 


FIRE. 


497.  Fire  direction  and  fire  control  are  functions  of  squadron 
and  platoon  commanders.  The  colonel  makes  the  primary  appor- 
tionment of  the  target — in  defense,  by  assigning  sectors  of  fire;  in 
attack,  by  assigning  the  objective.  In  the  latter  case  each  squad- 
ron in  the  firing  line  takes  as  its  target  that  part  of  the  general 
objective  which  lies  in  its  front. 

The  colonel  should  indicate  the  point  or  time  at  which  the  fire 
fight  is  to  open.  He  may  do  this  in^his  order  for  deployment,  or  he 
may  follow  the  firing  line  close  enough  to  do  so  at  the  proper  time. 
If  it  be  impracticable  for  him  to  do  either,  each  captain  determines 
the  time  for  opening  fire. 

THE   ATTACK. 

498.  The  regiment  is  the  attach  unit. 

If  his  regiment  be  one  of  several  in  the  firing  line,  the  colonel,  in 
executing  his  part  of  the  attack,  pushes  liis  regiment  forward  as 
vigorously  as  possible  within  the  front,  or  section,  assigned  to  it. 
The  great  degree  of  independence  allowed  to  him  as  to  details 
demands,  in  turn,  the  exercise  of  good  judgment  on  his  part. 
Better  leadership,  better  troops,  and  more  favorable  terrain  enable 
one  regiment  to  advance  more  rapidly  in  attack  than  another  less 
fortunate,  and  such  a  regiment  wi.\\  insure  the  further  advance  of 
the  others.  The  leading  regiment  should  not,  however,  become 
isolated;  isolation  may  lead  to  its  destruction. 

499.  The  deployment  having  been  made,  the  firing  line  advances 
without  firing.  The  predominant  idea  must  be  to  close  with  the 
enemy  as  soon  as  possible  without  ruinous  losses.  The  limited 
supply  of  ammunition  and  the  uncertainty  of  resupply,  the  neces- 
sity for  securing  fire  superiority  in  order  to  advance  within  the 
shorter  ranges,  and  the  impossibility  of  accomplishing  this  at 
ineffective  ranges,  make  it  imperative  that  fire  be  not  opened  as 
long  as  the  advance  can  be  continued  without  demoralizing  losses. 
The  attack  which  halts  to  open  fire  at  long  range  (over  1,200  yards) 
is  not  likely  ever  to  reach  its  destination.  Every  effort  should  be 
made,  by  using  cover  or  inconspicuous  formations,  or  by  advancing 
the  firing  line  as  a  whole,  to  arrive  within  800  yards  of  the  enemy 
before  opening  fire. 


THE  ATTACK.  195 

600.  Except  when  the  enemy's  artillery  is  able  to  effect  an 
unusual  concentration  of  fire,  its  fire  upon  deployed  dismounted 
troops  causes  losses  which  are  unimportant  when  compared  with 
those  inflicted  by  his  infantry;  hence  the  attacking  line  should 
proceed,  as  described  above,  to  a  position  from  which  an  effective 
fire  can  be  directed  against  the  hostile  infantry  with  a  view  to 
obtaining  fire  superiority.  The  effectiveness  of  the  enemy's  fire 
must  be  reduced  so  as  to  permit  further  advance.  The  more 
effective  the  fire  to  which  the  enemy  is  subjected  the  less  effective 
will  be  his  fire. 

601.  Occasionally  the  fire  of  adjacent  regiments  or  of  troops 
employing  fire  of  position,  or  of  supporting  artillery,  will  permit 
the  further  advance  of  the  entire  firing  line  from  tnis  point,  but 
it  will  generally  be  necessary  to  advance  by  rushes  of  fractions 
of  the  line. 

The  fraction  making  tlie  rush  should  be  as  large  as  the  hostile 
fire  and  the  necessity  for  maintaining  fire  superiority  will  permit. 
Depending  upon  circumstances,  the  strength  of  the  fraction  may 
vary  from  a  squadron  to  a  few  men. 

The  advance  is  made  as  rapidly  as  is  possible  without  losing 
fire  superiority.  The  smaller  the  fraction  that  rushes  the  greater 
the  number  of  rifles  that  continue  to  fire  upon  the  enemy.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  smaller  the  fraction  that  mshes  the  slower  will 
be  the  progress  of  the  attack. 

502.  Enough  rifles  must  continue  in  action  to  insure  the 
success  of  each  rush.  Frequently  the  successive  advances  of  the 
firing  line  must  be  effected  by  rushes  of  fractions  of  decreased  size; 
that  is,  advances  by  rushes  may  first  be  made  by  squadron,  later 
by  platoon,  and  finally  by  squads  or  files;  but  no  subsequent 
opportunity  to  increase  the  rate  of  advance,  such  as  better  cover  or 
a  decrease  of  the  hostile  fire,  should  be  overlooked. 

Whenever  possible,  the  rush  is  begun  by  a  flank  fraction  of  the 
firing  line.  In  the  alDsence  of  express  directions  from  the  colonel, 
each  captain  of  a  flank  squadron  determines  when  an  advance 
by  rushes  shall  be  attempted.  A  flank  squadron  which  inaugurates 
an  advance  by  rushes  becomes  the  directing  squadron.  An 
advance  by  rushes  having  been  inaugurated  on  one  flank,  the 
remainder  of  the  firing  line  conforms;  fractions  rush  successively 
from  that  flank  and  halt  on  the  line  established  by  the  initial  rush. 

The  fractions  need  not  be  uniform  in  size;  each  captain  indi- 


196  THE  ATTACK. 

cates  how  his  squadron  shall  rush,  havmg  due  regard  to  the  ground 
and  the  state  of  the  fire  fight. 

A  fraction  about  to  rush  is  sent  forward  when  the  remainder 
of  the  line  is  firing  vigorously;  otherwise  the  chief  advantage  of 
this  method  of  advancing  is  lost. 

The  length  of  the  rush  will  vary  from  30  to  80  yards,  depending 
upon  the  existence  of  cover,  positions  for  firing,  and  the  hostile  fire. 

When  the  entire  firing  line  of  the  regiment  has  advanced  to  the 
new  line,  fresh  opportunities  to  advance  are  sought  as  before. 

603,  Two  identical  situations  will  never  confront  the  regiment; 
hence  at  drill  it  is  prohibited  to  arrange  the  details  of  an  advance 
before  the  preceding  one  has  been  concluded  or  to  employ  a  fixed 
or  prearranged  method  of  advancing  by  rushes. 

504.  The  colonel  posts  himself  so  as  best  to  direct  the  reen- 
forcing  of  the  firing  line  from  the  support.  When  all  or  nearly 
all  of  the  support  has  been  absorbed  by  the  firing  line,  he  joins, 
and  takes  full  charge  of  the  latter. 

Reenforcing  the  firing  line  by  driblets  of  a  sq[uad  or  a  few  men 
has  no  appreciable  effect.  The  firing  line  requires  either  no  rein- 
forcement or  a  strong  one.  Generally  one  or  two  platoons  will 
be  sent  forward  under  cover  of  a  heavy  fire  of  the  firing  line. 

606.  To  facilitate  control  and  to  provide  intervals  in  which 
reenforcements  may  be  placed,  the  squadrons  in  the  firing  line 
should  be  kept  closed  in  on  their  centers  as  they  become  depleted 
by  casualties  during  the  advance. 

When  this  is  impracticable,  reenforcements  must  mingle  with 
and  thicken  the  firing  line.  In  battle  the  latter  method  will  be 
the  rule  rather  than  the  exception,  and  to  familiarize  the  men  with 
such  conditions  the  combat  exercises  of  the  regiment  should  include 
both  methods  of  reenforcing.  Occasionally,  to  provide  the  neces- 
sary intervals  for  reenforcing  by  either  of  these  methods,  the  firing 
line  should  be  thinned  by  causing  men  to  drop  out  and  simulate 
losses  during  the  various  advances.  Under  ordinary  conditions 
the  depletion  of  the  firing  line  for  this  purpose  will  be  from  one-fifth 
to  one-half  of  its  strength. 

506.  Subject  to  orders  from  higher  authority,  the  colonel  deter- 
mines the  point  from  which  the  assault  is  to  be  made.  The  firing 
line  having  arrived  at  that  point  and  being  in  readiness,  the  colonel 
causes  the  charge  to  be  sounded.  The  signal  is  repeated  by  the 
trumpeters  of  all  parts  of  the  line. 


THE   DEFENSE.  197 

The  platoon  and  squadron  commanders  give  the  command:  TO 
THE  ASSAULT,  repeat  the  command  charge  and  lead  their  units 
to  the  assault  as  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon. 

The  further  conduct  of  the  assaulting  troops  will  depend  upon 
circumstances;  they  may  halt  and  engage  in  pursuing  fire;  they 
may  advance  a  short  distance  to  obtain  a  field  of  fire  or  to  drive  the 
enemy  from  the  vicinity;  they  may  assemble  or  reorganize.  If 
the  enemy  vacates  his  position,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  open 
fire  at  once  on  the  retreating  mass,  reorganization  of  the  attacking 
troops  being  of  secondary  importance  to  the  infliction  of  further 
losses  upon  the  enemy  and  the  increase  of  his  confusion. 

A  portion  of  the  attacking  line  may  be  quickly  mounted  to  con- 
duct a  more  rapid  pursuit  and  to  intercept  the  enemy's  retreat. 

In  combat  exercises  the  colonel  will  assume  a  situation  and  ter- 
minate the  assault  accordingly. 

THE    DEFENSE. 

607.  In  defense,  as  in  attack,  the  regiment  is  the  tactical  unit 
best  suited  to  independent  assignment.  Defensive  positions  are 
usually  divided  into  sections  and  a  regiment  assigned  to  each. 

The  colonel  locates  such  fire,  communicating  and  cover  trenches, 
and  obstacles  as  are  to  be  constructed.  He  assigns  squadrons  to 
construct  them  and  details  the  troops  to  occupy  them. 

The  colonel  reenforces  the  firing  line  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  applicable  to  the  attack  and  explained  in  connection 
therewith,  maintaining  no  more  rifles  in  the  firing  line  than  are 
necessary  to  prevent  the  enemy's  advance. 

The  supply  of  ammunition  being  usually  ample,  fire  is  opened 
as  soon  as  it  is  possible  to  break  up  the  enemy's  formation,  stop  his 
advance,  or  inflict  material  loss;  but  this  rule  must  be  modified  to 
suit  the  ammunition  supply. 

608.  If  ordered  or  compelled  to  withdraw  under  hostile  rifle  fire 
or  in  the  presence  of  hostile  infantry,  the  support  will  be  posted  so 
as  to  cover  the  retirement  of  the  firing  line. 

When  the  regiment  is  operating  alone,  the  support  must  be  strong 
and  must  be  fed  sparingly  into  the  firing  line,  especially  if  a  counter 
attack  is  planned.  Opportunities  for  counter  attack  should  be 
sought  at  all  times. 


198  EMPLOYMENT  OF  THE  REGIMENT. 

Employment  of  the  Kegiment. 

609.  Careful  training  in  maneuvering  in  fighting  formation  is 
essential,  for  only  those  formations  that  have  been  constantly 
practiced  are  useful  in  war.  Such  training  has  for  its  object  the 
preparation  of  the  regiment  foir  the  different  roles  which  it  may  be 
called  upon  to  fulfill,  whether. acting  alone  or  with  other  troops. 

In  these  regulations  it  is  possible  to  set  forth  general  principles 
only;  the  application  will  vary  with  each  particular  case. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  colonel,  in  tactical  exercises  and  maneuvers, 
to  vary  the  hypotheses  and  to  place  his  regiment  in  the  different 
situations  in  which  it  might  be  found  in  a  campaign. 

The  regiment  is  above  all  the  cavalry  unit  of  attack;  it  combines 
the  conditions  of  mobility  and  cohesion,  indispensable  to  success 
in  mounted  action. 

It  may  be  formed  into  an  attacking  line  and  a  reserve,  or  into 
combat  groups.  A  squadron  may  be  employed  for  flank  attack  or 
as  a  flank  guard. 

It  may  operate  alone  or  as  part  of  a  larger  unit,  or  it  may  be  com- 
bined with  troops  of  all  arms. 

It  seeks  decisive  results  by  dismounted  action  when  mounted 
action  alone  would  not  obtain  them. 

the     regiment    acting     alone — marches — UTILIZATION     OP    THE 
TERRAIN. 

510.  When  at  a  distance  from  the  enemy,  the  regiment  marches 
on  the  road  or  across  country  under  cover  of  an  advance  guard 
or  of  scouting  patrols. 

On  nearing  the  enemy  the  approach  formations  should  be 
adapted  to  the  terrain  and  to  the  end  in  view. 

The  double  column,  making  use  of  echelons  and  opening  and 
closing  at  will,  permits  the  regiment  to  take  advantage  of  cover 
and  utilize  the  avenues  of  approach. 

In  open  country,  where  they  are  exposed  to  surprise  by  fire, 
the  double  column  and  the  column  of  platoons  are  to  be  avoided. 
The  regiment  then  uses  open  formations — echeloned  or  extended 
line  of  columns,  echelons,  extended  order. 


ATTACK  AGAINST  CAVALRY.  109 

COMBAT  PATBOLS. 

611.  During  the  approach  march,  the  regiment  covers  itself  to 
the  front,  rear,  and  on  its  flanks  by  combat  patrols. 

They  operate  with  a  variable  radius  of  action,  according  to  the 
terrain,  and  are  constantly  in  touch  with  the  regiment. 

They  remain  in  observation  in  the  direction  which  has  been 
indicated  to  them  or  on  the  flanks  which  they  are  ordered  to 
protect.  They  warn  the  colonel  of  all  attacks  or  of  any  movements 
of  the  enemy,  so  as  to  give  him  time  to  make  his  dispositions. 
They  continue  their  service  of  security  during  the  entire  duration 
of  the  action. 

GROUND   SCOUTS. 

612.  Besides  the  ground  scouts  who  ride  in  advance  of  each 
squadron,  the  colonel  may  have  the  regiment  preceded  at  a 
greater  distance  by  a  group  of  scouts  operating  under  an  officer. 
Their  movements,  signs,  and  signals  let  the  colonel  know  the 
difficulties  presented  by  the  terrain  and  permit  him  to  take  up, 
in  ample  time,  the  neceasary  formations  to  pass  around  or  to  cross 
obstacles. 

RECONNAISSANCB   OF  THE   BNEMY. 

613.  Under  cover  of  the  security  patrols  the  colonel  goes  in 
advance  of  his  squadrons  in  order  to  observe  for  himself  the  enemy 
and  the  terrain,  and  thus  determine  the  preliminaries  of  the 
combat. 

The  regiment  remains  in  touch  with  him,  ready  to  execute  his 
orders  and  to  join  him. 

ATTACK  AGAINST  CAVALRY. 

614.  In  Cavalrv  encounters,  the  colonel  should  seek  to  reach 
the  most  vulnerable  point  of  the  adversary,  particularly  the  flanks, 
and  to  concentrate  his  greatest  effort  on  the  chosen  point  of  attack. 

^  The  habitual  formation  for  the  attack  comprises  an  attacking 
line  and  a  reserve,  the  former  containing  the  greater  part  of  the 
force. 

Another  fraction  may,  when  necessary,  be  ordered  to  maneuver 
so  as  to  support  the  attack. 

The  advance  guard,  if  it  has  not  joined  the  main  body  before 
the  attack,  may  be  called  upon  to  perform  one  or  the  other  of  these 
rdlea. 


200  THE  REGIMENT  IN  BRIGADE. 

The  machine-gun  unit  may  be  used  in  this  action  as  a  pivot  for 
the  movement  or  disposed  on  the  flank  so  as  to  cover  possible 
ralljdng  points  with  its  fire.  It  should  never  be  so  placed  that 
its  fire  will  be  masked  by  the  advance  of  the  attacking  line. 

FLANK   GUARDS — OFFENSIVE   FLANK   GROUPS. 

615.  The  unit  designated  for  flank  attack  or  flank  guard  should 
be  detached  from  the  flank  involved. 

When  attacking  in  a  formation  other  than  echelon,  the  captain 
commanding  a  squadron  on  an  unsupported  flank  may,  upon  his 
own  initiative,  detach  a  flank  guard. 

ATTACKS  AGAINST  INFANTRY  AND   ARTILLERY. 

616.  The  regiment  conforms  to  the  principles  set  forth  in  the 
School  of  the  Squadron  and  in  the  Employment  of  Cavalry. 

THE   REGIMENT   IN  THE    BRIGADE. 

617.  The  regiment  as  pai't  of  a  larger  unit  devotes  itself  to  the 
r61e  assigned,  or  which  falls  to  it  in  the  course  of  the  action,  con- 
forming to  the  principles  previously  laid  down. 

When  the  regiment  is  placed  on  a  flank,  the  colonel  on  his  own 
initiative,  when  specific  orders  are  lacking,  assures  the  protection 
of  this  flank  and  the  observation  of  the  neighboring  zone. 

THE    REGIMENT  IN   COMBINATION   WITH  TROOPS   OF  ALL   ARMS. 

618.  A  regiment  attached  to  a  command  composed  of  all  arms, 
scouts  and  fulfills  the  various  missions  which  are  intrusted  to  it 
by  the  commander. 

When  it  has  gained  contact  it  reconnoiters  the  enemy's  position 
or  his  movements.  At  the  same  time  it  masks  and  protects  the 
staff  ofiicers  in  their  reconnaissance,  the  advance  guard  and  the 
battalions  of  the  first  line  in  their  deployment,  and  the  batteries 
going  into  position;  and  opposes  any  enterprise  of  the  hostile 
Cavalry. 

As  soon  as  the  advance  guard  has  deployed  and  the  Artillery 
lias  gone  into  position,  the  regiment  T\nthdraws  from  the  front  and 
takes  position  on  one  of  the  flanks. 


THE  REGIMENT  WITH  OTHER  TROOPS.  201 

During  the  engagement  the  regiment  is  charged  with  explora- 
tion and  security  at  a  distance  from  the  flanks,  keeps  in  view  the 
movements  of  the  enemy,  and  opposes  enterprises,  such  as  turn- 
ing movements.  The  regimental  commander  maintains  constant 
communication  with  the  commander  of  the  entire  force. 

On  the  flanks,  the  regiment  cooperates  in  the  attack  by  turning 
the  enemy's  flank;  it  pushes  forward  combat  groups  to  take  in 
flank  or  rear  the  enemy  already  engaged;  it  seeks  to  surprise  his 
artillery,  etc. 

Back  of  the  line  and  between  other  bodies  of  troops  it  is  held 
ready  to  support  the  infantry  attacks,  to  intervene  by  sq^uadrons 
or  half-regiments  whenever  there  is  a  favorable  opportunity,  and 
particularly  to  take  advantage  of  and  complete  the  partial  successes 
of  the  infantry  attacks,  being  careful  not  to  mask  the  fire  of  the 
attacking  line. 

If  the  hostile  Cavalry  in  superior  numbers  prevents  the  execution 
of  its  various  missions,  the  regiment  maneuvers  so  as  to  draw  them 
under  infantry  or  artillery  fire. 

The  enemy  repulsed,  the  regiment  takes  up  the  pursuit,  seeking 
to  overlap  his  flank. 

In  case  of  a  reverse  the  Cavalry,  if  necessary,  sacrifices  itself  to 
cover  the  retreat  of  the  other  troops. 

The  colonel  must  not  hesitate  to  utilize  dismounted  fire  action 
when  that  will  best  secure  results,  keeping  in  mind  the  mounted 
r61e  that  his  regiment  may  be  called  upon  to  fulfill,  and  the  neces- 
sity that  may  arise  for  a  gallop  to  a  new  position. 

619.  In  instruction,  each  exercise  should  have  a  tactical  object 
and  be  based  on  a  simple  and  clearly  defined  hypothesis. 

It  should  always  be  terminated  by  an  explanation  of  the  means 
employed  and  a  criticism  of  the  execution. 

The  different  arms  are  represented  by  troopers  carrying  pen- 
nants of  different  colors.  An  officer  commands,  and  has  the  neces- 
sary noncommissioned  officers  as  assistants. 

In  general,  yellow  represents  Cavalry;  blue,  Infantry;  red, 
Artillery. 

Four  markers,  boot  to  boot  (as  a  set  of  fours),  represent  a  squadron 
in  column. 

Four  markers,  with  intervals  of  12  yards,  represent  a  squadron 
in  line. 

The  markers  serve  first  as  fixed  objectives;  lat6r,  they  are  given 
liberty  of  movement. 


202 


THE  REGIMENT. 


^,  ■■■■    Note  -  To  economize  space,  in  these  plates,  but  four  squadrons 
aVIIJ.  are  shown  in  the  Regiment.       Witt)  six  squadrons,  the  same 
principles  apply,  a  squadron  is  added  to  each  wini 
The  Regiment.  l!;». 


t  Double  fMijm 
I  SIARCtt 


\  Column     I  MARCn 


Line  ^'^ 

of    platoon  CoUrRni 

to  the  right 
2  MARCH      HT 


Tne  route  Column 


1  Column  cf  Squadron  Masses  2  MARCH 

liil  lili  iiti  liii 

\  Line  of  Squadron  Masses  2  MARCh 

nlii'il""!!!i 

1  LiM  of  platoon  cohiims  2  MAPXh 


\  W^iS        2  MARCH 


iLine  of  Colurr.ns     I  MARCn 


1  Lme 

2  MARCii 


nil 


10  \t* 

Itft 

i  MARCn 


.Bimu--* 


1  Line         / 

2  MARCn 


lumns   s/  >r      to  the       •      .<  - 

I 

i 


,!?2MARCn    -ft 

3  » 

i    I 

ss  ^ 


1  L^^t  of  Columns 

to  the  

■  mH  -  -  -  -  -   ^~  2.MARCH| 
2  MARCH  ^22' 

-iiflfl«-'''s5 


f  LMARCn 


I  M$}    t  MARCn 


1  Double  Column  sis  ifc 

2  MARCH   ^^^.;'     «>^ 


THE  REGIMENT. 


SOS 


H 

"A 


zr  Hnnm 


IIIHHI 


IHIIMI, 


O      .  yvO 

Q)  <X3  t 

^  o  <a 

.e  ^  -c 


c 
E 

S  o 


2< 


£  cJ 


E 

3 


•«-    c=    c 


o 


3 


Hlllim   ^HHMHI=IHIIH!-IIIHHI.nflllfl 


^ 


•  tmiui 


nnflii 


>< 

X 


tin  II II 


IIIMIfl 


*=  = 

^ 


31 

o 

a: 

2 


:iia4i-iniiiini 


204 


THE  REGIMENT. 


XC 


^  The  colonel  placin|       ^ 

Sis  himself  at  the  head  of     ^ 

^  ■  The  3^^  S<;uadron.         -^ 

"*^  le^ds  toward  the  enenoy 


//// 


I  Line      2  MARCH 


\\\, 


THC  REGIMENT 


///; 


»  On  4rh  Squadron 
in  echelon 
Z  MARCH 
The  Colonel  later  puts  the  directing 


//// 


squadron  m  i,ne  of  platoon  columns 
and  theri:n  column 
The  01  hers  conform 


J  Line 


Z  MARCH* 


On  20  Squadron,  in  echelon   Z  MARCM 


THE  REGIMENT. 


30S 


I        t 


I 
ii 


"I 


L 
% 

c: 

I 

2> 


1 


■6 


-It  ; 


-!! 

.11. 
II 


II- 


.1  - 


-I 


-11- 


206 


THE  REGIMENT. 


i 

-. 

i 

c 

-% 

o 

^< 

i"    5 

<- 

2:    ■" 

1,. 

uJ 

*=r" 

^ 

0 

;5 

^    . 

V 

01  -: 

l. 

e 

< 

U     2 

3= 

-J-   ^ 

"a 

h- 

3 
** 
^ 

"*/ 

Zr 

■^ 

"V 

— — 

> 

X 

t 

X 

% 

u 

Uk- 

0 

« 

DC 

X. 

< 

■0 

X 

<W 

0 

= 

^ 

^ 

"S 

c 

^ 

< 

< 

O 


VW3 


THE  BRIGADE. 

(Plates  XXIII  to  XXVIII.) 

620.  A  brigade  is  composed  of  two  regiments  and  a  battery  of 
Horse  Artillery.  It  is  employed  alone  or  as  part  of  a  Cavalry  divi- 
sion. 

FORMATIONS   OP  ASSEMBLY. 

521.  The  assembly  of  the  brigade  is  made: 
In  line  of  double  columns. 
In  line  of  masses. 
In  column  of  masses. 
It  may  be  formed  with  variable  distances  and  intervals.     In  line 
the  battery  is  on  either  flank ;  in  column  it  is  in  rear.    The  assembly 
is  made  under  cover  from  the  observation  and  fire  of  the  enemy. 
The  service  of  security  guards  against  surprise. 

THE   ROUTE   MARCH. 

622.  The  brigade  marches  in  route  like  the  regiment;  the  dis- 
tance between  regiments  varies  according  to  circumstances. 

When  the  ground  will  permit,  the  column  of  platoons  may  be 
"  employed  with  advantage  to  reduce  the  depth  of  the  brigade. 

FORMATIONS   OF  MARCH  OR  MANEUVER. 

623.  The  formations  in  line  of  masses  or  in  column  of  masses 
with  variable  intervals  and  distances  serve  to  move  the  brigade 
under  cover  from  one  point  of  assembly  to  another.  They  are  pro- 
hibited as  maneuver  formations  on  account  of  their  vulnerability. 

The  maneuver  formations  are: 

(a)  The  line  of  double  columns,  with  greater  or  less  intervals. 

(6)  The  double  column. 

(c)  The  line  of  columns. 

(d)  The  echelon  formations. 

In  line  and  in  echelon  the  battery  is  on  the  flank  designated  ])y 
the  general.     In  column  it  maintains  its  position  in  rear. 

COMMAND. 

524.  The  general  leads  the  brigade  by  placing  himself  at  the 
distance  of  a  squadron  front  in  advance  of  the  colonel  of  the  direct- 

207 


208  EVOLUTIONS. 

ing  regiment.  The  brigade  adjutant  is  2  yards  on  his  left;  the  re- 
mainder of  his  staff  and  officers  acting  as  agents  of  communication, 
ride,  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left,  2  yards  in  rear.  His  orderlies 
ride  2  yards  in  rear  of  the  staff.  He  goes  wherever  he  thinks  his  pres- 
ence is  necessary;  if  need  be,  the  colonel  of  the  directing  regiment 
or  some  designated  officer  takes  his  place  in  leading  the  brigade. 

The  general's  orders  are  transmitted  by  agents  of  communication ; 
as  a  rule,  each  regiment  detaches  for  this  purpose  an  officer  and  a 
trumpeter. 

EVOLUTIONS. 

526.  Tlie  evolutions  of  the  regiments  in  the  brigade  are  similar 
to  those  of  the  squadrons  in  the  regiment. 

When  the  brigade  is  in  any  line  formation,  the  general  designates 
the  directing  unit.  The  colonel  of  the  regiment  to  which  this  unit 
belongs  follows  at  a  distance  of  squadron  front  behind  the  general. 
The  colonel  of  the  other  regiment  places  himself  in  front  of  the 
squadron  on  his  interior  flank. 

Before  giving  orders  for  deployment,  the  general  should  put  the 
brigade  into  an  open  formation.  When  the  brigade  is  in  column, 
the  second  regiment  in  forming  line  takes  its  place  on  the  left  of 
the  first;  however,  the  general  can  indicate  to  it  to  move  up  on  the 
right  or  to  the  right  and  left  by  half -regiments.  The  first  regiment 
faces  the  objective  and  deploys;  the  second  regiment  uncovers  by 
increasing  the  gait,  and  deploys  when  it  has  the  necessary  interval; 
it  follows  at  first  in  echelon,  then  comes  up  on  the  line. " 

FORMATIONS   OF  APPROACH. 

626.  The  most  appropriate  formations  for  the  approach  are 
double  column  and  echelon ,  The  brigade  being  in  double  column , 
the  general  directs:  On  the  first  half -regiment,  by  the  left 
form  echelon.  The  general  may  direct  the  half-regiments  to 
form  in  mass. 

The  double  column  allows  the  brigade  to  take  advantage  of 
inequalities  of  the  terrain  and  to  pass  rapidly  to  an  open  formation. 
The  brigade  being  in  double  column:  First  regiment  in  Hne  of 
columns;  second  regiment  by  the  right  and  left  in  echelon 
of  half -regiments. 

The  echelon  formations  have  the  advantages  of  both  shallow  and 
deep  formations;  they  allow  the  units  to  be  engaged  successivel>;, 
and  admit  of  immediate  deployment  in  all  directions.  The  flexi- 
bility of  their  march  and  the  flxiidity  of  their  movement  lend  them- 


THE  BRIGADE,  DISMOUNTED.  209 

selves  to  advancing  or  refusing  a  flank,  and  are  especially  suited  to 
combined  action  of  combat  groups. 

The  brigade  echelons  are  usually  of  half-regiq^ients;  they  may 
be  of  regiments;  they  are  formed  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the 
regiment:  On  such  regiment,  or  on  such  half -regiment,  in 
echelons;  or,  by  the  right,  in  echelon  of  regiments  (half- 
regiments). 

The  general  indicates  to  the  leading  unit  the  formation  to  take, 
the  direction,  and  the  gait;  the  other  echelons  regulate  on  the 
leading  echelon. 

The  intervals  and  distances  separating  the  echelons  should  be 
such  as  to  permit  of  rapid  deployment  forward,  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion, or  to  the  flank;  however,  when  the  deployment  is  to  be  made 
to  the  front,  the  general  may  reduce  the  distances  so  as  to  increase  the 
cohesion  and  force  of  the  attack. 

If  the  objective  is  in  a  direction  oblique  to  the  front,  the  general 
directs  the  leading  echelon  so  as  to  face  the  objective  before  giving 
the  command  for  the  deployment. 

In  case  of  surprise,  the  general  leads  out  and  deploys  the  echelon 
most  favorably  placed  to  attack;  the  others  support  the  attack. 


627.  The  brigade  in  mounted  action  conforms  to  the  principles 
laid  down  in  Employment  of  Cavalry. 

THE   BRIGADE,  DISMOUNTED. 

(See  dismounted  combat  in  Employment  of  Cavalry.) 

628.  The  action  of  dismounted  cavalry,  whether  in  offense  or 
defense,  differs  materially  in  the  ordinary  case  from  that  of 
Infantry. 

While  the  Infantry  bases  the  arrangement  of  the  combat  upon 
a  succession  of  progressive  efforts  made  by  troops  echeloned  in 
depth,  the  dismounted  Cavalry  is  ordinarily  compelled  to  rush  the 
attack  or  to  stop  the  enemy  at  a  distance  by  employing  at  once 
upon  an  extended  front  all  the  men' and  rifles  that  are  available. 
The  relative  weakness  in  numbers  of  the  Cavalry  and  the  likelihood 
of  a  smaller  supply  of  ammunition  are  not  favorable  to  a  combat  of 
prolonged  duration .  On  the  contrary,  its  spirit  of  enterprise ,  its  char- 
acteristic qualities  of  quick  action  and  mobility  fit  it  admirably  for 

34396^—14 14 


210  THE  BRIGADE,  DISMOUNTED. 

offensive  envelopments,  rapidly  executed,  and  for  maneuvering  on 
the  defensive  to  avoid  the  blows  of  the  adversary. 

Promptness  in  decision,  skill  and  rapidity  in  the  execution  of 
the  approach  march,  instantaneous  deployment  of  the  fractions 
engaged  and  operating  in  groups  extensively  articulated,  assure 
to  the  Cavalry  the  benefit  of  the  element  of  surprise  which  is  essen- 
tial to  success. 

The  chief  must  utilize  to  the  utmost  the  effect  of  surprise,  com- 
bining fire  action  with  vigorous  mounted  attacks  on  the  flanks  of 
the  enemy.  In  such  combats  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that 
the  leaders  of  the  different  groups  should  coordinate  their  efforts 
to  achieve  the  common  end. 

629.  Instances  will  arise,  however,  in  which  the  Cavalry  must 
make  use  of  dismounted  action  alone  to  capture  or  hold  an  important 
position. 

In  such  cases  the  attack  or  defense  must  be  conducted  as  is  an 
infantry  attack  or  defense. 

630.  The  brigade  is  deployed  by  the  general's  order  to  the 
commanders  of  regiments  and  special  units.  The  order  should 
give  them  information  of  the  situation  and  of  the  proposed  plan  of 
action.  In  attack  the  order  should  assign  to  each  regiment  not  in 
reserve  its  objective  or  line  of  advance.  In  defense  it  should 
assign  to  each  its  sector.  In  either  case  it  should  designate  the 
troops  for,  and  the  position  o  f ,  the  reserve,  and  prescribe  the  employ- 
ment of  tlie  machine  guns  and  the  battery. 

Both  in  attack  and  defense  the  order  may  fix  the  front  to  be 
covered  in  the  deployment. 

Encroachment  upon  the  proper  functions  of  subordinates  and 
unnecessary  details  should  be  studiously  avoided. 

631.  The  brigade  when  operating  alone  and  attacking  should 
undertake  an  enveloping  attack  if  it  does  not  result  in  over- 
extension. 

Assuming  a  brigade  of  1,200  rifles,  an  extension  of  more  than  800 
yards  between  its  extreme  flanks  when  making  an  enveloping 
attack  alone  is  seldom  justifiable;  when  part  of  a  battle  line,  a  front 
of  400  yards  can  rarely  be  exceeded. 

632.  In  defense  the  front  occupied  when  acting  alone  or  posted 
on  or  near  the  flank  of  a  battle  line  should  seldom  exceed  500  yards; 
when  posted  as  an  interior  brigade  the  front  may  be  increased  to 
700  yards.  The  front  may  be  somewhat  longer  tnan  in  the  attack, 
since  emaller  regimental  supports  are  justifiable. 


THE   BRIGADE,   DISMOUNTED.  211 

When  the  brigade  is  operating  alone,  however,  the  brigade 
reserve  should  be  as  strong  in  the  defense  as  in  the  attack  unless 
the  flanks  are  secure. 

633.  The  general  should  always  hold  out  a  brigade  support, 
generally  a  half -regiment.  When  the  brigade  is  operating  alone  it 
may  be  advisable  to  hold  out  more  at  first. 

Whereas  the  support  held  out  in  each  regiment  of  the  firing  line 
is  intended  to  thicken  the  diminishing  firing  line  at  the  proper 
times  and  sometimes  to  lengthen  it,  the  reserve  held  out  in  a  brigade 
operating  alone  is  used  for  this  purpose  only  as  a  last  resort.  Its 
primary  functions  are:  In  attack,  to  protect  the  flanks,  to  improve 
fully  the  advantage  following  a  victory,  or  to  cover  defeat;  in 
defense,  to  prolong  the  firing  line,  to  make  a  counter  attack,  or  to 
cover  withdrawal. 

It  is  the  general's  chief  means  of  influencing  an  action  once  be- 
.  gun.  It  should  be  conserved  to  await  the  proper  moment  for  its 
employment;  the  combat  will  seldom  come  to  a  successful  issue 
without  its  employment  in  some  form. 

The  reserve  of  a  brigade  operating  as  part  of  a  larger  force  be- 
comes a  local  reserve.  It  replaces  dei)leted  supports,  and  in  attack 
strengthens  and  protects  the  firing  line  in  the  assault. 


212  THE  BRIGADE. 


The  Brigade  xxnr 


r 


The  iinc  of  Double  Colufe" 


The  Double  Column         The  Lme  of  Masses 


The  Column  of  Masses 


THE  BRIGADE. 

21 

XXIV 

t 

Y 
t 

sfcs  s^ 

THL  brigade: 

S=fc 

\  1 

\  1 

ss   s=s 

\ 

SS    ss 

1 

1 

"T  T 

1 

t 

\  V 

1 

Y 

( 

""  v^ 

1 

—  *^ 

1 

srs  == 

•^ 

By  the  left  in 

echelor 

N      J 

sfs  ==s 

of  half  re^ 

>imcnt5 

=i=== 

massec 

1 

===i= 

\ 

cfssis 

\ 

=^s!s 

.'                   \ 

s±:=fe 

■  ^   .    " 

^  -^ 

—        ^.J-r.     ^ 

=f=ss 

.\« 


ssss 


914  THE  BRIGADE. 


THL  BRIGADL 


TT7 


I 


\ 


First  regiment  in  line  of  columns 
Second  regiment  b^  the  ri^ht  and  left 
m  echelon  'ot  half  regiments. 


t 

Y 


I  ^5r 


/ 

sts 

/ 

/ 

/ 

•\ 


THE  BBIGASE. 


SK 


-.\^J,\MIIHI 


216  THE  BRIGADR 


TKVW  i 

THE  brigade: 


sis       =r= 


In  echelon   on  first  rtfiirY^enV 


i      1      i       I  '        .       i 


\      \      \L»ne  of  Columns    *      i       / 


X      -i-sJs      ' 


THE  BRIGADE.  217 

JOLVillTHL  BRIGADE. 

i 

,       /  V.  Mounted  Attack 


r 


I 

1/   / 
I  / 
v/ 


\ 

\  ^  Fire  Attack 


THE  DIVISION. 

534.  The  normal  composition  of  the  Cavahy  division  is  three 
Cavaby  brigades,  a  regiment  of  Horse  Artillery,  a  pioneer  battalion 
of  engineers,  a  field  battalion  of  signal  troops,  and  the  necessary- 
sanitary  personnel. 

It  is  commanded  by  a  major  general,  who  rides  where  he  can 
best  observe  movements  and  issue  his  orders.  The  chief  of  staff 
rides  2  yards  to  his  left;  the  remainder  of  his  staff,  the  flag,  and 
orderlies,  ride  in  order  of  rank  in  convenient  formation  in  rear. 

The  batteries  of  Horse  Artillery  that  accompany  brigades  when 
detached  are,  when  the  division  is  united,  formed  with  their 
regiment. 

636.  The  brigades  are  designated:  In  line,  rights  center ^  and 
left;  or  if  one  be  in  rear,  rights  left,  and  rear;  in  column,  leading^ 
ceate)\  and  rear.  Unless  otherwise  directed  by  the  division  com- 
mander, the  brigades  are  posted  from  right  to  left  in  line  or  from 
front  to  rear  in  column  in  the  order  of  rank  of  their  commanders. 

When  in  line,  th^  division  commander  designates  the  directing 
unit. 

The  principles  prescribed  for  the  evolutions  of  the  brigade  apply 
to  the  division. 

The  positions  of  the  Artillery  and  of  the  special  units  are  as  pre- 
scribed by  the  division  commander. 

636.  The  formation  for  approach  is  a  formation  in  readiness 
which  must  be  susceptible  of  rapid  transformation  into  combat 
formation.  It  is  governed  by  the  plan  of  attack,  the  information 
possessed  of  the  enemy's  disposition  and  movements,  and  by  the 
terrain. 

The  approach  may  be  executed  by  a  continuous  progression, 
utilizing  the  most  favorable  avenues  of  approach  leading  toward 
the  enemy,  but  it  is  usually  executed  by  a  succession  of  rapid  ad- 
vances, interrupted  by  halts  in  favorable  positions  to  enable  the 
advance  guard  or  scouts  to  cover  the  next  advance,  or  to  get  the 
command  in  hand  after  the  passage  of  defiles  or  difficult  terrain. 

318 


THE  DIVISION.  219 

637.  The  division  commander  makes  liis  reconnaissance  under 
cover  of  the  advance  guard  or  scouts.  He  is  accompanied  by  the 
brigade  commanders  and  the  artillery  commander  and,  when  the 
machine  guns  are  massed,  by  the  commander  of  the  machine  guns. 
He  determines  the  objective  of  the  principal  attack,  the  time  of  its 
delivery,  and  the  troops  which  are  to  participate  therein,  as  also 
the  role  of  the  other  units  of  the  division. 

He  then  gives  his  orders  under  the  form  of  combat  missions  and 
indicates  the  end  to  be  attained  and  the  role  of  each  commander. 
He  leaves  to  commanders  the  largest  initiative  possible  in  the  exe- 
cution of  their  roles. 

638.  The  unit  designated  as  reserve  places  itself  within  reach  of 
the  division  commander  or  goes  to  the  place  designated  by  him. 

(For  the  employment  and  protection  of  Artillery,  see  Horse 
Artillery  and  Machine  Guns.) 


Paet  II.— campaign. 

EMPLOYMENT  OF  CAVALRY. 

General  Principles. 

639.  Mounted  action  is  the  principal  method  of  fighting  of 
Cavaky.  Animated  by  an  aggressive  spirit,  it  will  seize  every 
opportunity  to  attack  with  the  horse  and  the  saber. 

Success  is  achieved  by  simplicity  in  conception  and  vigor  in  the 
execution  of  plans. 

In  the  larger  units  Cavalry  receives  the  assistance  of  Horse  Ar- 
tillery and  machine  guns. 

540.  The  rifle  enables  Cavalry  on  foot  to  engage  in  effective 
combat,  offensive  or  defensive,  against  forces  of  all  arms.  In  many 
cases  dismounted  action  and  the  mounted  charge  may  be  combined 
to  advantage. 

A  bold  leader  will,  however,  frequently  find  opportunities  for 
mounted  attack,  which  will  produce  more  rapid  and  decisive  results 
than  can  be  gained  by  the  most  skillful  use  of  the  rifle. 

641.  In  combining  shock  with  fire  action,  the  latter  may  be 
provided  by  the  Horse  Artillery,  machine  guns,  or  rifles,  or  by 
any  combination  of  these  arms. 

The  duty  of  Horse  Artillery  and  of  machine  guns  is  to  prepare 
the  way  for  the  Cavalry,  to  support  it  in  the  mounted  attack,  and 
to  augment  the  fire  effect  of  its  rifles  in  the  dismounted  attack. 

642.  On  account  of  the  variety  of  its  weapons  and  methods  of 
action,  Cavalry  is  capable  of  independent  operations  under  prac- 
tically all  the  conditions  of  war. 

543.  The  large  size  of  modern  armies  and  the  great  extension 
of  their  fronts  have  rendered  it  more  difficult  than  ever  to  change 
dispositions  once  made  and  have  augmented  the  importance  of 
celerity  and  endurance  in  marching.  Every  improvement  in  the 
means  of  observation  and  communication  serves  to  increase  the 
opportunities  and  enhance  the  value  of  Cavalry  as  the  fighting 
force  of  greatest  mobility. 

220 


EMPLOYMENT  OF  CAVALRY.  221 

644.  Cavalry^  reconnoiters  the  theater  of  operations  and  the 
enemy's  dispositions;  it  protects  the  army  against  surprise  and 
screens  its  movements.  In  battle  it  fights  in  combination  with 
the  other  arms  and,  by  "vdrtue  of  its  mobility,  exploits  their  suc- 
cesses. It  is  able  to  furnish  rapid  support  at  threatened  points, 
or,  by  fighting  delaying  actions,  to  gain  time  and  minimize  the 
consequences  of  a  reverse. 

645.  Habitual  reliance  on  dismounted  action  mil  weaken  and 
eventually  destroy  initiative;  difficulties  of  terrain  are  likely  to  be 
overestimated.  Cavalry  imbued  with  the  true  spirit  of  the  arm 
does  not  remain  inactive,  waiting  for  a  more  favorable  opportunity 
for  a  mounted  charge.  Taking  conditions  as  it  finds  them,  enter- 
prising Cavalry  will  adopt  the  forms  of  action  suitable  to  the  occa- 
sion and  make  its  participation  in  the  operations  both  prompt  and 
effective. 

546.  When  small  bodies  of  Cavalry  unaccompanied  by  horse 
artillery  or  machine  guns  meet  similar  bodies  of  the  enemy's 
Cavalry,  their  best  course  will  usually  be  to  make  an  energetic 
mounted  attack  at  once,  should  the  ground  be  in  any  way  suit- 
able, without  delaying  or  weakening  the  mounted  attack  by  dis- 
mounting a  part  of  the  command. 

By  showing  a  resolute  determination  to  attach  promptly  whenever 
possible,  Cavalry  may  establish  a  moral  superiority  over  the  op- 
posing Cavalry  which  will  prove  of  inestimable  value  throughout 
the  campaign. 

547.  When  opposing  forces  of  Cavalry  find  themselves  in  con- 
tact a  decision  as  to  the  action  to  be  adopted  must  be  made  and 
acted  upon  at  once  or  disaster  will  result.  A  leader  who,  by 
means  of  his  patrols  and  scouts,  is  first  apprised  of  the  presence  of 
the  opposing  force  has,  owing  to  the  rapidity  of  maneuver  of  Cav- 
alry, a  great  advantage. 

The  Cavalry  leader  should  prepare  himself  by  practice  in  field 
exercises  for  any  of  the  various  combinations  of  cavalry  action. 
He  should  cultivate  the  habit  of  prompt  decision  and  lean  always 
toward  the  aggressive. 

648.  During  the  operations  preceding  a  general  engagement  the 
first  and  most  important  antagonist  is  the  enemy's  Cavalry.  In 
order  to  dominate  the  territory  between  the  armies  the  enemy's 
squadrons  should,  if  possible,  be  overthrown  in  mounted  combat 
and  his  horsemen  driven  completely  off  the  field. 


282  EMPLOYMENT  OF  CAVALRY. 

649.  In  a  battle  of  all  arms  even  relatively  small  forces  of 
Cavalry  may  achieve  important  results  by  seizing  an  opportune 
moment.  But  decisive  participation  in  a  general  engagement, 
whether  to  repulse  the  enemy  or  support  our  own  attack,  is  pos- 
sible only  by  the  employment  of  large  masses  of  Cavalry. 

650.  The  character  of  the  enemy  and  the  nature  of  the  terrain 
exercise  a  controlling  influence  on  the  operations  of  Cavalry. 
Against  savage  horsemen  who  scatter  widely,  the  charge  of  a 
compact  force  becomes  a  blow  in  the  air.  In  a  tropical  jungle 
and  over  submerged  areas  shock  action  finds  but  little  applica- 
tion. In  countries  covered  with  forests,  or  where  the  cleared  land 
is  cut  up  into  small  parcels  by  stone  walls  or  wire  fences,  there 
will  be  many  more  opportunities  for  fire  action  than  for  shock. 

While  the  nature  of  operations  probable  for  Cavalry  may  thus 
often  be  predicted,  its  organization  and  training  should  neverthe- 
less prepare  it  thoroughly  for  all  kinds  of  work  of  which  Cavalry 
is  capable,  and  thus  enable  it  to  take  advantage  of  opportunities 
in  whatever  form  they  may  occur. 

661.  Cavalry  should  be  bold  and  enterprising.  In  its  rapid 
movements  it  often  encounters  the  enemy  in  unprepared  situa- 
tions. Undue  caution  then  forfeits  the  advantages  of  surprise, 
which  is  an  influential  factor  in  the  success  of  a  charge,  since  the 
moral  element  is  combined  ^vith  the  effect  of  the  weapons. 

662.  Cavalry  must  not  only  be  strongly  impressed  with  the 
power  of  its  rifles,  but  must  be  readj^  to  assault  on  foot  and  to 
capture  positions  held  by  the  enemy  with  the  same  determination 
and  resolution  as  Infantry. 

With  cover,  many  of  the  functions  of  Cavalry,  such  as  ambush, 
delaying  and  harassing  movements,  raids  and  flank  attacks,  be- 
come more  easy  of  accomplishment. 

663.  The  most  effective  directions  of  attack  are  against  the 
enemy's  flank  and  rear.  Enterprises  against  his  communications 
may  secure  valuable  results,  but  they  should  be  so  timed  that 
the  Cavalry  will  not  be  beyond  reach  for  use  in  a  general  engage- 
ment. On  the  battlefield  all  bodies  of  troops  must  seek  to  contribute 
to  the  achievement  of  victory. 

664.  The  mobility  of  Cavalry  comes  into  full  play  in  the  pur- 
suit, to  reap  the  fruits  of  victory;  and  in  a  retreat,  in  the  quick 
utilization  of  successive  defensive  positions,  and  in  the  rapid 
withdrawal  therefrom  after  breaking  off  the  engagement  at  the 
last  moment. 


COMMAND  AND  LEADING.  22$ 

Command  and  Leading. 

565.  The  speedy  course  of  a  cavalry  battle,  with  its  sudden 
changes,  req^uires  special  qualities  in  a  leader.  He  should  be  active 
and  energetic,  with  a  keen  eye  and  good  judgment,  quick  decision, 
and  a  firm  will;  he  should  be  able  to  express  himself  readily  in 
brief  and  clear  orders. 

556.  The  personal  influence  exercised  by  the  bearing  and  ex- 
ample of  a  cavalry  commander,  and  the  confidence  he  is  able  to 
inspire,  form  a  powerful  factor  in  the  efficiency  of  a  command.  ^  All 
leaders  should  bear  in  mind  that  failure  to  act,  and  the  suspicion 
it  evokes,  form  a  more  serious  charge  against  a  cavalry  officer  than 
can  be  based  on  a  mistake  in  the  method  of  operations. 

557.  A  large  degree  of  independence  of  action  must  be  granted 
to  a  cavalry  commander  in  carrying  out  his  operations  in  conform- 
ity with  the  general  plan  of  the  commander-in-chief.  He  should 
never  wait  for  orders  but  be  ready  to  assume  the  entire  responsi' 
bility  in  engaging  the  enemy.  In  case  of  doubt  the  boldest  decision 
is  generally  the  best. 

558.  The  condition  of  the  horses  should  be  the  object  of  constant 
solicitude  for  the  commander  and  all  his  subordinates.  He  should 
endeavor  to  keep  them  in  full  vigor  up  to  the  time  of  combat  by 
avoiding  useless  marching  and  undue  hurry  in  deployment,  as  well 
as  by  taking  advantage  of  opportunities  to  halt  and  rest — dismount- 
ing the  troopers — and  to  feed  and  water  when  not  in  immediate 
danger  of  attack. 

Strict  economy  must  be  practiced  with  regard  to  advance  guard, 
outposts,  detached  units,  and  the  orderly  and  messenger  service; 
otherwise,  the  ranks  will  be  depleted  and  the  horses  run  down. 
Thus,  under  normal  conditions,  the  strength  of  the  command  is 
husbanded,  but  on  the  day  of  battle,  especially  in  pursuit  or  re- 
treat, it  should  be  used  without  stint;  if  necessary,  to  the  complete 
exhaustion  of  man  and  horse. 

559.  Unnecessary  losses  should  be  avoided  by  taking  advantage 
of  cover  and  adopting  suitable  formations;  but  the  troops  should 
never  be  withdrawn  so  far  from  the  zone  of  fire  or  so  massed  as  to 
render  doubtful  their  opportune  participation  in  the  action. 

560.  The  leader  goes  to  a  position  from  which  he  can  see  the 
country  and  the  enemy,  at  the  same  time  retaining  control  of  his 
troops.  He  remains  in  observation  or  sends  out  officers  to  recon- 
noiter.  Personal  observation  is  the  best,  and  l>efore  an  attack  on 
Cavalry  is  indispensable. 


224  RECONNAISSANCE. 

661.  Before  entering  into  an  engagement  subordinate  comman- 
ders should,  as  far  as  possible,  be  informed  of  the  plans  of  their 
chief. 

662.  During  a  general  engagement  the  cavalry  commander  must 
maintain  communication  with  the  commander-in-chief,  so  that  he 
may  report  the  results  of  reconnaissance  and  his  own  operations, 
and  also  remain  informed  as  to  the  course  of  the  battle  and  changes 
in  plans  at  headquarters.  He  also  keeps  in  touch  with  the  situation 
in  adjoining  parts  of  the  Army. 

663.  In  order  to  support  his  own  Infantry  and  Artillery  effec- 
tively, or  fight  that  of  the  enemy,  the  cavalry  commander  should 
know  the  characteristics  and  methods  of  combat  of  those  arms. 

664.  Enterprise  is  the  highest  virtue  of  a  cavalry  leader.  To 
keep  the  bulk  of  the  forces  in  hand  is  a  well-establidied  means  to 
success. 

Reconnaissance  . 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.,  "The  Service  of  Information.'*) 

666.  Before  entering  the  theater  of  operations  Cavalry  should 
be  in  possession  of  a  summary  of  the  available  general  information 
concerning  the  enemy  and  his  territory,  including  maps.  In  the 
field  local  details  are  obtained  from  all  possible  sources  and  promptly 
forwarded  to  superiors;  the  work  of  gathering  such  information  by 
individuals  or  bodies  of  troops  is  designated  reconnaissance. 

At  a  considerable  distance  reconnaissance  is  usually  effected  by 
bodies  of  independent  cavalry  varying  in  size  up  to  a  division,  or 
by  special  details  from  the  divisional  cavalry,  while  a  more  limited 
reconnaissance  is  carried  out  by  cavalry  units  assigned  to  the  duty 
of  protection. 

INDEPENDENT  CAVALRY. 

666.  The  duty  of  independent  cavalry  is  to  find  the  enemy's 
main  body  and  then  to  preserve  contact.  At  the  same  time  it 
seeks  to  prevent  like  enterprises  on  the  part  of  the  enemy's  Cav- 
alry, thus  forming  the  cavalry  screen.  To  accomplish  these 
objects  it  is  necessary  to  defeat  the  enemy's  Cavalry.  For  combat 
the  commander,  therefore,  maintains  a  central  mass,  from  which 
the  organs  of  observation — scouts  and  patrols — ^are  sent  out.  When 
the  latter  are  expected  to  fight  they  must  be  made  stronger  and  be 
backed  up  by  larger  detachments  known  as  contact  platoons  or 
squadrons. 


DIVISIONAL  CAVALRY.  22& 

667.  Great  latitude  must  be  allowed  the  commander  of  inde- 
pendent cavalry.  His  instructions  usually  indicate  only  the 
country  to  be  reconnoitered  and  the  extent  of  the  daily  advance 
of  the  army;  but  attention  may  be  invited  to  especially  important 
localities. 

568.  Commanders  of  independent  cavalry  must  solve  the  diffi- 
cult problems  confronting  them  without  expecting  aid  from  other 
troops.  The  march  of  the  central  mass  depends  upon  information 
brought  in,  but  is  usually  made  by  a  series  of  rapid  advances.  The 
extent  of  front  Covered  by  independent  cavalry  should  be  such 
that  the  commander  is  able  to  exercise  daily  control  over  all  parts 
of  his  command.     For  a  brigade  the  limit  would  be  about  7  miles. 

In  some  cases,  when  the  enemy  is  already  located,  or  in  covering 
and  concealing  a  turning  movement,  the  duty  of  forming  a  protec- 
tive screen  becomes  of  primary  importance. 

DIVISIONAL   CAVALRY. 

669.  Cavalry  attached  to  infantry  units  usually  enters  into  the 
composition  of  formations  for  protection,  and  then  perform  such 
reconnaissance  as  the  situation  demands. 

When  there  is  independent  cavalrj^  in  front,  the  divisional 
cavalry  maintains  connection  therewith;  when  not,  it  reconnoiters 
far  to  the  front  and  gains  touch  with  the  enemy  if  possible,  operat- 
ing in  a  manner  similar  to  that  of  independent  cavalry. 

Though  more  restricted  as  to  space,  the  reconnaissance  of  divis- 
ional cavalry  goes  more  into  detail  and  also  gathers  topographical 
information.  As  independent  cavalry  draws  off  to  a  flank,  the 
diAdsional  cavalry  must  be  especially  active  to  guard  against 
surprise,  gain  information  of  the  enemy's  movements,  and  prevent 
incursions  of  his  patrols. 

PATROLS. 

570.  Patrols  are  small  detachments,  usually  named  in  accord- 
ance with  the  duties  expected  of  them,  as  reconnoitering,  visiting, 
connecting,  flanking  patrols,  etc. 

The  commander  determines  the  number  and  strength  of  patrols 
according  to  circumstances.  Small  patrols  are  mobile,  easily  con- 
cealed, and  economical  of  the  fighting  strength.  On  the  other 
hand,  hostility  of  the  natives,  presence  of  the  enemy,  and  the 
necessity  of  sending  messages  make  stronger  detachments  necessary, 

34396°— 14 15 


226  PATROLS. 

571.  Reconnoitering  patrols. — The  chief  duty  of  reconnoitering 
patrols  is  to  gather  information.  TLqj  should  avoid  combat  and 
fight  only  when  their  mission  demands  it.  The  most  skillful 
patrols  accomplish  results  and  return  without  being  discovered  by 
the  enemy. 

Instructions  to  patrols  should  be  simple  and  definite,  and  under- 
standing thereof  verified. 

Neighing,  restless,  or  conspicuous  horses  should  not  be  sent,  and 
the  equipment  should  be  as  light  as  possible. 

672.  Patrol  leaders. — Skillful  patrolling  is  the  basis  of  efficient 
reconnaissance.  Leaders,  men,  and  horses  are  carefully  selected 
with  a  view  to  all  the  qualities  essential  to  success.  Officers  are 
detailed  only  in  cases  of  special  importance. 

The  patrol  leader  should  have  a  map,  watch,  compass,  field  glass, 
message  blanks,  and  pencils.  He  inspects  his  detail,  remedies 
deficiencies,  explains  his  instructions,  and  gives  specific  directions 
under  his  plans,  which  must  be  understood  by  all  the  members. 

673.  Conduct. — There  is  no  normal  formation  for  a  patrol.  It 
guards  against  surprise,  usually  with  point  and  flankers.  Scouta 
and  special  dismounted  observers  may  be  detached  for  short  dis- 
tances. Whatever  formation  is  adopted  it  should  favor  the  escape 
of  at  least  one  man  in  case  of  surprise. 

The  advance  is  made  from  successive  points  suitable  for  obser- 
vation, where  the  map  is  consulted  and  further  directions  are 
given. 

When  a  patrol  is  scattered,  it  reassembles  at  some  place  previously 
selected;  if  checked  in  one  direction,  it  takes  another;  if  cut  off,  it 
returns  by  a  detour  or  forces  its  way  through.  As  a  last  resort,  it 
scatters,  so  that  at  least  one  man  may  return  with  information. 

When  it  is  certain  that  the  enemy  has  been  discovered,  that  fact 
should  be  reported  without  delay. 

574.  In  order  to  develop  efficient  patrol  leaders,  the  course  of 
cavalry  training  should  provide  for  frequent  practice  of  patrols  in 
reading  the  signs  of  the  road  and  trail  and  other  indications  of  the 
presence  of  the  enemy,  in  distinguishing  the  various  arms  of  his 
forces,  and  in  estimating  their  strength,  as  prescribed  in  F.  S.  R. 

576.  Signals. — In  addition  to  the  signals  prescribed  for  maneuver: 

Enemy  in  small  numbers:  Hold  weapon  horizontally  above  the 
head. 

Enemy  in  force:  Same  as  preceding,  but  raise  weapon  repeatedly. 

No  enem>^,  or  all  clear:  Hand  well  above  the  head,  holding 
weapon  vertically,  or  the  headdress. 


PROTECTION.  227 

Take  cover:  Low  downward  motions  with  the  hand,  palm  down. 

Other  simple  signals,  for  example,  with  the  headdress,  may  be 

agreed  upon  at  any  time,  but  they  must  he  familiar  to  all  the  men. 

TRANSMISSION   OP  INFORMATION. 

576.  Information  to  retain  its  value  must  arrive  in  time  for  use, 
hence  it  is  the  duty  of  all  officers  to  facilitate  its  transmission.  For 
short  distances,  and  when  other  means  are  not  available,  informa- 
tion is  carried  by  mounted  messengers.  With  moving  troops,  and 
in  the  stress  of  battle  or  bad  weather,  technical  means  often  are  not 
established  or  fail  in  operation.  Cavalry  should,  therefore,  pre- 
pare itself  to  take  over  this  service  at  any  time  by  practice  in  the 
use  of  connecting  posts  and  relay  lines. 

Despatch  riders  should  be  intelligent  and  well  mounted.  They 
often  work  in  pairs;  important  messages  are  sent  in  duplicate  over 
different  routes,  sometimes  by  officers. 

Unless  prevented  by  further  orders  mounted  messengers  must 
return  to  their  squadrons  without  delay. 

When  motor  cycles  are  available  they  should  be  utilized  to  gain 
and  transmit  information,  therelSy  saving  the  horses. 

Protection. 
(See  also  F.  S.  R.,  '"The  Service  of  Security.") 

577.  The  general  protection  of  a  command  of  all  arms  is  pro- 
vided by  the  independent  cavalry  operating  at  a  distance.  Addi- 
tional security  is  obtained  by  covering  detachments  constantly 
on  duty  to  clear  the  way  or  to  gain  time  for  the  main  body  to  prepare 
for  action. 

On  the  march  these  detachments  are  called  advance,  flanJc,  or  rear 
guards;  in  camp  or  bivouac  they  are  called  outposts. 

advance  guards. 

578.  The  strength  of  the  advance  guard  of  a  cavalry  command  is 
about  one-fourth,  or  less,  of  the  whole  force.  It  is  divided  into  two 
nearly  equal  parts,  the  vanguard  and  the  reserve.  The  vanguard 
consists  of  the  advance  party  and  the  support.  The  advance  party 
sends  out  the  point  and  the  flanking  patrols.  The  support  and  the 
reserve  furnish  their  own /ani-fz-s. 


228  ADVANCE  GUAEBS. 

The  point  (2  to  4  troopers;  is  about  300  yards  ahead  of  the  advance 
party;  the  flanking  patrols,  somewhat  less  advanced,  are  several 
hundred  yards  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  line  of  march;  the  advance 
party  precedes  the  support  by  about  500  yards;  the  support  is  about 
half  a  mile  ahead  of  the  reserve  and  the  reserve  fully  half  a  mile 
from  the  main  body.  Flanking  patrols  parallel  to  the  support  and 
the  reserve  are  out  half  a  mile  or  more.  Connecting  troopers 
preserve  communication  between  support  and  reserve  and  reserve 
and  main  body. 

679.  All  distances  are  variable,  being  regulated  by  circum- 
stances and  the  orders  of  the  commander.  For  example,  they 
would  be  less  in  close  country,  at  night,  or  in  foggy  weather,  than  in 
open  country,  in  the  daytime,  or  in  fair  weather. 

680.  Small  commands  adopt  similar  formations.  A  point,  with 
several  small  patrols,  is  sufficient  for  a  squadron;  a  regiment  can 
dispense  with  a  reserve. 

681.  Macliine  guns  may  accompany  the  reserve  of  a  regiment  or 
half-regiment  on  advance  guard .  Horse  artillery  is  seldom  assigned 
to  the  advance  guard  of  commands  not  larger  than  a  brigade. 

682.  The  duty  of  an  advance  guard  is  to  insin-e  the  safe  and 
uninterrupted  advance  of  the  main  body;  to  guard  against  surprise; 
to  push  back  small  parties;  and  to  delay  the  enemy's  advance  in 
force. 

683.  Advance  Cavalry. — Unless  the  ground  is  impracticable  the 
advance  guard  of  all  mixed  commands  is  provided  with  Cavalry  for 
reconnaissance,  flank  patrols,  etc.  The  portion  preceding  the  point 
of  the  advance  guard  is  known  as  the  advance  cavalry.  It  maintains 
connection  with  the  independent  cavalry  and  reconnoiters  to  the 
extent  necessaiy. 

WTieii  there  is  no  independent  cavalry  in  front,  in  which  case  the 
greater  part  or  all  of  the  divisional  cavalry  will  be  detailed  for  duty 
with  the  advance  guard,  the  functions  of  independent  cavalry  are 
assumed  by  the  advance  cavalry,  as  far  as  practicable,  and  recon- 
naissance must  extend  at  least  far  enough  to  the  front  and  flanks  to 
protect  the  column  against  surprise  by  artillery  fire. 

FLANK   GUARDS. 

684.  The  flanks  of  a  column  are  protected  in  part  by  the  advance 
guard.  Additional  security  on  an  exposed  flank  is  obtained  b}^  the 
parallel  march  of  a  det-achment,  called  Siflanh  guard.  This  varies 
in  size  from  a  patrol  to  a  detachment  of  all  arms,  but  is  generally 


REAR  GUARDS.  229 

strong  in  Cavalry.  Formation  and  duties  are  similar  to  those  of  an 
advance  guard;  patrolling  should  be  especially  active  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  exposed  flank. 

REAR   GUARDS. 

586.  The  formation  of  a  rear  guard  is  like  that  of  an  advance 
guard  reversed.  Rear  cavalry,  rear  point,  and  rear  party  correspond 
to  advance  cavalry,  point,  and  advance  party. 

586.  The  object  of  a  rear  guard  is  to  gain  time  by  forcing  the 
enemy  to  deploy  for  attack  or  to  turn  defended  positions.  Horse 
Artillery  and  machine  guns  therefore  enter  into  the  composition  of 
large  cavalry  rear  guards.  In  rear  guards  of  all  arms  all  the  parts 
except  the  reserve  may  be  of  Cavalry,  for  the  mobility  of  the  latter 
enables  it  to  withdraw  after  breaking  off  an  engagement. 

587.  As  rear  guards  must  be  prepared  to  offer  a  stubborn  re- 
sistance and  can  not  count  upon  assistance  from  the  main  body 
they  are  relatively  somewhat  stronger  than  advance  guards. 

588/  When  the  enemy  is  conducting  an  energetic  pursuit  the 
Cavalry  endeavors  to  delay  him  by  occupying  successive  defen- 
sive positions,  retreat  therefrom  being  effected  under  cover  of 
fire  from  new  positions  in  rear.  The  flanks  should  be  protected 
by  mounted  bodies;  machine  guns  and  Horse  Artillery  cover  the 
principal  avenues  of  approach.  The  led  horses  of  the  firing 
lines  should  be  so  disposed  and  exits  to  the  rear  be  so  prepared  as 
to  facilitate  rapid  withdrawal.  Mounted  engineers  are  attached 
to  the  support  and  rear  party  and  prepare  additional  delay  by 
means  of  obstructions  and  demolitions. 

589.  An  advancing  force  seldom  requires  a  regular  rear  guard; 
a  small  detachment  may  be  dropped  out  from  the  tail  of  the  column 
to  cover  the  rear.  In  case  of  danger  of  attack  from  the  rear  a  rear 
guard  of  suitable  size  should  be  detailed.  To  ward  off  marauders, 
guerillas,  etc.,  and  to  protect  the  field  trains  a  large  part  of  such 
a  rear  guard  should  consist  of  Cavalry. 

OUTPOSTS. 

590.  The  j)rincipal  duties  of  outposts  are  to  give  warning  of 
the  enemy's  approach  and  to  stop  or  delay  his  advance.  Tney 
seek  early  information  of  the  enemy's  movements  and  endeavor 
to  prevent  reconnaissance  by  his  patrols. 


230  OUTPOSTS. 

The  strength  of  the  outposts  varies  with  the  nature  of  the  country 
and  the  character  and  the  proximity  of  the  enemy;  it  should  be 
kept  down  to  the  lowest  limits  consistent  with  safety  seldom 
exceeding  one-sixth  of  the  command. 

The  outposts  should  cover  the  entire  front  and  extend  around 
the  flanks;  in  some  cases  the  rear  must  also  be  guarded.  Troops 
for  this  duty  are  generally  disposed  as  follows: 

(a)  A  line  of  vedette  squads,  each  consisting  of  a  corporal  and 
three  troopers,  one  of  whom,  usually  dismounted,  is  posted  as 
lookout  or  vedette. 

(6)  A  line  of  supports.  Each  consists  of  one  or  two  platoons 
and  furnishes  the  vedette  squads  for  the  front. ' 

(c)  A  reserve.  This  is  generally  omitted  except  in  the  out- 
posts of  a  large  concentrated  command. 

691.  The  vedettes,  posted  at  favorable  points  but  concealed  as 
far  as  practicable,  watch  to  their  front  and  flanks  and  form  the  line 
of  observation.  They  should  be  provided  with  field  glasses.  Their 
vedette  squads,  dismounted,  are  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  under 
cover.  At  night  and  in  special  cases  the  vedette  squads  may  be 
doubled  to  post  double  vedettes. 

592.  The  supports  form  the  line  of  resistance.  They  are  posted 
on  roads  or  other  avenues  of  approach  from  the  front,  are  dismounted 
and  under  cover,  and  strengthen  their  position  by  obstacles  and 
intrenchments. 

593.  The  distances  between  fractions  of  outposts  vary  greatly 
according  to  circumstances,  but  ordinarily  the  reserve  should  be  a 
little  over  a  mile  from  the  main  body,  the  supports  about  the  same 
distance  from  the  reserve  or  main  body,  and  the  vedette  squads 
from  a  quarter  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  farther  toward  the  front. 

594.  The  outposts  are  relieved  every  24  hours;  the  vedette 
squads  every  12  hours;  and  the  vedettes  every  2  hours  or  oftener. 
The  extent  of  the  front  and  the  density  of  the  line  of  observation, 
as  influenced  by  the  nature  of  the  country  and  other  circumstances, 
usually  determine  the  strength  of  the  outpost  detail;  it  must  in 
any  case  be  sufficient  to  furnish  the  troops  deemed  necessary  on 
the  line  of  resistance. 

695.  Sections  of  the  outpost  line  are  usually  assigned  to  com- 
manders who  are  held  responsible  for  constant  readiness  for  action 
and  also  for  timely  warning  to  the  troops  in  rear. 

Machine  guns  and  Horse  Artillery  with  the  outposts  are  located 
so  as  to  sweep  open  spaces  and  lines  of  approach. 


ADVANCE  TOWARD  CONTACT.  231 

Suitable  arrangements  must  be  made  for  feeding,  watering,  and 
mess. 

Facilities  for  intercommunication  must  be  developed  to  the  full- 
est extent  and  information  from  different  sources  must  be  forwarded 
to  superiors  without  delay. 

The  Advance  Toward  Contact. 

686.  As  long  as  distance  from  the  enemy  permits,  the  command 
will  march  on  the  roads  in  one  or  several  columns.  Progress  is 
more  rapid  on  roads  than  across  country,  and  there  is  less  fatigue. 

The  march  of  a  large  command  in  a  single  column  is  likely  to  be 
slow  and  tiresome;  it  also  involves  certain  disadvantages  with  refer- 
ence to  subsistence,  forage,  and  water.  "When  parallel  roads  are 
available  the  march  will  therefore  usually  be  made  in  several 
columns,  each  preceded  by  an  advance  guard.  Ample  arrange- 
ments must  be  made  for  free  communication  between  the  columns 
so  as  to  insure  their  cooperation  in  emergency.  Temporary  separa- 
tion by  impassable  obstacles  should  be  avoided,  unless  at  a  safe 
distance  from  the  enemy.  When  parallel  roads  of  a  satisfactory 
character  are  not  available,  or  when  their  course  is  such  as  to  cast 
a  doubt  upon  the  possibility  of  prompt  cooperation,  it  is  better  to 
retain  the  advantages  of  concentration  afforded  by  marching  in  a 
single  column. 

697.  Thorough  reconnaissance  of  the  terrain,  the  study  of  good 
maps,  and  consultation  with  intelligent  g^uides  will  enable  the 
commander  to  issue  orders  and  make  dispositions  with  facility  and 
confidence. 

698.  As  soon  as  the  advance  has  arrived  at  a  stage  where 
encounter  with  bodies  of  the  enemy  is  no  longer  improbable,  the 
columns  approach  each  other,  and  the  roads  are  left  free  for  the 
Horse  Artillery  and  trains. 

699.  A  command  is  said  to  be  concentrated  when  the  various 
elements  of  combat  are  near  enough  to  each  other  to  cooperate  in 
the  same  action.  Such  concentration  should  always  be  brought 
about  before  engaging  the  enemy,  for  attempts  to  effect  a  junction 
of  the  columns  on  the  battlefield  itself  seldom  succeed. 

600.  After  leaving  the  road  the  columns  close  up  and  the  com- 
mand assumes  a  formation  in  readiness;  that  is,  a  line  of  short 
columns  with  deploying  intervals,  combined  with  such  echelons 
as  may  be  necessary  to  oppose  flank  attacks  and  to  form  a  support 


232  ADVANCE  TOWARD  CONTACT. 

and  a  reserve.  This  formation  gives  the  requisite  elasticity  for 
the  command  to  pass  over  uneven  ground,  to  take  advantage  of 
cover,  and  to  effect  a  rapid  deployment. 

601.  The  movements  of  the  Horse  Artillery  at  this  stage  of  the 
advance  will  depend  on  the  nature  of  the  country,  the  character 
of  action  expected,  and  the  instructions  of  the  cavalry  commander. 
While  retaining  use  of  the  roads  as  long  as  practicable,  it  eventually 
seeks  positions  on  the  flank  and  abreast  of  the  main  body. 

Some  of  the  machine  guns  may  be  detached  to  strengthen  the 
advance  guard;  the  remainder  stay  with  their  regiments  until 
orders  brigading  them,  or  instructions  for  their  movements,  are 
received. 

602.  Increased  reconnaissance  will  now  become  necessary. 
The  additional  patrols,  some  of  which  may  be  led  by  officers, 
receive  special  instructions  to  locate  the  enemy  and  ascertain 
his  dispositions.  These  patrols  must  be  supported  by  detach- 
ments when  the  enemy's  patrols  are  already  on  the  ground  and 
are  aggressive. 

603.  When  the  approximate  position  of  the  enemy  is  known 
and  there  is  a  chance  to  surprise  him,  tliis  reconnaissance  may  be 
entrusted  to  a  few  intelligent  scouts  or  selected  officers  in  order 
not  to  betray  our  own  presence  and  intentions. 

604.  The  skill  of  the  leader  in  conducting  the  further  advance 
consists  in  keeping  under  cover  as  much  as  possible  and  in  not 
being  caught  at  a  disadvantage.  He  will  proceed  from  one  good 
position  to  another  nearer  the  enemy,  passing  over  the  intervening 
space  at  rapid  gaits. 

605.  Before  beginning  the  approach  march,  the  field  trains  should 
be  sent  to  a  position  offering  facilities  for  parking  and  defense. 
The  locations  seized  for  the  successive  advances  of  the  main  body 
will  in  turn  serve  the  same  purpose  for  the  field  trains.  Event- 
ually the  combat  trains  are  separated  from  the  command  and  follow 
at  a  sufficient  distance  to  prevent  becoming  involved  in  the 
action. 

606.  For  cavalry  combat  personal  .reconnaissance  is  highly 
important.  At  an  opportune  moment  during  the  approach  march, 
the  commander,  accompanied  by  several  staff  officers,  and,  if 
practicable,  by  the  leaders  of  the  principal  subordinate  units, 
proceeds  to  a  point  where  he  can  see  the  ground  over  which  his 
command  may  be  launched  in  attack. 

607.  Having  decided  upon  the  plan  of  attack  the  commander 
then  gives  the  necessary  orders;  a  staff  officer  is  charged  with 


MOUNTED  COMBAT.  233 

supervision  of  direction  and  gaits,   and   the  subordinate   com- 
manders return  to  their  units. 

608.  In  case  of  emergency,  the  commander  should  not  hesitate 
to  send  his  troops  into  action  in  spite  of  inadequate  knowledge  of 
the  ground.  Incomplete  information  as  to  the  enemy's  disposi- 
tions should  not  cause  surrender  of  initiative. 

609.  In  addition  to  reconnaissance  constant  observation  by 
combat  patrols  is  required  to  guard  against  the  sudden  appearance 
of  hostile  forces,  especially  on  an  unprotected  flank.  In  large 
affairs,  a  platoon  or  even  a  squadron  may  be  assigned  to  this 
service. 

610.  While  it  is  the  duty  of  all  to  report  observations  of  military 
value  without  delay,  the  commander  should  cause  general  dis- 
semination of  up-to-date  intelligence  and  results  of  reconnaissance. 
When  practicable,  subordinate  commanders  should  mutually 
communicate  important  observations  and  changes  in  their  situa- 
tions. 

Mounted  Combat. 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.,  '^Combat.") 

(a)    AGAINST   CAVALRY. 

611.  In  the  mounted  charge  of  one  cavalry  force  against  another, 
the  one  attacking  with  the  greater  determination  and  entering  the 
collision  with  the  more  violent  impetus,  combining  velocity  and 
cohesion,  will  be  successful. 

Officers  and  men  must  have  a  firm  resolve  to  crush  the  enemy's 
lines  by  riding  down  whatever  confronts  them. 

612.  Good  Cavalr/ must  be  able  to  charge  repeatedly.  It  should 
be  taught  to  rally  quickly  behind  its  leader  in  response  to  trumpet 
call  or  command. 

It  is  only  when  the  horses  are  thoroughly  trained  and  hardened 
and  kept  in  fresh  and  vigorous  condition  that  Cavalry  can  satisfy 
all  the  demands  of  mounted  combat.  To  arrive  at  the  charging 
point  with  horses  in  distressed,  blown,  and  unsteady  condition 
would  be  to  sacrifice  the  most  important  elements  of  success — vigor 
and  cohesion  in  the  shock. 

613.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  commander  to  cause  the  movements 
of  his  units  to  culminate  in  a  charge  against  the  enemy's  main  body 
in  a  favorable  direction  and  at  the  right  moment.  His  plan  should 
be  definite  and  simple,  his  orders  brief  and  precise.     Good  observa- 


234  AGAINST  CAVALRY. 

tion  and  an  efficient  system  of  transmission  of  orders  are  essential  to 
success. 

614.  As  it  will  often  be  impossible  to  explain  the  details  of  pro- 
posed action,  subordinate  commanders  must  act  largely  on  their 
own  initiative,  in  conformity  with  the  general  plan  of  their  chief. 

615.  After  the  attacking  line  has  been  deployed  and  set  in 
motion  the  commander  is  no  longer  able  to  modify' his  plan.  It  is 
important,  therefore,  to  avoid  premature  deplo^miient  and  to  keep  a 
reserve  in  hand  for  eriiergencies. 

616.  If  the  enemy  can  be  surprised  as  to  the  time  or  direction 
of  the  attack  it  Avill  force  hurried  adoption  of  counter  measures  at  a 
critical  moment  and  place  him  at  a  disadvantage. 

617.  Wlien  cover  is  available,  effort  should  be  made  to  keep  the 
enemy  in  doubt  as  to  the  direction  of  the  main  attack  as  long  as 
possible  and  to  strike  liim  in  flank,  or  at  least  in  an  oblique  direc- 
tion, combined  with  envelopment. 

618.  The  most  favorable  opportunities  for  attacking  Cavalry  are 
found  when  the  enemy  is  emerging  from  a  defile,  when  he  can  be 
caught  in  column  or  in  the  act  of  changing  formation,  when  his 
lines  or  echelons  can  be  taken  in  flank,  and,  in  general,  whenever 
he  can  not  quickly  deploy  equivalent  forces  to  meet  an  attack. 

619.  Early  information  as  to  the  enemy's  location  and  disposi- 
tions, prevention  of  reconnaissance  by  his  patrols,  promptness  of 
decision,  and  celerity  of  movement  will  enable  the  commander  to 
secure  the  initiative.  He  keeps  it  by  striking  with  rapidity  and 
vigor. 

620.  The  plan  of  the  commander,  made  after  personal  recon- 
naissance, if  practicable,  should  decide  upon  the  moment  for 
attack,  the  objective  of  the  main  attack,  the  troops  to  participate 
therein,  and  the  role  of  the  other  units  of  the  command. 

621.  There  is  no  normal  attack  formation  and  definite  rules  can 
not  be  laid  down.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  commander,  bearing  in 
mind  the  general  principles  here  enunciated,  to  utilize  his  troops 
in  the  manner  deemed  necessary  for  the  achievement  of  victory. 

622.  However,  a  preliminary  articulation  of  the  command  pro- 
\ides  an  attaching  line,  consisting  of  about  two-thirds  of  the  entire 
force,  and  a  reserve. 

The  commander  of  each  of  the  large  combat  groups  of  the  attack- 
ing line  adopts  a  formation  suitable  to  his  place  and  duty  in  the 
general  line  and  conforming  to  the  nature  of  the  ground.  He 
executes  the  attack  by  the  simplest  and  most  direct  means,  with 


AGAINST  CAVALRY.  286 

I 
due  regard  to  the  position  of  the  adjoining  units.    He  sends  out 
the  necessary  ground  scouts  and  combat  patrols  on  his  own  ini- 
tiative. 

623.  Only  such  forces  are  deployed  for  the  charge  as  appear  to 
be  sufficient  to  accomplish  the  object.  These  are  followed  at 
short  distances  by  units  in  column  or  line  of  columns  forming  the 
support. 

624.  The  support  by;  its  proximity  increases  the  confidence  of 
the  charging  line  and  is  in  position  to  furnish  immediate  assistance, 
and  thus  insure  the  success  of  the  attack. 

625.  The  greater  part  of  the  support  is  disposed  in  echelon  to  the 
attacking  line  on  the  unsupported  or  more  exposed  flank,  prepared 
to  meet  enveloping  or  flank  attacks  of  the  enemy.  For  the  latter 
purpose  its  units  are  generally  formed  in  an  echelon  of  columns,  as 
the  elasticity  of  this  formation,  while  favoring  facility  of  advance, 
permits  quick  formation  of  line  for  a  charge  in  any  direction. 

626.  The  remaining  squadrons  of  the  support  follow  as  an  eche- 
lon to  the  less  exposed  flank,  or  in  rear  of  the  line. 

The  action  of  the  support  is  directed  principally  against  the  in- 
tact units  of  the  enemy,  such  as  have  not  been  broken  by  the  charge 
of  the  attacking  line  or  remain  in  support.  As  a  rule,  the  greater 
part  of  the  support  does  not  mingle  in  the  m^l6e  as  long  as  intact 
bodies  of  the  enemy  are  in  the  vicinity. 

627.  Immediate  deployment  while  advancing  against  the  enemy 
has  an  inspiring  effect  on  the  troops.  On  the  other  hand,  deploy- 
ment without  gaining  ground  to  the  front  is  more  quickly  made,  and 
may  therefore  be  resorted  to  when  it  is  desired  to  make  the  initial 
attack  with  large  deployed  forces  instead  of  with  the  leading  units 
only.  Such  deployment  also  is  useful  when  space  is  limited,  for 
example,  behind  cover,  when  the  plan  is  to  emerge  therefrom  in 
deployed  lines  to  surprise  the  enemy. 

628.  If  the  attacking  line  is  forced  to  cross  a  fire-swept  zone  the 
formation  of  its  units  should  be  modified  so  as  to  diminish  the  effect 
of  the  enemy's  fire.  Use  may  be  made  of  cover,  but  upon  approach- 
ing the  enemy  the  troops  must  be  in  proper  place  and  formation  for 
rapid  deployment;  it  is  specially  important  to  maintain  the  neces- 
sary intervals  for  this  purpose. 

629.  Wliile  the  flank  attack  is  favorable  to  us,  our  own  flanks 
require  protection  against  similar  action  by  the  enemy.  The  best 
flank  protection  is  afforded  by  impassable  obstacles.  Stone  walls, 
thick  hedges,  and  wire  fences  should  be  skillfully  utilized  for  similar 


236  AGAINST  CAVALRY. 

purposes.  Artillery  and  macliine-gun  fire  sweeping  large  open 
spaces  on  the  flanks  afford  efficient  protection.  In  the  general  case 
the  flanks  are  protected  by  echelons  placed  to  the  rear  and  outward. 

A  body  of  troops  placed  in  echelon  in  advance  of  the  main  line 
forms  an  offensive  flank,  corresponding  to  the  "flank  attack"  of  the 
squadron  and  regiment.  When  the  enemy  is  deficient  in  maneu- 
vering capacity,  or  when  he  can  be  surprised  by  the  advance  eche- 
lon emerging  from  cover,  the  offensive  flank,  if  skillfully  led,  prom- 
ises decided  advantages;  for  if  the  enemy  changes  (iirection  to 
protect  his  menaced  flank  he  exposes  himself  to  a  flank  attack  by 
the  main  line.  In  open  country,  however,  a  competent  enemy  will 
take  effective  counter  measures,  so  that  an  offensive  flank  may  find 
itself  flanked  in  turn  and  thrown  back  in  disorder  on  its  own  troops, 
separated  from  its  main  body,  or  enfiladed  by  fire. 

A  lateral  displacement  of  the  main  body  behind  cover  may  be 
used  to  deceive  the  enemy  as  to  the  direction  in  which  the  principal 
attack  is  to  be  made. 

630.  If  the  enemy  does  not  meet  the  attack,  but  retreats  when 
collision  is  imminent,  a  part  of  the  attacking  line  pursues  at  once 
to  keep  him  going  and  inflict  as  much  loss  as  possible;  the  remain- 
der, kept  well  in  hand,  follows  closely  to  assist  in  the  enemy's  de- 
struction and  to  protect  the  pursuing  troops  against  reverses. 

631.  When  the  enemy  receives  the  shock  a  melee  will  result. 
With  appro ximatey  equal  numbers,  determination,  horsemanship, 
and  skillful  use  of  weapons  decide  the  issue  in  such  a  contest. 

Such  units  as  have  penetrated  the  enemy's  line  will  rally  with 
the  utmost  promptness  and  charging  back  attack  tne  nearest  forces 
of  the  enemy  still  intact  or  being  rallied. 

In  the  pursuit  after  a  melee  the  troops  disorganized  by  success 
are  at  the  mercy  of  fresh  hostile  bodies.  They  must  therefore  be 
followed  closely  by  supports  or  rallied  units. 

632.  Should  the  attack  fail,  the  troops  withdraw  with  the  object 
of  ralh-ing  at  the  first  available  opportunity.  Artillery,  machine- 
gun,  or  rifle  fire  from  favorable  positions  Will  check  the  enemy. 
During  the  withdrawal  officers  must  endeavor  to  retain  or  regain 
control  of  their  units,  so  as  to  be  able  to  take  advantage  of  favorable 
opportunities  for  counter  attack. 

633.  The  reserve  formed  in  line  of  columns  or  echelon  of  columns, 
follows  several  hundred  yards  from  the  support,  in  rear  of  the  weaker 
flank,  or  in  the  position  assigned  to  it.  The  commander-in-chief, 
while  observing  the  vicissitudes  of  the  combat,  resists  the  tendency 


AGAINST  INFANTRY.  SWf 

to. participate  in  the  various  in^l6es,  and  uses  the  bulk  of  his  reserve 
as  a  unit,  at  a  well-chosen  time  and  place,  to  cause  the  final  disrup- 
tion of  the  enemy's  dispositions. 

634.  Should  the  attack  be  successful,  the  reserve  assists  the 
pursuit,  sending  its  last  fresh  troops  into  action  as  soon  as  rallied 
bodies  become  available  to  form  a  new  reserve.  In  case  of  failure, 
the  reserve  forms  a  nucleus  for  the  rally,  and  seeks  to  reestablish 
the  combat  or  protect  the  retreat. 

(6)  AGAINST  INFANTRY. 

636.  In  the  mounted  charge  against  Infantry  the  form  of  attack, 
as  well  as  the  prospect  of  success,  is  influenced  by  a  number  of 
circumstances  which  may  cause  the  problem  to  vary  from  the 
most  difficult  that  can  confront  the  cavalry  leader  to  a  mere  round- 
up of  dispirited  fugitives. 

636.  The  conditions  of  the  ground  are  unfavorable  when  the 
enemy's  position  is  surrounded  by  open  spaces  of  extensive  depth 
affording  neither  shelter  from  fire  nor  cover  from  view;  also  when 
soft  soil  or  broken  ground,  dense  vegetation  or  artificial  obstacles 
delay  the  charging  troops  or  break  up  their  formations. 

Rolling  country,  on  the  other  hand,  generally  affords  good  oppor- 
tunities for  a  protected  approach  and  for  surprise,  especially  if 
some  cover  is  available. 

637.  The  character  of  the  enemy's  troops  should  always  be  take  n 
into  account.  An  attack  which,  if  made  against  well-trained  and 
highlv-disciplined  Infantry  would  be  doomed  to  failure,  might 
achieve  a  brilliant  success  if  delivered  against  troops  only  partly 
trained  and  deficient  in  experience,  or  demoralized  by  previous 
defeats. 

638.  The  state  of  a  campaign  and  the  progress  of  a  battle  also 
have  an  important  bearing  on  the  vulnerability  of  troops.  When 
the  contest  with  the  opposing  Infantry  has  lasted  for  days,  when 
severe  losses  have  been  suffered,  when  food  and  water  are  lacking, 
or  when  the  vitality  of  the  foot  soldiers  has  been  undermined  by 
the  climate  or  by  an  epidemic,  the  remnant  of  their  fortitude  may 
be  swept  away  by  a  vigorous  charge  of  horsemen,  turning  extreme 
fatigue  and  approaching  exhaustion  into  utter  demoralization. 

639.  Conditions  for  the  mounted  charge  against  Infantry  are 
considered  most  favorable  when  the  Infantry  have  exhausted  their 
ammunition,  when  they  are  retreating  in  disorder  and  beyond 


238  AGAINST  INFANTRY. 

control  by  their  officers,  or  when  they  have  been  severely  shaken 
by  artillery  or  infantry  fire. 

640.  The  mounted  charge  may  also  be  useful  in  covering  a 
retreat,  and  may  be  necessary  to  cut  through  surrounding  forces  of 
hostile  Infantry. 

641.  The  formation  of  the  charging  troops,  if  substantial  results 
are  to  be  achieved,  must  always  have  considerable  extension  in 
depth;  the  lateral  extension  should  be  sufficient  to  leave  no  part 
of  the  hostile  force  free  from  attack. 

642.  The  commander  should  always  seek  to  make  his  attack 
more  or  less  as  a  surprise,  thus  gaining  the  advantage  of  moral 
effect.  In  this  attempt  he  will  be  favored  by  preoccupation  of 
the  enemy  already  engaged  with  other  troops,  and  by  undulations 
of  the  terrain  and  other  cover.  At  the  propitious  moment,  or 
when  the  attacking  force  can  no  longer  be  concealed,  it  is  generally 
best  to  go  straight  at  the  nearest  portion  of  the  enemy,  unless  the 
nature  of  the  ground  plainly  indicates  a  different  line  of  advance. 

643.  If  the  enemy  can  neither  be  approached  under  cover  nor 
surprised ,  or  when  it  is  evident  at  an  early  stage  that  the  attempt  to 
do  either  has  failed,  it  will  be  necessary  to  take  up  the  gallop  as  soon 
as  the  enemy's  fire  makes  itself  felt,  in  order  to  diminish  both  the 
efficacy  of  the  fire  and  the  time  of  exposure. 

644.  Simultaneous  charges  against  the  enemy's  front  and  one  or 
both  of  his  flanks,  by  a  rapid  succession  of  lines  pushing  through 
to  the  supports  and  reserves,  tend  to  cause  a  dispersion  of  his  fire 
and  to  increase  the  effect  of  the  attack. 

645.  Preparation  for  the  attack  should  be  made  by  the  fire  of 
the  horse  batteries  and  machine  guns  belonging  to  the  Cavalry, 
and  also  by  artillery  and  infantry  fire  of  neighboring  bodies, 
directed,  first  against  the  objective  of  attack,  and  later  against 
adjoining  forces  of  the  enemy. 

646.  When  the  attack  is*^  delivered  only  against  the  enemy's 
flank,  the  rear  echelons  should  be  struck  at  the  same  time  as  the 
firing  line. 

Rising  ground  toward  the  enemy's  position  diminishes  the  effect 
of  infantry  fire,  which,  moreover,  is  likely  to  be  less  steady  as  the 
attacking  force  closes  upon  them. 

If  choi'ce  be  permitted,  Cavalry  should  charge  the  enemy's  right 
flank  in  preference  to  the  left. 

647.  The  charge  against  Infantry  is  usually  made  in  successive 
lines,  following  each  other  at  distances  not  exceeding  200  yards. 


AGAINST  INFANTRY.  88# 

These  lines  are  in  single  rank,  except  that  the  leading  ones  may  be 
of  foragers,  and  they  should  be  supported  by  bodies  in  close  order. 
The  general  effect  of  such  attacks  should  be  that  of  a  rapid  succes- 
sion of  blows,  each  line  taking  advantage  of  results  achieved  by  its 
predecessor.  The  rallies  should  make  use  of  such  cover  as  may  be 
available.  Infantry  in  masses  may  be  charged  by  lines  of  short 
columns.  In  cases  requiring  instant  action  the  Cavalry  charges  in 
whatever  formation  it  finds  itself. 

648.  Against  unshaken  Infantry  a  decided  success  can  be  ob- 
tained only  when  it  is  possible  to  get  near  to  the  enemy  without 
being  discovered  and  to  attack  by  surprise.  It  is  then  more  im- 
porta-nt  to  utilize  the  favorable  moment  at  once,  than  to  attack  in 
perfect  formation  a  little  later. 

649.  Should  Cavalry  be  ordered  to  relieve  the  pressure  against 
its  own  Infantry  or  Artillery  by  immediate  mounted  action,  it  may 
be  forced  to  make  the  attack  without  the  advantage  of  surprise. 
In  such  cases  the  gallop  will  probably  havB  to  be  taken  up  at  greater 
distance  in  order  to  reduce  the  time'  of  exposure  to  fire.  The  com- 
manders concerned  should  be  informed  of  the  intention  to  attack 
so  that  they  may  make  good  use  of  the  respite  afforded  by  the  sacri- 
fices of  the  Cavalry. 

650.  The  extent  to  which  the  enemy's  action  is  diverted  by  the 
danger  of  the  cavalry  attack  and  the  number  of  counter  measures 
he  is  induced  to  take  will  indicate  the  degree  of  relief  afforded  to 
the  other  arms. 

65 1 .  Against  badly  shaken  and  disordered  Infantry  the  mounted 
charge  should  achieve  great  successes.  In  such  cases  it  is  of  de- 
cisive importance  to  attack  at  the  right  moment,  without  delaying 
to  adopt  a  better  formation  or  to  seek  a  more  favorable  direction. 
Effective  fire  of  pursuit  of  our  own  Infantry  or  Artillery  should  not 
be  masked  by  the  cavalry  charge. 

652.  The  fire  of  dismounted  Cavalry  is  assumed  to  be  equivalent 
to  that  of  a  numerically  equal  force  of  Infantry.  On  account  of  the 
led  horses  dismounted  Cavalry  is  very  sensitive  in  regard  to  its 
flanks  and  will  therefore  seek  to  take  advantage  of  natural  or  artifi- 
cial obstacles  for  protection.  In  the  attack  on  dismounted  Cavalry 
the  location  of  the  enemy's  led  horses  should  therefore  be  ascer- 
tained as  vsoon  as  possible  and  the  attempt  made  to  capture  them 
after  defeating  and  driving  off  the  mounted  reserve. 


240  AGAINST   ARTILLERY. 

(c)  AGAINST   ARTILLERY. 

663.  The  conditions  for  an  attack  on  Artillery  are  favorable: 
When  it  can  be  surprised,  caught  in  motion  or  ready  to  move,  or 
while  in  the  act  of  limbering  or  unlimbering;  and  when  it  is  without 
support,  or  when  its  infantry  supports  have  exhausted  their  ammu- 
nition. 

654.  With  an  open  held  of  fire.  Artillery  in  position  is  very 
strong  in  front;  it  is  weak  in  the  flanks — less  so  in  rear.  Whenever 
possible,  therefore,  the  attack  should  be  delivered  against  a  flank. 

When  undulating  ground  is  available  for  the  approach,  when  the 
guns  are  behind  cover  and  can  use  indirect  fire  only,  and  when  the 
supply  of  ammunition  is  low,  Artillery  can  be  charged  in  front 
without  too  serious  loss,  by  advancing  at  rapid  gaits  and  in  open 
formations. 

In  an  attack  on  batteries  placed  in  an  isolated  position  or  on  a 
flank  it  will  generally  be  advantageous  to  make  a  secondary  frontal 
attack,  or  at  least  a  demonstration  with  lines  of  foragers,  to  draw 
the  enemy's  fire  and  divert  his  attention  from  the  main  attack 
against  a  flank. 

656.  In  a  cavalry  battle,  when  the  commander  deems  it  neces- 
sary to  divert  the  enemy's  artillery  fire  from  his  main  body  and 
thinks  the  batteries  can  be  reached,  he  will  designate  one  or  more 
squadrons  for  this  purpose;  they  will  charge  as  foragers  in  the 
quickest  and  most  direct  way. 

656.  When  the  enemy's  artillery  forms  part  of  the  general  line 
of  battle,  it  will  usually  be  impossible  to  charge  it  in  flank.  The 
formation  for  attack  should  then  be  in  a  succession  of  lines  separated 
by  distances  exceeding  the  depth  of  a  shrapnel  burst  (200  yards). 
The  first  line  or  first  two  lines  will  be  deployed  as  foragers;  suc- 
ceeding lines  will  be  in  single  rank  as  supports.  These  are  followed 
by  a  reserve  in  line  or  echelon  of  columns.  One  object  of  the  for- 
mation in  depth  is  to  prevent  the  hostile  artillery  from  embracing 
the  entire  attacking  force  with  one  elevation  of  fire. 

657.  The  foragers  attack  the  cannoneers  and  teams;  the  sup- 
ports charge  the  enemy's  supports  and  secure  the  battery.  The 
reserve  follows  and  is  held  in  hand  to  meet  hostile  cavalry  or  other 
troops  that  may  attempt  to  recover  the  guns. 

658.  The  attack  on  Artillery  should  usually  be  made  on  broad 
fronts,  not  only  covering  the  batteries  and  extending  beyond  their 
flanks,  but  engaging  adjoining  troops  so  as  to  prevent  a  converging 
fire  on  tlie  charging  lines.    Under  modern  conditions  the  advance 


AGAINST  MACHINE  GTTNS.  SJit 

will  be  started  at  such  long  distance  that  it  will  be  impossible  to 
recognize  and  point  out  separate  objects  in  the  defender's  line; 
and,  once  under  serious  fire,  it  is  too  late  to  give  instructions  and 
effect  changes  of  direction.  The  rapid  advance  and  charge  are 
therefore  usually  made  straight  at  the  enemy's  position;  the  gaits 
must  be  controlled  so  as  not  to  exhaust  the' horses  in  arriving  at 
the  objective.  The  reserve  must  close  up  as  the  crisis  approaches 
in  order  to  meet  eventualities  and  take  advantage  of  opportunities. 

659.  If  the  cannoneers  take  shelter  under  their  carriages  or  else- 
where and  defend  themselves  with  small  arms,  the  troopers  use 
their  pistols  and  must  not  hesitate  to  jump  off  their  horses  and 
attack  with  the  rifle,  provided  there  is  no  immediate  danger  of 
counter  attack  by  the  enemy's  Cavalry. 

660.  After  capturing  the  batteries  an  effort  should  be  made  to 
carry  off  the  guns  and  caissons.  If  this  be  not  possible  for  lack  of 
time,  the  guns  should  be  disabled  and  the  horses  killed,  or  the 
traces  cut. 

To  disable  a  field  gun,  open  the  breechblock  and  then  break  it 
with  a  heavy  hammer,  or  explode  a  charge  of  guncotton  or  dyna- 
mite in  the  breech  with  the  block  partly  closed,  or  fire  a  shotted 
gun  with  its  muzzle  against  the  chase  of  another.  Guns  of  the 
Krupp  system  may  be  temporarily  disabled  by  carrying  off  the 
breechblock  or  breaking  the  handle. 

661.  If  the  cavalry  attack  succeeds  in  causing  a  temporary  sus- 
pension of  hostile  artillery  fire,  or  its  deviation  from  other  objec- 
tives, this  fact  alone  may  suffice  to  exercise  a  far-reaching  influence 
on  the  outcome  of  the  battle. 

(d)  AGAINST   MACHINE   GUNS. 

662.  Machine  guns  will  generally  be  used  in  groups  of  two  or 
four  guns,  seldom  in  larger  bodies. 

Artillery  is  the  most  powerful  weapon  against  machine  guns, 
when  they  can  be  definitely  located. 

The  mounted  attack  against  machine  guns  is  best  made  by  for- 
agers charging  from  various  directions  at  the  same  time. 

663.  When  in  a  cavalry  engagement  it  is  a  question  of  prevent- 
ing the  destructive  action  of  machine  guns  against  our  cavalry 
masses,  relatively  small  bodies— several  platoons  or  at  most  squad- 
rons—are detached  to  occupy  the  attention  of  the  machine  guns 
and  draw  their  fire.  They  disperse  as  foragers  on  a  wide  front  and 
attack  from  various  directions  as  soon  as  possible. 

34396"— 14 16 


248  DISMOUNTED  COMBAT. 

Dismounted  Combat. 
(See  also  F.  S.  R.,  ''Combat.") 

664.  Dismounted  action,  offensive  or  defensive,  is  resorted  to 
whenever  the  tactical  situation  or  the  nature  of  the  terrain  prevents 
the  Cavalry  from  accomplishing  its  assigned  mission  by  mounted 
combat. 

Careful  instruction  and  training  are  necessary  to  inspire  leaders 
and  troops  with  confidence  in  the  rifle. 

Half-hearted  measures  seldom  attain  success  in  war;  lack  of  de- 
termination is  a  fruitful  source  of  defeat. 

The  object  of  a  combat  will  be  attained  with  less  difficulty  if  the 
enemy  can  be  deceived  as  to  the  nature  and  strength  of  the  troops 
engaged. 

665.  The  mobility  of  Cavalry  enables  it  to  attack  suddenly  from 
various  directions  and  to  effect  a  rapid  deployment  and  develop- 
ment of  fire.  Consequently  it  is  able  to  deal  blows  at  the  enemy's 
flank  and  rear  before  he  has  time  to  meet  them,  or  can  overwhelm 
the  head  of  his  column  with  fire  before  he  can  make  adequate  de- 
ployment. 

Rapidity  of  action  and  surprise  are,  therefore,  important  factors 
in  dismounted  action.  When  a  surprise  has  been  effected  the  Cav- 
alry should  develop  its  full  strength  without  delay. 

666.  Flank  protection  is  of  special  importance;  it  can  usually 
be  obtained  by  occupying  strong  positions  on  the  flanks,  by  taking 
advantage  of  natural  or  artificial  obstacles,  and  by  far-reacjtiing  use 
of  patrols. 

667.  The  nurnber  of  rifles  to  be  placed  in  the  firing  line  depends 
on  tactical  considerations;  the  proportion  of  troops  to  be  dis- 
mounted, whether  three-fourths,  or  practically  all,  is  controlled  by 
the  degree  of  mobilitv  desired  for  the  led  horses,  the  nature  and 
extent  of  cover  available  for  them,  and  in  some  cases  on  the  degree 
of  promptness  of  action  demanded. 

668.  The  question  whether  it  is  more  important  to  develop  a 
firing  line  of  maximum  strength  than  to  retain  the  ability  to  resume 
mounted  action  quickly,  must  be  decided  according  to  the  circum- 
stances of  each  case. 

669.  Dismounted  combat,  whether  offensive  or  defensive, 
should  whenever  possible,  be  preceded  by  a  personal  reconnais- 
sance made  by  the  commander. 


THE  ATTACK.  248 

670.  The  following  are  examples  of  situations  in  which  dis- 
mounted action  may  be  required: 

(a)  In  an  inclosed,  wooded,  rough,  marshy,  or  inundated  country, 
where  mounted  action  is  impracticable;  for  example,  villages, 
bridges,  defiles,  ravines,  hedges,  wire  and  other  fences,  field  works, 
entanglements,  abattis,  rice  fields,  etc.  Also  in  level  and  open 
country,  swept  for  long  distances  by  effective  fire  of  the  enemy. 

(b)  To  force  a  position  and  clear  the  way  for  further  advance;  to 
seize  a  point  of  support,  or  to  occupy  a  defile  under  circumstances 
not  permitting  delay. 

(c)  To  attack  a  line  of  outposts  for  reconnaissance  or  to  prepare  the 
way  for  penetration  by  a  mounted  force. 

(d)  In  a  pursuit,  to  occupy  positions  on  the  enemy's  line  of 
retreat. 

(e)  Participation  in  a  general  engagement,  especially  in  connec- 
tion with  turning  movements. 

(/)  To  seize  and  defend  important  positions  at  a  distance  from 
the  main  body  of  the  Army  until  the  arrival  of  Infantry.^ 

(g)  To  hold  positions  for  flank  protection,  or  as  a  pivot  of  ma- 
neuver for  a  mounted  attack. 

(h)  As  support  to  horse  artillery  and  machine  guns. 

(i)  To  replace  Infantry  in  position  prior  to  a  withdrawal. 

(j)  To  defend  a  line  against  enterprises  of  the  enemy;  defense  of 
villages,  camps,  and  cantonments. 

(k)  To  reenforce  hard-pressed  portions  of  the  line  of  battle,  or  to 
check  a  turning  movement. 

(l)  During  a  retreat  to  delay  the  enemy  by  compelling  him  to 
leave  the  road,  deploy  across  country,  and  make  a  formal  attack. 

(m)  When  Cavalry  is  greatly  outnumbered  by  hostile  Cavalry 
and  the  country  is  suitable  for  dismounted  action. 

THE   ATTACK. 

671.  Cavalry  will  often  be  forced  to  make  a  dismounted  attack 
to  open  a  passage  for  further  mounted  advance.  Enterprises  against 
the  enemy's  communications,  destruction  of  railroads,  depots, 
magazines,  etc.,  will  frequently  call  for  fighting  on  foot. 

The  attack  should  be  pushed  as  rapidly  as  possible  for  the  double 
purpose  of  arriving  at  a  decision  before  the  enemy's  reserves  can  get 
into  action  and  of  recovering  mobility  with  the  least  practicable 
delay. 


244  THE  ATTACK. 

672.  When  the  strength  of  the  enemy  is  known,  the  force  desig- 
nated for  the  principal  attack  should  ordinarily  be  strong  enough 
from  the  start  to  carry  the  position.  Before  a  shot  is  fired  the  com- 
mander should  know  what  he  wants  to  accomplish  and  inform  his 
subordinates  accordingly.  Such  movements  as  he  may  contemplate 
should  be  embodied  in  his  plan  of  action. 

673.  As  long  as  the  situation  has  not  been  cleared  up,  the  bulk 
of  the  forces  must  be  held  back  to  await  developments.  But,  when 
the  time  for  the  decisive  attack  has  come,  it  would  be  a  serious 
error  to  launch  an  inadequate  force,  with  the  idea  of  reenforcing  it 
gradually. 

674.  As  a  general  rule  relatively  weak  forces,  widely  extended, 
are  deployed  against  the  enemy's  front,  the  principal  part  being 
kept  in  hand  for  attack  and  envelopment  of  a  flank,  or,  when  the 
flanks  are  strongly  protected,  for  a  concentrated  effort  against  a 
weak  point  in  his  line.  Deployment  on  a  wide  front  tends  to  cause 
dispersion  of  the  enemy's  fire  while  it  favors  a  convergence  of  fire 
for  the  attack  and  permits  its  concentration  on  the  principal  objec- 
tive. To  a  considerable  extent  it  also  serves  to  protect  the  led 
horses.  An  attempt  to  turn  both  flanks  is  warranted  only  in  case 
of  decided  numerical  superiority. 

675.  The  cavalry  commander  should  not  seek  a  fight  to  a  deci- 
sion unless  he  is  sure  of  superiority.  Neither  will  he  make  a 
frontal  attack  across  a  field  of  fire  selected  by  the  enemy,  if  it  can 
be  avoided.  By  virtue  of  its  mobility  Cavalry  can  select  and  arrive 
at  ground  favorable  for  the  attack,  and  can  start  and  develop  turn- 
ing movements  faster  than  an  enemy  on  foot  can  meet  them. 

676.  Except  when  assigned  as  reserve,  brigades  in  a  division, 
regiments  in  a  brigade,  and  squadrons  in  a  regiment  are  deployed 
side  by  side.  They  provide  their  own  supports  and  endeavor  by 
this  method  to  restrict  the  mixing  of  units.  Articulation  in  depth 
will  vary  with  the  size  of  the  command,  the  extent  of  the  enemy's 
position,  the  depth  of  the  fire-swept  zone  and  the  amount  of  resist- 
ance expected. 

677.  A  continuous  firing  line  is  not  generally  desirable.  In 
many  cases  it  will  be  better  to  operate  in  groups,  in  order  to  avoid 
ground  affording  no  cover. 

678.  In  special  cases  a  dismounted  reserve  will  be  necessary, 
in  order  to  have  a  force  available  when,  in  the  course  of  the  engage- 
ment, the  enemy's  weakness  is  developed,  or  the  decisive  point 
for  attack  is  recognized. 


THE  ATTACK.  245 

679.  Tlie  density  of  the  whole  dismounted  deployment  for  the 
main  attack  will  vary  according  to  circumstances;  for  a  regiment 
it  should  ordinarily  be  not  less  than  two  men  per  yard  of  front. 
After  allowing  for  a  mounted  reserve,  a  regiment  dismounting 
three-fourths  of  its  troopers  could  provide  this  density  for  a  line 
equal  to  about  one-half  of  its  front  mounted. 

A  mounted  reserve  will  be  designated  in  all  cases. 

680.  Horse  Artillery  and  machine  guns  are  placed  in  positions 
from  which  they  can  combine  their  fire  with  that  of  the  firing  line, 
preferably  with  oblique  or  flanking  effect. 

THE  COURSE  OF  THE  ATTACK. 

681.  The  preliminary  measures  of  the  preparatory  stage  are  often 
of  decisive  importance. 

The  commander,  accompanied  by  subordinate  leaders  and  staff 
officers,  reconnoiters  the  enemy's  position  and  the  adjacent  ground ; 
the  troops  in  the  meantine  remain  under  cover.  Having  arrived 
at  a  decision  as  to  the  objective  and  the  direction  of  attack,  the 
commander  leads  his  troops  to  the  position  for  deployment.  In  the 
mean  time  a  more  detailed  reconnaissance  of  the  enemy's  position 
is  made  by  subordinates.  As  far  as  practicable,  the  movements  in 
the  deployment  itself  should  still  be  made  mounted. 

682.  The  decision  to  attack  should  be  followed  promptly  by 
the  commander's  attack  order,  before  conditions  have  time  to 
change. 

This  order  designates  the  troops  for  the  secondary  attack,  the 
main  attack,  and  a  dismounted  reserve.  It  gives  instructions  for 
all  parts  and  arms  of  the  command  and  endeavors  to  secure  their 
cooperation  in  the  decisive  action. 

Ammunition  supply,  the  size  of  the  mounted  reserve,  and  the 
position  of  the  led  horses  are  prescribed  when  necessary.  Troopers 
going  into  dismounted  action  should  carry  not  less  than  150  rifle 
cartridges  on  the  person. 

683.  The  Horse  Artillery  ordinarily  opens  the  fight,  facilitates 
the  advance  of  the  skirmish  lines,  and  helps  to  develop  the  situ- 
ation. The  time  for  the  decisive  attack,  however,  must  not  be  made 
to  depend  on  the  results  of  artillery  fire  alone. 

684.  The  mounted  reserve  not  only  takes  charge  of  the  pro- 
tection of  the  led  horses,  but  continues  reconnaissance  during 
the  engagement.    When  practicable  it  attacks  the  enemy's  posi- 


246  THE  ATTACK. 

tion  in  flank.  If  the  combat  is  against  dismounted  Cavalry,  it 
endeavors  to  defeat  the  mounted  reserve  and  to  capture  the  led 
horses. 

685.  The  attack  consists  in  carrjdng  forward  the  firing  line, 
the  attainment  of  fire  superiority,  and  the  eventual  ejection  of 
the  enemy  from  his  position  by  a  charge. 

686.  The  cavalry  spirit  manifests  itself  in  dismounted  action 
by  an  irresistible  determination  to  advance.  Officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  must,  by  personal  example,  carry  their  men 
forward  from  position  to  position. 

687.  As  the  supply  of  ammunition  is  limited  and  can  not  be 
readily  replenished  during  the  action,  opening  of  fire  by  the  skir- 
mish line  should  be  delayed  as  long  as  possible.  Even  in  fairly  open 
country  the  fire  attack  should  not  begin  before  mid  range,  if  it 
can  be  avoided. 

688.  Whenever  practicable  the  initial  deployment,  consisting 
of  a  strong  firing  line  with  supports,  will  be  made  within  effective 
range  of  the  enemy's  position.  When  cover  is  lacking  it  will  often 
be  necessary  to  advance  to  the  firing  position  in  a  succession  of 
thin  lines,  or  in  lines  of  squads  in  column  of  files.  The  fire  attack 
is  then  begun  after  the  firing  line  has  filled  up. 

689.  The  commander  of  the  attacking  force  assigns  portions 
of  the  enemy's  position  as  objective  and  designates  the  time  for 
opening  fire.  Squadron  and  platoon  commanders  assume  the 
direction  and  control  of  fire.  When  no  objectives  are  assigned  the 
squadrons  operate  toward  their  own  front.  The  time  for  opening 
fire  may  be  left  to  the  senior  officer  with  the  firing  line.  The  pla- 
toon is  the  liahitual  unit  of  fire. 

690.  Specially  effective  fire  of  Artillery  or  machine  guns,  or 
other  circumstances,  may  permit  the  advance  of  the  entire  line 
from  the  initial  firing  position,  but  as  a  rule,  further  progress  can 
be  effected  only  by  rushes.  Between  the  rushes  a  deliberate  and 
well-aimed  fire  must  be  kept  up. 

691.  The  distance  of  the  supporting  groups  from  the  firing  line 
will  vary  according  to  the  stage  of  the  action  and  the  amount  of 
cover  available.  On  principle  they  are  as  close  to  the  firing  line  as 
practicable,  approacning  it  as  they  are  likely  to  be  needed;  in 
any  event,  they  must  be  at  hand  for  decisive  action. 

692.  The  squadrons  close  in  on  their  centers  as  they  become 
depleted  by  casualties  during  the  advance.  To  keep^  up  the 
strength  of  the  firing  line,  maintain  its  morale,  and  give  it  an  im- 
pulse forward,  considerable  fractions  of  the  support  are  sent  into 


THE  ATTACK  24/f 

gaps  in  the  firing  line,  preferably  under  cover  of  a  heavy  fire  by 
the  troops  engaged.  When  this  method  of  reinforcement  is  im- 
practicable, which  in  battle  will  generally  be  the  case,  the  deployed 
supports  must  mingle  with  and  thicken  the  firing  line.  Even- 
tually the  firing  line  should  contain  as  many  rifles  as  can  be  used 
effectively. 

693.  After  the  firing  line  has  gained  superiority  of  fire  and  has 
worked  up  close  to  the  enemy's  position,  a  charge  may  still  be 
necessary  to  drive  him  out  and  complete  his  defeat. 

The  arrival  of  the  proper  moment  for  the  charge  depends  upon 
so  many  circumstances  that  it  can  not  be  predicted  far  in  advance. 
It  may  be  recognized  by  leaders  in  the  firing  line,  or  by  superiors 
in  rear. 

Before  ordering  a  charge  the  commander  should  see  that  there 
are  enough  troops  on  hand  to  make  it  a  success.  The  charge  is 
iriade  simultaneously  if  possible  by  all  parts  of  the  line.  When 
the  commander  sees  that  some  of  his  troops  are  about  to  charge  he 
should  cause  the  sounding  of  the  call  at  once. 

It  is  preferable  to  make  the  charge  over  a  short  distance  only. 
Troops  arriving  in  the  enemy's  position  badly  blown  are  not  m 
good  condition  for  a  melee  or  for  further  firing. 

694.  If  the  charge  has  been  successful  the  troops  must  advance 
sufficiently  to  be  able  to  fire  upon  the  retreating  enemy.  Horse 
Artillery  and  machine  guns  hasten  to  the  front  for  the  same  purpose. 
The  mounted  reserve  takes  up  the  pursuit. 

696.  As  soon  as  the  position  has  been  captured  the  commander 
will  give  thought  to  remounting  all  the  troops  not  needed  to  hold 
the  position.  The  led  horses  are  brought  up  at  a  rapid  gait,  or  the 
troops  march  back  to  them,  part  at  a  time. 

696.  When  two  opposing  forces  of  Cavalry  come  within  range  of 
each  other,  but  are  separated  by  impassable  obstacles,  such  as 
streams  or  ravines,  or  by  obstacles  delaying  their  movements,  such 
as  wire  fences,  the  force  which  opens  fire  first  will  have  a  decided 
advantage  and  may  compel  a  numerically  stronger  enemy  to  retreat 
to  cover  or  out  of  range. 

697.  Unexpected  appearance  and  simultaneous  opening  of  fire 
by  a  body  of  troops  is  called  a  surprise  by  fire.  Cavalry  commands 
are  well  adapted  to  tliis  kind  of  action,  and  by  making  skillful  use 
of  the  ground  and  taking  advantage  of  their  mobility,  may  inflict 
serious  losses  on,  and  shake  the  morale  of  opposing  forces. 

As  soon  as  the  intended  results  have  been  attained,  the  command 
should  withdraw  rapidly  before  the  enemy  can  develop  a  counter 


248  THE  DEFENSE. 

attack  with  supeiior  forces.  Combat  patrols  must  be  specially 
active  to  insure  ample  warning  of  movements  threatening  tlie 
flanks. 

In  attacks  of  this  kind  it  is  very  desii'abie  to  have  cover  for  the 
led  horses  close  at  hand.  As  many  rifles  as  possible  should  be  put 
into  action  from  the  beginning. 

The  fire  of  Horse  Artillery  and  of  machine  guns  gives  the  maxi- 
mum power  to  surprise  attacks  of  this  nature.  In  some  cases  the 
Cavalry,  mounted  or  dismounted,  is  used  only  for  the  protection 
of  horse  artillery  or  machine  guns  to  enable  them  to  gain  positions 
from  which  to  overwhelm  the  enemy  with  sudden  fure. 

THE    DEFENSE. 

698.  A  position  defended  by  effective  rifle  fire  is  so  strong  in 
front  that  it  can  be  held  by  a  comparatively  small  force.  The 
weakness  of  a  defense  by  dismounted  cavalry  lies  in  the  flanks 
and  in  the  necessity  of  protecting  the  led  horses. 

With  the  ample  supply  of  ammunition  which  must  always  be 
available,  dismounted  troopers  should  be  imbued  with  the  confi- 
dence that  they  are  able  to  cope  with  several  times  their  own  num- 
ber. 

699.  The  first  requirement  of  a  good  position  is  a  clear  field  of 
fire  to  the  front  and  exposed  flanks  for  a  distance  of  about  half  a 
mile.  The  length  of  front  should  be  suited  to  the  size  of  the  com- 
mand, and  the  location  of  the  position  should  be  such  that  the 
enemy  must  attack  or  abandon  his  plans. 

700.  If  a  stubborn  resistance  is  to  be  made,  there  should  be  no 
dead  spaces  for  several  hundred  yards  to  the  front.  Cover  for 
supports  and  reserves  and  good  facilities  for  communication  in 
rear  are  highly  desirable;  impassable  obstacles  on  the  flanks  add 
greatly  to  the  security  of  a  position. 

701.  Places  for  horse  artillery  and  machine  gims  must  also  be 
taken  into  consideration;  the  importance  of  their  role  may  have 
the  controlling  influence  in  the  selection  of  the  position. 

702.  A  continuous  line  is  not  necessary;  defense  by  combat 
groups  will  be  the  rule.  The  best  ground  for  defense  can  thus  be 
selected  and  the  enemy  also  be  deceived  as  to  the  strength  of  the 
forces  confronting  him. 

An  extended  position  is  so  di^dded  into  sections  that  each  has, 
if  practicable,  a  field  of  fire  made  distinct  by  the  terrain.     Unfa- 


THE  DEFENSE.  249 

vorable  and  unimportant  ground  will  ordinarily  cause  gaps  to  exist 
in  the  general  line  of  defense. 

The  commander  assigns  to  subordinates  the  front  to  be  occupied 
by  their  commands.  These,  in  turn,  subdivide  the  front  among 
the  next  lower  units  of  the  firing  line. 

703.  The  density  of  the  deployment — firing  line  and  supports — 
depends  upon  the  number  of  troops  available,  the  severity  of  attack 
expected,  and  many  other  factors.  In  exposed  positions,  the  firing 
line  should  be  as  heavy  as  in  the  attack,  not  less  than  two  men  per 
yard  of  front;  when  the  position  is  intrenched  and  has  a  good  field 
of  fire,  less  strength  may  serve  the  purpose. 

704.  Whether  a  dismounted  reserve  is  to  be  detailed  depends 
upon  the  instructions  and  intentions  of  the  commander;  when  a 
stubborn  resistance  and  possible  counter  attacks  are  contemplated, 
such  a  force  will  be  necessary. 

705 .  The  front  may  be  strengthened  by  machine  guns.  Usually 
machine-gun  platoons  are  well  placed  in  the  protection  of  the  flanks, 
or  in  positions  from  which  they  can  enfilade  the  advancing  enemy. 
It  will  often  be  of  advantage  to  hold  the  machine  guns  in  reserve, 
or  at  least  to  withhold  their  fire  and  not  disclose  their  position  until 
the  enemy's  main  attack  is  under  way. 

708.  The  Horse  Artillery  should  be  placed  in  positions  from 
which  it  can  fire  upon  the  enemy  in  the  early  stages  of  his  advance 
and  deployment,  and  also  cover  the  terrain  well  around  the  flanks. 
While  ordinarily  a  battery  should  not  be  divided,  occasions  may 
arise  where  the  assignment  of  platoons,  or  even  single  pieces,  for 
special  purposes  is  indicated. 

707.  When  time  and  means  are  available  the  position  should 
be  fortified.  This  work  will  usually  be  limited  to  the  simplest 
means,  such  as  demolitions,  obstructions,  and  construction  of  rifle 
pits  or  sections  of  fire  trench.  Buildings  and  walls  heavy  enough 
to  afford  protection  against  rifle  fire  and  shrapnel  may  be  included 
in  the  line  of  defense,  especially  if  they  extend  the  view  and  enlarge 
the  field  of  fire. 

Engineers  may  be  called  upon  to  assist  in  demolitions  and  in 
construction  of  defenses. 

708.  The  most  effective  protection  against  artillery  fire  is  con- 
cealment; every  effort  should  be  made  to  secure  it  and  to  deceive 
the  enemy  as  to  the  location  of  the  main  defenses.  If  possible,  the 
position  should  be  viewed  from  the  direction  of  the  enemy  to  ascer- 
tain whetlier  the  measures  for  invisibility  and  deception  are  effec- 


250  THE  DEFENSE. 

tive.     Ranges  should  be  measured  and  marked  and  troops  made 
familiar  with  the  d  istances. 

709.  Detachments  for  protection  of  the  flanks  are  placed  in 
echelon.  Whether  they  shall  be  mounted  or  dismounted  will 
depend  upon  circumstances  and  the  nature  of  the  ground.  After 
repulse  of  the  enemy  such  detachments  are  available  for  immediate 
assumption  of  the  offensive  and  pursuit. 

710.  The  led  horses  must  be  placed  so  as  not  to  come  under 
effective  tire.  A  fold  in  the  ground  will  shield  them  from  rifle  fire, 
but  concealment,  through  overhead  cover,  is  the  best  protection 
against  discovery  by  aerial  reconnaissance  and  the  curved  hre  of 
artillery. 

711.  When  practicable  the  led  horses  are  united  in  groups  at 
points  conveniently  accessible  by  their  units,  which  should  always 
remain  informed  as  to  their  location.  Distance  from  the  firing  line 
is  also  influenced  by  the  probable  duration  of  the  combat. 

712.  A  mounted  reserve  will  be  necessary  in  most  cases.  Itfl 
duty  is  to  keep  up  reconnaissance,  to  protect  the  flanks,  and  to 
guard  the  led  horses  against  bold  strokes  by  the  enemy. 

The  mounted  reserve  may  also  be  used  to  attack  the  enemy's  led 
horses  and  to  assist  in  the  withdrawal  of  firing  lines,  in  which  case 
it  may  act  mounted  or  dismounted. 

713.  The  supports  are  placed  as  close  to  the  firing  line  as  practi- 
cable and  reenforce  the  latter  as  the  crisis  of  the  attack  approaches. 
When  there  is  no  cover  available,  the  supports  may  be  put  into  the 
firing  line  from  the  start. 

714.  The  dismounted  reserve  should  be  so  posted  as  to  be 
entirely  free  to  act  as  a  whole,  according  to  developments.  It  is 
used  to  protect  the  flanks  against  enveloping  movements,  to  make 
a  counter  attack,  or  to  cover  withdrawal  of  the  firing  line.  As  far 
as  possible  it  should  be  concealed  and  under  cover,  so  that  its  action 
may  be  in  the  nature  of  a  surprise. 

716.  The  commander  controls  the  opening  of  fire. ^  This  may 
take  place  at  longer  range  than  in  the  attack,  especially  if  the  action 
is  intended  for  delay  only . 

If  the  enemy  has  powerful  artillery  it  will  often  be  best  to  with- 
hold fire  until  a  specially  favorable  target  appears.  Vigorous  and 
well-directed  bursts  of  fire  should  then  be  employed.  During  the 
initial  stage  of  the  enemy's  advance  and  before  his  plans  are  devel- 
oped, only  a  small  number  of  troops  need  be  in  the  trenches.  The 
remainder  may  be  kept  under  cover,  if  near  at  hand,  and  sent  to 


BREAKING  OFF  AN  ENGAGEMENT.  261 

their  places  as  needed,  thus  avoiding  premature  disclosure  of  the 
main  position. 

716.  Villages  and  groups  of  buildings  are  defended  from  the  edge 
or  from  positions  beyond  the  edge,  as  determined  by  the  field  of  fure. 

When  troops  are  quartered  in  towns  the  led  horses  must  be  placed 
in  safety  if  possible.  The  principal  entrances  should  be  barricaded 
and  the  edge  of  town  prepared  for  defense. 

717.  P'or  the  defense  of  defiles  and  obstructions  fire  positions 
should  be  chosen  so  as  to  bring  a  specially  effective  fire  to  bear  upon 
them  and  the  surrounding  teiTain,  and  also  upon  distant  approaches. 
The  trenches  should  be  fully  manned  as  soon  as  the  enemy  appears, 
in  order  to  establish  superiority  of  fire  from  the  start. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  defend  a  defile  at  the  end  toward  the 
enemy,  the  horses  should  generally  be  kept  in  rear. 

718.  In  fighting  delaying  actions  all  measures  tending  to  deceive 
the  enemy  are  of  increased  importance.  Suitable  preparations  to 
facilitate  the  movement  of  troops  to  the  rear  and  to  delay  progress 
of  the  enemy  should  be  made  beforehand. 

Breaking  Off  an  Engagement  and  Leaving  a  Position. 

719.  The  diflTiculty  of  breaking  off  an  engagement  or  of  leaving 
a  position  increases  with  the  progress  of  the  action. 

At  long  range  an  attack  ca,n  be  abandoned  without  serious  loss; 
at  mid-range  this  is  only  possible  when  the  ground  is  specially 
favorable.  When  the  attack  has  advanced  close  to  the  enemy  it 
is  generally  best  to  carry  it  through. 

Under  effective  fire  at  close  range  the  defenders  of  a  position 
can  not  withdraw  without  destructive  losses,  unless  protected  by 
cover  or  by  the  fire  of  other  troops  participating  in  the  engagement. 

720.  When  leaving  a  position  is  contemplated,  whether  to 
advance  or  retire,  the  enemy  should  be  kept  in  ignorance  of  this 
purpose  as  long  as  possible.  If  the  firing  has  been  in  bursts,  with 
intervals  of  silence,  the  fact  that  there  is  no  firing  will  not  indicate 
evacuation  of  the  position.  The  movement,  therefore,  should  take 
place  immediately  after  a  burst  of  fire. 

721.  In  withdrawal  from  a  position  the  degree  of  mobility  of  the 
led  horses  and  their  location  are  important.  To  avoid  confusion 
the  retiring  units  may  be  met  by  guides;  the  led  horses  should  be 
placed  so  as  to  be  easily  mounted  and  ready  to  move  to  the  rear. 
The  best  line  of  retreat,  for  speed  and  cover,  should  be  determined 
in  advance  and  obstacles  likely  to  cause  delay  be  removed. 


258  HOESE  ARTILLERY  AND  MACHINE  GUNS. 

722.  Part  by  part  withdrawal  from  a  defensive  position,  under 
cover  of  bursts  of  fire  from  the  parts  remaining,  is  often  advisable. 
The  troops  at  the  greatest  distance  from  their  horses,  and  those 
having  the  least  cover  in  their  rear,  should  be  among  the  first  to  be 
relieved,  while  those  with  horses  close  at  hand  and  having  cover 
immediately  available,  should  hold  on  to  the  last. 

723.  Troopers  should  be  able  to  remount  and  gallop  out  of  range 
while  a  foot  soldier  passes  over  300  yards  of  fairly  good  ground. 
When  the  ground  in  front  of  the  position  is  heavy,  or  when  obstacles 
delay  the  enemy  under  fire,  even  greater  proximity  of  approach 
than  300  yards  may  be  permitted,  provided  the  ground  in  rear  of 
the  position  affords  good  cover,  continuous  within  effective  rifle 
range. 

724.  When  a  retreat  becomes  unavoidable  the  horse  artillery 
and  machine  guns  must  keep  up  their  fire  on  the  advancing  bodies 
of  the  enemy  as  long  as  possible,  even  at  the  risk  of  capture. 

725.  Attacks  of  the  mounted  reserve  against  the  flanks  of  the 
pursuing  enemy,  whether  made  mounted  or  dismounted,  will  mate- 
rially facilitate  the  retreat. 

726.  As  the  troops  return  to  their  horses  they  remount  at  once 
and  ride  at  rapid  gaits  beyond  reach  of  the  enemy's  fire.  Horses 
left  without  riders  are  led  along. 

The  direction  of  retreat  and  the  formation  and  gaits  of  the  troops 
are  governed  by  the  force  of  circumstances  and  previous  instruc- 
tions, which  may  also  indicate  a  place  of  assembly. 

727.  If  defensive  combat  is  to  be  continued  in  retreat  with  a 
view  to  delaying  the  enemy,  the  commander  must  keep  his  troops 
well  in  hand  and  place  them  in  a  succession  of  defensive  positions 
affording  mutual  support,  and  which  the  enemy  is  compelled  to 
attack  or  turn.     See  also  "Rear  Guard  in  Action,"  F.  S.  R. 

Horse  Artillery  and  Machine  Guns. 

728.  Horse  artillery  and  machine  guns  add  greatly  to  the  power 
of  cavalry,  both  in  attack  and  defense. 

All  cavalry  officers  should  possess  a  general  knowledge  of  the 
powers  and  limitations  of  these  weapons  in  order  that  the  maximum 
benefit  may  be  derived  from  their  tactical  association  with  cavalry 
commands. 

729.  In  combined  action  against  hostile  mounted  troops  fire 
will  mostly  be  furnished  by  horse  artillery  and  machine  guns.  On 
the  defensive,  tliey  will  greatly  strengthen  a  position;  in  delaying 


HORSE  ARTILLERY  AND  MACHINE  GXTNS.  263 

actions  they  can  force  an  early  deployment.  They  are  able  to 
disturb  the  march  of  columns  of  all  arms  at  loni,^  range  and  to  drive 
the  enemy  off  his  line  of  advance.  In  a  surprise  by  fire  they  play 
a  leading  part,  and  they  assist  reconnaissance  in  causing  the  enemy 
to  show  his  forces.  By  their  fire  they  may  break  up  resistance  at 
defiles  and  in  occupied  positions,  thus  saving  the  cavalry  a  dis- 
mounted combat. 

730.  On  the  march  horse  artillery  will  usually  be  near  the  head 
of  the  main  body;  across  country,  it  will  hold  itself  near  a  flank 
and  approximately  abreast  of  the  main  body.  Whenever  possible 
it  should  be  kept  on  a  road. 

While  ordinarily  horse  artillery  is  not  attached  to  the  advance 
guard,  one  or  more  batteries  should  be  used  freely  for  reinforcement 
of  the  advance  guard  in  case  of  a  check  by  hostile  troops;  and,  in 
anticipation  of  such  use,  some  horse  artillery  may  temporarily 
follow  the  reserve  of  the  advance  guard. 

Machine  guns  remain  with  their  regiments,  unless  brigaded  or 
otherwise  assigned  according  to  the  principles  governing  the 
assignment  of  horse  artillery. 

731.  In  combining  shock  and  fire  action  the  attacks  must  be 
correctly  timed  and  must  not  interfere  with  each  other.  To  fulfill 
the  first  of  these  conditions  it  may  be  necessary  for  horse  artillery 
and  machine  guns  to  push  boldly  to  the  front  so  as  to  get  into  action 
at  the  most  suitable  time;  while  to  fulfill  the  second  there  must 
be  sufficient  lateral  separation  so  that  up  to  the  moment  of  collision 
the  fire  of  the  guns  will  not  be  masked. 

732.  The  chiefs  of  horse  artillery  and  macliine  guns  must  act 
on  their  own  initiative  and  be  ready  to  seize  all  opportunuties 
for  ei^ective  action  against  the  enemy,  in  accordance  with  the 
general  instructions  of  the  cavalry  commander.  The/  remain  with 
him  until  their  commands  are  assigned  to  a  definite  mission,  and 
and  later  on  maintain  communication.  The  cavalry  commander, 
for  his  part,  should  keep  them  informed  as  to  his  plans  and  inten- 
tions. 

733.  The  cavalry  leader  indicates  the  time  for  the  first  deploy- 
ment and  the  approximate  position  for  horse  artillery  and  machine 
guns  to  suit  his  tactical  plan,  but  the  exact  places  and  the  time 
for  opening  fire  he  leaves  to  the  judgment  of  the  commanders  of 
those  units. 

734.  On  principle,  fire  should  be  directed  against  such  parts 
of  the  enemy's  forces  as  have  direct  influence  on  the  outcome  of  the 
engagement.     A   duel   with  hostile   artillery   does    not  prondse 


254  HORSE  ARTILLERY  AND  MACHINE  GUNS. 

immediately  decisive  results.  However,  when  the  enemy's 
artillery  exposes  itself,  rapid  and  effective  advantage  may  be 
taken  of  the  circumstance;  it  may  also  be  necessary  to  lire  on  the 
enemy's  artillery  to  withdraw  his  fire  from  our  own  Cavalry. 

736.  During  a  cavalr\  battle  the  horse  artillery  will  concentrate 
a  rapid  and  well-aimed  fire  against  that  portion  of  the  enemy's 
cavalry  against  which  the  decisive  charge  is  about  to  be  delivered 
in  order  that  it  may  be  thrown  into  confusion.  As  soon  as  such 
fire  becomes  maskea  by  the  cavalry  advance,  the  guns  should  be 
directed  against  the  enemy's  supports  and  reserves,  if  any  are 
coming  up,  or  against  his  artillery. 

736.  When  mounted  cavalry  attacks  foot  troops  or  artillery, 
the  leader  will  endeavor  to  charge  them  in  flank.  On  such  occa- 
sions rapid  and  effective  fire  of  horse  artillery  should  hold  the 
enemy  in  place  and  prevent  him  from  changing  position  to  face 
the  advancing  Cavalry. 

737.  Assembly  of  the  batteries  facilitates  fire  leading.  Separate 
positions  for  machine-gun  platoons  are  not  generally  advisable. 
When  there  are  s  veral  lines  of  fire  the  movements  of  the  Cavalry 
are  hampered,  or  the  latter  will  mask  the  fire  of  some  of  the  positions. 
However,  the  nature  of  the  country,  or  circumstances  of  the  engage- 
ment, may  make  separate  positions  necessary. 

738.  The  protection  of  the  Artillery  falls  to  the  nearest  troops; 
they  detail  an  escort  when  necessary,  or  upon  request  of  the  artil- 
lery commander.  The  escort  commander  exercises  his  judgment 
as  to  the  tactical  handling  of  his  command,  but  must  act  in  concert 
with  the  artillery  commander  and  is  responsible  for  the  safety 
of  the  batteries.  Machine  guns  do  not  require  an  escort  except 
in  very  close  country.  The  cavalry  escort  may  act  dismounted. 
The  Artillery  protects  itself  against  surprise  by  using  its  own 
patrols. 

739.  Except  in  urgent  cases  the  Artillery  going  into  position  will 
take  advantage  of  cover.  In  order  to  follow  the  rapidly  changing 
aspects  of  a  cavalry  battle  the  Artillery  must  usually  be  in  positions 
enabling  it  to  use  direct  lading.  To  escape  the  destructive  fire 
of  hostile  artillery  already  in  position,  or  to  act  in  combination 
with  dismounted  Cavalry,  positions  under  cover  may  be  advisable. 

740.  In  battle  the  batteries  of  horse  artillery  remain  with  their 
cavalry  commands,  since  they  are  indispensable  during  and  after 
the  action.  In  a  general  engagement,  however,  a  large  part  of  the 
horse  artiller>^  can  frequently  be  used  to  advantage  in  rendering 


HORSE  ARTHIERY  and  machine  guns.  255 

temporar>^  assistance  to  other  troops;  it  must  always  remain  at 
the  ultimate  disposition  of  the  cavalry  commander. 

741.  In  a  cavalry  battle  horse  artillery  and  machine  guns  at 
first  support  the  deplovment  and  then  the  attack. 

A  position  toward  a  flank,  or  for  machine  guns,  forward  and  to  a 
flank,  permits  fire  to  be  continued  until  just  before  the  shock,  and 
also  to  be  directed  against  the  enemy's  flanking  movements.  If 
the  position  taken  is  on  high  ground,  firing  over  the  heads  of  troops 
can  be  continued  for  a  longer  time.  There  should  be  no  hesitation 
about  such  fire  within  proper  limits,  and  the  troops  should  ap- 
preciate the  necessity  therefor.  The  time  required  to  make  the 
necessary  lateral  movements  may  cause  the  artillery  and  machine 
guns  to  miss  their  opportunity,  besides  cutting  down  the  length 
of  time  in  action.  In  many  cases  it  will  therefore  be  of  advantage 
for  the  horse  artillery  and' machine  guns  to  go  into  position  near 
the  line  of  advance,  and  for  the  cavalry  command  to  maneuver 
toward  a  flank.  The  horse  artillery  with  its  escort— and  with 
frequently  all  or  part  of  the  machine  guns— thus  constitutes  a  pivot 
of  maneuver  from  which,  by  far-reaching  fire,  it  serves  to  facihtate 
and  protect  the  deployment  of  our  masses  of  cavalry,  and  also  to 
interfere  with  the  enemy's  deployment  and  to  break  up  his  for- 
mations at  the  decisive  point  of  attack. 

742.  Positions  secure  against  direct  attack  are  desirable,  but 
artillery  and  machine  guns  will  often  be  forced  to  go  into  imme- 
diate action  without  regard  to  cover  and  other  advantages. 

743.  If  the  attack  succeeds,  the  horse  artillery  and  machine  guns 
act  on  their  own  initiative  and,  if  necessary,  advance  rapidly  to 
positions  from  which  the^r  can  pursue  the  enemy  with  fire  and  pre- 
vent him  from  rallving  his  units  for  renewed  resistance. 

744.  Should  the  attack  fail,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  Artillery  and 
machine  guns  to  check  the  enemy's  pursuit  and  cover  the  with- 
drawal and  re-f ormins:  of  the  Cavalry .  In  carrying  out  this  function 
the  Artillery  must  not  hesitate  to  risk  losing  their  guns.  The  Cav- 
alry in  falling  back  should  be  careful  not  to  mask  the  fire  of  their 

746.  When  dismounted  action  of  cavalry  is  contemplated, 
whether  in  attack  or  defense,  the  use  to  be  made  of  horse  artilleiy 
and  machine  guns  is  always  am.ong  the  first  things  to  be  considered. 

To  make  a  dismounted  attack  the  cavalry  commander  will 
usually  take  advantage  of  his  mobility  to  move  against  the  enemy  s 
flank  and  to  gain  positions  for  enfilade  fire.    To  meet  these  opera- 


256  THE  PXTRSTTIT. 

tions  the  enemy  must  expose  himself  and  he  then  becomes  a 
profitable  target  for  artillery  fire. 

During  a  disnaounted  attack  an  overwhelming  artillery  fire  should 
be  directed  against  that  part  of  the  enemy's  position  which  is  to  be 
charged . 

When  the  position  has  been  captured.  Artillery  and  machine  guns 
advance  rapidly  to  positions  from  which  they  can  fire  effectively 
on  the  retreating  enemy. 

746.  In  a  defense  by  dismounted  cavalry  the  cavalry  comman- 
der will  in  most  cases  order  the  opening  of  fire;  to  fire  prematurely 
would  betray  the  position  to  the  enemy. 

If  the  defense  fails,  Artillerj^  and  machine  guns  must  endeavor 
to  cover  the  retreat  by  directing  their  fire  against  the  pursuers, 
without  regard  to  the  enemy's  artillery  fire. 

747.  In  a  retreat,  the  horse  artillery  and  machine  guns  will, 
from  successive  positions  or  ''pivots  of  maneuver,"  support  the 
fire  of  the  dismounted  defense,  or  cover  the  formation  and  assist 
the  charge  of  the  mounted  forces  in  counter  attacks. 

Note. — For  details  of  the  tactical  employment  of  machine  guns, 
see  Cavalry  Machine-Gun  Regulations. 

The  Pursuit. 

748.  After  a  successful  battle  relentless  pursuit  is  imperative 
in  order  to  gather  the  fruits  of  victory.  It  should  be  continued 
with  the  utmost  energy  until  complete  disintegration  of  the  enemy's 
forces  is  accomplished. 

749.  The  pursuit  is  the  special  duty  of  the  Cavalry.  The  vigor 
and  persistence  of  its  efforts  will  depend  to  a  large  extent  upon 
the  condition  of  the  horses,  a  fact  to  be  remembered  by  Army  and 
cavalry  commanders  during  the  earlier  stages  of  the  action. 

750.  As  a  general  engagement  approaches  conclusion,  all  bodies 
of  cavalry,  large  and  small — including  divisional  cavalry — ^hasten 
toward  the  front  so  as  to  be  immediately  available  for  prospective 
duties.  After  a  victory  the  mass  of  the  Army  can  dispense  with 
the  services  of  the  Cavalry  temporarily. 

751.  Wlien  the  ground  is  so  difficult  that  large  bodies  of  cav- 
alry can  not  pursue  as  a  whole,  the  division  commanders  mil  indi- 
cate the  general  direction  of  advance  and  leave  it  to  brigade  and 
regimental  commanders  to  gain  contact  with  the  enemy.  On  such 
occasions  the  rule  is  to  attack  whenever  possible,  and  it  is  better 
to  charge  in  small  units  than  to  do  nothing.    The  constant  effort 


THE  RETREAT.  257 

of  all  commanders  of  Cavalry  must  be  to  remain  at  the  enemy's 
heels  and  keep  him  moving. 

762.  The  direct  pursuit  is  initiated  by  the  troops  engaged  in 
the  battle.  As  the  enemy  begins  to  give  way  the  cavalry  masse? 
available  near  the  flanks  of  the  Army  will  advance  in  lines  parallel 
to  the  direction  of  retreat.  Their "  endeavor  will  be  to  pass  the 
enemy's  masses  or  retreating  columns,  to  fire  into  or  charge  them 
in  flank  again  and  again,  to  force  them  off  their  lines  of  retreat,  to 
anticipate  them  at  defiles  and  bar  their  progress,  to  destroy  bridges, 
to  break  up  their  trains — in  short,  to  attack  whenever  a  conditioii 
of  disorder  offers  a  chance  of  success.  By  taking  up  a  position 
across  the  enemy's  line  of  retreat,  the  Cavalry,  if  in  sufficient  force, 
may  bring  the  enemy  to  a  halt  and  thus  gain  time  for  the  pursuing 
Infantry  to  come  within  striking  distance. 

753.  \Wenever  portions  of  the  enemy  endeavor  to  hold  their 
ground  they  must  be  outflanked  repeatedly.  This  constant  over- 
lapping must  be  kept  up  day  and  night,  regardless  of  the  fatigue 
of  men  and  horses.  A  pursuit  thus  carried  to  the  utmost  may  save 
the  Army  another  battle  and  terminate  the  whole  campaign. 

764.  A  direct  pursuit  from  the  battle  front  usually  can  not  be 
undertaken  by  cavalry  until  the  pursuit  by  fire  has  ceased.  Be- 
yond the  reach  of  infantry  fire  of  pursuit,  the  Cavalry  must  seek  to 
prevent  the  enemy  from  re-forming  his  organizations  and  starting 
them  on  the  roads  in  columns  of  route.  If  such  columns  have 
already  been  formed,  the  Cavalry  will  conduct  a  parallel  pursuit  as 
previously  ex])lained. 

755.  The  commander-in-chief  should  be  kept  informed  c[  the 
progre.ss  of  the  pursuit  and  the  location  and  condition  of  the  enemy's 
forces  by  messages  from  the  cavalry  commander. 

The  Retreat. 

756.  AMien  the  outcome  of  a  battle  has  been  unfavorable  and  a 
withdrawal  is  necessary,  it  is  the  duty  of  Ca^•alry  to  delay  the  enemy 
by  energetic  action — to  the  extent  of  self-sacrifice  if  necessary — 
and  thus  facilitate  the  retrograde  movements  of  the  other  arms.  A 
small  gain  of  time  is  of  great  importance  to  troops  temporarily  in 
disorder  and  may  serve  to  avert  complete  disaster. 

757.  The  commander  will  determine  in  accordance  with  the 
features  of  the  ground  and  the  urgency  of  the  situation  whether 
delay  can  best  be  effected  by  occupation  of  successive  positions  or 
by  flanking  the  enemy's  advance,  and  whether  mounted  action,  a 

348^"— 14 — 11 


258  THE  CAVALRY  DIVISION. 

combination  of  shock  and  fire  action,  or  fire  action  alone  promises 
to  be  most  effective. 

768.  The  presentation  of  a  bold  front  and  the  assumption  of  a 
vigorous  offensive  by  the  Cavalry  of  the  retreating  troops  may 
deceive  the  enemy  as  to  the  extent  of  the  reverses  suffered  and  can 
not  fail  to  impress  him  with  the  power  of  resistance  still  available. 

769.  The  principal  object  is  to  delay  the  general  advance  of  the 
enemy's  forces.  Frequent  and  bold  attacks  and  deception  as  to 
the  nature  of  the  troops  confronting  him  will  be  effective  means  to 
this  end.  If  the  pursuers  can  be  surprised  by  fire  or  caught  in 
ambush,  it  will  render  them  cautious,  which  means  gain  of  time. 

760.  Special  precautions  should  always  be  taken  to  look  out  for 
and  secui'e  the  flanks  and  to  gain  information  of  attempts  at  parallel 
pursuit  by  the  enemy.  The  retention  of  a  substantial  portion  of 
the  command  for  use  in  emergencies  is  essential. 

761.  Throughout  the  retrograde  movement  the  Cavalry  should 
keep  the  commanders  of  the  retreating  troops  acquainted  with  the 
movements  of  the  enemy's  columns;  assurance  of  lack  of  progress 
on  the  part  of  the  enemy  will  remove  anxiety,  restore  confidence, 
and  contribute  greatly  toward  reorganization  of  tactical  units. 

The  Cavalry  Division  in  a  General  Engagement.^ 

762.  A  Cavalry  division  attached  to  an  army  always  has  impor- 
tant duties  to  fulfill  on  the  field  of  battle. 

During  the  operations  the  commander  must  keep  himself 
informed  as  to  the  enemy's  movements,  the  progress  of  the  engage- 
ment, and  the  position  and  movements  of  troops  in  his  vicinity. 
He  asks  for  orders  from  higher  authority  and,  failing  to  receive  any, 
acts  on  his  own  responsibility  when  circumstances  indicate  opera- 
tions suitable  for  his  command. 

As  the  general  lines  of  battle  come  into  contact  the  bulk  of  the 
Cavalry  will  clear  the  front  by  passing  around  the  flanks  or  through 
gaps  in  the  line  and  take  position  near  a  flank  or  in  rear  of  the 
center. 

768.  The  duty  of  a  cavalry  division  in  battle  is  to  operate 
against  the  enemy's  flank  and  rear,  to  attack  shaken  infantry  or 
unprotected  artillery,  to  guard  the  flanks  of  its  own  army,  and  to 

1  The  principles  governing  the  duties  of  the  cavalry  division  in  a  general  engage- 
ment apply  equally  to  smaller  or  larger  bodies  ot  c^^yalry  placed  xmder  sim.1% 
conditiopiSx 


THE  CAVALRY  DIVISION.  269 

delay  or  drive  off  hostile  reinforcements.  Continued  reconnais- 
sance is  necessary  to  give  timely  warning  of  enveloping  and  turning 
movements  on  the  part  of  the  enemy.  At  the  conclusion  of  a 
battle  the  division  takes  up  the  pursuit  or  covers  the  retreat. 

764.  Opportunities  for  cavalry  action  are  most  frequently 
found  near  the  fianl^  of  the  line  of  battle.  A  position  in  advance 
of  a  flank  facilitates  participation  in  the  general  battle  and  of  itself 
acts  as  a  menace.  It  also  is  favorable  for  the  purposes  of  recon- 
naissance. From  such  a  position  it  may  be  possible  to  attack  the 
enemy's  reserves  or  surprise  his  ammunition  train,  thus  causing 
serious  interference  with  his  operations.  In  the  achievement  of 
such  successes  more  important  duties  must  not  be  neglected. 

765.  If  the  enemy's  cavalry  force  is  encountered  on  the  same 
flank,  the  first  endeavor  must  be  to  engage  and  defeat  it  in  order 
to  gain  freedom  for  further  enterprises.  When  the  enemy's  cavalry 
makes  use  of  infantry  supports  to  occupy  strong  positions,  whether 
in  the  form  of  Mounted  Infantry  or  Infantry  transported  on  bicycles, 
automobiles,  or  wagons,  the  commander  will  decide  whether  it  is 
best  to  attack  them  at  once  with  dismounted  Cavalry,  Horse  Artil- 
lery and  machine  guns,  or  to  isolate  them  by  passing  around,  leaving 
them  to  be  dealt  with  after  dispatching  tlie  hostile  cavalry. 

766.  In  rear  of  the  center  the  cavalry  division  is  usually  held  in 
reserve.  It  may  be  called  upon  to  overcome  crises  in  the  battle  by 
charges  to  the  front  in  deployed  lines,  to  provide  dismounted  reen- 
forcement  to  a  depleted  firing  line,  or  to  move  rapidly  to  threatened 
points  to  cope  with  unforeseen  emergencies.  Its  mobility  may  be 
utilized  to  bring  the  power  of  its  fire  to  bear  on  the  enemy  in  unex- 
pected places  and  thus  exercise  an  important  influence  on  the 
course  of  the  battle. 

767.  When  the  forces  of  Cavalry  with  an  army  exceed  the 
strength  of  a  division,  they  may  be  organized  as  a  Cavalry  Corps. 
In  any  event  when  large  forces  of  Cavalry  are  assembled  or  operate 
together  on  any  part  of  the  field  their  harmonious  cooperation 
should  be  secured  by  formal  assignment  of  a  chief. 

768.  The  duties  of  the  divisional  cavalry  in  reconnaissance,  pro- 
tection, screening,  and  delaying  actions  will  lead  to  combats,  both 
mounted  and  dismounted. 

In  a  battle  its  action  will  be  similar  to  that  of  a  cavalry  division, 
but  reconnaissance  remains  its  most  important  duty.  It  may  take 
part  in  the  great  cavalry  battles  by  temporarily  joining  the  cavalry 
division  or  larger  body,  either  pursuant  to  orders  or  on  its  own  initia- 
tive. 


260  RAIDS. 


Raids. 


769.  Raids  are  isolated  operations  carried  out  by  forces  composed 
exclusively  of  mounted  troops. 

Tlie  object  of  a  raid,  in  the  general  case,  is  to  strike  the  hostile 
army  in  the  arteries  upon  which  it  depends  for  the  flow  of  ammuni- 
tion, reenforcements,  food  and  supplies  of  all  kinds  indispensable 
to  its  ejficiency. 

770.  Raiding  operations  are  most  feasible  when  the  troops  are 
familiar  with  the  country  they  are  to  traverse,  for  example,  after 
invasion  by  the  enemy,  and  when  information  as  to  position  and 
movements  of  hostile  forces  can  be  secured  through  sympathizers, 
as  in  ci^il  war,  or  in  friendly  territory.  In  the  enemy's  country, 
the  opposite  conditions  usually  prevail.  Difference  in  language, 
widely  disseminated  systems  for  electrical  transmission  of  intelli- 
gence available  to  the  enemy,  and  various  means  for  rapid  trans- 
portation of  his  troops  contribute  to  lessen  the  opportunities  for 
extended  raids  in  ci\ilized  foreign  countries. 

In  partly  civiUzed  or  sparsely  inhabited  countries,  with  weak 
governments  and  inefficient  military  forces,  raids  are  subject  to 
less  risk  and  may  be  carried  out  for  political  reasons,  or  for  some 
special  purpose  of  minor  importance. 

Raids  are  permissible  only  when  cavalry  can  be  spared  from  its 
usual  duties  and  when  its  presence  with  the  army  at  critical  junc- 
tures is  not  jeopardized  by  temporary  absence  on^a  raiding  expedi- 
tion. 

771.  The  object  of  a  raid  must  be  both  definite  and  adequate; 
definite,  in  order  that  the  commander  may  make  suitable  plans 
and  pr-eparations  and  carry  out  the  operations  with  the  directness, 
celerity,  and  energ\^  necessary  to  success;  adequate,  so  that  the 
results  expected  will  outweigh  the  losses  and  depreciation  of  men 
and  horses. 

An  alternative  objective  is  desirable,  so  that  if  it  proves  impos- 
sible to  attain  the  principal  object,  accomplishment  of  the  second 
will  still  be  a  success. 

772.  As  surprise  and  rapidity  of  action  are  essential  factors, 
small  forces  will  often  succeed  where  large  ones  would  fail.  The 
character  and  extent  of  the  work  and  the  amount  of  resistance 
expected  help  to  determine  the  size  of  the  raiding  force. 

773.  The  best  troops,  well-seasoned  and  self-reliant,  should  be 
selected,  weak  men  and  horses  being  eliminated  from  the  desig- 
nated units  before  starting.    Horse  Artillery  and  machine  guns 


RAIDS.  261 


may  be  used  with  great  advantage  on  a  raid;  a  reserve  supply  of 
ammunition  will  liave  to  be  provided. 

774.  Wheel  transportation  should  be  reduced  to  a  minimum,  for 
it  may  have  to  be  abandoned  during  the  raid.  Pack  transportation 
is  preferable,  and  in  some  countries  no  other  kind  can  be  taken. 

776.  In  addition  to  the  explosives  usually  carried  by  the  Cavalry, 
a  mounted  section  of  Engineers  with  the  necessary  equipment 
should  accompany  the  command  to  carry  out  the  more  extensive 
demolitions.^ 

776.  For  subsistence  a  raiding  force  will  ordinarily  count  upon 
what  can  be  carried  on  the  horses,  and  upon  the  resources  of  the 
country.  On  extended  raids,  and  to  meet  emergencies  resulting 
from  delay,  reserve  supplies  for  a  few  days  should  be  carried  along. 

Preparations  for  a  raid  should  be  complete  as  to  essential  details. 
Good  maps  are  indispensable,  and  well-informed  guides  should, 
if  possible,  be  secured. 

777.  The  success  of  a  raid  depends  in  a  large  measure  upon  the 
skill,  good  judgment,  and  resolution  of  the  leader.  The  command 
must  move  rapidlv  and  secretly.  As  a  raiding  force  has  no  com- 
munications it  is  free  to  move  in  any  direction.  It  should  avoid 
serious  combat  except  when  necessary  to  accomplish  its  object  or 
cut  its  way  out.  As  far  as  possible,  the  enemv  should  be  kept  in 
ignorance  of  the  position  of  the  main  body  of  the  raiding  force  and 
of  its  destination  and  object  of  attack,  and  efforts  should  be  made 
to  deceive  him  as  to  future  movements,  especially  as  to  the  route 
of  return. 

1  Detailed  instructions  for  demolitions  are  found  in  the  Engineer  Field  Manual. 


CAMPING. 


The  Platoon. 
778.  The  platoon  camps  in  line. 

SINGLE  RANK. 

If  the  horses  are  to  be  secured  to  a  ground  line  the  platoon  first 
forms  single  rank  to  allow  the  necessary  room. 

At  the  command  for  dismounting  (given  without  recounting 
fours)  the  front-rank  men  ride  out  4  yards,  all  dismount,  the  front- 
rank  horses  are  turned  left  about,  led  back,  and  coupled  with 

those  of  the  rear  rank. 

Rifles  are  stacked  5  yards  in  rear 
of  the  horses  of  the  rear  rank. 

The  sabers  and  the  rolls  of  the 
shelter  halves  are  then  taken  from 
the  saddles  and  the  shelter  tents 
pitched  with  their  open  ends  facing 
the  horses  and  1  yard  in  rear  of 
the  stacks  of  rifles. 

The  picket  line  is  then  put  to- 
gether and  stretched  in  front  of 
the  horses  (on  the  side  opposite  the 
tents). 

When  the  picket  line  has  been 
secured,  the  bits  are  removed  and 
the  horses  are  tied  on  the  line,  the 
girths  being  loosened  and  the  sad- 
dles left  on  until  the  backs  are 
cooled;  the  horses  being  watched  to  prevent  their  rolling. 

Knot  for  securing  the  halter  rope  to  the  picket  line. 

The  saddles  are  then  removed  and  placed  on  the  ground  in 
front  of  the  shelter  tents,  and  the  saddle  blankets  are  spread  on 
them  to  dry.  On  unsaddling,  if  the  ground  is  suitable,  the 
horses  are  encouraged  to  roll,  being  untied  from  the  line  for  the 
purpose. 

The  rifles  are  then  taken  from  the  stacks  and  placed  in  the 
shelter  tents. 

262 


CAMPING. 


fm 


264  CAMPING. 

DOUBLE   RANK. 

779.  If  the  picket  line  can  be  supported  about  4  feet  above  the 
ground,  so  as  to  separate  the  horses  into  two  ranks  and  prevent  their 
crowding  on  one  side,  the  platoon  may  camp  in  double  rank. 

After  dismounting,  the  odd  numbers  turn  their  horses  to  the 
left  about  and  lead  back  beside  the  horses  of  the  even  numbers; 
the  horses  of  each  rank  are  then  coupled  (each  couple  being  formed 


OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 


TKePlatoon  CampirKj  in.  double  ranK 

(picket  lir\c.  supported) 


—      —    26yard^ — - 

Saddles 

o  Ljg^^        ooo  o  o  op  op  o.oopo.o  Gp 


0 


of  an  odd  and  an  even  number).  The  rifles  are  placed  in  stacks, 
those  of  the  rear  rank  5  yards  in  rear  of  the  horses,  those  of  the 
front  rank  5  yards  in  front. 


CAMPING. 


265 


PioKfi^tLine  Supported 
Anchored  in 
around 


The  sabers  and  the  rolls  of  the  shelter  halves  are  then  taken 
from  the  saddles  and  the  shelter  tents  are  pitched  in  two  ranks 
on  opposite  sides  of  the  horses, 
with  their  open  ends  facing  them 
and  1  yard  farther  from  them 
than  the  stacks  of  the  rifles. 

The  picket  line  is  stretched 
over  supports  between  the  two 
ranks  of  horses. 

The  front-rank  horses  are  then 
tied  at  the  front  side  of  the  line 
and  the  rear-rank  horses  at  the 
rear  side. 

The  Squadron. 

780.  The  squadron  camps  in  column  or  in  line;  the  platoons 
camping  as  though  alone. 

Before  camping  in  line  in  single  rank,  the  platoons  all  move 
up  on  a  line  with  the  directing  platoon. 

Before  camping  in  line  in  double  rank,  the  platoons  take  6  yards 
interval  to  allow  room  for  passages  between  the  raised  picket  lines 
of  the  platoons. 

Before  camping  in  column  in  double  rank,  the  platoons  take  10 
yards  more  distance  to  allow  camping  room. 

In  camping  in  line,  the  picket  lines  of  the  platoons  are  each  se- 
cured independently  and  when  camping  in  double  rank  a  free 
passageway  of  2  yards  is  left  between  the  supported  picket  lines  of 
the  platoons. 

When  a  heavy  picket  line  is  carried,  it  will  be  in  four  sections, 
one  for  each  platoon. 

The  kitchen  and  the  tent  of  the  first  sergeant  are  on  one  flank; 
the  officers'  tents  on  the  same  flank.  The  forage  and  the  sinks 
are  on  the  other  flank. 

781.  Space  required  for  squadron  camp  (minimum,  allowing 
room  for  cook  fires) : 


Formation. 


Depth. 


In  column,  single  rank. 
In  column,  double  rank 

In  line,  single  rank 

In  line,  double  rank 


Yards. 
70 
110 
20 


26$  CAMPING. 

The  Regiment. 

782.  The  regiment  camps  in  column,  in  column  of  squadrons 
(each  in  line),  or  (with  increased  intervals)  in  mass. 

Each  squadron  camps  as  though  alone  except  that  in  mass  the 
squadron  officers,  the  first  sergeant,  and  the  cook  hres  are  in  front 
of  the  squadron  and  the  sinks  in  rear. 

In  column  of  squadrons  the  distances  are  reduced  about  one- 
half  before  camping. 

The  tents  of  the  colonel,  his  staff,  and  the  field  officers  are  beyond 
those  of  the  squadron  officers. 

Space  required  for  regimental  camp  {minimum  for  6  squadrons) : 


Formation. 

Front. 

Depth. 

In  column,  single  rank 

Yards. 
60 
45 
180 
120 
240 
150 

Yards. 
420 

In  column,  double  rank 

670 

In  squadron  column,  single  rank 

120 

In  squadron  column,  double  rank 

180 

In  mass,  single  rank 

100 

In  mass,  double  rank 

140 

These  distances  do  not  include  space  for  the  machine-gun  unit, 
which  camps  in  rear  of  the  regiment. 

General  Provisions. 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.) 

783.  In  order  to  get  the  greatest  benefit  from  the  meager  camp 
equipment  carried,  the  dispositions  in  camp  must  be  adapted  to 
the  ground.     The  camp  will,  therefore,  seldom  be  ideally  regular. 

Even  in  small  commands  the  commanding  officer  or  an  officer 
designated  should  precede  the  column  to  look  over  the  camping 
ground  and  decide  on  the  arrangement  of  the  camp,  so  that  on  the 
arrival  of  the  head  of  the  column  each  squadron  may  occupy 
immediately  the  ground  assigned  it  and  the  squadron  commander 
be  informed  as  to  arrangements  for  water,  fuel,  forage,  etc. 

On  arriving  in  camp,  sinks  are  dug  at  once  and  are  concealed 
by  bushes;  they  are  covered  daily  with  fresh  earth. 


CAMPING.  267 

In  a  hostile  country  the  camp  should  not,  as  a  rule,  be  within 
rifle  shot  of  cover  for  the  enemy.  Orders  are  given  as  to  the  place 
of  assembly  and  other  dispositions  to  be  made  in  case  of  a  night 
alarm;  in  each  platoon  men  are  designated  beforehand  to  go  at 
once  to  the  horses  and  take  charge  of  them. 

When  time  permits,  a  shallow  ditch  is  made  around  each  tent 
and  channels  made  to  carry  off  the  water. 

784.  Men  should  not  be  required  unnecessarily  to  sleep  on  the 
bare  ground ;  boughs  and  leaves  are  not  often  available  in  sufficient 
quantity  and  there  should  be  no  temptation  for  the  trooper  to  rob 
his  horse  of  hay  or  straw.  Provision  should  therefore  be  made  for 
a  special  supply  as  bedding  for  the  men.  Attention  to  this  rule, 
to  cleanliness,  and  to  the  proper  cooking  of  food  will  greatly  lessen 
the  number  and  frequency  of  camp  diseases. 

785.  To  prevent  stampeding  in  camp  it  will  in  most  cases  be 
sufficient  for  the  men  to  go  quietly  among  the  horses  at  the  first 
sign  of  fright  and  speak  to  them.  If  horses  are  stampeded,  men 
should  mount  the  fastest  animals  within  reach,  place  themselves 
in  front  of  the  herd,  and  conduct  it  back  to  camp.  With  old  horses 
the  sounding  of  stable  call  may  prevent  or  stop  a  stampede. 

786.  One  of  the  greatest  difficulties  of  Cavalry  in  campaign  is 
to  secure  sufficient  long  forage.  On  this  account  the  greatest 
attention  should  be  given  to  grazing  at  every  opportunity. 

The  horses  are  either  held  on  the  halter  rope,  picketed  on  the 
lariat,  turned  loose  in  inclosed  pastures,  or  if  there  has  been  oppor- 
tunity for  sufficient  training  they  may  be  herded. 

Special  effort  should  be  made  to  give  them  an  hour  or  two  of 
grazing  in  the  morniug  while  the  dew  is  on  the  grass  (not  clover), 
especially  if  the  supply  of  hay  at  night  has  been  short,  and  in  such 
cases  they  should  not  be  disturbed  until  the  last  moment,  time  lost 
being  made  up  by  more  rapid  marching. 

Should  the  horses  have  to  be  protected  from  an  enemy,  they  are 
taken  out  to  graze  under  charge  of  an  officer  as  soon  as  possible 
after  camping.  They  are  taken  as  far  as  is  safe,  so  as  to  keep  the 
nearer  grass  for  night.  It  is  occasionally  practicable  to  arrange 
the  camp  so  as  to  use  the  wagons  and  natural  obstacles  to  inclose  a 
space  for  night  grazing. 

787.  The  camp  site  should  be  on  well-drained,  dry  ground,  and 
due  consideration  should  be  given  to  shelter  from  cold  winds  or, 
in  summer,  to  shelter  from  the  sun,  for  horses  as  well  as  men,  and 
to  exposure  to  cooling  breezes.  Convenience  of  watering  places, 
grass,  fuel,  and  shelter  must  be  considered  on  the  principle  that, 


268  CAMPING. 

although  in  campaign,  comfort  must  often  be  sacrificed  to  more 
imperative  considerations,  yet  the  vigor  and  staying  powers  of 
both  horses  and  men  are  dependent  upon  the  most  solicitous  care 
for  their  comfort  and  conservation  of  their  energy. 

This  duty  of  conservation  calls  for  all  the  forethought  and  energy 
of  cavalry  officers  in  camp  as  well  as  on  the  march,  and  the  degree 
of  success  obtained  is  one  of  the  highest  indications  of  the  ability 
of  the  officers  and  of  the  training  of  the  command. 

788.  Fixed  camps  or  cantoiunents  where  regular  tentage  is 
furnished,  or  where  substantial  shelters  are  constructed,  are  care- 
fully laid  out  on  the  plan  above  indicated  or  on  a  plan  specially 
adapted  to  the  ground  and  conditions,  arrangements  being  made 
for  economy  of  labor  in  watering,  feeding,  supply,  and  in  the  daily 
service,  and  especial  attention  being  given  to  sanitation. 

789.  The  position  of  the  transportation  (wagons  and  pack  trains) 
will  be  selected  by  the  commander  or  his  representative  with  due 
regard  to  facility  of  supply  and  convenience  in  watering,  etc.,  as 
well  as  to  comfort  and  safety. 


MARCHES. 

(See  also  F.  S.  E.) 

790.  The  most  difficult  problem  that  confronts  a  cavalry  officer 
is  to  bring  his  command  on  the  field  of  actual  combat  with  their 
principal  weapon,  the  horse,  in  serviceable  condition,  not  only  for 
the  charge,  but  for  the  rapid  movements  required  by  the  varied 
role  of  cavalry  on  the  battle  field  under  modern  conditions. 

Experience  shows  that  when  cavalry  has  been  unable  to  respond 
to  the  demands  of  the  action  or  to  take  advantage  of  opportunities 
presented,  their  failure  has  been  due  to  the  exhaustion  or  to  the 
injuries  of  the  horses  rather  than  to  the  fatigue  of  the  men. 

Accordingly  attention  is  concentrated  on  mininlizing  the  wear 
and  tear  of  horseflesh;  incidentally,  but  none  the  less  surely,  the 
rider's  condition  is  benefited  by  the  good  condition  of  his  mount. 

791.  It  is  inevitable  that  the  proportion  of  cavalry_  recruits 
drawn  from  classes  of  horsemen  who  are  accustomed  to  thinking  of 
the  needs  of  the  horse  will  be  almost  negligible.  Consequently 
this  instinct  of  the  natural  horsemen  must  be  replaced  by  an  equiv- 
alent habit  resulting  from  special  and  persistent  training. 

Supervision  in  actual  service  can  at  best  correct  only  a  few 
neglects  or  errors;  the  individual  troopers  must  have  been  first 
trained  into  horse  savers.  The  supervision  of  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  will  then  suffice  to  keep  them  up  to  their 
work  under  stress  of  hardship,  fatigue,  and  excitement. 

792.  Although  in  discussing  marches  it  is  usually  assumed  that 
the  animals  are  in  condition,  yet  it  must  be  admitted  that  marches 
are  often  undertaken  with  horses  that  for  various  reasons  are  not  in 
proper  condition.  Distances  covered  and  time  under  saddle  must 
then  be' very  short  until  "condition"  has  been  obtained, ^  If 
forced  by  imperative  military  necessity  to  disregard  this  precaution, 
we  must  frankly  face  a  loss  of  50  per  cent  almost  immediately,  due 
to  sore  backs  and  exhaustion. 

The  number  of  hours  during  which  the  horse  is  to  carry  his  rider 
is  to  be  considered,  as  well  as  the  number  of  miles  he  is  to  cover, 
and  the  former  consideration  may  easily  be  the  important  one 
where  slow  movement  is  imposed  upon  a  cavalry  force  or  where, 

269 


270  MARCHES. 

on  account  of  difficulty  of  securing  forage,  time  must  be  gained  for 
grazing. 

793.  Preparation. — Before  starting,  special  inspections  should 
anticipate  everything  that  can  be  foreseen  in  the  adjustment  of 
saddlery  and  equipment  and  in  the  shoeing. 

In  winter,  the  ice  calks  must  be  looked  to  and  it  must  be  certain 
that  the  men  know  how  to  quickly  apply  and  remove  them. 

If  there  are  extra  horses  they  should  carry  a  few  spare  saddle 
blankets  to  replace  those  which  will  be  destroyed  by  cutting  to 
relieve   saddle  galls. 

794.  Guides  cautiously  used  may  be  very  useful,  but  a  habit  of 
dependence  upon  them  is  to  be  discouraged.  An  inhabitant, 
mounted  on  a  spare  horse  and  taken  along  for  a  few  miles,  or,  until 
he  can  be  replaced  by  another  man,  is  more  likely  to  be  of  use  than 
one  with  a  more  extended  but  less  intimate  acquaintance  with  the 
country. 

796.  The  start. — Unless  for  imperative  military  reasons  the  start 
should  not  be  made  for  an  hour  after  daylight,  and  usually  the 
mobility  of  cavalry  will  allow  it  to  move  out  in  the  morning  still 
more  deliberately  without  danger  of  prolonging  its  march  too  late 
in  the  day. 

796.  Night  marches  are  slow  and  fatiguing,  the  inability  to  see 
the  progress  being  made  has  a  depressing  mental  influence,  there  is 
always  danger  of  lengthening  the  road  by  going  astray,  and  neither 
men  nor  animals  can  make  up  the  lost  sleep  in  daylight.  Conse- 
quently there  must  be  imperative  reasons  when  a  night  march  is 
undertaken. 

797.  Formation. — The  narrowness  of  the  roads  usually  pre- 
scribes the  column  of  squads,  and  often  the  column  of  half-squads. 
Every  effort  must,  therefore,  be  made  to  reduce  the  length  of  the 
column  by  closing  up  as  much  as  is  compatible  with  comfort  and 
economy  of  effort  and,  with  a  large  command,  by  utilizing  parallel 
roads. 

In  order  to  avoid  checks  and  irregularities  of  gait  and  to  allow  the 
dust  to  settle  or  blow  away,  distances  must  be  left  between  platoons; 
these  distances  like  those  between  larger  units  disappear  when 
checks  occur  and  are  at  times  exceeded,  but  there  is  a  constant 
tendency  to  recover  them. 

Each  element  marches  so  as  to  best  take  advantage  of  the  ground, 
so  that  in  general  each  will  take  up  the  trot  or  walk  at  the  point 
where  the  preceding  unit  changed  gait. 


MARCHES.  271 

798.  In  campaign  the  roads  will  often  be  reserved  for  the  infan- 
try, artillery  and  the  combat  trains,  and  the  cavalry  will  find  its 
way  across  country.  It  can  then  often  march  in  the  maneuvering 
column  with  platoon  front,  a  formation  which  permits  each  horse 
to  see  clearly  the  ground  before  him  and  gives  relief  from  dust. 
The  regiment  may  also  use  the  double  column. 

By  sending  a  party  ahead  to  cut  and  roll  up  barbed  wire,  open 
the  fences,  and  prepare  crossings,  the  column  can  advance  steadily. 
When  a  short  defile  appears  in  front,  the  leading  unit,  if  the  ground 
permits,  increases  the  gait  until  it  has  passed  well  beyond  it,  so  as  to 
avoid  checking  the  column. 

The  footing  must  be  constantly  kept  in  mind  and  its  considera- 
tion will  govern  rather  than  the  accurate  preservation  of  regular 
formations.  Good  soft  footing  will  often  be  found  at  the  sides  of  the 
roads  and  the  column  can  be  spread  out,  traveling  along  both  sides. 
In  going  across  country  in  platoon  front  the  troopers  take  intervals 
to  find  good  footing,  and  after  a  few  platoons  have  passed,  the 
horses  of  the  succeeding  platoons  will  be  following  smooth  and  well- 
defined  trails. 

799.  Leading  on  foot. — The  modern  trooper  being  equipped  and 
trained  for  quick  action  dismounted  is  a  good,  active  walker  and 
full  advantage  of  this  must  be  taken,  when  at  the  walk,  to  save  the 
horses  as  well  as  to  limber  up  the  men  and  give  them  relief  from  the 
constraint  of  the  saddle. 

As  frequent  dismounting  and  mounting  with  packed  saddles  not 
only  involves  some  effort  but,  with  girths  as  loose  as  they  should  be 
on  the  march,  tends  to  shift  the  saddles,  advantage  should  be  taken 
of  anticipated  halts  to  dismount  and  walk  for  some  distance  before 
halting  and  again  after  the  halt  before  remounting. 

Habitually  on  campaign  the  troopers  should  assist  each  other  in 
mounting  by  bearing  down  on  the  off  stirrup  or  off  side  of  the  saddle 
to  keep  it  level. 

Leading  dismounted  requires  some  training  to  teach  the  horse  not 
to  crowd  his  rider  nor  to  step  on  his  feet;  it  should  not  be  carried  to 
the  point  of  fatiguing  the  trooper  but  so  arranged  that  after  he  is 
trained  to  it  he  will  always  be  glad  of  the  relief  of  dismounting  or  of 
remounting. 

Steep  hills  indicate  leading  dismounted,  especially  in  descend- 
ing, as  here  little  effort  is  imposed  on  the  man  and  great  relief  af- 
forded the  horse.  In  climbing  them  the  pace  must  be  very  slow 
for  the  comfort  of  the  men,    A  horse  climbs  with  much  less  effort 


272  MARCHES. 

tlian  a  man;  he  can  comfortably  carry  his  rider  up  a  steep  hill  if 
the  pace  is  very  slow. 

800.  The  pace  should  be  arranged  with  due  consideration  both 
of  the  time  the  horse  is  to  carry  his  load  and  the  distance  to  be 
covered.  The  quicker  a  march  can  be  completed  without  forcing 
the  less  the  fatigue  to  both  horse  and  man.  Where  the  footing  is 
good,  the  road  level,  and  other  considerations  do  not  hamper,  the 
column  can  advance  from  a  halt,  first  by  leading  dismounted, 
then  mount  and  walk,  then  trot,  a  short  gallop,  then  the  trot,  the 
walk,  and  finally  dismount  and  lead  to  the  next  halt.  No  pace  is 
to  be  maintained  continuously  long  enough  to  weary  either  horse 
or  man.  The  officer  setting  the  pace  should  occasionally  drop  back 
to  observe  the  pace  of  the  column. 

The  trot  should  be  at  8  miles  per  hour  so  as  to  facilitate  posting, 
the  gallop  should  be  at  less  than  the  maneuvering  gait  and  will 
depend  upon  the  training,  as,  unless  accustomed  to  this  gait  in 
marching,  the  horse  will  waste  his  energy. 

Very  rarely,  however,  will  the  conditions  allow  the  regular 
arrangement  of  gaits  indicated  above.  Tvolling  country,  with 
ascents  and  descents,  stretches  of  hard  or  stony  road,  or  of  mud 
or  sand,  crossings  of  streams,  etc.,  will  ordinarily  impose  corre- 
sponding changes  of  gait,  on  each  small  unit  of  the  column  as  it 
reaches  them.  Consequently  the  column  must  be  articulated  with 
distances  between  the  platoons  to  allow  for  closing  up  at  checks. 

Each  platoon  conforms  to  the  gait  of  the  platoon  ahead  as  it 
reaches  the  point  where  chansfes  have  been  made.  \\'ith  care 
this  method  of  marching  should  result  in  enabling  every  horse 
in  the  column  to  move  with  almost  the  same  rejyularity  and  free- 
dom from  checks  as  though  he  were  at  the  head  of  the  column. 
^  The  fast  pace  that  can  be  expected  of  small  detachments  and  of 
single  riders  can  not  be  demanded  of  a  cavalry  column,  and  as  the 
command  increases  in  size  the  rate  of  march  will  decrease.  The 
regulation  sfaits  being,  at  the  walk,  4  miles,  the  trot,  8  miles  per 
hour,  cavalry  should  be  able  to  make,  including  halts,  from  5  to 
6  miles  per  hour.  This  rate  can  be  maintained  for  daily  marches  of 
25  miles  under  ordinary  conditions  for  a  week  at  a  time,  after  which 
a  day  of  rest  should  be  allowed  before  continuing  the  march. 

801.  Forced  marches. — In  emergencies  cavalry  may,  under  fav- 
orable conditions,  cover  as  much  as  50  miles  per  day  for  several 
days  and  75  miles  inside  of  24  hours  without  serious  injury  to  the 
horses.  Such  emergencies  justify  the  lightening  of  the  load  carried 
on  the  saddle  if  it  can  possibly  be  transported  otherwise* 


MARCHES.  2m 

The  work  to  be  demanded  of  the  cavalry  at  the  end  of  the  forced 
march  must  be  kept  in  view;  this  is  presumably  a  mounted  rdle 
and  the  horses  must  be  brought  on  the  field  in  a  condition  to  do 
their  part.  If  it  is  not  the  intention  to  call  for  mounted  action  at 
the  end  of  the  forced  march  this  must  be  clearly  stated,  and  the 
cavalry  commander  will  then  be  justified  in  sacrificing  some  of 
his  horses- 

So  many  conditions  operate  to  affect  the  length  of  forced  marches 
and  long-distance  rides  that  they  are  here  touched  upon  only  in 
order  to  furnish  some  guide  in  planning  operations.  Expert  cav- 
alry opinion  should  be  available  in  determining  what  may  be  safely 
demanded  at  the  moment  in  each  particular  case. 

802.  The  mobility  of  a  cavalry  column  is  greatly  reduced  when 
it  has  to  rely  on  wagons  for  its  transportation.  Good  pack  trains 
can  keep  pace  with  it  and  follow  it  anywhere.  On  account,  how- 
ever, of  their  small  carrying  capacity,  pack  trains  can  not  replace 
wagon  trains,  but  should  be  well  organized  and  held  in  reserve 
for  emergencies. 

803.  Halts. — The  first  halt  should  be  made  after  a  couple  of 
miles  have  been  covered  and  within  three-quarters  of  an  hour 
after  starting;  it  should,  if  possible,  be  preceded  by  a  short  trot  in 
order  to  betray  to  the  troopers  any  faulty  adjustment  of  equip- 
ment. This  halt  gives  an  opportunity  for  the  horses  to  stale,  and 
for  the  troopers  to  tighten  girths  and  to  adjust  saddlery,  equipment, 
and  dress. 

Other  halts  of  5  to  10  minutes  should  be  made  at  hourly  inters 
vals,  and,  if  the  march  is  to  be  prolonged  into  the  afternoon,  a 
longer  halt  should  be  made  at  noon  when  girths  are  loosened, 
horses  fed,  and  the  men  eat  their  lunch. 

On  an  unusually  long  march  this  long  halt  may  be  extended 
sufficiently  to  admit  of  unsaddling,  but  this  must  not  be  done  with- 
out the  precaution  of  previous  loosening  of  girths  and  cooling  of 
backs,  supplemented  by  hand  rubbing.  Some  saddles  may  even 
then  have  to  be  immediately  replaced  to  keep  down  swelling  and 
prevent  injury. 

The  length  of  the  halt  should  be  announced  immediately  on 
halting  in  order  that  the  men  may  govern  themselves  accordingly. 

If  the  column  has  closed  up  at  the  halt,  the  different  elements 
arriving  at  different  times,  they  will  move  out  successively  with 
the  old  distances,  so  that  each  may  have  its  full  period  of  rest.  The 
elements  may  be  halted  simultaneously  by  signals  passed  back  and 

34396"— 14 18 


274  HAECHES. 

similarly  be  again  put  in  march,  thus  preserving  their  distances 
constantly. 

804.  Watering. — On  the  march,  as  a  rule,  horses  should  be 
watered  whenever  opportunity  occurs,  conforming  as  far  as  prac- 
ticable to  the  rule  of  water  before  food,  and  removing  the  bit  when 
the  horse  can  be  better  satisfied  by  so  doing,  or  when  the  quantity 
available  is  small.  Public  watering  troughs  are  avoided  on  account 
of  danger  from  infection.  The  use  of  buckets  will  often  make 
watering  places  otherwise  insufficient  thoroughly  satisfactory. 

806.  Feeding. — In  time  of  peace  when  a  regular  supply  of  grain 
and  long  forage  can  be  counted  on  effort  should  be  made  to  follow 
as  far  as  practicable  the  routine  to  which  horses  have  been  accus- 
tomed in  garrison.  In  time  of  war  regularity  of  supply  of  forage, 
and  especially  of  the  long  forage,  can  not  be  expected,  and  officers 
must  neglect  no  opportunity  of  catering  to  the  needs  of  their  ani- 
mals when  passing  grainfields,  pastures,  or  stacks  of  hay  and  other 
fodder.  A  supply  for  the  night  can  often  be  gathered  and  carried 
along  on  the  wagons  or  may  be  tied  up  compactly  with  the  lariat 
and  be  carried  on  the  horse.  The  principle  of  feeding  a  little  grain 
or  forage  at  every  opportunity  should  govern,  so  that  the  horse  shall 
have  something  in  his  stomach  at  all  times.  The  risk  of  having  to 
work  on  a  full  stomach  must  often  be  frankly  accepted  as  less  than 
that  of  having  to  later  go  without  food. 

The  finished  trooper  with  his  habitual  solicitude  for  his  mount 
will  be  constantly  removing  the  bits  to  let  his  horse  fill  himself  at 
every  delay  or  check  and  he  will  miss  no  chance  to  pick  up  an 
extra  feed  of  grain. 


SWIMMING  HORSES  AND  FORDING. 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.) 

806.  As  it  is  often  necessary  for  cavalry  to  cross  streams  by  swim- 
ming, the  exercise  is  important,  as  it  gives  confidence  to  men  and 
horses. 

It  is  laid  down  in  the  school  of  the  trooper,  dismounted,  that  the 
men  must  be  taught  to  swim.  Unless  this  has  been  done,  it  is  use- 
less to  expect  a  command  to  make  crossings  where  the  horses  must 
swim,  unless  the  men  who  are  not  swimmers  can  be  crossed  on 
boats,  rafts,  or  bridges. 

For  instruction  the  horses  are  at  first  equipped  with  the  snafiie 
only  and  are  barebacked.  The  reins  are  on  the  horse's  neck  just  in 
front  of  the  withers  and  knotted  so  that  they  will  not  hang  low 
enough  to  entangle  the  horse's  feet,  care  being  taken  to  have  them 
so  placed  as  to  permit  the  horse  to  push  his  nose  well  out  and  to 
have  entire  freedom  of  the  head.  A  lock  of  the  mane  is  tied  in  with 
reins  to  prevent  their  slipping  over  the  head.  The  horse  should 
previously  be  watered,  but  not  too  freely. 

The  trooper  mounts,  rides  into  the  stream,  and  when  he  gets  into 
deep  water,  drops  reins,  seizes  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the  upstream 
hand,  allows  his  body  to  drift  off  quietly  to  the  downstream  side  of 
the  horse,  and  floats  or  swims  flat  on  the  water,  guiding  the  horse, 
when  necessary,  by  splashing  water  against  his  head,  only  using 
the  reins  when  the  splashing  fails.  When  the  horse  touches  bottom 
at  the  landing,  the  trooper  i)ulls  himself  on  the  horse's  back  and 
takes  the  reins.  The  horse  is  a  good  swimmer  and  is  easily  con- 
trolled when  not  confused;  it  is  therefore  necessary  that  the  trooper 
should  be  gentle  and  deliberate.  The  trooper  must  be  cautioned 
that  pulling  on  the  reins  is  apt  to  pull  the  horse  over  backward, 
and  that  when  the  horse  touches  bottom  he  may  begin  to  plunge. 

The  trooper  will  also  be  required  to  swim  holding  the  horse's  tail, 
the  horse  towing  him. 

After  the  trooper  and  horse  have  gained  confidence,  the  trooper 
will  retain  his  seat  while  swimming.  The  weight  of  the  rider 
presses  the  horse  down  and  impedes  his  movements;  the  trooper 

275 


276  SWIMMING  AND  FOEDING. 

should  therefore  hold  the  knees  well  up  to  lessen  the  resistance, 
and  steady  his  seat  by  holding  on  the  mane. 

With  some  horses  that  swim  low  it  is  ad^dsable  that  the  trooper 
sit  back  on  the  loins  to  allow  the  forequarters  to  float  high. 

807.  Saddlery,  arms  and  equipment,  and  the  men's  clothing 
will  be  crossed  in  boats  or  on  rafts  when  time  and  facilities  permit. 
When  the  crossing  must  be  made  fully  equipped  the  stirrups  are 
crossed  and  secured  to  keep  them  from  catching  on  the  horse's  feet 
or  in  the  equipment  of  other  horses.  It  is  well  to  remove  the  curb 
bits. 

Immediately  after  crossing  arms  are  looked  after  to  dry  them  as 
much  as  possible. 

808.  The  men  are  instructed  in  crossing  swift-running  water  to 
keep  their  eyes  fixed  on  the  opposite  bank,  and  to  keep  the  horse 
headed  slightly  upstream. 

When  large,  swift  rivers  are  to  be  swum,  too  hazardous  for  all  the 
horses  to  be  ridden,  the  bridle  reins  are  secured  to  avoid  the  danger 


of  their  being  caught  by  the  horse's  feet  or  by  those  of  another  horse 
swimming  close  to  him;  the  stirrups  are  crossed  and  secured;  a 
trained  horse  is  selected  for  a  leader  and  is  ridden  without  saddle; 
all  the  horses  are  led  or  driven  to  the  approach  and  can  generally 
be  made  to  take  the  water  without  much  difficulty.  The  approach 
should  be  selected  at  some  distance  above  the  landing.  If  prac- 
ticable, a  few  horses  should  be  taken  over  and  placed  at  the  land- 
ing, and  some  men  stationed  to  receive  the  horses  as  they  land. 
Stable  call  sounded  on  the  opposite  bank  as  the  horses  take  the 
water  may  be  a  useful  expedient. 

If  there  be  a  ponton  bridge  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  the 
crossing  should  be  below  it. 

809.  Wlien  a  horse  is  towed  or  led  from  a  boat  he  should  be  held 
astern  of  the  oars,  and  on  the  downstream  side  or  in  the  wake.  He 
is  towed  by  a  rope  knotted  around  the  neck  in  a  bowline,  a  knot 
that  can  not  slip  and  strangle  him  and  is  easily  adjusted  and  untied. 

The  rope  should  be  just  tight  enough  to  prevent  slipping  oyer  the 
head.  When  the  horse  is  afloat  the  rope  must  be  slack  or  his  lie^ 
will  be  pulled  under  water  and  he  will  drown. 


SWIMMING  AND  FORDING.  277 

810.  When  a  stream  with  a  treacherous  bottom  is  to  be  forded, 
stakes  or  bushes  should  be  placed  so  as  to  mark  the  limits  of  the 
ford,  or  may  be  placed  so  as  to  mark  the  dangerous  places  only. 

When  the  stream  is  to  be  forded  at  night,  lighted  lanterns  should 
be  fastened  to  the  stakes  and  one  displayed  at  the  landing  or  a  fire 
built  there. 

In  order  to  minimize  delay  and  secure  more  liberty  of  movement, 
and  because  a  ford  may  become  too  deep  after  many  animals  have 
used  it,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  discover  other  crossing 
places.  The  inhabitants  may  not  have  discovered  them  through 
never  having  need  of  other  crossings. 

A  ford  should  be  carefully  examined  before  a  crossing  is  begun 
and  the  width  of  the  front  in  crossing  is  limited  by  the  safe  width 
of  the  ford. 

When  the  stream  has  a  swift  current  and  the  water  is  above  the 
horses'  bellies,  the  subdivisions  should  cross  with  as  wide  a  front 
as  practicable,  to  permit  a  freer  flow  or  prevent  damming  of  the 
water,  which  might  carry  a  horse  off  his  feet;  but  in  crossing  a 
dangerous  ford,  the  column  of  half-squads  is  less  objectionable  than 
the  column  of  squads. 

Cavalry  should  generally  cross  streams  above  infantry  or  so  far 
below  that  the  water  will  not  be  dammed  against  them. 

Ice  from  4J  to  6§  inches  thick  will  bear  cavalry  marching  in 
column  of  files  or  half-squads. 

Whenever  opportunity  offers,  horses  should  be  practiced  in 
crossing  ponton  bridges;  leading  first  in  column  of  files  at  a  slow 
walk  and  then  in  column  of  half-squads,  the  horses  on  the  inside, 
the  troopers  on  the  outside. 

Troops  take  the  formation  for  crossing  at  least  100  yards  before 
reaching  the  bridge,  and  retain  this  formation  until  at  least  100 
yards  beyond  it. 

During  a  crossing,  as  a  rule,  only  the  engineers  on  duty  at  the 
bridge  are  permitted  to  cross  in  the  opposite  direction.  Good  order 
and  calmness  must  prevail  and  checks  on  the  bridge  and  on  the 
opposite  bank,  with  hurried  closing  up  of  rear  units,  must  be 
avoided  under  all  circumstances. 

In  crossing  ponton  bridges  the  orders  of  the  engineer  officer  in 
charge  must  be  obeyed. 


TRANSPORTATION  OF  HORSES. 

By  Rail. 

811.  Care  should  be  taken  that  before  a  long  railway  journey 
horses  are  in  good  condition  and  they  should  have  a  bran  mash 
before  starting,  as  on  the  journey  they  will  get  hay  only  when  they 
are  unloaded,  en  route,  or  when  special  stops  are  made  to  allow 
them  to  be  fed  in  the  cars  and  the  latter  cleaned  of  what  remains  to 
avoid  danger  of  fire. 

It  is  safest  to  remove  the  shoes  if  the  animals  are  not  to  be  put  to 
work  immediately  on  detraining. 

The  tails  may  be  protected  from  rubbing  by  tying  them  up  and 
covering  them  with  gunny  sacking,  secured'  from  slipping  by  a 
few  stitches  through  the  hair  with,  a  bale  needle;  care  must  be 
taken  that  men  do  not  attempt  to  accomplish  this  by  tying  strips 
around  the  root  of  the  tail,  as  the  constriction  may  cause  the  hair 
to  fall  out  or  on  a  long  journey  even  more  serious  injury. 

812.  Unless  horses  are  to  be  loaded  at  regular  stockyards  or  where 
special  facilities  are  known  to  exist,  the  loading  place  must  be 
previously  examined  and  perhaps  extra  ramps  provided  to  avoid 
delay.  It  is  always  well  to  carry  a  portable  ramp  for  unloading  in 
emergencies;  and  if  there  is  expectation  of  detraining  in  the  open, 
there  should  be  a  ramp  for  every  three  or  four  cars. 

Cars  are  inspected  to  see  that  they  are  in  proper  condition,  and, 
if  they  are  equipped  for  feeding  and  watering  en  route,  that  the 
apparatus  is  in  proper  working  order. 

813.  On  reaching  the  loading  point  the  saddlery  is  removed 
and  carefully  tied  up  in  the  saddle  blanket  or  in  a  grain  sack.  The 
horses  are  then  led  into  the  cars,  beginning  with  a  quiet  animal, 
and  are  placed  across  the  car  alternating  heads  and  tails,  the  halter 
being  removed  after  the  horse  is  in  place  as  soon  as  it  is  not  needed 
to  keep  him  from  getting  out.  The  halter  head  may  be  left  on, 
removing  only  the  halter  strap  or  rope. 

The  more  snugly  animals  are  packed  in  ordinary  stock  cars  the 
better  they  will  travel.  These  cars  will  usually  carry  18  animals 
conveniently. 

814.  The  trains  should  be  so  made  up  that  the  man  and  his  horse 
are  always  on  the  same  train.  A  squadron  should  have  its  men, 
horses,  baggage,  and  transportation  complete  on  one  train,  so  that 
it  may  move  off  into  camp  immediately  on  detraining. 


TRANSPORTATION   OF   HORSES.  279 

Special  watchfulness  is  necessary  to  insure  the  above  precau- 
tions, as  railway  employees  are  prone  to  disregard  the  requirements 
of  the  troops,  and  once  the  train  is  made  up  traffic  schedules  serve 
as  an  excuse  for  refusal  to  correct  errors. 

816.  On  arrival  at  the  detraining  point,  the  officers  first  look 
over  the  ground,  the  men  are  then  detrained,  carrying  out  the 
equipment  they  have  with  them;  they  next  get  their  saddles  from 
the  baggage  car  and  then  detrain  the  horses,  saddle  up  and  march 
to  camp,  returning  later  for  the  baggage  and  transportation  or 
leaving  a  detail  to  bring  it  up. 

The  special  conditions — weather,  distance  of  camp,  and  service 
to  be  performed — govern  the  work  and  manner  of  detraining,  but 
before  beginning  the  operation  some  plan  is  formulated  and  is  not 
lightly  modified. 

By  Sea. 

816.  The  horse  should  have  a  bran  mash  the  evening  before 
embarkation  and  should  have  neither  food  nor  water  for  two  hours 
before  he  is  loaded.  On  board  ship  he  is  for  the  first  few  days  fed 
hay  only  and  thereafter  about  half  a  ration  of  grain,  care  being 
taken  to  keep  the  bowels  open  by  bran  mashes  several  times  a 
week. 

Unless  the  voyage  is  a  short  one  and  unless  the  debarkation  is  to 
be  made  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy  shoes  should  be  removed. 
If,  however,  the  arrangements  are  imperfect  and  the  horse  must 
stand  on  a  wet  footing  the  hoof  may  become  so  worn  as  not  to  hold 
a  shoe  on  landing;  it  will  be  necessary  in  such  cases  to  leave  the 
shoes  on. 

Horses  should  not  be  loaded  until  arrangements  have  been  made 
for  the  ship  to  get  under  way  as  soon  as  the  last  animal  is  on  board. 
This  is  of  special  importance  in  hot  climates  on  account  of  the  poor 
ventilation  when  the  vessel  is  stationary.  On  arriving  at  the  point 
of  debarkation  the  same  reason  requires  the  vessel  to  be  kept  mov- 
ing until  the  unloading  of  the  horses  can  begin. 

817.  When  fighting  units  are  embarked  for  a  landing  in  the 
presence  of  the  enemy  free  space  must  be  left  to  allow  for  leading 
for  exercise,  in  order  that  on  landing  the  animals  may  be  in  condi- 
tion for  immediate  service.  Passageways  wide  enough  to  get  the 
horses  out  of  their  stalls  and  to  lead  them  about  in  turn  for  20 
minutes  daily  is  all  that  is  necessary. 

The  details  of  embarkation,  debarkation,  and  horse  management 
at  sea  are  found  in  the  Transport  Service  Regulations. 


MINOR  WABFARE. 

818.  Minor  war&ire,  or  war  on  a  email  scale,  embraces  enter- 
prises of  relatively  small  bodies  of  trained  and  organized  troops 
against  hostile  forces  similarly  constituted;  its  more  frequent 
apj)lication,  however,  is  in  operations  against  savage  or  semi- 
civilized  enemies,  or  such  as  resort  to  guerilla  warfare  after  defeat 
of  their  organized  troops. 

In  the  former  case  the  tactics  will  conform  to  those  prescribed 
for  the  smaller  units,  with  slight  modifications  indicated  by  special 
circumstances;  in  the  latter,  the  methods  pursued  must  be  gov- 
erned by  the  nature  of  the  country  and  the  character,  armament, 
distribution,  and  system  of  warfare  of  the  enemy.  This  will 
probably  involve  irregular  operations  by  detachments,  each  with 
more  or  less  latitude  under  a  general  plan  of  campaign.  Adapt- 
ability of  officers  and  men  to  new  conditions  is  an  important  factor 
of  success. 

819.  The  enemy  will  usually  be  found  in  small  bodies  lacking 
in  organization  and  discipline,  assembling  and  scattering  with 
great  facility,  and  living  on  the  country.  For  success  his  groups 
generally  depend  on  the  rapidity  and  secrecy  of  their  movements, 
on  the  concentration  of  greatly  superior  forces  at  the  point  of 
attack,  on  their  intimate  knowledge  of  the  country,  on  the  diffi- 
culties of  the  terrain,  on  the  assistance  of  the  population,  and  on 
surprises,  ambuscades,  cunning,  and  treachery. 

820.  When  the  enemy  has  a  seat  of  government,  or  a  place  to 
which  he  attaches  special  importance,  capture  thereof  may  ter- 
minate resistance;  in  other  cases  seizure  of  herds  and  supplies 
will  be  necessary  to  obtain  submission.  In  operations  against 
roving  bands,  assisted  by  the  population  through  sympathy  or 
fear,  the  troops  will  be  divided  into  small  units  cooperating  in 
the  execution  of  a  general  plan. 

821.  Resolution,  vigilance,  and  good  judgment  are  important 
factors  in  overcoming  the  hardships  and  disadvantages  of  warfare 
against  savages  and  guerillas.  Fear  and  hunger  are  the  principal 
influences  to  which  such  enemies  are  susceptible.  The  prestige 
of  the  troops  should  be  cultivated  in  every  way  practicable.  Hesi- 
tation, delays,  and  retrograde  movements  are  looked  upon  as 

280 


MINOR  WARFARE.  ^1 

signs  of  weakness  and  serve  to  embolden  the  enemy  and  to  recruit 
his  ranks.  A  vigorous  offensive,  strategical  as  well  as  tactical, 
manifested  in  continuity  of  operations,  bold  and  resolute  attacks, 
and  relentless  pursuit,  is  the  safest  method  of  conducting  opera- 
tions. 

822.  Preparation  for  a  campaign  should  include  careful  study 
of  the  topography,  climate,  and  sanitary  conditions  of  the  country 
and  of  the  mode  of  fighting,  habits,  and  characteristics  of  the 
enemy;  a  summary  of  the  information  available  should  be  dis- 
tributed to  the  troops.  The  best  maps  obtainable,  durably 
mounted,  should  be  furnished  to  all  units.  It  will  generally  be 
necessary  to  hire  or  impress  guides,  and  in  foreign  countries, 
interpreters  also. 

The  troops  selected  for  service  should  be  seasoned  and  well 
disciplined.  Their  armament  and  equipment  must  be  complete 
and  their  clothing  suited  to  climatic  conditions.  The  troops 
should  be  highly  mobile;  in  most  cases  a  large  proportion  of 
mounted  troops  will  be  required. 

The  resources  of  the  country  should  be  utilized  as  far  as  possible, 
but,  as  a  rule,  nearly  all  the  supplies  will  have  to  be  carried. 
The  problem  of  transportation  is  a  difiicult  one  and  requires  careful 
consideration.  Owing  to  lack  of  good  roads  it  will  often  be  impos- 
sible to  use  wagons  or  even  carts.  Expeditionary  forces  will  then 
be  dependent  on  pack  animals  for  transportation.  In  the  policing 
of  occupied  territory  pack  animals  also  are  necessary  to  carry 
rations  for  detachments  and  to  renew  the  supplies  of  small  stations. 

823.  In  the  occupation  of  country  infested  by  guerillas  or 
bands  of  robbers  it  will  often  be  advisable  to  establish  a  number 
of  secondary  bases  at  strong  points,  fortified  if  necessary,  to  be  held 
by  foot  troops,  while  mounted  units  continue  operations  in  the 
field.  In  addition  to  rations,  forage,  and  ammunition,  such 
stations  should  carry  small  reserves  of  clothing,  equipment,  horse- 
shoes, and  veterinary  supplies,  so  that  mounted  detachments, 
periodically  relieved,  can  turn  to  them  for  treatment,  reshoeing, 
and  recuperation  of  their  animals. 

824.  In  close  country  the  march  will  often  have  to  be  made 
in  column  of  files,  and  the  use  of  flankers  will  be  difiicult  or  impos- 
sible. As  the  enemy  is  usually  skillful  in  ambuscades,  recon- 
naissance must  be  carried  out  with  special  care,  patrols  being 
pushed  out  as  far  as  danger  of  being  cut  off  will  permit.  A  column 
in  any  case  must  be  preceded  by  an  advance  party.  For  further 
security  the  command  may  be  divided  into  several  nearly  equal 


282  MINOR  WARFARE. 

parts  separated  by  distances  of  about  100  yards.  When  there  is 
special  danger  of  surprise  the  troopers  may  be  required  to  march 
with  their  arms  in  readiness  for  instant  action. 

In  the  enemy's  country  pack  trains  will  march  between  the  tail 
of  the  column  and  a  strong  rear  guard. 

826.  Camp  should  be  made  in  a  compact  formation,  on  open 
ground  suited  for  defense.  The  means  of  transportation  should 
be  inside  the  camp.  All  the  avenues  of  approach  must  be  guarded, 
arbed  wire  may  be  stretched  at  places  open  to  a  rush.  Every 
unit  of  the  command  must  have  a  position  assigned  to  it,  to  be 
taken  in  case  of  alarm.  The  line  of  defense  will  be  on  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  camp.  A  reserve  is  kept  at  the  disposal  of  the 
commander  for  use  in  emergencies.  Vigilance  must  never  he 
reloj^d. 

826.  Combats  resulting  from  unexpected  meeting  with  the 
enemy  will  be  relatively  frequent.  In  such  cases  promptness 
to  attack  confers  a  great  moral  advantage.  In  dismounted  attacks 
an  enveloping  movement  will  be  specially  effective;  the  enemy 
seldom  has  sufficient  maneuvering  abilit}^  to  meet  them.  When 
possible  mounted  units  should  take  up  a  vigorous  pursuit. 

Mounted  troops  are  not  in  great  danger  from  a  rush  by  dismounted 
savages.  Mounted  detachments  cut  off  on  a  trail  have  a  better 
chance  of  escape  by  charging  at  once  than  by  attempting  a  defense 
with  the  rifle. 

827.  Operations  at  night,  and  during  storms  or  severe  weather, 
are  frequently  advisable.  The  discipline  of  irregular  troops  being 
inferior,  they  rarely  provide  proper  protection  for  their  camps 
under  conditions  imposing  hardships;  by  taking^  advantage  of 
this  fact  it  may  be  possible  to  surprise  them  and  inflict  serious  loss. 

Night  operations  of  mounted  troops  may  be  utilized  to  reach 
positions  from  which  to  attack  at  early  dawn. 


NIGHT  OPERATIONS. 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.) 

828.  At  night  the  usefulness  of  the  cavalry  horse  is  greatly  im- 
paired, darkness  preventing  the  utilization  of  his  speed. 

In  mixed  commands  cavalry  should,  therefore,  not  be  employed 
for  night  operations,  except  at  a  distance. 

Cavalry  under  special  circumstances  may  have  to  resort  to  night 
assaults  on  foot  to  minimize  fire  losses,  but  generally  its  night 
operations  will  consist  of  night  marches  conducted  with  stealth, 
with  the  object  of  escaping  observation  of  aerial  scouts  and  of 
gaining,  unobserved,  positions  from  which  to  operate  by  surprise  in 
davlight. 

To  carry  out  these  night  marches  it  will  often  be  necessary  to 
capture  or  brush  aside  small  forces  of  the  enemy.  In  such  encoun- 
ters firing  should  be  avoided  and  these  patrol  actions  should  not 
excite  the  suspicion  of  the  enemy  as  to  the  movement  of  a  larger 
force. 

If,  however,  the  main  body  should  come  into  serious  collision 
with  a  large  force  and  should  have  to  sacrifice  secrecy  of  movement, 
a  judicious  employment  of  rapid  fire  may  deceive  the  enemy  as 
to  our  strength  and  permit  the  execution  of  the  original  plan . 

In  harassing  a  retreating  or  severely  handled  enemy  cavalry 
will  also  frequently  resort,  at  night,  to  bursts  of  fire  from  points 
which  it  has  gained  on  the  flanks  or  in  rear,  thus  breaking  the  rest 
of  the  fatigued  enemy  and  destroying  his  morale. 

829.  As  the  essence  of  night  operations  is  secrecy,  preparation 
for  the  enterprise  must  be  confided  to  a  few  of  the  higher  officers  only 
until  the  troops  are  turned  out  for  the  movement.  At  that  time, 
however,  all  officers  should  be  informed  of  the  general  design  and 
the  composition  of  the  whole  force,  and  should  be  given  such  addi- 
tional information  as  will  secure  cooperation  and  eliminate  mis- 
takes. 

During  the  movement  every  precaution  must  be  taken  to  keep 
secret  the  fact  that  troops  are  abroad. 

Precautions  are  taken  to  avoid  losing  the  road ;  at  forks  and  cross- 
roads obstructions  are  placed  across  the  road  not  followed,  or  men 
may  be  left  to  direct  following  units. 


284  FIELD  ESCOETS. 

Unfriendly  guides  must  frequently  be  impressed.  These  should 
be  secured  against  escape,  outcry,  or  deception. 

Fire  action  should  be  avoided  in  offensive  operations.  In  gen- 
eral, rifles  should  not  be  loaded,  in  order  to  prevent  premature 
firing. 

A  conspicuous  badge  should  be  adopted  as  a  means  of  recognition. 

830.  Long  night  marches  should  be  made  only  over  well-defined 
routes.  March  discipline  must  be  rigidly  enforced.  Lights, 
smoking,  and  talking^may  be  prohibited.  The  troops  should  be 
marched  in  as  compact  a  formation  as  practicable,  with  the  usual 
covering  detachments,  advance  and  rear  guards,  but  with  very 
greatly  reduced  distances,  and  with  numerous  connecting  files. 
The  rate  of  march  is  much  slower  than  in  daylight. 

To  avoid  noise,  wagons  should  not  accompany  the  column  and 
for  the  same  reason  it  may  be  advisable  not  to  take  artillery. 

The  plan  for  a  night  enterprise  or  a  night  march  must  be  ex- 
tremely simple.  Cooperation  of  two  or  more  forces  can  not  be 
relied  on. 

FIELD  ESCORTS. 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.) 

831.  The  commander  of  the  escort,  if  a  commissioned  officer, 
regulates  the  time  and  distance  of  the  marches  and  the  location  of 
the  camps. 

The  escort  of  trains,  being  a  service  of  slow  and  often  interrupted 
marches,  is  very  injurious  to  cavalry  horses,  and  is  better  performed, 
as  a  rule,  by  dismounted  men. 

The  commander  of  the  escort  commands  the  convoy  and  is  respon- 
sible for  its  safety;  he  directs  the  march,  keeping  as  many  wagons 
abreast  as  practicable;  enforces  train  discipline,  placing  for  this 
purpose  a  small  part  of  the  escort  with  the  convoy,  and,  with  the 
main  body,  protects  the  convoy  and  expedites  the  march. 

The  main  body  furnishes  advance  guard,  rear  guard,  and  flank- 
ers; reconnoitering  patrols  are  detached  to  considerable  distances. 
In  case  of  attack,  the  escort  should,  if  possible,  hold  the  enemy  at 
a  distance,  keeping  up  the  march  of  the  convoy;  when  this  is  not 
practicable,  the  train  should  be  parked  and  the  defense  concen- 
trated; if  the  defense  can  not  be  made  successful,  such  part  of  the 
convoy  as  can  not  escape  by  flight  must  be  destroyed;  the  animals 
must  be  taken  away  or  shot. 


INTRENCHMENTS.  286 

INTBENCHMENTS. 

(See  also  F.  S.  R.) 

832.  Intrenchments  play  an  important  part  in  dismounted 
combat,  and  it  will  often  be  necessary  for  cavalry  to  intrench. 
Such  defenses  will  frequently  enable  the  cavalry  commander  to 
hold  for  the  advancing  infantry  desirable  positions  from  which 
he  would  otherwise  be  compelled  to  withdraw.  ^  Officers  will 
thoroughly  familiarize  themselves  with  this  subject,  and  all 
squadrons  be  given  practical  instruction  therein. 


Part  III.— CEREMONIES. 

REVIEWS,  PARADES,  ESCORTS,  PRESENTATION  TO 
THE  STANDARD,  GUARD  MOUNTING,  HONORS. 

General  Rules  for  Ceremonies. 

833.  On  occasions  of  ceremony,  except  funerals  and  reviews  of 
large  forces,  troops  will  be  arranged  from  right  to  left  in  line,  and 
from  head  to  rear  in  column,  in  the  following  order:  First,  Infan- 
try; second.  Field  Artillery;  third.  Cavalry.  Artillery,  Engineer, 
and  Signal  Corps  troops,  equipped  as  Infantry,  are  posted  as  In- 
fantry; dismounted  Cavalry  and  marines  attached  to  the  Army 
are  on  the  left  of  the  Infantry  in  the  order  named;  companies  or 
detachments  of  the  Hospital  Corps  and  mounted  detachments  of 
Engineers  are  assigned  to  places  according  to  the  nature  of  the 
ceremony;  mounted  companies  and  detachments  of  the  Signal 
Corps  are  posted  as  Cavalry.  When  Cavalry  and  Field  Artillery  are 
reviewed  together  without  other  troops,  the  artillery  is  posted  on 
the  left.  Troops  in  column  in  funeral  escorts  will  be  arranged  from 
head  to  rear  in  the  following  order:  First,  Cavalry;  second.  Field 
Artillery;  third.  Infantry.  In  the  same  arm,  regulars,  militia  in 
the  service  of  the  United  litates,  and  volunteers  are  posted  in  line 
from  right  to  left,  or  in  column  from  head  to  rear,  in  the  order 
named.  In  reviews  of  large  bodies  of  troops  the  different  arms  and 
classes  are  posted  at  the  discretion  of  the  commanding  general, 
due  regard  being  paid  to  their  position  in  camp.  On  all  other 
occasions  troops  of  all  classes  are  posted  at  the  discretion  of  the 
general  or  senior  commander. 

At  the  assembly  for  a  ceremony  squadrons  are  paraded  on  their 
own  ground. 

At  the  trumpet  call  for  assembly  of  the  regiment  the  regiment 
is  formed. 

The  rules  laid  down  for  reviews  furnish  a  guide  for  other  cere- 
monial occasions  for  which  troops  may  be  paraded. 

Note. — Inspections  are  not  ceremonies.  They  are  usually  made  by  the  com- 
mander for  a  general  survey  of  his  unit.  Pie  uses  the  methods  of  the  drill  regula- 
tions in  the  most  practical  manner  for  the  purposes  of  his  inspection. 

The  detailed  inspection  should  be  made  in  the  smaller  units.  As  far  as  possible 
the  unit  should  be  kept  constantly  in  good  condition  by  dailv  special  inspection 
of  some  detail  of  the  armament,  equipment,  clothing,  horses,  Duildings,  etc.  The 
tendency  to  let  things  go  until  a  day  of  periodical  inspection  should  be  systematic- 
ally combatted. 


REVIEWS.  287 

Reviews. 


834.  Reviews  are  held  for  tlie  purpose  of  making  a  general 
inspection  of  the  personnel,  the  mount,  armament,  clothing,  equip- 
ment, and  training  of  a  command;  and  also  as  a  special  honor  to  a 
high  military  authority  or  civil  dignitary. 

The  ofTicer  for  whom  the  review  is  ordered  fixes  the  place,  the 
hour,  and  indicates  the  dress,  the  equipment,  and  the  formation 
desired;  he  also  determines  whether  the  review  is  to  be  followed 
by  evolutions  or  exercises. 

The  post  of  the  reviewing  officer,  usually  opposite  the  center 
of  the  line,  is  indicated  by  a  flag.  . 

Officers  of  the  same  or  higher  grade,  and  distinguished  person- 
ages invited  to  accompany  the  reviewing  officer,  place  themselves 
on  his  left;  their  staffs  and  orderlies  place  themselves,  respectively 
on  the  left  of  the  staff  and  orderlies  of  the  revicAving  ofiicer;  all 
others  who  accompany  the  reviewing  officer  place  themselves  on 
the  left  of  his  staff,  their  orderlies  in  rear.  A  staff  officer  is  desig- 
nated to  escort  distinguished  personages  and  to  indicate  to  them 
their  proper  positions. 

An  organization  will  not  be  reviewed  before  an  inspector  junior 
in  rank  to  the  commanding  officer;  but  he  will  be  given  every  facil- 
ity for  the  purposes  of  his  inspection. 

In  forming  for  review  the  troops  may  be  placed  in  any  regula- 
tion formation  except  that  in  line  the  units  are  not  echeloned, 
and  that  in  line  or  in  mass  the  machine  guns  are  on  the  left  of  the 
regiment  with  6  yards  interval.  The  squadron  is  usually  "i.lii^fj 
it  may  be  in  column;  the  regiment  is  in  line  or  in  mass;  the  brigade 
in  line,  or  in  line  of  masses. 

In  the  march  past,  the  squadron  passes  in  column;  the  regiment 
in  column,  in  column  of  squadrons,  in  double  column  or  in  mass; 
the  bridgade  in  column,  in  column  of  squadrons,  in  double  column, 
or  in  column  of  masses. 

836.  If  the  ground  is  restricted  formations  and  movements  must 
.  be  adapted  to  the  space,  and  intervals  and  distances  reduced. 
The  column  of  squadrons  may  be  formed  from  column  (1.  Squad- 
rons, 2.  Line,  3.  MARCH)  and  to  save  space  this  movement  may 
be  executed  successively  by  the  squadrons  as  each  reaches  the 
line  on  which  it  is  to  march  past. 

836.  In  a  review  of  commands  comprising  the  three  arms,  each 
arm  conforms  to  its  own  regulations  as  far  as  practicable.    Special 


258  REVIEWS. 

arrangements  are  made.    The  breadth  of  front  for  the  march  past 
is  made  as  nearly  as  practicable  the  same  for  the  different  arms. 

837.  In  a  squadron  review  the  trumpeters  of  the  squadron  are 
formed  irf  line  in  single  rank;  in  line  they  are  6  yards  from  Hie 
right  flank,  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank;  in  column  they  are  6 
yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  first  platoon  and  6  yards  in  rear  of 
the  captain. 

The  trumpeters  of  each  regiment,  led  by  the  chief  trumpeter, 
are  imited  in  platoon  formation  in  double  rank.  In  line  and  in 
mass  they  are  placed  6  yards  to  the  right  of  the  regiment,  in  col- 
umn they  are  6  yards  in  advance  of  the  captain  of  the  directing 
squadron  and  6  yards  in  rear  of  the  noncommissioned  staff. 

838.  A  command  upon  reaching  the  ground  is  drawn  up  in  the 
formation  and  upon  the  line  previousljr  determined.  If  it  must 
await  the  arrival  of  other  units  to  take  its  place,  it  is  halted,  dis- 
mounted, and  allowed  to  rest  far  enough  from  the  ground  to  be 
occupied  to  be  out  of  the  way  of  the  neighboring  troops. 

839.  On  the  arrival  of  the  reviewing  oflicer  the  commander 
brings  the  troops  to  attention,  has  sabers  drawn  and  presented, 
and  salutes. 

When  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles  him  to  the  honor, 
each  regimental  standard  salutes  at  the  command:  1.  Present, 
2.  SABER;  the  assembled  trumpeters  sounding  the  march  or 
flourishes.  The  commander  then  has  the  sabers  brought  to  a  carry, 
forms  column,  and  marches  on  a  line  passing  in  front  of  the  review- 
ing point  so  that  the  right  flank  will  pass  at  12  yards. 

Distance  between  regiments  in  brigade  is  50  yards,  between 
brigades  100  yards. 

The  troops  pass  in  review  at  any  gait.  They  may  pass  several 
times,  at  different  gaits;  in  this  case  the  salutes  are  rendered  the  first 
time  only. 

840.  In  the  first  march  past  (at  any  gait)  all  officers  and  all 
commanders  of  platoons,  the  noncommissioned  staff  and  the  gui- 
dons salute.  The  regimental  standards  salute  if  the  rank  of  the 
reviewing  officer  entitles  him  to  the  honor.  The  salute  is  made  at 
12  yards  before  reaching  the  reviewing  officer  and  the  return  to 
carry  saber  immediately  after  passing  him. 

Excepting  those  who  salute,  all  keep  their  heads  and  eyes  to 
the  front. 

The  reviewing  officer  and  others  at  the  reviewing  stand  salute 
tJbie  standard  as  it  passes. 


PARADES.  289 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  sahite  of  the  commanding  officer 
of  the  troops  only.  Those  who  accompany  him  do  not  salute. 
^  After  saluting  the  reviewing  officer,  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  troops  turns  out  of  the  column  and  takes  his  post  on  the  right 
of  the  reviewing  officer,  his  staff  on  the  right  of  the  reviewing 
officer's  staff.  Sabers  are  not  returned.  ^\^en  the  rear  element 
of  his  command  has  passed,  he  salutes  the  reviewing  officer  and 
then  rejoins  his  command.  The  commanding  officer  of  the  troops 
and  his  staff  are  the  only  ones  who  turn  out  of  column. 

841.  If  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer  is  on  the  left  of  the  col- 
umn, the  commanding  officer  and  nis  staff  turn  out  of  the  column 
to  the  left,  taking  post  as  prescribed  above,  but  to  the  left  of  the 
reviewing  officer. 

842.  In  marching  past,  the  trumpeters  on  arriving  at  50  yards 
from^  the  reviewing  officer  sound  a  march  appropriate  to  the  gait, 
continuing  until  they  have  passed  100  yards  beyond  the  reviewing 
point  and  keeping  their  place  in  the  formation. 

843.  The  march  past  will  be  so  regulated  that  the  different  arms 
when  passing  the  reviewing  officer  will  be  separated  by  the  distance 
of  100  yards. 

In  a  brigade  or  larger  review  a  regimental  commander  may  cause 
his  regiment  to  stand  at  ease,  or  he  may  cause  it  to  dismount  and 
rest,  taking  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  ceremony. 

In  reviews  of  brigades  or  larger  commands,  each  regiment  is  care- 
ful not  to  decrease  the  pace  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer  and 
to  so  direct  its  march  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  march  of  the  column 
in  rear;  unless  otherwise  ordered,  it  then  clears  the  head  of  the 
column  and  retiirns  to  camp  by  the  most  practicable  route. 

Parades. 

844.  The  command  is  formally  paraded  for  the  purpose  of  pub- 
lishing complimentary  orders  or  presentation  of  medals,  or  of 
emphasizing  the  importance  of  smartness  in  turnout  of  men  and 
horses  and  of  smoothness  and  life  in  evolution. 

The  command  having  assembled  is  marched  to  the  most  suit- 
able ground,  where  it  is  reviewed.  The  formations  are  selected 
with  an  eye  to  effect,  and  the  review  may  be  followed  by  a  few 
ehowy  evolutions. 

Ud9r—U 19 


290  ESCORTS. 

ESCOBTS. 
ESCORTS   OP  HONOR. 

845.  Escorts  of  honor  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of  receiving 
and  escorting  personages  of  high  rank,  civil  or  military.  The 
troops  for  this  purpose  are  selected  for  their  soldierly  appearance 
and  superior  discipline. 

The  escort  forms  in  line  opposite  the  place  where  the  personage 
presents  himself,  the  trumpeters  on  the  flank  of  the  escort  toward 
which  it  will  march.  On  the  appearance  of  the  personage  he  is 
received  with  the  honors  due  to  his  rank.  The  escort  is  formed 
into  column  of  platoons  or  squads  and  takes  up  the  march,  the 
personage  and  his  sfcaff  or  retinue  taking  positions  in  rear  of  the 
column.  When  he  leaves  the  escort  line  is  formed,  and  the  same 
honors  are  paid  as  before. 

An  officer  is  appointed  to  attend  the  personage  and  bear  such 
communication  as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  commander  of  the 
escort. 

846.  When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable  dis- 
tance from  the  point  where  the  personage  is  to  be  received,  as, 
for  instance,  where  a  courtyard  or  wharf  intervenes,  a  double  line 
of  troopers,  with  intervals,  facing  inward,  may  be  posted  from 
that  point  to  the  escort;  the  troopers  successively  salute  as  he 
passes  and  are  then  relieved  and  join  the  escort, 

FUNERAL  ESCORT. 

847.  The  funeral  escort  of  the  Secretary  of  War  or  General  of 
the  Army  will  consist  of  a  regiment  of  Infantry,  a  squadron  of 
Cavalry,  and  a  battalion  of  Field  Artillery;  of  the  Assistant  Secre- 
tary of  War  or  the  lieutenant  general,  a  regiment  of  Infantry, 
a  squadron  of  Cavalry,  and  a  battery  of  Field  Artillery;  of  a  major 
general,  a  regiment  of  Infantry,  two  platoons  of  Cavalry,  and  a 
battery  of  Field  Artillery;  of  a  brigadier  general,  a  regiment  of 
Infantry,  a  platoon  of  Cavalr^%  and  a  platoon  of  Field  Artillery;  of 
a  colonel,  a  regiment;  a  lieutenant  colonel  or  major,  a  battalion  or 
three  squadrons;  a  captain,  one  company  (squadron  or  battery);  a 
subaltern,  a  platoon. 

The  escort  is  formed  opposite  the  quarters  of  the  deceased;  the 
trumpeters  on  that  flank  of  the  escort  toward  which  it  is  to 
march. 


FTFNERAL  ESCORT.  291 

Upon  the  appearance  of  the  coflin  the  commander  commands: 
J .  Present,  2.  SABEB,  and  the  trumpeters  sound  a  dirge. 

848.  The  coffin  having  been  placed  on  the  caisson  or  hearse  the 
escort  is  next  formed  into  column  of  platoons  or  squads.  The 
procession  is  formed  in  the  following  order:  1.  Trumpeters, 
2.  Escort,  3.  Clergy,  4.  CoflSn  and  pallbearers,  5.  Mourners, 
6.  Members  of  the  former  command  of  the  deceased,  7. 
Other  oflBLcers  and  men,  8.  Distinguished  persons,  9.  Dele- 
gations, 10.  Societies,  11.  Civilians.  Officers  and  men  (Nos. 
6  and  7),  with  side  arms,  are  in  the  order  of  rank,  seniors  in  front. 

The  escort  marches  slowly,  the  trumpeters  playing  a  dirge. 
The  column  having  arrived  opposite  the  grave,  line  is  formed 
facing  it. 

849.  The  coffin  is  then  carried  along  the  front  of  the  escort  to 
the  grave;  sabers  are  presented,  the  trumpeters  sound  a  dirge, 
and  the  coffin  having  been  placed  over  the  grave,  sabers  are  brought 
to  the  carry. 

During  the  funeral  service  officers  and  men  bow  the  head. 

850.  When  the  funeral  services  are  completed  and  the  coffin 
lowered  into  the  grave  the  commander  causes  the  escort  to  return 
saber  and  dismounts  it  (To  fire  on  foot)  (substituting  the  words 
**To  fire"  for  To  fight).  He  assembles  the  command  and  fires 
three  rounds  of  blank  cartridges  over  the  grave,  the  muzzles  of 
the  rifles  being  elevated.  When  the  escort  is  greater  than  a 
squadron,  one  squadron  is  designated  to  dismoimt  and  fire  the 
volleys. 

A  trumpeter  then  sounds  taps. 

851.  The  escort  is  then  formed  into  column,  marched  to  th« 
point  where  it  was  assembled,  and  dismissed. 

The  trumpeters  do  not  play  until  they  have  left  the  inclosure. 

When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  considerable, 
the  escort,  after  having  left  the  camp  or  garrison,  may  march 
at  ease  until  it  approaches  the  burial  ground,  when  it  is  brought 
to  attention. 

852.  At  the  funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  man,  his  horse,  in 
mourning  caparison,  follows  the  hearse. 

853.  Should  the  entrance  to  the  cemetery  prevent  the  caisson's 
accompanying  the  escort  to  the  grave,  the  column  is  halted  at  the 
entrance  long^  enough  to  take  the  coflSn  from  the  caisson,  when  it 
is  again  put  in  march.  The  Cavalry  and  Artillery,  when  unable 
to  enter  the  inclosure,  turn  out,  face  the  column,  and  salute  the 


292  PRESENTATION  TO  THE  STANDARD. 

remains  as  they  pass.  If  necessary,  the  Cavaby  may  be  dis- 
mounted to  fire  on  foot,  assembled,  and  marched  into  the  cemetery. 

864.  When  the  remains  are  escorted  from  the  quarters  of  the 
deceased  to  the  church  before  the  funeral  service,  arms  are  pre- 
sented upon  receiving  them  and  as  they  are  borne  into  the  church. 

The  commander  of  the  escort,  previous  to  the  funeral,  gives  the 
clergyman  and  pallbearers  all  needful  directions. 

866.  Funeral  ceremonies,  dismounted,  are  conducted  according 
to  the  same  principles.  After  the  coffin  has  been  placed  over  the 
grave  the  command  is  brought  to  parade  rest,  and  heads  are  bowed 
during  the  ser^dce. 

Presentation  to  the  Standard. 

866.  At  least  twice  a  year  the  regiment  will  be  formally  pre- 
sented to  its  standards.  At  this  ceremony  special  effort  is  made 
to  have  all  new  men  present. 

The  regiment  being  in  mass,  the  colonel  sends  a  squadron, 
accompanied  by  the  assembled  trumpeters,  to  receive  the  stand- 
ards and  escort  them  to  the  regiment. 

The  escort  moves  out  in  column,  the  standard  bearers  at  the 
center  of  the  column,  and  marches  without  music  to  the  colonel's 
office  or  quarters,  where  it  forms  line  and  halts,  facing  the  en- 
trance, and  draws  sabers.  The  trumpeters  take  post  on  the  flank 
toward  which  the  escort  is  to  march  in  returning. 

The  senior  lieutenant,  the  standard  bearers,  and  a  sergeant 
designated  by  the  captain  dismount  in  front  of  the  colonel's  quar- 
ters, their  horses  being  held  by  a  trumpeter. 

The  standard  bearers,  preceded  by  the  lieutenant  and  followed 
by  the  sergeant,  then  enter  the  building  to  receive  the  standards. 

The  standard  bearers  reappear,  followed  by  the  lieutenant  and 
sergeant.  They  mount  and  form  facing  the  center  of  the  escort, 
the  lieutenant  on  the  right,  the  sergeant  on  the  left,  the  trumpeter 
returning  to  his  place  with  the  assembled  trumpeters. 

The  captain  then  commands:  1.  Present,  2.  SABEK.  The 
trumpeters  sound  to  the  standard,  the  guidon  saluting. 

Sabers  are  brought  to  the  carry,  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant 
return  to  their  posts;  the  squadron  forms  column,  the  standard 
bearers  placing  themselves  in  the  center,  and  mai'ches  at  a  walk 
to  trumpet  music  back  to  the  regiment.  As  the  escort  approaches, 
the  regiment  is  brought  to  attention  and  sabers  are  drawn.    The 


GUARD  MOUNTING,  MOUNTED.  298 

escort  approaches  the  regiment  so  as  to  pass  along  the  front  at  100 
yards. 

When  the  standards  arrive  opposite  the  colonel  the  standard 
bearers  turn  out  of  column  and,  advancing  toward  the  colonel, 
halt  at  12  yards  in  front  of  him. 

The  trumpeters  cease  playing,  take  up  the  trot,  and  move 
quickly  to  their  post  on  the  right;  the  escort  trots  to  its  place  in 
the  regiment. 

When  the  escort  and  trumpeters  have  reached  their  places 
the  colonel  faces  the  regiment  and  commands:  1.  Present,  2. 
SABEB.  The  guidons  salute.  The  colonel,  faces  the  standards 
and  salutes,  the  trumpeters  sounding  To  the  Standard.  The 
national  and  regimental  standards  salute. 

The  colonel  then  faces  about  and  commands:  1.  Carry,  2. 
SABEB.  He  may  address  the  regiment  in  remarks  appropriate 
to  the  occasion.  The  standards  then  take  their  places  in  the  regi- 
ment with  the  guard  of  the  standard. 

The  regiment  is  then  marched  to  trumpet  music  toward  the 
colonel's  quarters  as  far  as  it  can  conveniently  go,  when  the  colonel 
halts  it  and  commands:  Dismiss  your  Squadrons.  The  stand- 
ards are  escorted  by  the  guard  of  the  standard  to  the  colonel's 
quarters,  and  the  squadrons  are  marched  off  and  dismissed. 

Guard  Mounting,  Mounted. 

857.  The  organization  designated  for  guard  is  paraded  and 
inspected  by  its  commander  on  its  own  parade  ground.  It 
marches  with  sabers  drawn  to  the  post  of  the  guard  to  the  music 
of  its  trumpeters  or  of  the  assembled  trumpeters  of  the  regiment. 

As  the  n.ew  guard  approaches  the  post  of  the  guard  the  old 
guard  is  formed  in  line,  sabers  at  the  carry,  its  trumpeters  2 
yards  to  its  right.  The  new  guard  is  marched  so  as  to  pass  in 
front  of  the  old  from  left  to  right.  As^it  approaches  the  left  of 
the  old  guard  the  latter  presents  sabers  and  returns  to  the  carry 
when  it  has  passed. 

The  new  guard  marches,  at  the  walk,  past  the  old  guard,  com- 
manders of  both  guards  saluting,  and  forms  line  on  the  right  of 
the  old  guard. 

The  commander  of  each  guard  then  commands:  1.  Present, 
2.  SABEB;  salutes  the  commander  of  the  other  guard  and  then 
commands:  1.  Carry,  2.  SABEB. 


294  HONORS  AND  SALUTES. 

Wben  the  commander  of  the  organization  is  not  the  officer  of 
the  day,  the  guard  is  brought  to  attention  upon  the  approach  of 
tJie  latter,  the  officer  of  the  guard  commanding:  1.  Present, 
2.  SABEB,  and  saluting.  The  officer  of  the  day  returns  the 
salute;  the  officer  of  the  guard  then  commands:  1.  Carry,  2. 
SABER;  1.  Return,  2.  SABER. 

The  details  of  relieving  guard  are  found  in  the  Manual  of  Guard 
Duty. 

While  the  sentinels  and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  being 
relieved,  both  guards  stand  at  ease;  or  if  the  delay  is  considerable, 
they  are  dismounted  and  rested.  If  the  trumpeters  of  the  regi- 
ment are  assembled  they  play  from  time  to  time  while  the  guard 
is  being  relieved. 

The  detachments  and  sentinels  of  the  old  guard  as  they  are 
relieved  and  come  in  form  on  its  left.  Both  guards  then  come 
to  attention  and  draw  sabers.  The  old  guard  is  marched  off  past 
the  front  of  the  new  guard,  which  presents  sabers,  the  commanders 
of  both  guards  saluting. 

If  the  trumpeters  of  the  regiment  are  present  they  take  their 
place  ahead  of  the  old  guard  as  it  passes  the  new  guard.  The 
trumpeters  sound  a  march  as  soon  as  the  new  guard  has  presented 
sabers. 

The  old  guard  marches  with  trumpet  music  to  its  own  parade 
ground  where  it  is  dismissed. 

Guard  mounting,  dismounted,  is  conducted  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples. The  post  band  replaces  the  trumpeters  for  marching  and 
plays  concert  music  while  the  guard  is  being  relieved. 

Honors  and  Salutes. 

868.  The  President  and  the  Vice  President  will  be  received 
with  regimental  standards  dropping,  officers  and  troops  saluting, 
and  the  bands  playing  ''The  Star  Spangled  Banner,''  or  trumpeters 
sounding  ''To  the  Standard."  Officers  of  the  following  grades  of 
rank  will  be  received  with  regimental  standards  dropping,  officers 
and  troops  saluting,  and  the  bands  or  trumpeters  playing,  as 
follows:  The  general,  the  General's  March;  the  lieutenant  gen- 
eral, trumpets  sounding  3  flourishes;  a  major  general,  2  flourishes; 
a  brigadier  general,  1  flourish. 

To  the  members  of  the  Cabinet,  the  Chief  Justice,  the  President 
pro  tempore  of  the  Senate,  the  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, American  or  foreign  ambassadors,  and  governors  within 


HONOES  AND  SALUTES.  295 

their  respective  States  and  Territories  the  same  honors  are  paid 
as  to  the  general,  except  that  a  foreign  ambassador  will  be  re- 
ceived with  the  national  air  of  his  country,  and  that  the  number 
of  guns  fired  as  personal  salute  will  be  as  prescribed  in  the  Army- 
Regulations ;  to  the  Assistant  Secretary  of  War  and  to  American 
or  foreign  envoys  or  ministers  the  same  honors  as  to  the  lieutenant 
general;  to  officers  of  the  Navy  the  honors  due  to  their  relative 
rank;  to  officers  of  marines  and  volunteers,  and  militia  when  in 
the  service  of  the  United  States,  the  honors  due  to  like  grades  in 
the  Regular  service;  to  officers  of  a  foreign  service  the  honors  due 
to  their  rank. 

869.  The  national  or  regimental  standard,  uncased,  passing  a 
guard  or  other  armed  body  will  be  saluted,  the  field  music  sound- 
ing '^To  the  Standard. '^  Officers  or  enlisted  men  passing  the 
uncased  standard  will  render  the  prescribed  salute;  with  no  arms 
in  hand,  the  salute  will  be  the  hand  salute,  the  headdress  not  to 
be  removed. 

860.  When  the  ''Star  Spangled  Banner"  is  played  at  retreat 
at  a  military  post  or  at  "Colors"  on  a  transport,  officers  and  men 
stand  at  attention,  facing  the  music,  retaining  that  position  until 
the  last  note  of  the  air,  and  then  salute. 

On  other  occasions  when  the  "Star  Spangled  Banner"  is  played 
where  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are  present  in 
their  official  capacity,  or  present  unofficially  but  in  uniform, 
officers  and  men  will  stand  at  attention,  facing  toward  the  music 
and  salute,  retaining  the  position  of  salute  until  the  last  note  of 
the  air. 

861.  Abroad,  or  when  representatives  of  foreign  services  are 
present,  care  will  be  taken  to  conform  to  generally  accepted  mili- 
tary customs  and  courtesies. 

862.  No  honors  are  paid  by  troops  when  on  the  march,  in 
trenches,  or  on  outpost,  except  that  they  may  be  called  to  atten- 
tion; no  salute  is  rendered  when  marching  in  double  time. 

In  approaching  or  passing  each  other  within  saluting  distance 
individuals  or  bodies  of  troops  exchange  salutes  when  at  a  distance 
of  about  6  paces.  If  they  do  not  approach  each  other  that  closely 
the  salute  is  exchanged  at  the  point  of  nearest  approach. 

Arms  are  not  presented  by  troops  except  in  the  ceremonies  and  in 
saluting  the  color. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  salutes  ail  general  officers  and 
the  commander  of  his  post,  regiment,  or  squadron,  by  bringing  his 


296  IIONOES  AND  SALUTES. 

command  to  attention  and  saluting  in  person.  The  troops  are 
brought  to  attention  in  time  to  permit  the  salute  to  be  rendered  at 
the  prescribed  distance;  they  are  held  at  attention  until  after  the 
salute  has  been  acknowledged. 

When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in  rear  of  a  body  of 
troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite  the  post  of  the 
commander. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  salutes  in  person  all  officers 
senior  to  him  in  grade,  other  than  those  above  specified,  without 
bringing  the  troops  to  attention.  A  noncommissioned  officer  com- 
manding a  detachment  will  bring  it  to  attention  before  saluting 
an  officer. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  exchanges  salutes  with  the 
commanders  of  other  bodies  of  troops;  the  troops  are  brought  to 
attention  during  the  exchange. 

An  officer  commanding  a  body  of  troops  is  saluted  by  all  officers 
junior  to  him  in  grade,  and  by  men  out  of  ranks.  He  does  not 
acknowledge  these  salutes. 

Salutes  are  not  exchanged  while  engaged  in  drill  or  exercises. 

863.  When  making  or  receiving  official  reports  all  officers  will 
salute,  if  covered;  if  uncovered,  they  stand  at  attention.  A\hen 
under  arms,  the  salute  is  made  with  the  saber,  if  drawn,  otherwise 
with  the  hand.  On  meeting,  all  officers  salute  when  covered;  when 
uncovered,  they  exchange  the  courtesies  observed  between  gentle- 
men. In  the  observance  of  this  rule  officers  should  set  a  high  stand- 
ard as  an  example  to  their  men.  Military  courtesy  requires  the 
junior  to  salute  first,  but  when  the  salute  is  introductory  to  a  report 
made  at  a  military  ceremony  or  formation  to  the  representative  of  a 
common  superior — as,  for  example,  to  the  adjutant,  officer  of  the 
day,  etc. — the  officer  making  the  report,  whatever  his  rank,  will 
salute  first;  the  officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowl- 
edge, by  saluting,  if  covered,  or  verbally,  if  uncovered,  that  he  has 
received,  and  understood  the  report. 

Uncovering  is  not  a  form  of  the  prescribed  salute,  and  the  hand 
salute  is  executed  only  when  covered. 

864.  Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition  is  easy. 
In  general  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces.  Officers  are  saluted  whether 
in  uniform  or  not. 

On  all  occasions  outdoors,  and  also  in  public  places,  such  as 
stores,  theaters,  railway  and  steamboat  stations,  and  the  like,  the 
salute  to  any  person  whatever  by  officers  and  enlisted  men  in  uni- 
form, with  no  arms  in  hand,  whether  on  or  off  duty,  shall  be  the 
hand  salute,  the  headdress  not  to  be  removed. 


HONORS  AND  SALUTES.  297 

Indoors,  except  as  provided  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  an 
unarmed  enlisted  man  uncovers  and  stands  at  attention  upon  the 
approach  of  an  officer.  If  armed  with  the  rifle,  he  makes  the  rifle 
sahite. 

An  enlisted  man,  armed  with  the  saber  and  out  of  ranks,  salutes 
all  officers  with  the  saber,  if  drawn;  otherwise  he  salutes  with  the 
hand.    If  on  foot  and  armed  with  a  rifle,  he  makes  the  rifle  salute. 

Men  out  of  doors  and  armed  with  the  rifle,  salute  with  the  rifle  on 
either  shoulder;  if  indoors  the  rifle  salute  is  rendered  at  the  order 
or  trail. 

An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an  officer, 
faces  toward  him,  and,  if  covered,  salutes;  if  uncovered,  he  stands 
at  attention.  Standing,  he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  piurpose. 
If  the  parties  remain  in  the  same  place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such 
complmients  need  not  be  repeated.  Soldiers  actually  at  work  do 
not  cease  work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  soldiers,  the  word 
** Attention"  is  given  by  some  one  who  perceives  him,  when  all 
rise  and  remain  standing  in  the  position  of  a  soldier  until  the  officer 
leaves  the  room.     Soldiers  at  meals  do  not  rise. 

Before  addressing  an  officer,  an  enlisted  man  makes  the  pre- 
scribed salute.  He  again  salutes  after  receiving  a  reply.  If  uncov- 
ered, he  stands  at  attention  without  saluting. 

Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay  the  same  compli- 
ments to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Corps,  and  Volunteers, 
and  to  officers  of  the  Organized  Militia,  or  of  foreign  services,  in  uni- 
form, as  to  officers  of  their  own  regiment,  corps,  or  arm  of  service. 

Officers  will  acknowledge  the  courtesies  of  enlisted  men  by 
returning  their  salutes  smartly  and  promptly.  When  several  offi- 
cers in  company  are  saluted,  all  return  it. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

Service  Calls. 

865.  First  call ,  full  dress,  overcoats,  drill,  stable,  ivater,  and  boots 
and  saddles  precede  tlie  assembly  by  such,  inten'^al  as  may  be  pre- 
scribed by  the  commanding  officer. 

In  camp,  where  the  men  are  near  their  horses  and  known  to  be 
present,  the  assembly  may  be  sounded  immediately  after  boots  and 
saddles,  in  which  case  the  men  immediately  proceed  to  the  horses 
and  saddle. 

Mess,  church,  and  fatigue  may  also  be  used  as  warning  calls. 

First  call  is  a  call  for  formation  on  foot  only;  it  does  not  precede 
and  is  not  used  in  connection  with  other  warning  calls,  except /w/Z 
dress  and  overcoats. 

Boots  and  saddles  is  the  call  for  mounted  formations;  for  mounted 
drills  it  immediately  follows  the  drill  call. 

When  full  dress  or  overcoats  are  to  be  worn  the  full  dress  or  over- 
coats call  immediately  follows  first  call  or  boots  and  saddles. 

Call  to  quarters;  the  call  for  the  men  to  go  to  their  quarters. 

Assembly;  the  call  for  the  platoons  or  details  to  fall  in.  The 
platoons  are  assembled  in  the  squadron  as  soon  as  practicable  with- 
out further  signal. 

Regimental  assembly;  the  call  for  squadrons  to  form  regiment;  it 
consists  of  the  regiment,  followed  by  assembly;  it  follows  the  assem- 
tdy  at  such  interval  as  ma^^  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

To  the  standard  18  sounded  when  the  standard  salutes. 

The  general  is  the  signal  for  striking  tents  and  loading  wagons 
preparatory  to  marching. 

Reveille  is  the  call  sounded  at  the  beginning  of  the  day;  retreat 
is  the  call  sounded  at  the  close  of  the  day  or  at  sunset;  tattoo  is  a 
call  sounded  in  the  evening  between  retreat  and  call  to  quarters. 
When  roll  calls  are  held  on  these  occasions  reveille  and  tattoo  precede 
the  assembly  at  such  intervals  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  com- 
manding officer;  the  retreat  follows  the  assembly,  the  interval  being 
only  that  required  for  formation  and  roll  call. 

Taps  is  the  signal  for  extinguishing  lights;  it  is  usually  preceded 
hj  call  to  quarters  at  such  interval  as  the  commanding  officer  may 
direct. 

298 


TRTTMPET  CALLS. 


fm 


Assembly,  reveille,  retreat,  to  the  standard,  the  flourishes,  and  the 
mardies  are  soundea  by  all  the  trumpeters  united;  the  other  calls, 
as  a  rule,  are  sounded  by  the  trumpeter  of  the  guard  or  orderly 
trumpeter;  he  may  also  sound  the  assembly  when  the  trumpeters 
are  not  united. 

The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  reveille;  or,  if  marches 
are  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the  commencement  of  the 
first  march. 

The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

Fire  call;  the  call  for  the  men  to  fall  in  without  arms  to  extinguish 
fire. 

To  arms;  the  call  for  the  men  to  fall  in  under  arms,  dismounted, 
on  their  squadron  parade  grounds  as  quickly  as  possible. 

To  horse;  the  call  for  the  men  to  go  under  arms  to  their  horses, 
saddle,  mount,  and  assemble  at  a  designated  place  as  quickly  as 
possible. 

Drill  Calls. 

It  will  be  observed  that  captains  (or  squadron  commanders)  is  the 
first  two  bars  of  officers  with  the  attention  added. 

In  sounding  the  calls  for  simultaneous  movements,  the  call 
platoons,  squadrons,  or  regiments  precedes  the  preliminary  call  for 
the  movement. 

The  calls  are  sounded  in  the  same  order  as  the  commands  are 
prescribed  in  the  text. 

Gangway  is  sounded  to  clear  the  way  or  to  warn  other  troops  that 
a  passage  is  desired. 

List  of  trumpet  calls. 


1.  Firs  I  call. 

2.  Trumpeters. 

3.  Full  dress. 

4.  Overcoats. 

5.  Drill. 

6.  Stable. 

7.  Water. 

8.  Boots    and    sad- 

dles. 

9.  Assembly. 

10.  Reveille. 

11.  Retreat. 


SERVICE   CALLS. 

12.  Tattoo. 

13.  Call  to  quartern. 

14.  Taps. 

15.  Mess. 

16.  Sick. 

17.  Church. 

18.  Issue. 

19.  Fatigue. 

20.  School. 

21.  Recall. 

22.  Officers. 


23.  Captains  (or 

squadron  com- 
manders), 

24.  First  sergeants. 

25.  To  the  standard. 

26.  The    General's 

March. 

27.  The  flourish. 

28.  The  general. 

29.  Fire. 

30.  To  arms. 

31.  To  horse. 


800 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 


FIELD   CALLS. 

A 

32. 

March,  or  execu 

-    41.  Charge.                   50. 

As  foragers. 

tion. 

42.  Right.                    51. 

Rally. 

33. 

Attention. 

43.  Left.                       52. 

To  fight  on  foot 

34. 

Prepare    to    44.  To  the  rear.           53. 

As     skirmishers 

mount. 

45.  Column.                 54. 

Commence   fir- 

35. 

Prepare    to    dis 

-    46.  Line. 

ing. 

mount. 

47.  Platoons.                55. 

Cease  firing. 

36. 

Forward. 

48.  Squadron   or  56. 

Route  order. 

37. 

Halt. 

squadrons.          57. 

Gangway. 

38. 

Walk. 

49.  Regiment  or 

39. 

Trot. 

regiments. 

40. 

Gallop. 

First     ^ 
Second 

SQUADRON   CALLS. 

Third 
Fourth 

>To  be  preceded  by  "Squad 

ron.'» 

Fifth 

Sixth   . 

REGIMENTAL  CALLS. 


A  short  distinctive  regimental  call  for  each  regiment. 


THE  GUIDON. 

866.  The  squadron  guidon  appears  at  ceremonies,  where  it  is 
carried  by  a  noncommissioned  officer  riding  one  yard  to  the  left  of 
the  leader  of  the  directing  platoon  and  one  yard  less  advanced.  In 
campaign  it  is  carried  at  the  head  of  the  squadron  and  indicates 
the  position  of  the  squadron  on  the  march  and  in  camp.  It  is  not 
earned  into  action  nor  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy. 

Position  op  Carry  Guidon  (dismounted). 

867.  The  lance  of  the  guidon  is  held  vertically  in  the  right 
hand,  thumb  in  front  of  the  lance,  forefinger  along  the  side,  ferrule 
about  6  inches  from  the  ground.  In  marching  at  attention  it  is 
thus  carried. 

Position  of  Order  Guidon. 

868.  The  ferrule  of  the  lance  rests  on  the  ground  on  a  line  and 
touching  the  toe  of  the  right  shoe;  the  right  hand  grasps  the  lance 
in  the  same  manner  as  when  at  a  carry. 

Parade  rest  is  executed  as  with  the  nfle,  except  that  the  forearms 
are  nearly  horizontal. 

At  the  command  attention,  resume  the  order. 

The  order  and  parade  rest  are  executed  with  the  squadron;  the 
carry  at  the  command  right  shoulder  arms. 

At  stand  to  horse,  the  ferrule  of  the  lance  rests  on  the  ground  on 
a  line  with  and  touching  the  toe  of  the  left  shoe,  lance  vertical, 
left  hand,  grasping  the  lance,  at  the  height  of  the  neck,  elbow  and 
forearm  closed  against  the  lance. 

At  the  command  prepare  to  mount,  raise  the  lance  from  the 
ground  while  stepping  back;  upon  halting  place  the  ferrule  on  tlie 
ground  about  one  foot  in  front  of  the  horse's  left  foot. 

869.  After  mounting,  grasp  the  lance  with  the  right  hand  under 
the  left,  which  lets  go  of  it  without  quitting  the  reins;  raise  the 
lance  over  the  horse's  neck  under  the  reins,  lower  and  place  the 
ferrule  in  the  stirrup  socket;  the  right  hand  then  grasps  the  lance, 
forearm  nearly  horizontal,  the  arm  through  the  sling,  lance  verti- 
cal.    This  is  the  position  of  carry  guidon^  mounted. 

The  guidon  executes  the  salute  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the 
standard. 

301 


THE  STANDABD. 

870.  The  word  ''standard"  implies  the  national  standard;  it 
includes  the  regimental  standard. 

The  silken  national  and  regimental  standards  are  carried  in 
battle,  campaign,  and  on  occasions  of  ceremony  at  regimental  head- 
quarters in  which  two  or  more  squadrons  of  the  regiment  participate. 

In  ceremonies  the  standards  with  their  guards  are  3  yards  to 
the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  right  center  squadron  in  line,  in 
line  of  columns,  in  mass,  and  in  double  column;  in  column  they 
follow  the  center  squadron  at  6  yards,  the  distance  of  the  following 
subdivision  being  increased  accordingly.  In  action  the  position 
and  role  of  the  standards  T\all  be  indicated  by  the  colonel,  who  may, 
through  their  display,  inspire  enthusiasm  and  maintain  the  morale; 
he  may,  however,  hold  them  back  when  they  might  indicate  to 
the  enemy  the  direction  of  the  main  attack,  betray  the  position 
of  the  main  body,  or  tend  to  commit  the  regiment  to  defensive 
action.  In  the  presence  of  the  enemy  and  during  the  *  'approach  " 
the  standards  aie  carried  cased,  ready  to  be  instantly  broken  out 
when  their  inspiration  is  required . 

In  garrison  the  standards,  when  not  in  use,  are  kept  in  the  office 
or  quarters  of  the  colonel,  and  are  escorted  thereto  and  therefrom 
by  the  guard  of  the  standard;  in  camp  they  are  in  front  of  the 
colonel's  tent.  From  reveille  to  retreat,  when  the  weather  permits, 
they  are  displayed  uncased;  from  retreat  to  reveille  ana  during 
inclement  weather  they  are  cased. 

Standards  are  said  U^  be  cased  when  furled  and  protected  by  the 
oilcloth  covering. 

The  regimental  standard  salutes  only  in  the  ceremony  of  presenta- 
tion to  the  standard  and  when  saluting  an  officer  entitled  to  the 
honor. 

The  national  standard  renders  no  salute  except  in  the  ceremony 
of  presentation  to  the  standard. 

The  manual  of  the  standard  is  as  prescribed  for  the  guidon,  excej)t 
that  at  carry  standard,  dismounted,  the  ferrule  of  the  lance  is 
supported  at  the  right  hip. 

871.  Standard  salute,  mounted:  Lower  the  standard  to  the  front 
until  the  lance  (under  the  right  arm)  is  horizontal. 

302 


THE  STANDARD.  408 

Dismounted;  Slip  the  right  hand  up  the  lance  as  high  as  the  eye, 
then  lower  the  lance  to  the  front  by  straightening  the  right  arm 
to  its  full  extent. 

If  marching,  the  salute  is  executed  when  at  12  yards  from  the 
officer  entitled  to  the  salute;  the  carry  is  resumed  immediately 
after  passing  him. 

At  the  halt,  the  salute  is  executed  at  the  command:  1.  Present, 
2.  SABER  (or  2.  ARMS);  the  carry  is  resumed  at  the  com- 
mand, 1.  Carry,  2.  SABER  (or  Order  Arms). 

872.  The  guard  of  the  standard  consists  of  two  color  sergeants, 
who  are  the  standard  bearers,  and  two  experienced  privates  selected 
by  the  colonel.  The  senior  color  sergeant  carries  the  national 
standard;  the  junior  color  sergeant  carries  the  regimental  standard. 
The  regimental  standard  is  always  on  the  left  of  the  national 
standard. 

The  guard  of  the  standard  is  formed  and  marched  in  one  rank, 
the  standard  bearers  in  the  center.  It  salutes  when  the  standard 
salutes.  It  presents  saber  at  command  of  the  standard  bearer  in 
receiving  and  parting  with  the  standards;  in  the  latter  case  the 
guard  returns  to  the  carry  at  the  command  of  its  senior  member. 


Appendix  A. 

TRUMPET  MUSIC. 
SERVICE  CALLS, 


To  ccoiioniize  space,  the  music  is  written  an  octave  higher  than  the  trumpet  scale, 
and  is  adjusted  to  the  scale  of  the  bugle. 


1.  FIRST  MUSIC 


Qtlick. 


2.  TRUMPETERS. 


QuicK. 


xn\  rj^ 


^SEf 


3.  FULL  DRESS. 


Q}i.ick. 


APPENDIX  A. 
4.  OVERCOATS. 


305 


^^^^^^^^ 


5.  DRILL. 


^^^^^^^ 


6.  STABLE. 


Quick, 


i^^tFB^T^^^ 


NtTffff=^t^^^33 


34396*— 14- — 20 


$06 


APPENDIX  A. 
7.  WATER. 


Quick, 


i 


-M  # 


W- 


8.  BOOTS  AND  SADDLES. 


Quick, 


^tffWt^B^^ 


9.  ASSEMBLY. 


Moderate, 


^m 


pjf^j-rjT — psx 


f^^==^'^^^^+f— L3^t=f 


10.  REVEILLE. 


^#ffl^tP^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
11.  RETREAT. 


SOT 


Moderate, 


^^^^^^^^m 


$ 


S^jggg 


i 


i=m^=mE^i^^m 


*^?s 


^ESJ=?E^ 


m 


^::p 


^^ 


£ 


g=E 


^ 


11^^ 


S 


S^fe^ 


I 


-«- 


JEEE;faE 


108                                         APPENDIX  A. 

RETREAT— Continued . 

ft/ 

^— J — J 4i J — J J J—J 

_-| 

12.  TATTOO. 


Quick, 


^IheE 


Ipl 


-^ ^ ^ 


# 4—4-4— & 


|E;^££^SiE^EfEfeig^^ 


§gp^i^ 


^ ^*,^-V— ^-1 


I^^Slj^^gfl^Hg 


Ig^ggpSife^Jt^^^ 


i^si^^p^^ 


APPENDIX  A. 

TATTOO— Continued . 


309 


gl^SJ^'^fS^ 


^^Sf^^l^y 


i 


2~^3S 


1^ 


eS 


g^g^slE^^i^ 


i^^gl^^i^iP 


I^^^P^^^^^ 


l^l^^JE^gjJ^i^gP 


sto 


APPENDIX  A. 
TATTOO— Continued. 


2±fcJf!^i§^S 


■•-*- 


,p_:  + 


a=?t 


$^^^S^^m^l^^^ 


^=a^^s^E^ 


U^0. 


^%-%^^^ 


-#-*-• — #- 


I^IjOF- 


s 


^=zit 


s^ 


I 


^p 


p^ 


=S:xit-- 


l^-g^^^^ 


1^ 

1-1 


n- 


-=3- 


#  b^i  — #■ 


m 


^ 


APPENDIX  A. 
TATTOO — Continued . 


311 


-N- 


^^EJ^E^jgnS^g^ 


g 


=^1=; 


^^^^^^^p 


13.  CALL  TO  QUARTERS. 


I 


Slow. 


W—i- 


-^=+ 


4?=«^ 


=^ 


-<2— («^ 


-*— i — hat- 


^ 


#-=^- 


T-#- 


ijin^rzjii 


fe 


/^    /TN       /T\ 


^ 


-f- 


<Sio«?. 


Ee; 


-^ 


14.  TAPS. 


^^ 


±at 


^§^^=^-Cm 


^ 


-«^^#- 


312 


APPENDIX  A. 
15.  MESS. 


Quick. 


^=s3=^ 


SEg 


hW4    I      f- 


f f~^- 


#■■  ^  -y- 


_/g     I       ^-4 


-^ /* 


tz=t--=2:: 


-#— ^-(«-^-^ 


-_E^ 


._l — i — f: 


-gi — 1— ^- 


5^^ 


^^^ 


16.  SICK. 


^ 


F-Sl 


jtf^^Hf--jfii'4r-f 


J=:60 


17.  CHURCH. 

r    I  I  ,r  r— 


^fc 


APPENDIX  A. 


18.  ISSUE. 


313 


Allegro.  ^___« ^  ^ 


t 


^tticfe. 


19.  FATIGUE. 

t 


^^ 


S 


z^zqi: 


^ — fif  01  ft.. 


m 


-jr-f-yzz 


i=: 


% 


m^ 


Q^ick, 


20.  SCHOOL. 


?^S 


-^• 


F^ 


#  tf 


^^^aa^^SRS^^g^f^ 


814 


APPENDIX  A. 
21.  BECALIi. 


Moderato. 


22.  OFFICERS. 


„       Qaiek. 

'^:^=^^--f-iT=^^ 

:§-8-r — ^- 

L-H-H !      *— ^     — 1 V 

I 


g=Tl'=Pl'=^3g 


^ 


28.  CAPTAINS  (OR  SQUADRON  COMMANDERS). 


24.  FIRST  SERGEANTS. 


APPENDIX  A. 


31^ 


25.  TO  THE  STANDARD. 


QuicJc  time. 


-i«-^-#- 


^ — r=^ 


-^^m 


-a- 


q^Pif- 


— I HibJ- 


tzzipipi 


J5:nd. 


^^s^ 


.=».    .f    f  f-f— f-gl 


D.C. 


Ega? 


26.  THE  GENERAL'S  MARCH. 


^^^ 


h         '     J 


m 


^SF 


-J -J^2-5^ 


E§3^SL^^ 


i::^-^ 


^ 


3«^ 


:3=:*e: 


-3-*- 


--f^ 


^f^ 


^^g^^ 


316 


Quick. 


APPENDIX  A. 
27.  THE  FLOTJBISH. 


pE|— H^^E^^E^ 


28.  THE  GENERAL. 


Quick. 


::#— (•-•^^(*^~ 


-^— ^-^-^-^-^e. 


-  j 1 } —a r-         — — I        — 3- — —     d  f"r 


i: 


?ii:S^gSS 


^tE^tt£t5El'^^2^:^ 


,.?E3zl!=*: 


^^^SI^B^^^ 


p^g 


f=«^^=i5i^=irl= 


^-^ 


-X 


i 


APPENDIX  A. 
ALARMS. 
29.  FIRE. 


817 


-V        Qnich.    /PS ^    


i 


^^.^^^r^^^^^^E:^ 


■*  T-^ 


P 


aL^aln  f^ 


;     ,..r,. 


Repeat  at  wiU, 


^M 


££a^==N=Fyr-^f4^ 


<2-. 


I 


QificA:. 


^ 


30.  TO  ARMS 


e 


^^^ 


^ 


■Iff  *.^.^..±^ 


•  (g  y-.±-jg-^. 


Eepeai  at  will. 


31.  TO  HORSE. 


Presto. 


■ — *  MIW 


818 


APPENDIX  A. 
FIBLI)  CALLS. 
32.  MARCH  OR  EXECUTION. 


t 


33.  ATTENTION. 


M 


34.  PREPARE  TO  MOUNT. 
3  3  y^f 


'^S—0    0    \^      Fh— ! — ! — w^^^— 


36.  PREPARE  TO  DISMOUNT. 


-l>-~f*   #-^=^ 


36.  FORWARD. 


i 


Slow, 


3     # 


APPENDIX  A. 
37.  HALT. 


n9 


i 


^ 


38.  WALK. 


Slow. 


39.  TROT. 


A     Quvclt. 


40.  GALLOP. 


rnrl 


1  r  r  f  ^  r  r  r  v" !  r  r= 


41.  CHARGE. 


APPENDIX  A. 
42.  RIGHT. 


43.  LEFT. 


i 


J.=120 


r=g 


^ 


44.   TO  THE   REAR. 


W 


Slow 


=^ 


45.  COLUMN. 


J. =90 


46.  LINE. 


J  =  100 


APPENDIX  A. 
47.  PLATOONS. 


Quick. 


381 


48.  SQUADRON  OR   SQUADRONS. 

Quick. 


li^^si^si: 


^7\ 


49.  REGIMENT  OR  REGIMENTS. 

Moderaif. 


|-:^gf?rf^^g^ 


Slow. 


60.  AS  FORAGERS. 

/7N 


^^ 


±zz^ 


61.  RALLY. 


Slow. 


^m 


m 


^ 


F=me: 


i 


ISIT 


34390^-14  —2J. 


322 


APPENDIX  A. 
52.  TO   FIGHT  ON   FOOT. 


i 


-+- 


53.  AS   SKIRMISHERS. 


Quick, 


#-4- 


3r=2 


:]^-f-x:sg 


m 


£ 


^^ 


54.  COMMENCE   FIRING. 


i 


QuieL 


j-^i  r-g/i  M 


a — p~ 


I.  ^g 


^ 


56.  CEASE   FIRING. 


56.  ROUTE   ORDER. 


^ 


^^=P 


APPENDIX  A. 
67.  GANGWAY. 


t 


J=.138 


&^ 


^^^ 


m 


$ 


SaUADBON  CALLS. 


m 


(One,) 

^ 


^ 


^ 


i 


Cr«?^.) 


!•         # 


rr-''  if^  r  I 


i 


(Three.) 


^  Ir^r^lf-^'^ 


i 


(Four,) 


^       f 


^^-^--|^^^H^^ 


^^ 


f/i're,) 


^ft^^trf 


(•  (» 


F^  I  r  >^f=^==F==^F^ 


B 


r^t>.; 


^ 


^ 


/TV 


884  APPENDIX  A. 

REGIMENTAL   CALLS. 
FIRST    CAVALRY. 


SECOND    CAVALRY. 


THIRD    CAVALRY. 


FOURTH  CAVALRY. 


FIFTH  CAVALRY. 


i 


APPENDIX  A. 
SIXTH  CAVALRY. 


SEVENTH   CAVALRY. 


EIGHTH  CAVALRY. 


NINTH   CAVALRY. 


J  =  128 

PL 


TENTH   CAVALRY. 


£j  I  ^  p  r  T  I  C,J   F    I 


198 


APPENDIX  A. 
ELEVENTH   CAVALRY. 


J.  =  120 


^'S'j'I^^Ulfb^^^ 


TWELFTH    CAVALRY. 


i 


THIRTEENTH    CAVALRY. 


FOURTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


FIFTEENTH  CAVALRY. 


J  =136 


c".r3ir  P 


APPENDIX  A. 
SUGGESTIONS  OR  MODELS 

FOR 

REGIMENTAL   CALLS. 


827 


tJ-t82 


Q^ 


^ 


J  =  152 


L£rc;'[£rcr'[ig 


^^F^ 


\      ■i=l5Z r— — 


J  ^138 


S 


g^^^^ 


-^ 


J=112 


fc'r  'P^r  rri  f  ^J   '^  I 


Yffy 


^^^^^^ 


dd8  APPENDIX  A. 

REGIMENTAL  CALLS— Continued. 
^        J  =138 


^\uL-^uin\u^^ 


J.,84 


Lf  ir  y^ir  g 


'-  '^f>  y 


^ 


J.<n6 


#   ^     #        jE 


i 


^ 


Appendix  B. 


SEMAPHORE  CODE  FOR  CAVALRY. 


CONVENTIONAL    SIGNALS    AND    INSTRUC- 
TIONS. 

To  call  or  answer:  "Attention,"  fol- 
lowed by  call  letter  of  station  called. 
Repeat  as  necessary. 

Both  stations  then  make  "Interval." 

I  last  word:  R,l  "Interval;"  or  Q. 
last  sentence:  R,  2  "Intervals," 
last  message:  R,  3  "Intervals." 
after    (word):    R,    "Interval" 
(word). 
(word:  1  "Interval." 
sentence:  2  "Intervals." 
message:  3  "Intervals." 
Error:  "Attention-Interval,"  then  re- 
peat word. 
To  break  in:  "Attention," 
Wait  a  moment:  "Attention"  followed 
by  two  or  more  "Intervals." 
Acknowledgment  or  understood:  U. 
"Numerals"  precedes  every  number 
sent  and  indicates  numerals  until  "In- 
terval" Ls  made,  after  which  letters  recur 
without  further  indication.     When  nu- 
merals   follow   letters   no    intervening 
"Interval"  is  necessary. 

"Negative,"  "Af!irmative,"  or  "In- 
terrogatory'^ followed  by  "Interval" 
give  corresponding  meanings  to  the 
following  signal. 

Receiver  acknowledges  "Attention" 
whenever  made,  also  "Repeat,"  etc., 
and  end  of  message,  lohen  latter  is  under- 
stood. 

If  a  letter  or  a  numeral  occurs  twice 
in  succession  swing  one  or  both  flags  to 
the  front. 

While  waiting  for  "Acknowledgment" 
or  in  case  of  delay  remain  at  "  Interval." 
Words  not  in  code  are  spelled  out. 

HINTS. 

A  to  D:  Left  arm  at  "Interval,"  right 
arm  progresses  upward. 

E  to  G:  Right  arm  at  "Interval,"  left 
arm  progresses  downward. 

A  to  G:  Complete  series  one  arm  at 
"Interval." 


K  to  N:  Right  arm  inclined  45'*  down- 
ward, left  arm  progresses  downward. 

P  to  S:  Right  arm  horizontal,  left  arm 
progresses  downward. 

H,  I^nd  O:  Left  arm  crosses  the  body. 

W,  X,  and  Z:  Right  arm  crosses  the 
body. 

Opposite  letters:  A&G,  B&F,  C&E, 
H&Z,  I&X,  J&P,  K&V,  O&W,  M&S, 
and  a&Y. 

The  numerals  are  the  first  10  letters  in 
order. 

The  special  meanings  are  generally 
represented  by  their  initials,  e.  g., 
"  Negative  "=N. 

AAA:  Ammunition  going  forward  (if 
signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  front). 

AAA:  Ammunition  required  (if  sig- 
naled from  the  front). 

CCC:  Charge  (if  signaled  from  the  rear 
to  the  front). 

CCC:  About  to  charge  if  no  instruc- 
tions to  contrary  (if  signaled  from  the 
front). 

CF:  Cease  firhig. 

F:  Commence  firing. 

DT:  Double  time,  rush,  or  hurry. 

O:  Move  forward  (if  signaled  from  the 
rear  to  the  front). 

O:  Preparing  to  move  forward  (if  sig- 
naled from  the  front), 

HHH:  Halt. 

L:  Left. 

N:  Negative. 

R:  Range. 

RT:  Right. 

SSS:  Support  going  forward  (if  sig- 
naled from  the  rear  to  the  front). 

SSS:  Support  needed  (if  signaled  from 
the  front). 

SUF:  Suspend  firing. 

T:  Target. 

Y:  Afiirmative. 

Q:  What  is  the  (R). 

M:  Bring  up  the  horses  (if  signaled 
from  front  to  rear). 

M:  Horses  going  forward  (if  signaled 
from  rear  to  front). 

329 


880 


APPENDIX  B. 
TWO  ARM  SEMAPHORE  CODE. 


-£»fL-l 


D     '*'     4. 


e:   -^    J 


!     '^      9 


4" 

M     * 


Megotive 


Ihterrogotory 


Repeat 


AffVm<rfiv« 


Interval 


Mumcrols 


Appendix  C. 


LIST  OF  MANUALS  FOR  REFERENCE. 


U.  S.  Army  Kegulations. 

Field  Service  Regulations 

Small- Arms  Firing  Manual. 

Saber  Exercise. 

Directions  for  the  Use  of  Equip- 
ment. 

The  Manuals  of  Equitation  of  the 
Mounted  Service  School. 

The  Army  Horse  in  Accident 
and  Disease. 

The  Army  Horse  Sheer. 

Physical  Training  for  the  U.  S. 
Army. 


Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty 

Outline  of  First  Aid  for  the  Hosl 
pital  Corps. 

Signal  Book,  U.  S.  Army. 

Engineer  Field  Manual. 

Cavalry  Machine  Gun  Regula- 
tions. 

Pack  Transportation,  Quarter- 
master's Department. 

Regulations  U.  S.  Army  Trans- 
port Service. 

Manual  for  Army  Cooks 

Trumpet  Music* 


o 


331 


UNIVEESITY  OB'  CALIFORNIA  ilBRAEV 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


APR  14  1916 


necetvEo 

CWCUUTIONOepT. 


MAY  0 

_CJRCLILATtON  Jafj. 
LIBRARY  If     !_"" 

JUL  0  2  ?mi    ■ 


U.  C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


II  lllll  II 


•"■  ] 

m 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CAWFORNIA  LIBRARY    . 

